Copy 3i

DEPAITMENT OF. THE ARMY FIELD MANUAL

i t! C_-2 ' "-

FIELD ARTILLERY
TACTICS
AND TECHNIQUES
- QUARTERMASTER LIBRARY
' SCHOOL, U S.
'JT CSO

HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

DECEMBER 1 958
AGO 2696B-Nov
 *FM 6-20

FIELD MANUAL I HEADQUARTERS,

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
No. 6-20 J WASHINGTON 25, D. C., 10 December 1958

FIELD ARTILLERY TACTICS AND TECHNIQUES

Paragraphs Page
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL_______________________________ 1-5 3
2. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FIELD 6, 7 6
ARTILLERY.
3. FIELD ARTILLERY ORGANIZATION____ 8-14 7
4. COMMAND, CONTROL, AND COORDINA-
TION
Section I. Command responsibilities and relationships___ 15-20 9
II. Field artillery staffs …_______-_____________
21-34 12
III. Control and coordination ____-- ____________. 35-40 21
IV. Estimate of field artillery requirements -_____ 41-44 25
CHAPTER 5. TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT OF FIELD
ARTILLERY
Section I. Principles of employment__________________
-45-50 28
II. Organization for combat __________________. 51-62 30
III. Observation _____________________________ 63-66 40
IV. Survey__________________________________ 67-69 44
V. Maneuver of field artillery units_____________ 70-79 46
VI. Auxiliary weapons________________________
-80-84 56
VII. Factors affecting the employment of certain 85-90 58
types of field artillery units.
VIII. Army aviation _______________________.…....91-94 64
CHAPTER 6. OFFENSIVE COMBAT_--__-- ____________ 95-104 66
7. DEFENSIVE COMBAT AND RETROGRADE
MOVEMENTS
Section I. Defensive combat _________________________ 105-107 70
II. Retrograde movements_____________________ 108-111 75
CHAPTER 8. FIELD ARTILLERY IN SPECIAL OPERA-
TIONS
Section I. General _________________________________. 112-117 78
II. Amphibious operations_____________________ 118-123 80
III. Airborne operations ______________________. 124-129 90
IV. Operations in deep snow and extreme cold ____ 130-137 93
* This manual supersedes FM 6-20, 22 October 1953, including C 1, 5 May
i955, and C 2, 9 February 1956.

AGO 2696B 1
 Paragraphs Page
Section V. Mountain operations_______________________ 138-144 96
VI. Jungle operations_ __-______-____-_________. 145-154 99
VII. Desert operations -_____-___-____.__________ 155-157 102
VIII. Combat in towns _________________________ 158-160 103.
IX. Field artillery in river crossings ___________-- 161-163 104
X. Coastal frontier defense -__________________ 164, 165 107
CHAPTER 9. TARGET INTELLIGENCE AND ANALYSIS
Section I. General _________________________________ 166, 167 108
II. Target intelligence ._______________________. 168-175 108
III. Target analysis __-____________________.-__. 176-184 115

CHAPTER 10. PROCEDURES AND TECHNIQUES FOR

HANDLING TERRESTRIAL TARGET
INFORMATION
Section I. General __-.__-____._--_--_---------------- 185, 186 125
II. Processing target information -_____________ 187-191 125
III. Counterbattery activities _________________- 192-196 133
IV. Countermortar activities __--__--_--- ____-- 197-201 138
V. Shelling reports.___._______<- ______________ 202-210 144
VI. Location of hostile guns and howitzers by 211-2.15 151
crater analysis.
VII. Location of hostile mortars by crater analysis_ 216-218 155
CHAPTER 11. COORDINATION OF FIRE SUPPORT
Section I. General ______________--__--------
- - _---- 219-222 159
II. The fire support coordination center _________ 223-229 161
III. Procedure _______________________________. 230-232 168
CHAPTER 12. FIRE PLANNING._-__._____-___________- 233-244 172
13. FIELD ARTILLERY FIRE DIRECTION
Section I. Organization and operation ____________-__.. 245-247 188
II. Massing the fires of more than one battalion___ 248-253 195
CHAPTER 14. COMMUNICATION ____- __----- __-------- 254-264 198

15. --
AMMUNITION SUPPLY __________--___ 265-269 207
APPENDIX I. REFERENCES -______________--__-------- ------ 211

II. FORMS AND EXAMPLES-_______________ _______ 215

III. ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLE, PLANNING _______ 248
FIELD ARTILLE'RY OPERATIONS
AND FIRE SUPPORT.
IV. A PROCEDURE FOR PREPARING -______ 271
SCHEDULES OF CORPS ARTILLERY
FIRES.
INDEX __________________________--___--_------------- - _______ 277

2 AGO 2696B
 CHAPTER 1
GENERAL

1. Purpose and Scope

This manual is a guide for field artillery officers and commanders
and staffs of all combat arms. It is concerned with the tactical em-
ployment of field artillery. It covers organization, command, and
tactical control of field artillery. It includes a discussion of the
techniques involved in target intelligence and analysis, field artillery
fire planning, and the direction of field artillery fires. It includes
a general discussion of the principles, organization and techniques
of coordination of fire support with particular emphasis given to
field artillery aspects. The employment of field artillery in airborne,
amphibious, and other special operations is covered. Where the
term artillery is used in this manual, it refers to field artillery. For
employment of air defense artillery, see FM 44-1 and other manuals
of the 44-series. For additional references, see appendix I. The
material presented herein is applicable without modification to both
nuclear and nonnuclear warfare.
2. Classification
Field artillery weapons are classified as cannons or missiles.
a. Cannons are those weapons that discharge projectiles out of
tubes by means of an explosive which may be separate from the pro-
jectile, a part of the projectile, or a combination of both.
b. Missiles are those weapons that, when fired, are powered in
flight by a propulsion means contained within the projectile. Mis-
siles may be guided or free flight missiles.
(1) Guided missiles are those missiles whose trajectory or
flight path may be altered after firing.
(2) Free flight missiles are those missiles whose flight path
cannot be altered after firing.
3. Cannons
a. Field artillery cannons are classified according to caliber and
maximum range capability as light, medium, heavy, and very heavy.
Self-propelled cannons are given the same classification as their
towed counterparts. All cannon are considered as short range field
artillery.
AGO 2696B 3
 (1) Light-under 115 mm, the maximum range capability does
not exceed 16,500 meters.
(2) Medium-115 mm or larger, the maximum range capabil-
ity does not exceed 16,500 meters.
(3) Heavy-less than 21]0 mm, the maximum range capability
exceeds 16,500 meters.
(4) Very heavy-210 mm or larger, the maximum range capa-
bility exceeds 16,500 meters.
b. Field artillery cannons are classified according to their method
of organic transport as towed, self-propelled, and aeropack.
(1) Towed-cannon designed for movement as trailed loads
behind prime movers. This includes weapons transported
in single and multiple loads, and weapons transported in
a single load by multiple prime movers.
(2) Self-propelled-cannon permanently installed on vehicles
which provide motive power for the piece and from which
the weapon is fired. Self-propelled weapons may be either
armored or unarmored.
(3) Aeropack-cannon designed for transport, assembled or
in sections, by army aircraft. The weapon and carriage
are partially disassembled for transport and reassembled
for firing from ground positions.
c. The methods of aerial transport and delivery of cannon are
identified as follows:
(1) Aeropack-cannon designed for transport, assembled or
in sections, by Army aircraft. The weapon and carriage
may be partially disassembled for transport and reassem-
bled for firing from ground positions.
(2) Air transportable-cannonwhose gross weight is within
the lift capabilities of-
(a) Medium and medium assault transport aircraft.
(b) Heavy transport aircraft.
(3) Heavy drop-cannon which can be delivered from medium
assault, medium transport, or heavy transport aircraft by
parachute.
4. Missiles
a. Field artillery missiles are classified according to their range
capability as short range, medium range, and long range.
(1) Short range-maximum range does not exceed 40 kilo-
meters.
(2) Medium range-maximum range does not exceed 200 kilo-
meters.
4 AGO 2696B
 (3) Long range-maximum range exceeds 200 kilometers.
b. The methods of aerial transport and delivery of field artillery
missiles are-
(1) Air transportable-launchersand missiles whose assem-
bled or disassembled gross weight are within the lift capa-
bilities of-
(a) Medium or medium assault transport aircraft.
(b) Heavy transport aircraft.
(2) Heavy drop-launchersand missiles which can be delivered
from medium transport, or heavy transport aircraft by
parachute.
(3) Launchers and missiles which can be transported by heli-
copter.
5. General Missions
The two general missions of field artillery in combat are to-
a. Support the other arms by fire, neutralizing or destroying those
targets which are most dangerous to the supported arms.
b. Give depth to combat and isolate the battlefield by counterfire,
by fire on hostile reserves, by restricting movement in rear areas,
and by disrupting hostile command facilities and other installations.

AGO 2696B 5
 CHAPTER 2
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FIELD ARTILLERY

6. Capabilities
Field artillery is the principal agency of ground fire support.
It is equipped with mobile cannon, missiles, and equipment required
for fire control, movement, observation and surveillance, and com-
munication. It provides a powerful means of influencing the course
of combat. The efficient exploitation of field artillery capabilities
depends on control, liaison, communication, observation, location
and evaluation of targets, survey control, and logistical support.
The capabilities of field artillery include the ability to-
a. Maneuver nuclear fires and massed nonnuclear fires rapidly
within a large area and on a wide front without change of positions.
b. Displace quickly.
c. Regroup units to bring greater firepower on important sectors.
d. Deliver accurate fire with appropriate caliber and type of am-
munition on targets encountered under all conditions of visibility,
weather, and terrain.
e. Deliver fires with or without adjustment. The latter method
enhances the effect of fires by shock and surprise.

7. Limitations
a. The principal limitation of field artillery is its reduced effective-
ness and increased vulnerability during displacement.
b. Adequate control is essential to the maximum effectiveness of
field artillery. This control depends on close liaison with the sup-
ported, reinforced, and adjacent units; on adequate observation and
survey; and dependable communication facilities. Control is facili-
tated by accurate maps. Without adequate, timely intelligence and
efficient fire control procedures, artillery cannot capitalize on targets
of opportunity. It is particularly vulnerable to enemy air action.
It requires large amounts of ammunition for nonnuclear fires, except
where ammunition performance data are available and predicted
fire technique can be used. Maximum accuracy of cannon requires
registration which may sacrifice surprise. Field artillery's surface
mobility is sensitive to difficult terrain.

6 AGO 2696B
 CHAPTER 3
FIELD ARTILLERY ORGANIZATION

8. General
The organization of field artillery units and headquarters is shown
in detail in appropriate tables of organization and equipment. The
composition, in terms of units, of field artillery echelons is flexible
and is determined by the organization for combat.
9. Field Artillery Battalion Group
a. In the absence of a group or other suitable headquarters, a
battalion may be attached to another battalion to form a battalion
group (pars. 17 and 57). The battalion group headquarters has the
same function as the group headquarters.
b. In the absence of a battalion or other suitable headquarters,
a battery may be attached to another battery to form a battery
group (par. 57). The battery group headquarters has essentially
the same function as a battalion headquarters.
10. Field Artillery Group
a. Field artillery groups are classified as field artillery group and
field artillery missile group (heavy). The field artillery group con-
sists of a headquarters and headquarters battery and such units as
may be attached. The group provides flexibility in organization for
combat, since the number, type, and caliber of attached units may
be varied to meet the needs of the situation. While the units at-
tached to a group may be of the same or different calibers and types,
mixed calibers and types permit greater flexibility in employment.
The group organization provides centralized tactical control as well
as a limited degree of administrative supervision.
b. The field artillery missile group (heavy) is organized as a
tactical and administrative unit and is self-sustaining. It is com-
posed of a group headquarters; headquarters battery; a field artil-
lery missile battalion, Redstone; and engineer company, Redstone;
and an ordnance company, Redstone.
11. Division Artillery
Division artillery consists of a division artillery headquarters and
headquarters battery, other units organic to division artillery, and
such field artillery units as are assigned or attached to the division
AGO 2696B 7
and retained under the command of the division artillery com-
mander. Artillery with the division includes the division artillery
and the field artillery of the battle groups subordinate to the divi-
sion. It has the personnel and equipment necessary for communica-
tion and observation and the minimum number of units required
for combat. Additional field artillery support is ordinarily provided
and is obtained by attaching field artillery units to the division or
by reinforcing the fire of the division artillery with corps artillery,
adjacent division artillery or artillery of a division in reserve.

12. Corps Artillery

Corps artillery consists of the corps artillery headquarters and
headquarters battery, the field artillery observation battalion, the
field artillery searchlight battery, the corps artillery aviation com-
pany, and such field artillery units as are assigned or attached to
the corps and retained under command of the corps artillery com-
mander. Artillery with the corps includes the corps artillery and
the field artillery with the divisions subordinate to the corps.

13. Army Artillery

Army artillery consists of such field artillery units as are assigned
or attached to the army and retained under command of the army
artillery commander. Artillery with the army includes army artil-
lery and field artillery with the corps subordinate to the army.
14. Army Group and Theater Army Artillery
Artillery representation at these echelons consists of artillery staff
sections as necessary to fulfill the requirements of the particular
organization. Field artillery units normally are not retained under
control of these headquarters.

8 AGO 2696B
 CHAPTER 4
COMMAND, CONTROL, AND COORDINATION

Section I. COMMAND RESPONSIBILITIES AND RELATIONSHIPS

15. General
a. In army group and higher headquarters, the senior artillery
officer in the artillery staff section is designated as the artillery
officer. He is a special staff officer and advises the commander on
field artillery matters.
b. In an army, corps, division, or task force, the senior officer
in the artillery headquarters is designated as the artillery com-
mander. He commands field artillery units retained under the
control of the headquarters. In addition, he is the artillery officer
on the special staff. As the artillery officer he advises the commander
and staff on all field artillery matters and is the fire support coordi-
nator for the command.
16. Command Relationships
a. Field artillery is a member of the tactical team employed by
a commander to accomplish a certain mission. The relationship
of the artillery commander to the force (supported unit) com-
mander depends on the status of the artillery as a member of the
team. When the artillery is assigned or attached to the force (sup-
ported unit), the artillery'officer is both a subordinate commander
and a special staff officer of the force (supported unit) commander.
When artillery is neither assigned or attached to the force but is
supporting the force, the artillery commander's relationship to the
force commander is that of both an adviser and an independent com-
mander obliged to render continuous effective fire support in accord-
ance with his assigned mission. In either case, close coordination
and liaison between commanders is essential for accomplishment
of the mission.
b. There is no direct chain of artillery command from armies to
corps, from corps to division, or from division to battle groups.
Instructions for the artillery with a corps are issued in the name
of the army commander. Instructions for division artillery are
issued in the name of the corps commander.
17. Field Artillery Battalion Group (Battery Group) Commander
The field artillery battalion group (battery group) commander

AGO 2696B 9
is designated by the authority establishing the battalion group
(battery group). He has the same functions and responsibilities as
a group (battalion) commander in addition to commanding his own
battalion (battery). The numerical (alphabetical) designation of
the battalion group (battery group) is that of the battalion (bat-
tery) which is required to provide the battalion group (battery
group) commander.

18. Field Artillery Group Commander

a. The field artillery group commander's responsibilities include
the following command functions:
(1) Coordinate observation and survey control within the
group.
(2) Plan fire support as necessary to carry out the group's
assigned mission.
(3) Control the fires of the group.
(4) Direct training within the group.
(5) When he is the senior artillery officer with a task force,
perform additional duties as outlined in paragraph 19.
b. For responsibilities and command functions pertaining to the
field artillery missile group (heavy), see FM 6-25, Field Artillery
Missile Group (Heavy) (U).

19. Army, Corps, Division, and Task Force Artillery Commanders

The artillery commander of an army, corps, division, or task force
has the following principal responsibilities:
a. Determine the requirements and recommend the allocations
and employment of field artillery units, materiel, and ammunition.
When appropriate, this includes requirements for units and materiel
to replace or augment field artillery.
b. Command the assigned and attached field artillery not reas-
signed or reattached to subordinate units.
c. Plan for nuclear and nonnuclear field artillery fires in support
of the plan of operations.
d. Advise the commander and staff on the employment of nuclear
and nonnuclear field artillery fires.
e. Coordinate all field artillery observation within the zone of
responsibility of the command (normally limited to echelons below
field army).
f. Is responsible for the details of coordination of fire support as
fire support coordinator'for the command (ch. 11).

10 AGO 2696B
 g. Collect, process, and disseminate information and intelligence.
h. Coordinate survey control for field artillery.
i. Direct the fire of assigned and attached field artillery not re-
assigned or reattached to subordinate units.
j. Recommend assignment of field artillery personnel and esti-
mate replacement requirements for field artillery units.
k. Direct the training of field artillery units within the command.
1. Counterfire activities. Corps artillery commander has respon-
sibility for counterbattery activities. Division artillery commander
has responsibility for countermortar activities. Task force artillery
commanders have responsibility for both counterbattery and coun-
termortar activities. When the distances are too great for effective
centralized control of counterfire, these activities may be reassigned
to subordinate artillery commanders who have or are provided the
means to accomplish these activities.

20. Theater Army and Army Group Artillery Officers

The artillery officer of a theater army or an army group has such
duties and responsibilities as are assigned by the commander. At
these levels, the artillery section will consist of personnel experi-
enced in all aspects of artillery. Theater army and army group
artillery officers are usually assigned the following responsibilities:
a. Determine the number and types of nonorganic field artillery
units required by the forces in the command, including special equip-
ment for these units.
b. Recommend the allocations of the various types of field artil-
lery to subordinate commands.
c. Recommend assignment of field artillery personnel and esti-
mate replacement requirements for these units.
d. Supervise the training of field artillery units and replacement
personnel within the command and the operation of any field artil-
lery schools under the control of the commander.
e. Publish information and intelligence of interest to field artil-
lery.
f. Plan for the reception and processing of field artillery units
within his echelon.
g. Determine ammunition requirements and recommend alloca-
tion of ammunition.
h. Exercise, in the name of the commander, operational control
'f those field artillery units which have not been assigned or
attached to subordinate units.
AGO 2696B 11
 Section II. FIELD ARTILLERY STAFFS
21. General
a. The organization and functions of field artillery staff are
flexible and may be varied by the artillery commander to meet the
demands of each particular situation. Since the control of artillery
and the coordination of fire support are the principal duties of an
artillery commander, his staff is organized to assist him in the
discharge of these responsibilities.
b. The composition and organization of a theater army or an
army group artillery staff are determined by the artillery officer.
IHe organizes his staff to aid him in carrying out his responsibilities
(par. 20).
c. Personnel for field artillery staffs at army level and below are
provided in appropriate tables of organization. Type functional
organizations are shown in figures 1 through 4.

Comd

LXO

ISVI S2 L LX
|Asst S2 || | |Food
(recon 6sv)| ssf S3
o adviser

Chaplain (2) MedO

I

Figure 1. Type organizationof a field artillerygroup staff.

12 AGO 2696B
 q,

(n

0~~~~~~

10 0 0

- ) -, 0

0
O .E~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Ce
o~o
40
0~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

4~~~~~~~~~~~4

0~~~~~~~~~~~~~l
o~~~~~~~~~~f

EE
AGO
2696D 13

0 0)

C,)

AGO 266B1
 i

*O. on ,,~ O

4"
~~ ~
CL ~ ~ ~ ~ 0

v, a
Co

U,
l M~~~~~~~~~M
o

U) E~o

04 AO266

Ha
NI
B n~~~~~~C 0

00~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

S N
~~~~~~~~~~~~E0~~~~~
E~~

go
OX
~ "= ~ 0
~ ~~~~Nn
·Su~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
0-

Z4

4 ~~~~
4

14 AGO 2696B
 e Deputy
comd i FSC

Sl 52 S3 54

Figure 4. Type organizationof an army artillery staff.

d. The duties of field artillery staff officers conform generally to

the principles and procedures described in FM 101-5 for the corre-
sponding general or special staff officers. Amplification of the duties
of field artillery staff officers is discussed in paragraph 22 through
34.

22. Deputy Army Artillery Commander (Assistant Corps Artillery

Officer)
The deputy army artillery commander (assistant corps artillery
officer) performs such duties as may be assigned to him by the army
(corps) artillery commander. These duties may require him to-
a. Serve as the army (corps) artillery commander's deputy at
the army (corps) command post.
b. Supervise and coordinate the work of field artillery personnel
at the army (corps) command post.
c. Act for the army (corps) artillery commander in his capacity
as fire support coordinator (ch. 11).
d. As representative of the fire support coordinator, to provide
the army (corps) commander with predictions of the radioactive
fallout from friendly nuclear weapons.

23. Assistant Division Artillery Executive Officer

The assistant division artillery executive officer is the principal
assistant to the division artillery commander in his capacity as fire
support coordinator. The assistant division artillery executive
officer performs duties as directed by the fire support coordinator,
and represents him at the FSCC in his absence.

AGO 2696B 15
24. Executive Officer
In general, the executive officer of a field artillery staff performs
the duties set forth in FM 101-5 for the chief of staff. Additionally,
he may-
a. Direct the establishment of the field artillery command post
in the location designated by the commander and insure that the
various elements, properly protected and concealed, are disposed to
facilitate operations..
b. Supervise the operation of the field artillery command post to
include the fire direction center.

25. Adjutant (S1)

The S1 or adjutant of a field artillery staff is the adviser to the
commander on matters pertaining to personnel and general admin-
istration. When a separate S1 :is not provided, another staff officer
is designated to perform his duties.
26. S2
The S2 of a field artillery staff is primarily concerned with the
direction of the target intelligence effort of artillery agencies (ch.
9). His specific duties include-
a. Initiation of a systematic and coordinated search by all avail-
able collecting agencies for target information to include targets
suitable for nuclear attack. To accomplish this, he must-
(1) Coordinate, through the normal chain of command and
through staff contacts, the work of artillery intelligence
personnel in lower echelon artillery units, including the
battle group artillery where appropriate. This includes
the coordination of observation facilities, including Army
aviation used for artillery observation, and the coordina-
tion of the artillery intelligence reporting system of lower
echelon artillery units.
(2) Maintain close liaison with the intelligence sections of
higher, lower, adjacent, and supported units for the pur-
pose of exchanging information and mutual assistance in
the location of targets.
(3) Foresee the need for, obtain, and distribute maps, photo-
maps, and aerial photographs.
(4) Study and interpret aerial photographs when no photo-
interpreter teams are available; supervise their activities
when present.
(5) Direct the operation of countermortar (division) and

16 AGO 2696B
 counterbattery (corps) intelligence activities as described
in chapter 10.
(6) Originate requests for reconnaissance missions by Air
Force aircraft.
b. Collection, evaluation, and interpretation of information and
dissemination of target information and intelligence in time for
units to take appropriate action.
c. Keeping the artillery commander, staff (FDC), and subordi-
nate units informed of the enemy situation and capabilities.
d. Close collaboration with the S3 (or FDO) on intelligence and
operations matters.
e. Examination of maps, photomaps, and aerial photographs for
reliability of control and dissemination of this information to sub-
ordinate units.
f. Preparation and distribution of intelligence reports.
g. Keeping the S2 situation map and any other records pertaining
to the S2 section that the situation may require.
h. Furnishing pertinent data for inclusion in the command report.
i. Preparing a plan for and supervising the execution of counter-
intelligence measures (FM 30-5).
j. Preparation of the artillery intelligence bulletin (corps and
army artillery S2 only) for distribution of enemy information to
higher, adjacent, and subordinate artillery commanders (to include
battalions and separate batteries). The bulletins are prepared only
as specifically required.
k. Supervising intelligence training for the artillery.
I. Informing the survey officer of all plans affecting survey re-
quirements.
27. S3
The S3 of a field artillery staff (FDO of battle group artillery)
is responsible to his commander for activities pertaining to organi-
zation, training, and operations. His duties are to-
a. Make recommendations to the artillery commander regarding
the employment of artillery units.
b. Formulate plans as directed and prepare operation orders for
the approval of the commander.
c. Keep the commander and staff informed of matters pertaining
to training, combat efficiency, and disposition of artillery units.
d. Plan and supervise artillery training and operations.
AGO 2696B 17
 e. Collaborate with other staff officers on matters affecting opera-
tions.
f. Prepare artillery fire plans.
g. Make recommendations for the employment of artillery nuclear
'weapons.
h. Coordinate and integrate artillery fire plans of lower echelon
artillery units with each other and with the plan of operations (chs.
:11 and 12).
i. Provide current information of artillery fire capabilities.
j. Keep the S4 informed to ammunition requirements.
k. Recommend allocations and reallocations of artillery units te
subordinate commands.
1. Plan and supervise artillery liaison activities.
m. Keep current at FDC the information on the friendly tactical
situation.
n. Obtain and distribute meteorological messages.
o. Keep the communication officer informed of all plans affecting
signal communication requirements.
p. In cooperation with the artillery S2 of the next higher artillery
headquarters, plan and supervise the work of intelligence personnel
(in artillery units not authorized an intelligence officer).
q. Supervise the preparation of pertinent records and reports.
r. Exercise staff supervision over fire direction activities.
s. Inform the survey officer of all plans affecting survey require-
ments.

28. S4
The S4 of a field artillery staff is responsible to his commander
for the coordination and supervision of all logistical functions of the
organization. Although all S4's have the general duties outlined for
the G4 in FM 101-5, there is a difference between S4's in respect to
their echelon, the scope of their operations, and the assistance they
receive in carrying out their logistical responsibilities. Artillery
battalion S4's and airborne division artillery S4'sare operating S4's;
that is, they have the means at their disposal to procure and dis-
tribute supplies and, if necessary, to establish supply points. Non-
operating S4's do not have the means to procure and distribute sup-
plies. Therefore, they are concerned primarily with coordination
and supervision. In addition to procurement and distribution (as
appropriate), an S4's duties are to-

18 AGO 2696B
 a. Prepare and supervise the execution of a plan for the timely
supply of artillery ammunition (ch. 15).
b. Keep the commander and staff informed of the ammunition
status of the command.
c. Keep appropriate records of the overall artillery ammunition
status, the location of ammunition offices and ammunition supply
points, and the available transportation.
d. Keep a current record of all traffic data and information on
road nets.
e. Supervise all supply functions of the command to assure ade-
quate procurement and proper distribution.
f. Keep a record of critical items of equipment and supplies.

29. Liaison Officer

The techniques of liaison is discussed in paragraph 36. The prin-
c:pal duties of a field artillery liaison officer are to-
a. Represent the artillery commander at the headquarters to
which sent.
b. Keep the headquarters to which he is sent informed of the
situation, plans, policies, and capabilities of the command he rep-
resents.
c. Keep his own headquarters informed of the situation, plans,
policies, and capabilities of the command with which he establishes
liaison.
d. Facilitate necessary coordination and cooperation between
units.
e. Perform specific functions as directed.
30. Communication Officer
The principles and techniques of communication for field artillery
are discussed in paragraph 37 and chapter 14. For details of signal
communication, see the field manuals of the 24-series. The principal
duties of the field artillery communication officer are to-
a. Advise and assist the artillery commander on signal communi-
cation matters.
b. Plan and recommend the unit communication system and exer-
cise staff supervision of its installation and operation.
c. Obtain and distribute signal operation instructions (SOI) and
standing signal instructions (SSI).
d. Prepare prearranged-message code and other authorized codes.
AGO 2696B 19
 e. Assist lower echelon artillery units in procuring signal supplies.
f. Supervise communication training throughout the unit.
g. Recommend the location of key installations within the com-
mand post area.
h. Supervise the maintenance of signal communication equipment
in his own and subordinate units.
i. Coordinate the use of existing and planned communication
facilities with the communication officers of adjacent and supported
units, and with lower echelon artillery units.
j. Advise the commander and staff on electronic countermeasures
and antijamming techniques pertaining to communication.

31. Reconnaissance and Survey Officer

In the performance of his duties, the reconnaissance and survey
officer is closely associated with the commander, S2, S3 (FDO of
battle group artillery) and the survey officers of higher, lower, and
adjacent units and headquarters. His specific duties include-
a. The preparation of a survey plan.
b. Obtaining survey control and carrying control to lower echelon
artillery units (pars. 68 and 69).
c. Execution of the survey plan.
d. Conduct of reconnaissance for routes, position areas, and ob-
servation as directed by the commander.
e. Supervision of survey training within the command.
f. Continuous planning for future reconnaissance and extension
of survey.
g. Close collaboration with the S2 and S3 (FDO of battle group
artillery) is securing needed information on target location, obser-
vation, routes, and future position areas.
h. Exchanging survey data and information with the survey
officers of higher, lower, and adjacent units and headquarters. This
may include establishing a survey information center (par. 69).
i. Determination of the accuracy of available maps.

32. Army Aviation Officer

The principal duties of the Army aviation officer are to-
a. Supervise the operations of organic, attached, or supporting
Army aviation.
b. Determine the requirements for and recommend the allocation
of aircraft and aircraft supplies for his own section and lower artil-
lery echelons.

20 AGO 2696B
 c. Supervise and coordinate the selection, preparation, and opera-
tion of airfields for the command.
d. Recommend, plan for, and coordinate the employment of or-
ganic, attached, or supporting Army aviation for the command.
e. Maintain close liaison with Army-aviation officers at higher,
lower, and adjacent commands.
f. Supervise the training of Army aviation units organic or at-
tached to the command.
g. Be responsible for implementation of air traffic control proce-
dures, as prescribed by the army commander, and provide the air
defense artillery units with position information and identification
of aviation under his command or supervision.
33. Radar Officer
The duties of the radar officer are to-
a. Advise the commander and staff on all radar matters.
b. Advise and aid the S3 in organizing and supervising radar
training programs.
c. Submit necessary reports and keep pertinent records.
d. Supervise radar maintenance.
e. Provide liaison on radar matters with higher headquarters.
f. Advise the commander and staff on radar coverage.
g. Advise and assist the S4 in the procurement of radar supplies.
h. Maintain clutter and coverage diagrams as appropriate.
i. Advise the commander and staff on electronics countermeas-
ures and antijamming techniques pertaining to radar, and recom-
mend to the S3 training measures on these subjects.
34. Other Staff Officers
Duties of other artillery staff officers, such as the chaplain and
surgeon, are outlined in FM 101-5.

Section III. CONTROL AND COORDINATION

35. General
The efficiency with which artillery fires are employed depends on
adequate control of artillery and coordination with the supported
units. Artillery fires also require coordination with those of other
fire and tactical support agencies. Various means by which neces-
sary control and coordination are effected are discussed in para-
graphs 36 through 40.
AGO 2696B 21
36. Liaison
a. General. Liaison (FM 101-5) is maintained between units to
insure mutual understanding and unity of purpose and action.
Liaison is usually accomplished by the exchange of information
being carried out by a unit's representative visiting or remaining
with another unit. Artillery liaison is established by the supporting
unit with the supported unit and by the reinforcing unit with the
reinforced unit and may be established between higher, lower, and
adjacent units and headquarters. Liaison between lower and higher
units and headquarters is established as directed by the higher com-
mander and between adjacent units on the initiative of adjacent
commanders or on orders from the common commander.
b. Command Liaison. Through personal contact, artillery com-
manders effect command liaison with supported and reinforced
commanders. The liaison effected by commanders is maintained
continuously by liaison officers. furnished by the unit responsible for
establishing liaison.
c. Liaison Officers. The liaison officer is the commander's per-
sonal representative to the unit with which liaison is established.
The principal duties of an artillery liaison officer are listed in para-
graph 29. Frequent changes of liaison officers are undesirable. How-
ever, in situations requiring prolonged absences, it may be desirable
to change liaison officers so they may keep up with the current
situation, plans, and policies of their own command.
d. Staff Liaison. Liaison duties are not restricted to specifically
appointed liaison officers but may be performed by any staff officer
or other designated officer. A staff officer making a staff visit to
another headquarters is, in effect, performing liaison duties. Liaison
between staff sections of one unit and the same or similar staff
sections of an associated unit is desirable in the furtherance of
cooperation and coordination between units. In effecting staff
liaison, staff officers act only within the limits set by policies of the
commander.
37. Communication
a. The communication facilities of the artillery are integrated
into systems which afford the artillery commander means for con-
trolling and coordinating the fires of his unit and those of sub-
ordinate units. The commander of each echelon of artillery is re-
sponsible for the installation, operation, and maintenance of the
communication facilities of his command. The communication offi-
cer of each artillery unit exercises immediate staff supervision over
the unit's communication facilities.
b. Artillery communication includes the employment of all avail-

22 AGO 2696B
able means to transmit orders, information, intelligence, and com-
mands between artillery units and to establish liaison with sup-
ported, reinforced, and adjacent units. For details on artillery
communication, see chapter 14.
38. Command Post
The need for concealment, dispersion, reliable communications,
access routes, and other tactical considerations influence the selec-
tion of a location for a field artillery command post. However, the
most important factors influencing the selection are the require-
ments to exercise control of subordinate artillery units, to plan fire
support, and to be prepared to function as a force or supported unit
command post in an emergency. The headquarters battery or head-
quarters element of field artillery is normally located near the
FDC. The element that effects coordination of fire support is nor-
mally located at the command post of the force or supported unit to
establish the fire support coordination agency or to effect necessary
liaison on fire support matters.
39. Estimates of the Situation, Plans, and Combat Orders
Artillery commanders must plan for and recommend the assign-
ment, attachment, organization, and employment of artillery. Addi-
tionally, as fire support coordinators, they must anticipate the re-
quirements and coordinate and recommend the employment of other
fire support means. To accomplish this, the artillery commander's
estimate of the situation and his plan to provide the best possible
fire support must be continuous. These plans, as approved, are
incorporated into the instructions issued for the employment of
the force. With each change in the situation, the artillery com-
mander must re-examine all considerations involved and decide
whether changes in fire support measures are advisable. This con-
tinuous process is carried on concurrently at successive echelons
and in close collaboration with the force (supported unit) com-
mander and his staff. A discussion of the techniques involved
in the preparation of estimates of the situation, plans, combat
orders, and standing operating procedures is contained in FM
101-5. For appropriate forms and samples, see appendix II.
40. Coordinating and Limiting Measures
a. Zones of Fire. Zones of fire are assigned to artillery units
to effect control of fire laterally and in depth to best support the
action of the supported unit. Lateral limits within which a unit
must be able to fire are designated by points or lines. Zones in
depth may be prescribed by assigning position areas or by pre-
scribing minimum range lines and lines to be reached by all or part
AGO 2696B 23
of the firepower of a unit. Zones of fire are assigned with the
tactical mission.
b. No-Fire Lines. The no-fire line is a line beyond which artillery
units may fire without prior clearance from the direct support
artillery or from the battle group artillery, providing no more than
negligible effects occur short of the line. The location of the no-
fire line is established by the direct support artillery commander
in coordination with the supported unit commander or by the battle
group artillery commander in coordination with the battle group
commander. Division artillery is kept informed of the location of
and changes to the no-fire line. Division artillery coordinates no-
fire lines within the division sector and disseminates the location
of the division no-fire line to all artillery units with the division,
to all artillery units reinforcing the artillery of the division, to
adjacent division artilleries, and to corps artillery headquarters.
Corps artillery headquarters coordinates division no-fire lines and
transmits the location of the corps no-fire line to corps artillery
units, to the artillery of divisions of the corps, and to-the adjacent
corps. Direct support artillery or battle group artillery is author-
ized to fire short of the no-fire line in its own sector. Other artillery
units must obtain clearance from the direct support artillery or
battle group artillery concerned prior to firing short of the no-fire
line. Before executing fire missions short of the no-fire line and
near the boundaries of the supported units, the direct support
artillery or battle group -artillery must coordinate with the artillery
unit supporting the affected, adjacent unit. If it is considered nec-
essary, the division FSCC may establish a separate nuclear no-fire
line based on recommendations from the battle groups, combat
commands, or division artillery.
c. 0-0 Line. The 0-0 line is a line established by corps artillery
(par. 65) as a means of coordinating in depth the search for targets.
To the extent possible, the attention of intelligence agencies with
the division is focused on the area short of the 0-0 line; that of
corps artillery is focused beyond the line. This arbitrary division,
however, is not intended to restrict the zones of observation or
attack of targets. The line should be designated by terrain features.
The location of the 0-0 line is changed as the situation develops.
d. Bomb Line. The bomb line is a line designated by ground forces,
beyond which air attacks may be executed without clearances from
the ground forces, providing no more than negligible effects from
the use of nuclear or nonnuclear weapons occur short of the line.
The bomb line must be easily identifiable by terrain features from
the air and the ground to prevent confusion and accidental air
attacks on friendly ground forces. The bomb line should be located

24 AGO 2696B
as near the forward elements as practicable but must be consistent
with the safety of friendly troops. During an attack, the bomb line
should be located sufficiently far out to prevent unnecessarily fre-
quent changes. The division G3 air, after coordination with the
fire support coordinator, submits the recommended location of the
bomb line and changes thereto to the corps G3 air. The corps G3
air submits the recommended bomb line to the army G3 air. The
field army is responsible for the establishment, dissemination of
information concerning location, and movement of the bomb line.
Targets so located that the use of nuclear or nonnuclear weapons
in an air attack may result in moderate or severe effects short of
the bomb line require clearance by the ground forces. An appropri-
ate nuclear safety line may be established as an additional troop
safety measure for each such attack.
e. Nuclear Safety Line (NSL). The nuclear safety line is a line
used as a troop safety measure. The division artillery commander,
as fire support coordinator for the division, is responsible for desig-
nating the nuclear safety line. When a battle group is operating
independently, the battle group commander may be required to
establish nuclear safety lines for those weapons employed in support
of his unit. The nuclear safety line may be used to-
(1) Designate the limits to which casualty producing effects
of friendly nuclear weapons may be permitted to extend
in the direction of friendly forces.
(2) Designate an area wherein friendly troops must observe
certain protective measures.
(3) Limit the advance of friendly troops and prevent them
from 'encountering casualty producing effects of friendly
nuclear fires.

Section IV. ESTIMATE OF FIELD ARTILLERY REQUIREMENTS

41. Responsibility
a. The artillery officer of an echelon ordering or conducting an
operation is responsible for making the estimate of the artillery
requirements. In making this estimate, the artillery officer con-
siders the eventual organization for combat and the practicability
of assembling the necessary artillery and ammunition at the time
and place desired. Lower echelon artillery commanders may assist
in the preparation of the estimate.
b. Artillery estimates are made to determine the number and
types of artillery units, the amount of ammunition required to
support the contemplated operation effectively, and the allocations
of units and ammunition to lower echelons.
c. Requirements for special operations are discussed in chapter 8.
AGO 2696B 25
42. Basis of Field Artillery Estimates
a. The minimum requirements are that sufficient artillery be
available to-
(1) Place the required mass of fire on important targets.
(2) Attack effectively all enemy installations that affect
planned operations during any anticipated phase.
b. The amounts and types of artillery required for an offensive
action depend primarily on the plan of the commander and the type
of enemy resistance expected. Generally, units making secondary
efforts will be allotted only limited amounts of artillery in order
to permit the massing of artillery on other fronts where decisive
offensive action is contemplated.
c. The amounts and types of artillery required for a defensive
action depend primarily on the capabilities of the enemy, the ter-
rain, and the plans of the commander.

43. Estimate of Field Artillery Requirements

Field artillery requirements vary so widely that no fixed data
can be furnished. FM 101-10 contains tables showing basic loads,
and experience tables for expenditures of ammunition for various
types of operations; these are of assistance is making initial artil-
lery estimates. As a campaign progresses, accurate experience
data applicable to the conditions encountered should be compiled by
artillery commanders as a guide for the conduct of future opera-
tions. Among the factors that must be considered in estimating
the number and types of artillery units and amount of ammunition
required are-
a. Availability and known or expected extent of use of artillery
nuclear delivery units and ammunition.
b. Availability and known or expected extent of use of nuclear
weapons by other fire support agencies (Air Force, Navy).
c. Type of operation (attack, defense, delaying, special operation,
etc.) and supporting fires.
d. Tentative plan of operation and tentative fire plans.
e. Terrain and weather.
f. Comparative strength of friendly and enemy forces, to include
morale, training, and supply.
g Assistance that may be expected from air bombardment, naval
gunfire, reinforcing fires by tanks and air defense artillery, or other
means of support.
h. Composition, tactics, disposition, and organization of enemy
force.

26 AGO 2696B
 i. Strength, types, and ranges of opposing artillery.
j. Enemy artillery techniques.
k. Time available and capacity of road net.
I. Front and depth of main and secondary attacks.
m. Ammunition available (quantity and type).
n. Allowance for losses during combat.
o. Types of enemy fortifications and defenses to be encountered.

44. Estimate of Ammunition Requirements

a. The factors affecting ammunition estimates are the same as
those affecting the estimates for artillery weapons and units (par.
43). Estimates must be realistic and based on anticipated expendi-
tures (ch. 15). A guide for making estimates, based on various
types or phases of combat, is contained in FM 101-10: The infor-
mation contained in FM 101-10 must not be considered as binding
for units in combat. It is the responsibility of artillery commanders
at all levels to maintain adequate records to permit development of
ammunition requirement factors from actual experience data.
b. When the estimated ammunition requirements exceed the
available supply, it is necessary to modify the anticipated or planned
rate of expenditures. It may be necessary to modify, postpone, or
abandon the contemplated operation depending on the supply at
army or theater level.

AGO 2696B 27
 CHAPTER 5
TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT OF FIELD ARTILLERY

Section I. PRINCIPLES OF EMPLOYMENT

45. General
Through the maneuver of artillery fire, commanders possess a
powerful means of influencing the course of combat. Field artillery
is capable of delivering fire over a zone of great width and depth,
and of rapidly shifting and concentrating its fire without changing
its position. The principles of war (FM 100-5) apply to artillery as
to all other arms. The principles of mass, economy of force, surprise,
and maneuver (flexibility) have special application in the case of
artillery, as well as the factor of cooperation.
46. Cooperation
Artillery supports and protects the other arms by fire. In pro-
viding this support it is essential to know when, where, and in what
form the other arms require it. Most of this information ,can be
provided either by the commanders who are planning and directing
the operation or by the troops who are in contact with the enemy.
Close and continuous liaison is necessary between force (supported
unit) commanders and their artillery commanders both in planning
and throughout the battle. The integration of fire support, both
nuclear and nonnuclear, such as air, naval gunfire, and artillery,
requires coordination which cannot be accomplished without co-
operation, in the absence of unified command.
47. Mass
The power tactical and technical employment of artillery fire
power exploits the principles of mass and maneuver. Artillery
weapons and units are not physically massed, rather artillery is
employed to provide the maximum capability for massing its fires
when and where they are required to support the action of the
ground gaining arms. Means of achieving effective massed fires
include the use of survey, transfer of fire techniques, and employ-
ment of nuclear weapons. A single nuclear weapon is capable of
providing massed fire greater than anything heretofore known on
the battlefield.
48. Maneuver
Mass and maneuver are interrelated. While mass implies the
28 AGO 2696B
ability to concentrate a large volume of fire on a single target,
maneuver implies the capability to transfer and distribute fire
rapidly from one point or area to another, over a wide frontage as
the tactical situation dictates. Maneuver also implies the ability,
inherent in the mobility of field artillery units, to displace rapidly
as well as the capability of quickly altering the organization for
combat (pars. 51-62) to pace the bulk of fires where needed. Ma-
neuver, therefore, involves the control of massed firepower by the
subordinate artillery commanders, who are in immediate touch with
the situation in forward areas. This control must be freely delegated
by superior commanders when speed is a primary consideration.
Such flexibility of control is dependent on the speed and reliability
of the communication system.

49. Economy of Force

a. Economy of force requires that artillery be employed in con-
formance with the principles of mass and maneuver. Furthermore,
the coordination of artillery fires with the other means of fire sup-
port must be such that the full weight of the artillery is placed on
those targets which cannot be engaged with equal or greater effect
by other means.
b. Economy of force also implies that the effort allocated to any
task shall not exceed that necessary to produce the desired effect.
The ability of the artillery to fulfill its function depends ultimately
on the availability of ammunition; unnecessary expenditures involve
a waste of effort through the whole channel of supply from factory
to weapon. Therefore, strict control of both nuclear and nonnuclear
ammunition expenditures is a primary consideration in attaining
true economy of force.
50. Surprise
The principle of surprise is as important to the employment of
artillery as to that of any other arm. To artillery, surprise implies
the instantaneous delivery of a high volume of fire on the enemy
without warning. Means of achieving surprise include concealment
and camouflage, night occupation of positions, use of temporary
and dummy positions, adherence to rigid standards of survey, use
of predicted fire and transfer of fire techniques, restrictions on
registration, firing from unexpected directions and in unexpected
volume, judicious employment of nuclear ammunition, and the
avoidance of stereotyped methods.

AGO 2696B 29
 Section II. ORGANIZATION FOR COMBAT
51. General
Organization for combat places each artillery unit in a tactical
organization and assigns each unit a tactical mission or mission type
order (pars. 58 and 59). Where the situation demands, artillery
units may be attached to other forces to provide the required sup-
port.
52. Objectives in Organizing for Combat
In any given situation there will be many combinations that will
meet the requirements of a workable organization for combat. A
good organization for combat is one that fulfills the following ob-
jectives:
a. Furnishes adequate support for the supported unit.
b. Provides massed fires where required.
c. Makes maximum use of the available weapons according to
their best capabilities.
d. Facilities future operations.
53. Basic Considerations in Organizing for Combat
Certain considerations are applicable to all artillery echelons, and
are basic to attainment of the objectives in organizing for combat.
These basic considerations are as follows:
a. Mission of the force.
b. Plan of maneuver (offense).
c. Scheme of defense (defense).
d. Centralized versus decentralized control.
e. Capabilities of weapons.
f. Availability of suitable position areas.
g. Number and type of artillery units available.
h. Capabilities and limitations of current and planned tactical
groupings.
i. Planned or anticipated operations.
j. Availability of other fire su:pport agencies (Navy, Air Force).
k. Availability and expected extent of use of nuclear and non-
nuclear ammunition.
1. Provision of continuous fire support.
54. Fundamentals in Organizing for Combat
a. Fundamentals governing the development of an artillery or-
ganization for combat at a specific echelon are obtained by a study
of the basic considerations (par. 53) as they apply to that echelon.

30 AGO 2696B
Fundamentals derived in this manner simplify the task of develop-
ing an artillery organization for combat that fulfills the objectives
mentioned in paragraph 52.
b. The following fundamentals in organizing artillery for combat
apply to all echelons:
(1) Artillery commanders at all echelons retain centralized
control of their subordinate units (elements) when the
tactical situation, distance between units, terrain, and
communications make it possible. However, when these
factors indicate the necessity, artillery commanders may
decentralize control of their artillery by the assignment of
appropriate tactical missions or by attachment of these
units (elements) to supported echelons or to subordinate
artillery echelons.
(2) Artillery at all echelons is organized for combat to provide
adequate fire support for units in contact with the enemy,
weight to the main attack (offense), additional strength
to vulnerable areas (defense), immediately available fire
support with which the commander can influence the ac-
tion, and adequate fire support for the reserve when it is
committed. Nuclear weapons allocated to a commander
which have not been further allocated provided formidable
firepower with which the commander can influence the
action. Such weapons may be considered as a portion of
the reserve of the commander.
c. Other fundamentals in organizing artillery for combat have
less widespread application. These fundamentals are covered in
paragraphs 55 and 56.
55. Fundamentals in Organizing Battle Group Artillery and Divi-
sion Artillery for Combat
a. In organizing for combat, battle group artillery and division
artillery include attached units and apply the fundamentals men-
tioned in paragraph 54. The tactical employment and use of avail-
able Army aviation and available fires of reinforcing artillery receive
careful cons'deration.
b. Division artillery considers its countermortar, flak suppression,
harassing, and interdiction fires, and other programs of fires in
organizing for combat.
c. Battle group artillery considers the battle group counterfire
program in organizing for combat.
d. Divisional field artillery missile units are usually retained
directly under division artillery control and assigned a mission of
general support of the division. However, a division artillery missile
AGO 2696B 31
unit, or portion thereof, may be attached to a task force below
division level when the task force is operating beyond the range of
firing positions with the main body of the division.

56. Fundamentals in Organizing Corps and Army Artillery for

Combat
a. In organizing for combat, army artillery and corps artillery
apply the fundamentals mentioned in paragraph 54.
b. Corps artillery provides depth to combat with short and medi-
um-range fires, and augments the fire support provided by the
artillery with division. Corps artillery considers its counterbattery
program and.other programs of fires in organizing for combat. It
also may recommend the tactical employment and use of army ar-
tillery fires in the corps sector.
c. Army artillery provides depth to combat with medium- and
long-range fires, and augments the fire support provided by the
artillery with the corps.
d. Army light field artillery battalions are usually attached to
corps and, then, reattached to divisions or other subordinate units
of corps. An appropriate tactical mission is then assigned by the
controlling headquarters. A general support, general support-rein-
forcing, or reinforcing mission, is appropriate for these units.
e. Army medium and heavy field artillery battalions are usually
attached to corps and, then, reattached to field artillery groups. A
general support or general support-reinforcing mission is appropri-
ate for these units. When it is necessary for a corps medium bat-
talion to support a division with all of its fires, it is preferable for
the corps artillery commander to attach the medium battalion to a
division rather than to assign it a mission of reinforcing the division
artillery.
f. Army very heavy cannon field artillery battalions are usually
retained directly under Army artillery control, or attached to corps
and retained directly under corps artillery control. A general sup-
port mission is appropriate for these units.
g. Army short- and medium-range artillery missile battalions are
usually attached to corps. Short range field artillery missile bat-
talions may be reattached to corps artillery groups or to a division.
Appropriate missions for these units are general support; reinforc-
ing; or general support-reinforcing.
h. Army long-range field artillery missile units are retained under
army artillery control and assigned a mission of general support.
i. The field artillery observation battalion organic to each corps
artillery functions more efficiently as a unit. Therefore, it is normally

32 AGO 2696B
 retained under centralized control of corps artillery and given a
general support mission. However, when corps operations are de-
centralized, the organization of the battalion permits the attach-
ment of the observation batteries to divisions. Divisions normally
assign a general support mission to attached observation batteries.
When operating on extended frontages the capabilities of. the bat-
talion may be exceeded. This will necessitate employment to provide
coverage of only selective portions of the front if additional observa-
tion battalion support can not be made available from higher
echelons.
j. The searchlight battery organic to each corps artillery may be
assigned a mission of general support or may be attached to a sub-
ordinate unit. Platoons or, in some cases, the entire battery may be
attached to a division. Divisions may assign either a direct support
or general support mission to attached searchlight units.
k. One corps artillery aviation company is organic to each corps
artillery. The group flights of this company operate from airstrips
in or adjacent to artillery group areas and under the operational
control of the supported group commander. All or part of the corps
artillery aviation company may operate from a base airfield directly
under the operational control of the corps artillery commander.
1. Field artillery group headquarters are normally attached to
corps and retained directly under corps artillery control. They may
be attached to divisions along with several artillery battalions.
Groups are normally given a general support or a general support-
reinforcing mission.
m. Division artillery of a reserve division is usually employed in
a general support or reinforcing role, modified if necessary (par.
62).
n. Battle group artillery of a reserve division may be attached to
the division artillery of the reserve division and employed with the
division artillery to support a division in contact. It may be attached
to a division in contact, and further attached to the division artillery.
It may be retained in reserve with its parent division. It normally
is used in a reinforcing or general support-reinforcing role. For-
ward observer and liaison sections are normally left with the parent
battle group to insure rapid employment of the battle group artillery
when it is returned to its parent unit.
57. Formation of Tactical Groupings
The formation of tactical groupings is an important considera-
tion in organizing for combat. Tactical groupings are based on
attachments. The attachment of an artillery unit to a corps, divi-
AGO 2696B 33
sion, group, force, or another artillery unit makes the attached
unit a subordinate element of the command to which attached dur-
ing the period of attachment. The attached unit receives its mission
and executes all orders from the command to which attached (par.
78).
a. FieldArtillery Groups.
(1) The field artillery group headquarters is capable of con-
trolling 2 to 6 battalions.
(2) Mixed calibers and types of weapons within a group add
flexibility and are desirable. However, the weapons of
a group should be compatible so they can be used properly
in fulfilling the group mission.
(3) Battalions are retained with the same group headquarters
insofar as feasible.
b. Field Artillery Battalion (Battery) Groups. An artillery bat-
talion (battery) group is formed when it is desirable for one artil-
lery battalion (battery) to exercise control over one additional
battalion (battery) to a degree greater than would exist under a
reinforcing mission (par. 17). In that distance between units is
also a factor of control, extended frontages or other conditions
which create greatly increased distances between battalions will
tend to decrease the number of battalions which can effectively be
controlled by the group.
58. Support as a Mission Type Order
a. General. A force commander may direct the field artillery
under his control to support a particular operation or, depending on
the degree of control desired, may further delineate responsibilities
by assigning one or more of the specific tactical missions of direct
support; general support; reinforcing; and general support-
reinforcing. It is normal for army, corps, and division artillery
commanders to be directed to support the attack. This is a directive
which gives the artillery commander flexibility to employ the artil-
lery available to him in the manner best suited in his judgment to
assist in accomplishing the force mission, within the guidance
provided by the force commander. Lower echelon artillery com-
manders may be directed to support designated units if the situa-
tion requires a partial decentralization of control. In this case, the
lower echelon artillery commander assigns missions to his sub-
ordinate units as the situation requires and makes subsequent
changes to meet changing situations.
b. Responsibilities of Commanders.
(1) Although there is not a fixed set of responsibilities inher-
ent in the mission type order of support as with the
34 AGO 2696B
 standard field artillery tactical mission, an infantry divi-
sion artillery battalion assigned this order must accom-
plish the following requirements with respect to the
supported force:
(a) Provide a minimum of one 105-mm howitzer battery to
reinforce the fires of the mortar battery of each com-
mitted battle group.
(b) Provide liaison and communication to the headquarters
of supported unit(s).
(c) Position and displace subordinate batteries as required
to provide artillery support.
(d) Respond with fire to requests for artillery support, for-
warding requests beyond the battalion capabilities to
division artillery FDC.
(e) Furnish forward observers as required.
(f) Establish OP's to observe the zone of action of sup-
ported unit(s), and in conjunction with battle group
artillery commanders, coordinate observation within
this zone.
(g) Assist in planning fires in support of the supported
units (c below).
(h) Keep division artillery informed of position areas and
tactical missions assigned to subordinate artillery units.
(2) When a field artillery battalion is given the mission type
order of "support," the division artillery commander may
issue certain instructions in conjunction with the order
which may amplify or modify the requirements as out-
lined in (1) above. Therefore, the division fire support
plan must be studied in conjunction with the order to
insure that all instructions issued by the division artillery
commander are being complied with.
c. Effect on Fire Planning in the Infantry Division. Fire plan-
ning is normally accomplished at battle group artillery and division
artillery levels. Since a supporting battalion is in between these
two levels of command, it will not normally plan fires. The respon-
sibilities of the support battalion commander for fire planning can
best be discussed by considering two situations.
(1) When supporting one battle group. The fires of a battalion
placed in support of one battle group are considered as
automatically allocated to the battle group for fire plan-
ning purposes unless otherwise specified by the division
artillery commander. The supporting battalion then as-
sists the battle group artillery by providing information
and assistance in scheduling. The degree of assistance
AGO 2696B 35
 will vary from providing a liaison officer from the rein-
forcing artillery battery to providing as much of the facili-
ties and personnel of the battalion as necessary. The
battle group commander may request the supporting bat-
talion commander to coordinate his fire support. The
battle group artillery fire plan will be sent directly to
division artillery with an information copy to the sup-
porting artillery battalion. In the defense, all 105-mm
howitzer batteries of the supporting battalion are allo-
cated to the battle group for scheduling of barrages.
(2) When supporting more than one battle group. When a
battalion is placed in support of more than one battle
group, the division artillery commander specifically allo-
cates the fires of batteries of the battalion for fire plan-
ning purposes and barrages. Additionally, the division
artillery commander may specify priorities of fires. The
supporting battalion coordinates the battle group artillery
fire plans and may plan additional fires as specifically di-
rected by division artillery. The coordinated battle group
fire plans will be forwarded to division artillery by the
supporting battalion. In the defense, each committed
battle group will be allocated a minimum of one 105-mm
howitzer battery of the supporting artillery battalion for
scheduling of a barrage.

59. Tactical Missions

a. General. A tactical mission is the fire support responsibility
that may be assigned to an artillery unit. Tactical missions that
may be assigned to field artillery units are direct support; general
support; reinforcing; and general support-reinforcing. The respon-
bilities inherent in each type tactical mission are illustrated in fig-
ure 5. Examples of various missions are shown in type orders in
appendixes II and III.
b. Direct Support. Direct support artillery has the mission of
supporting a specific unit of a command. When practicable, the sup-
porting artillery unit is habitually placed in direct support of the
same unit in order to facilitate teamwork. The direct support ar-
tillery commander maneuvers his unit to conform with the plan of
the supported unit commander. Direct support artillery is not at-
tached to the supported unit; it remains under the command of the
higher artillery commander, but its fires are not taken away from
the supported unit except by the authority of the division or force
commander. This authority normally is delegated to the division
artillery or force artillery commander.

36 AGO 2696B
 c. General Support. General support artillery has the mission of
supporting the force as a whole. An artillery unit with a general
support mission remains under the command of the force artillery
commander and provides the force commander a reserve of firepower
with which to influence the action.
d. Reinforcing. Reinforcing artillery has the mission of augment-
ing the fires of reinforced artillery on call. Artillery with a rein-
forcing mission remains under the command of the higher artillery
commander, but priority of fires is to the reinforced artillery. The
reinforcing artillery establishes liaison and direct communication
with the reinforced artillery in order to minimize the time required
to answer calls for fire.
e. General Support-Reinforcing. General support-reinforcing
artillery has the mission of supporting the force as a whole, and of
providing reinforcing fires for another artillery unit. A unit with
this mission displaces on order of the next higher artillery com-
mander, or as requested by the reinforced unit subject to approval
of the next higher artillery commander. However, the unit com-
mander must be prepared to recommend actual position areas and
to advise the higher artillery commander when displacement is
necessary. Priority of fires is to the force as a whole unless other-
wise specified by the force commander.
f. Modification of Tactical Missions. Tactical missions assigned
artillery units may be modified; the modifications must be clearly
stated by the commander assigning the mission. Since a tactical
mission of direct support requires the full use of all elements of an
artillery unit, it normally should not be modified. Frequently used
modified missions include-
(1) General support, prepared for direct support-A mission
of general support, but the battalion commander must
prepare for a probable future direct support mission by
instituting the necessary planning, reconnaissance, liaison,
selection of positions (when appropriate), communica-
tions, and survey.
(2) General support-reinforcing; revert to control of parent
unit upon commitment or order-A mission frequently
given to a division artillery when its parent division is not
committed and the division artillery is under corps artillery
control. Necessary planning, reconnaissance, liaison, selec-
tion of positions, communications, and survey must be in-
stituted early to provide effective fire support for the
parent division when it is committed.
g. Battle Group Artillery. The artillery organic to a battle group
AGO 2696B 37
 i. ·. . -.
"o
0. .or - t. 8 ¥.
CI

E· .5.= - _
,O B
OS! .~~ Elrc
o
_
CI E~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ ,,. *,, z .2.
o ° :' o

I *t 0 Z 0 C 'a a u

eE o
f 2·E
IaC C,
ot Vo z
C
a .x
!!
o' . _
.1 ~~~~~~~~~,.o.
0 0
* El -El-- 0 1~~~~~~~~~~~,.. c --

r a~~~r
300 8C 6B AO 2

-to ( UCo -a- a

g
a- Z~~~o.
0~~~~~~~~~~~
o El S
o
.C ;C1
!!. *; C

05
ZL O P
~ 5
O.
E
O: e~.
C=~

14~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~*
',* i. .1 4 ·
.5 o C1
£0 u .5
Z
5
.·- C C

00 a0C
~
C~~~~Ece~~
-j 0

~~~~~- ..
-o £ Cv E Cm %)E

4 -0 ; : a - -- =~~~~~ 0
I
-L .0 £ . 0 2 "Is2

Z r
- II
C 0 'E
0
f~~~

C. C CL

!C-
E i C
P
0

0 0 020
-
El0 01 c~~c :: Z o ::~ 0 Cm
a AGO 269BL
·

AGO 2696
38
provides continuous close fire support for the battle group. The
battle group commander may retain it in general support of the
battle group or place it in direct support of designated elements of
the battle group. When the battle group artillery is retained in gen-
eral support, its responsibilities are as shown in figure 5.

60. Assignment of Tactical Missions

a. Tactical missions for battle group artillery are normally rec-
ommended by the battle group artillery commander and assigned by
the battle group commander.
b. Tactical missions for division artillery are normally assigned
by the division artillery commander as approved by the division
commander. However, a division artillery battalion commander with
a mission type order of support (par. 58) may assign tactical mis-
sions to subordinate units as the situation requires and make subse-
quent changes to meet changing situations.
c. Tactical missions for corps artillery are normally assigned by
the corps artillery commander as approved by the corps commander.
d. Tactical missions for army artillery are normally assigned by
the army artillery commander as approved by the army commander.
e. Both corps and army artillery commanders assign tactical mis-
sions to the groups and separate battalions retained under their
control. Ordinarily, they do not assign tactical missions to the bat-
talions within a group. However, they may direct the group com-
mander to assign a tactical mission to a battalion (s) of the group
by caliber. This modifies the tactical mission assigned to the group
(e.g., 102d FA Gp: GS-reinf 1st Inf Div Arty with one 155-mm how
bn). In this case, the group commander assigns a general support-
reinforcing tactical mission to one medium battalion of the group
and a general support tactical mission to the other battalions of the
group.
f. When a battalion within a group is given the tactical mission of
reinforcing a division artillery, the tactical mission is assigned to
the battalion by the corps artillery commander, the battalion is auto-
matically relieved from the attachment to the group, and placed
under command of the corps artillery commander with priority of
fires to the reinforced division artillery.
g. A battery may be assigned a reinforcing mission without being
withdrawn from control of the battalion.
h. Tactical missions suitable for various types of field artillery
units are mentioned in appropriate field manuals of the 6 series and
in paragraphs 55 and 56.
AGO 2696B 39
61. Zones of Fire
Normally, the zone of fire for battle group artillery and direct
support artillery is the zone of action of the supported unit. Other
artillery units are assigned zones of fire to insure complete artillery
coverage and to provide for maximum firepower at points critical to
the success of the operation.
62. Artillery With Reserve Units
a. As a general rule, artillery is not held in reserve, thus organic
artillery of a division in reserve may be employed in support of the
corps if it can be foreseen that the artillery will be able to rejoin
its division when that unit is committed. Artillery of the division
should be employed as general support or general support-reinforc-
ing artillery. Plans for the utilization of the fires of these artillery
units should be integrated with the overall artillery fire plan in such
a way that the overall plan will not suffer a major disruption on
their withdrawal. Organic artillery units of a reserve division must
prepare plans to reassemble their subordinate elements so they can
give timely support to the parent division when it is committed. If
practicable, it is preferable to employ the artillery units of a reserve
division as a group. Sufficient members of the artillery staff should
be left with the reserve division to insure proper planning, liaison,
and reconnaissance for future actions of the division.
b. The principles indicated in a above also apply to the employ-
ment of an artillery battalion or battery which normally supports a
specific unit, when that unit is in division reserve. The battle group
artillery of a reserve battle group should be employed in areas that
will facilitate future operations of the parent battle group. Rein-
forcing or general support-reinforcing missions are preferable to a
general support or direct support mission in these cases.
c. When a large mobile reserve is retained for possible employ-
ment over an extended frontage on short notice, or when the neces-
sity for artillery replacement by unit is indicated or probable, it is
usually desirable to retain artillery in reserve.

Section III. OBSERVATION

63. General
Artillery commanders utilize air and ground observation as a
means of controlling and coordinating supporting fires and collect-
ing information of the enemy. Observation provides information for
friendly troops. It provides a means of adjusting and performing
surveillance of artillery fires and of fires delivered by aircraft and
naval guns. Each corps artillery has an organic field artillery ob-

40 AGO 2696B
servation battalion (par. 87). Artillery maintains observation
throughout daylight and darkness. During darkness, observation is
aided by various means of battlefield illumination (par. 86) and
electronic devices such as radar (par. 64d). Artillery observation
should cover the entire zone or sector of the supported unit. It is
coordinated by assigning artillery units the zones of observation
which normally correspond to their assigned zones of fire and by the
designation of the 0-0 line (par. 40c). Careful attention must be
given to coordination of observation along boundaries between ad-
jacent units to insure complete coverage.
64. Means of Observation
a. Observation Posts. Observation posts (OP's) form the frame-
work of ground observation and are an important adjunct to the
air warning system (FM 44-8). They are established by artillery
observers and surveyors to locate targets, to adjust fires, to provide
surveillance of fires, and to maintain observation throughout the
zone, including areas defiladed to forward observers. When appro-
priately situated and accurately located by survey, two or more
of these OP's may function as a target area base. Target area
bases are established and maintained by all divisional artillery bat-
talions and corps medium battalions if the situation permits (FM
6-40 and TM 6-200). The surveyed locations of these OP's are
reported to higher artillery headquarters in order that effective
target areas bases can be established and coordinated across the
force front. However, observation and adjustment of field artillery
fires are not confined to artillery personnel; members of supported
units often report the locations of targets and sometimes adjust
fire thereon (FM 6-135).
b. Forward Observation. Direct support artillery furnishes a
forward observer section for each infantry or tank company or
similar organization committed to action by the supported unit.
Battle group artillery furnishes observers for rifle companies of
the battle group. Forward observers are principally concerned with
the immediate surroundings of the supported unit, consequently
their observation capabilities are directly related to the unlit's mis-
sion and situation. The observers' ability to observe and his knowl-
edge of the battlefield must be exploited to assist in keeping the
units adequately informed at all times. Artillery units other than
those organic to battle groups or with a direct support mission may
also furnish forward observer sections. These sections function
under the control of the organic or direct support unit.
c. Aerial Observation. Observers in aircraft are used to supple-
ment ground- observation and to exercise general surveillance over
AGO 2696B 41
the battlefield. Army aircraft organic to divisions and corps are
employed for close-in surveillance. Long-range artillery may require
aerial observation beyond the capabilities of Army aircraft; in
which case reconnaissance aircraft of the Air Force are available
on the request of the artillery commander (par. 173). For artillery
adjustment and surveillance missions, performed by an Air Force
observer, definite arrangements for the communication and tech-
nique to be utilized are made by the artillery unit concerned with
the Air Force observer through the air-ground operations system.
d. Radar. Field artillery observation batteries (par. 87), ar-
mored division light field artillery battalions (FM 6-101), and in-
fantry division artillery headquarters and headquarters battery
are equipped with radar sets which under favorable conditions are
capable of detecting and locating enemy artillery to an accuracy
of 150 meters and mortars to an accuracy of 50 meters at a maxi-
mum range of 10,000 meters. Under favorable conditions, artillery
radar is capable of registering and adjusting artillery fire. Heavy
rain or snow and lack of suitable position areas for the radar sets
will reduce the efficiency of radar. Radar when suitably sited may
also be used to detect enemy movements.
e. Sound and Flash (Ranging). Sound and flash (ranging) are
two distinct and separate but supplementary systems of locating
enemy weapons and adjusting friendly fire by: observation by sonic
devices on the sound produced by the enemy weapon in firing, or
by the friendly projectile in exploding; or by visual observation
of the flash produced or of the point of burst of the enemy weapon
or friendly projectile.
f. Sound Ranging. Sound ranging is accomplished for the artil-
lery by the observation battalion (par. 87). Sound ranging nor-
mally is capable of determining the locations of sound sources with
an accuracy of 50 to over 150 meters at ranges up to 20,000 meters.
Its greatest value is in locating artillery weapons which are hidden
from visual observation. Sound ranging does not require a clear
line of sight to the target, is particularly effective in fog or rain,
and falling snow has no effect. High winds impair the accuracy of
sound ranging. The maximum range is limited by the intensity of
the sound. Battle group sound locating sets (FM 7-21) are also
useful in locating mortars and direct fire weapons.
g. Flash Ranging. Flash bases are established by the observation
battalion and abbreviated (0:1-02) flash bases can be established
by most artillery battalions. Under favorable conditions flash
ranging is the most accurate available means of target location and
a valuable source of intelligence. Flash ranging is limited in its

42 AGO 2696B
effectiveness, however, by unfavorable terrain and weather condi-
tions which impair visibility, and by enemy deceptive measures.
65. Coordination of Observation
Coordination of observation must be a continuous process at all
-levels of command to insure that complete coverage of the zone of
operations is maintained. The artillery S2 (battle group artillery
commander) coordinates all of the means of observation available
to his commander. The plan of observation, like a fire plan, is
prepared simultaneously at all echelons. Coordination of observa-
tion cannot be effected by the corps artillery S2 until he has the
plans of observation of divisions within the corps. Necessary read-
justments are made through the normal chain of command.
a. Field Artillery Group. The observation functions of the field
artillery group S2 depend on the tactical mission assigned the
group. If the group has a reinforcing mission, the coordination of
observation is a responsibility of the reinforced unit; with a gen-
eral support mission, the overall coordination of observation rests
with the S2 of the artillery of the supported force or unit. In
either case, the group S2 coordinates the observation facilities under
group control, with the overall observation plan. His duties in this
respect parallel those of the division artillery S2.
b. Battle Group Artillery. Coordination of observation within
the battle group is effected by the battle group artillery fire direc-
tion officer (FDO). He must know the location of all observation
posts within the battle group area. He determines the adequacy of
coverage, weaknesses, dead spaces, and the need to augment or
relocate observation facilities. He coordinates the observation of
reinforcing artillery units and informs division artillery of ground
and aerial observation requirements which cannot be met by The
battle group. He provides the division artillery with visibility
charts of ground OP's and with information concerning the battle
group observation plan.
c. Division Artillery. The coordination of observation effected
by the division artillery S2 requires analysis of, and the submission
of appropriate recommendations concerning present and future
observation requirements. Visibility charts of ground OP's and
radar clutter and coverage overlays are studied by the S2 to deter-
mine the adequacy of coverage, weaknesses, dead spaces, and the
need to augment or relocate observation facilities. He coordinates
the observation facilities of the division, as well as those of units
reinforcing the artillery with the division. This coordination may
include-
(1) Instructions concerning the number of observation posts
and their general locations.
AGO 2696B 43
 (2) Assignment of zones of observation and areas of primary
responsibility.
(3) Employment of aircraft used by the division for artillery
purposes.
(4) Employment of sound ranging, flash ranging, and radar
facilities.
(5) Employment of other observation facilities which are
made available to the. artillery with the division.
d. Corps Artillery. The coordination of observation is effected
by corps artillery S2. Coordination in depth, when considered nec-
essary, is obtained by designation of an 0-0 line (par. 40c). Par-
ticular attention is directed to the areas along division and corps
boundaries. Observers in the zone of one division frequently can
see and adjust artillery fire on targets in the zone of another divi-
sion. Observation for adjustment or surveillance of fire may be
assigned to observers belonging to units other than the artillery
units designated to fire. Army aviation is employed to supplement
ground observation (par. 64c). While the technique of setting up
flash, radar, and sound installations is left to the observation bat-
talion, its attention should be directed into those areas most likely
to contain enemy artillery. Provision may be made for direct com-
munication between observation batteries and fire direction centers
to facilitate delivery of fire on ,targets located by the observation
batteries.
e. Army Artillery. Army artillery coordinates observation by
participation in planning for the use of high-performance aircraft,
special forces, and other agencies which have a capability for long-
range artillery observation and target acquisition.

66. Battlefield Illumination

Illumination of the battlefield is a supporting mission and is a
responsibility of the artillery. Illuminating shells, aircraft flares,
and field artillery searchlights are used for illuminating the battle-
field to facilitate night observation and provide assistance to infantry
and armored unit's night operations. For employment of artillery
searchlight batteries see FM 6-115 and paragraph 86.

Section IV. SURVEY

67. General
Artillery survey is the process of determining the relative hori-
zontal and vertical locations of artillery weapons, targets, and target
locating devices and of providing means of orienting weapons and
equipment on the ground. Survey facilitates the massing of fires, the

44 . AGO 2696B
delivery of observed fires without adjustment and the delivery of
effective unobserved fires. Survey must be performed with appro-
priate accuracy and should be based on a carefully prepared plan
with definite goals and priorities. The senior artillery commander
is responsible for initiating the overall survey plan, establishing
common control, disseminating survey information, and determining
the accuracy of available maps. Commanders must allow for the
time required for survey if support by accurate unobserved fire is
expected. The time required depends on the control available,
Weather, enemy activity, and terrain. Inasmuch as forces may be
employed over an extended area, survey operations at all echelons
must be carefully planned to insure that survey control is established
as expeditiously as possible.
68. Control
Common control is that control used by a unit as a whole; it may
be either assumed control or true control, depending on the origin
of the common grid.
a. Assumed control is survey based on an arbitrary height and
grid reference for the starting point and an assumed or true direc-
tion. It should closely approximate true control in direction and
height to permit use with met data.
b. True control is control that has been tied into the survey sys-
tem (military grid) being used. These data are procured by artil-
lery survey personnel from topographic engineers, existing maps,
trig lists, or other lists of existing control.
69. Echelons of Survey
The higher echelon is responsible for extending survey control to
the lower unit. However, survey is performed simultaneously in all
echelons. Lower units commence survey from control points when
these have been furnished by higher headquarters. When no control
is available, survey is initiated based on assumed control and con-
verted to true control when it is made available.
a. Field Artillery Group. The group does not perform survey.
The group commander may assist his battalions in survey activities
by procuring and furnishing survey data and by coordinating survey
plans. Each battalion of the group ties its survey into the common
control furnished by the artillery headquarters with which the group
is working.
b. Battle Group Artillery. For a discussion of survey by battle
group artillery, see FM 6-18 and FM 6-21. A detailed discussion of
survey methods and techniques, duties of personnel, and survey
planning is contained in TM 6-200.
AGO 2696B 45
 c. Division Artillery. Division artillery extends corps survey
control to each battalion or separate battery of the division artillery
and to the battle group artillery. In the absence of corps control,
division artillery extends common control to these units, tying into
corps control when it becomes available. Division artillery estab-
lishes a survey information center (SIC) that serves the same pur-
pose as the corps survey information center (d below).
d. Corps Artillery. The corps artillery survey officer is the ob-
servation battalion commander. The observation battalion (par. 87)
normally furnishes common control to the field artillery units of
the corps. Where true control is available, the observation battalion
connects the corps survey to true control and makes the necessary
conversion to place the entire corps on true control. The observation
battalion, in addition to extending common control to artillery units
with the corps, executes its own internal survey, and establishes a
survey information center to maintain a record of all survey control
available in the corps sector. All requests for control should be made
to the survey information center and all survey data determined by
units with the corps should be reported to it.
e. Army Artillery. Army artillery units, except as noted in f
below, perform their own survey operations. This survey is tied in
to true control which may be obtained from Army topographic en-
gineers, a corps artillery, or available maps, trig lists, or other lists
of existing control. Units requiring survey control of a higher order
of accuracy than that furnished by a corps observation battalion are
furnished survey support by special army engineer teams.
f. Air Defense Artillery Units. When an air defense artillery
unit is assigned a surface mission, it must be provided complete
survey data. When assigned an air defense mission, but in position
to augment the fire of a field artillery unit, the air defense artillery
unit will use survey data supplied by the field artillery unit.

Section V. MANEUVER OF FIELD ARTILLERY UNITS

70. General
This section discusses the movement of artillery units as opposed
to the maneuvering of artillery fires which is discussed in chapter 13.
The artillery commander is responsible that his units are so ma-
neuvered that they are able tc render effective support in all situa-
tions. This requires-
a. That the artillery's characteristic of mobility be zealously main-
maintained (par. 71).
b. That all artillery commanders keep abreast of plans of the

46 AGO 2696B
supported units (pars. 35 and 36) and anticipate requirements for
artillery (par. 41).
c. Proper organization for combat, necessary changes thereto
during the operation, and decentralization of control when appropri-
ate (pars. 51-62).
d. Coordinated movement of artillery units and proper employ-
ment of artillery during marches and with security detachments
(pars. 72 and 73).
e. Selection of position areas (par. 74) from which effective
artillery fire can be delivered.
f. Continuing rconnaissance (par. 75) for position areas, observa-
tion posts, locations for other installations, and routes.
g. Timely displacement (par. 76) of artillery units to provide
continuity of fire support.
h. Sound procedures in effecting relief of artillery units in combat
(par. 77) and in the reception of attached artillery (par. 78).
i. Effective security measures (par. 79).
71. Mobility
a. Mobility is a prime requisite of field artillery units. It is ob-
tained by applying an effective system of maintenance and operation
to the unit's organic transportation (FM 6-101 and FM 25-10).
b. The commander of each echelon of artillery is responsible for
the operation and maintenance of the transport of his unit. The
prescribed standards of vehicle operation and maintenance can be
maintained only by close supervision. The execution of this func-
tion may be delegated to the motor officer but the responsibility re-
mains with the commander.

72. Movements
a. References. For the basic doctrine governing troop movements,
see FM 100-5; for technical and logistical data and march tables,
FM 101-10; for march orders, FM 101-5; for detailed treatment
of motor movements, FM 25-10; for details of marches of field
artillery battalions, FM 6-101; and for a discussion of air defense
artillery protection, FM 44-2 and FM 44-4.
b. TacticalMarches. When a force is marching in multiple march
columns, artillery is placed within each column to insure its avail-
ability for early and adequate support of the security forces and
of the initial action of the main body. Artillery in each march
column may be placed under the command of the column com-
mander; command reverts to the force artillery commander when
AGO 2696B 47
control can be effectively centralized. This is accomplished on order
of the force commander. Artillery reconnaissance, survey, observa-
tion, and liaison personnel march with forward elements of the
column. When the rate of march of the column is that of dis-
mounted troops, the artillery marches by bounds.
c. Air Defense Protection. The march column requires continu-
ous air defense protection. This protection is obtained by dispers-
ing self-propelled light air defense artillery fire units throughout
the column within mutually supporting distance of each other.
73. Artillery With Security Forces
A military force in movemnet secures itself by reconnaissance
elements (covering forces) operating in front of the command and
by advance, rear, and flank guards when appropriate (FM 100-5).
Self-propelled artillery is desirable for the support of all security
forces.
a. Covering Forces. Covering forces should be strong in artillery.
When not organic to the covering force, artillery units usually are
attached to it. For the artillery to occupy position promptly to
support the action, planning and reconnaissance must be continuous.
The artillery is located so that it can enter action promptly and
so other elements of the covering force can protect it from surprise
attacks. To accelerate the opening of fire, minimum survey and
communication is used.
b. Advance Guard. Artillery support for the advance guard (FM
6-101) is furnished by the attachment of an artillery unit to, or
by artillery marching with, the advance guard. If the advance
guard is small and within range, artillery support may be furnished
by artillery with the main body. The amount of artillery attached
depends on the mission and size of the advance guard and expected
enemy action. The location of the artillery and the performance of
reconnaissance is similar to that for covering forces. Speed in the
occupation of position and in the attack of targets is essential. When
contact is imminent, the artillery supporting the advance guard
moves by bounds from one firing position to another.
c. Rear Guard. The mission of the rear guard requires the sup-
port of light and medium artillery and sometimes longer range
artillery. Artillery with the rear guard is usually attached. The
employment of the artillery is similar to that with the advance
guard. The artillery occupies positions close behind each of the
successive rear guard delaying positions. Fire is opened early to
force the enemy to deploy and thus delay his advance. Roads, road
junctions, and key terrain features are taken under interdiction
fire. Some of the artillery is displaced early to allow continuous

48 AGO 2696B
fire and to support the withdrawal of the rear guard to its next
delaying position.
d. Flank Guard. Artillery support for the flank guard is usually
furnished by artillery with the main body. However, if the size
of the flank guard is large and it is operating at a considerable dis-
tance from the main body, artillery is attached to it. The employ-
ment of artillery attached to the flank guard is similar to that with
the advance guard.
74. Position Areas
a. General. The location of artillery position areas is governed
mainly by the mission, the terrain, the nature of the tactical opera-
tion, and the need for dispersion as a defensive measure against
enemy nuclear weapons. Artillery commanders may have to de-
lineate areas for the location of major elements of their commands
in order to coordinate the position areas with the operation. Usually
battle group artillery and direct support artillery have priority for
positions within the division area and division artillery units have
priority over corps artillery units for postions within the corps
area. Corps artillery units have priority over army artillery for
positions within the army area. Special requirements may neces-
sitate special priorities. For a discussion of field artillery battalion
and battery position areas, see FM 6-101 and FM 6-140.
b. Responsibility. Battle group artillery and direct support artil-
lery commanders normally select their own position areas subject
to approval of the next higher headquarters. Position areas for
general support units are selected (par. 75) by the force artillery
commander and may be selected for reinforcing artillery units by
either the force artillery commander or by the commander of the
reinforced unit. Corps and army artillery position areas within
the division area are coordinated with the division artillery com-
mander concerned; army artillery position areas within the corps
area are coordinated with the corps artillery commander concerned.
Artillery commanders coordinate the selection of positions for both
field and air defense artillery units. All artillery commanders should
be aggressive in searching for position areas and be prepared to
make recommendations to the commander responsible for selection.
75. Reconnaissance
Reconnaissance is a directed effort in the field by military units
to gather information of the enemy, weather, and terrain. Artillery
reconnaissance consists of target reconnaissance, which is a part
of target intelligence (ch. 9), reconnaissance for positions, recon-
naissance by fire, and route reconnaissance. Reconnaissance for
positions involves a search for all appropriate locations for artillery
AGO 2696B 49
 installations, such as firing positions, command posts, and observa-
tion posts. For a discussion of reconnaissance by fire, see below.
Route reconnaissance is made prior to any movement of artillery
units and involves a search for all potential displacement routes.
Artillery reconnaissance is active and continuous. It is planned
with a definite object in view and decentralized when time is short.
a. Responsibility. Artillery commanders at all echelons, regard-
less of their assigned tactical mission, are responsible for perform-
ing continuous route and position area reconnaissance and for
making recommendations pertinent thereto. Reconnaissace person-
nel must determine what information is desired and carefully plan
their activities so that reconnaissance may be completed in time
for the information to be of use. Aerial observers, liaison officers,
forward observers, communication personnel, and survey parties
habitually report on routes within the zone of advance.
b. Reconnaissance Means. Artillery commanders use every means
at their disposal to secure the information they need. Liaison with
other units often precludes the necessity for lengthy reconnaissance.
Reconnaissance may be performed by any of the following means
or combination thereof:
(1) Maps. Position area and route reconnaissance are initi-
ated by the use of maps. Map studies are particularly
valuable in planning a reconnaissance but can seldom be
used as the only source of information.
(2) Aerial photographs. Aerial photographs may be used in
the same manner as maps for position area and route
reconnaissance. Recent aerial photographs indicate cur-
rent terrain conditions.
(3) Air. Aerial reconnaissance may be performed by Army
aircraft or by Air Force or Navy reconnaissance support.
Army aircraft, particularly the rotary-wing type, are an
especially valuable aid to reconnaissance. A map or map
substitute reconnaissance should precede reconnaissance
by air.
(4) Ground. Ground reconnaissance is performed by all com-
manders, their staffs, and observation and reconnaissance
personnel. A ground reconnaissance should be made of
position areas prior to occupation and of routes prior to
their use. Ground reconnaissance is preceded by a map
study and is organized so it may be performed in the mini-
mum time.
c. Reconnaissance By Echelon. Each echelon must execute recon-
naissance to obtain information pertinent to the employment of

50 AGO 2696B
units of that echelon. Reconnaissance is coordinated between artil-
lery echelons by the senior artillery commander concerned.
(1) Field artillery group. Field artillery groups perform nec-
essary reconnaissance to select position areas for their
battalions and command installations after a general
position area and mission have been assigned by higher
headquarters. When applicable, the reconnaissance is co-
ordinated with the unit whose fires the group is reinforc-
ing. The group also performs necessary route reconnais-
sance for movement of the group.
(2) Battle group artillery. The battle group commander in
certain situations may designate general position areas
for the battle group artillery. However, the battle group
artillery commander is responsible for performing posi-
tion area and route reconnaissance. Position areas and
routes selected are reported to battle group headquarters
and to division artillery. Coordination of battle group
artillery position areas and position areas for attached
or reinforcing artillery is a responsibility of the battle
group artillery commander. Battle group artillery per-
forms extensive target reconnaissance (ch. 9).
(3) Division artillery. Division artillery selects general posi-
tion areas and routes for movement of subordinate general
support units, for units reinforcing the division artillery,
and may select them for direct support units. Direct sup-
port artillery commanders are responsible for perform-
ing their own position area and route reconnaissance.
Position areas and routes so selected are reported to divi-
sion artillery. Although position areas and routes of
movement for subordinate general support units are se-
lected by division artillery, general support battalion and
separate battery commanders perform continuous posi-
tion area and route reconnaissance in order to be prepared
to recommend areas and routes, and to facilitate displace-
ment when ordered by division artillery. Division artillery
also performs extensive target reconnaissance (ch. 9).
(4) Corps artillery. Corps artillery directs continuous and
aggressive target reconnaissance (ch. 9). Normally, corps
artillery headquarters assigns general position areas and
routes to groups and separate battalions based, when pos-
sible, on preliminary ground reconnaissance and a study
of maps and fire capabilities. Necessary additional recon-
naissance is left to group and battalion commanders.
(5) Army artillery. Army artillery arranges for continuous

AGO 2696B 51
 and aggressive target reconnaissance (ch. 9). Normally,
army artillery headquarters assigns general position areas
and routes to groups and separate battalions retained
under army control based, when possible, on preliminary
ground reconnaissance and a study of maps and fire ca-
'pabilities. Necessary additional reconnaissance is left to
group and battalion commanders.
d. Reconnaissance By Fire. Reconnaissance by fire is used to
find targets, when enemy activity is so restricted as to make little
or nothing visible. It is a method of probing suspected areas by fire
to produce enemy reaction. Available observation -is coordinated
to detect any signs of activity that result from the fire. In some
situations reconnaissance by fire may be utilized to determine the
nature of a fortification. ThiJs must be closely coordinated with
observation and the comparison of air photographs. Firing on the
suspected areas may strip away natural cover, earth, and camou-
flage. This fire may establish the presence and thickness of con-
crete or armor, the outlines of the fortified structure, the location
and direction of fire of embrasures, the system of tactical coordina-
tion, and the location of strong points.

76. Displacements
Timely and rapid displacements of field artillery units are neces-
sary to provide continuous fire support. Fire support is maintained
during displacements by displacing units by echelon or by using
other artillery units to answer calls for fire. Displacements are
accomplished as rapidly as possible so that fire can be resumed with
a minimum of delay and to lessen the probability of the displacing
unit's detection and attack by the enemy. When possible, command
posts are displaced by echelon to insure continuity of control. Initial
communication is installed and operations are begun at the new
command post location prior to displacement of the old command
post. When possible, survey should be completed before displace-
ment is begun. Prior to the beginning of an action, units may dis-
place to positions during darkness or inclement weather to avoid
detection by the enemy. Thereafter, displacements are made depend-
ing on the progress of the supported unit or force. Normally, many
considerations, such as the immediate situation, overall plan of oper-
ations, effective range of weapons, terrain, difficulty in maintaining
communication, and availability of position areas and routes, will
influence each displacement. All artillery commanders are respon-
sible for continuous reconnaissance for position areas and routes,
for keeping themselves abreast of the situation, and for making
recommendations to the appropriate headquarters when displace-

52 AGO 2696B
ment becomes necessary. As shown in figure 5, authority for dis-
placement of field artillery units varies with the tactical mission
assigned the unit.

77. Relief in Combat

a. General. Relief in combat is of two general types: relief in
place and passage of lines (FM 100-5). Neither type of relief
presents any serious difficulties for the artillery. If the relieving
artillery is to occupy positions other than those of the artillery being
relieved, the relief is accomplished in a manner similar to that used
during reinforcement in combat. If the relieving artillery is to
occupy the positions of the artillery being relieved, the relief entails
more detailed planning and cooperation between incoming and out-
going artillery units. During the course of the relief, the artillery
maintains its normal fires and is prepared to execute counterbattery
and protective fires in the event of an attack by the enemy. Relief
is made at night, when possible, to maintain secrecy.
b. Warning Orders. When a relief in place or a passage of lines
is to be made, warning orders are issued by the commanders of the
next higher headquarters, the relieving unit, and the relieved unit.
Warning orders should include the hour the movement for the relief
is to begin and end, the zone of operation of the relieving unit, and
any restrictions imposed upon reconnaissance parties.
c. Reconnaissance. Prior reconnaissance and consultation on de-
tails are necessary, but may be limited by the amount of time avail-
able. Time permitting, the relieving unit commander, staff, and sub-
ordinate commanders should make personal reconnaissance and
confer with their opposite members of the relieved unit in order to
reach agreement on details of the relief.
d. Responsibilities. The unit being relieved is responsible for
furnishing the relieving unit with such of the following as are ap-
plicable:
(1) Friendly situation including location of units and installa-
tions, no-fire line, 0-0 line, nuclear safety line, and OP's.
(2) All available information of the enemy.
(3) Information on routes and road guides, if necessary.
(4) Survey information.
(5) Location of supply installations.
(6) Location of other artillery units within supporting range
and means of communicating with them.
(7) Any restrictions on firing or movement.
(8) Existing wire circuits and wire line route maps.
AGO 2696B 53
 (9) Information necessary for fire control including fire plans,
situation maps, and other information pertaining to oper-
ations in that area.
(10) Authorized ammunition in excess of basic load or other
allowance (applicable only to relief in place).
(11) Any other information which may be pertinent.
e. Command.
(1) The principle of one responsible commander must be ad-
hered to during the execution of a relief in place (FM
100-5). When the artillery and the supported unit are
being relieved during the same period, the artillery com-
mand passes from the relieved artillery commander to the
relieving artillery commander simultaneously with the
passage of command from the relieved supported unit com-
mander to the relieving supported unit commander (FM
6-101). When the artillery and the supported unit are
being relieved at separate times, the artillery command
passes from the relieved artillery commander to the
relieving artillery commander upon the direction of higher
headquarters.
(2) When a relief by passage of lines occurs, the incoming
artillery commander usually becomes responsible for the
artillery support prior to the beginning of the operation.
This may be achieved by attaching the outgoing artillery
to him or by assigning the outgoing artillery a mission of
reinforcing him. In any event, the outgoing artillery sup-
ports the passage of lines from its original positions only
until such time as the relieving supported unit passes
beyond its range, then its status of attachment or mission
of reinforcement normally ceases.

78. Reception of Attached Artillery

a. General. The presence of additional artillery on a battlefront
may be an index of more active operations. Artillery supporting a
battlefront should be moved up at night whenever practicable and
with utmost secrecy.
b. Attachment to Other Artillery Headquarters. Artillery units
of platoon, battery, battalion, group or division artillery size may be
attached to other artillery headquarters. The attached units are
given orders similar to those given to organic units, which state
their mission, position areas, and routes.
c. Attachment to Organic Battalion (Battery). When an artillery
battalion (battery) is attached to an organic battalion (battery),

54 AGO 2696B
the commander of the organic unit is designated as the battalion
(battery) group commander (pars. 9 and 17). He is responsible
that complete preparations are made for the reception of the at-
tached battalion (battery). As a minimum, the battalion (battery)
group commander's responsibility for the attached battalion (bat-
tery) includes-
(1) Selection of position area.
(2) Designation of route into position and time of occupation.
(3) Furnishing survey information.
(4) Communication arrangements between battalions (bat-
teries).
(5) Furnishing information concerning-
(a) Enemy and friendly situation.
(b) Fire direction SOP's, firing, and other special instruc-
tions concerning fire direction.
(c) Communication.
(d) Administrative and logistical support.
(6) Instructions for liaison and observation requirements.
79. Security
a. General. Imagination and resourcefulness in the employment
of security measures is necessary to maintain effective artillery fire
against an enemy strong in artillery and tactical air or skilled in
infiltration and guerilla tactics. Successful deception contributes
to effective security. Deceiving the enemy as to the amount of
friendly artillery assists the command in effecting surprise in
launching an attack. For active and passive defensive measures of
the artillery battalion and batteries in position and on the march,
see FM 6-101 and FM 6-140.
b. Movements. Secrecy in moving artillery units into position
may be gained by night marches and by infiltration. Detailed staff
planning and coordination are necessary to avoid confusion and de-
lays.
c. Deceptive Measures. Any deceptive measures employed by
lower commanders must conform to the mission and counterintelli-
gence plan of the higher commander.
(1) Dummy positions are employed to deceive the enemy as to
the true location of artillery units. These positions are
constructed to appear as realistic as possible. Logs, cap-
tured weapons, and pneumatic devices may be used to
simulate artillery positions. The appearance of digging,
vehicle tracks in and around the position, and actual and
simulated firing add to realism. Dummy positions should
AGO 2696B 55
 be located so that resulting enemy fire will not damage
friendly installations.
(2) There are many other deceptive measures that may be
taken. Artillery may occupy temporary positions and fire
from them for short periods of time before moving back
to the primary position. The firing of roving guns from
surveyed positions for registration purposes and for
harassing and interdiction missions is effective. Simul-
taneous firing by many units makes it' difficult for the
enemy to locate individual positions. The curtailment of
fires, elimination of artillery preparations prior to attacks,
restrictions on registrations, and the imposition of radio
silence or other restrictions on radio operation, all help
to conceal the presence of artillery in a given area.

Section VI. AUXILIARY WEAPONS

80. General
a. When directed by the appropriate commander, the fires of
auxiliary weapons are used to supplement the fires of field artillery
units. Examples of auxiliary weapons suitable for use in the field
artillery role are tanks, light, medium, and heavy air defense artil-
lery guns, air defense artillery missiles, and armored amphibians.
For maximum effect when employed in a field artillery role, units
with such weapons should be capable of employing massed fire tech-
niques and should be connected to field artillery by survey, liaison
and communication.
b. The employment of auxiliary weapons as field artillery is
facilitated by assigning the unit a mission of reinforcing a field
artillery battalion which has the means readily available for assist-
ing the reinforcing unit. Those air defense artillery units trained
and equipped to function as field artillery may also be assigned
general support missions (par. 59).
c. The commander of the reinforced artillery unit is responsible
for the coordination and employment of all available resources of
both the reinforced and the reinforcing unit to enable the rein-
forcing unit to accomplish its mission in an auxiliary role. This may
entail assistance to the reinforcing unit in any or all of the follow-
ing:
(1) Designating general position areas.
(2) Arranging for aerial observation and supplementing
ground observation as required.
(3) Furnishing necessary survey.

56 AGO 2696B
 (4) Assigning missions and preparing firing data when appli-
cable.
(5) Providing communication for the reinforcing unit, if
necessary.
(6) Assisting with refresher field artillery training.
d. The reinforcing unit will usually be responsible for the follow-
ing (if within the unit's capability):
(1) Establishing communication.
(2) Procuring ammunition and supplies.
(3) Establishing liaison with the reinforced artillery unit.
(4) Furnishing forward observers when requested by the rein-
forced unit.

81. Tanks
Tank units with a mission of reinforcing the fires of field artillery
normally remain under the command of the unit to which they are
assigned or attached. When employed in field artillery roles, they
are assigned fire missions suitable for the flat trajectory weapon
with which they are armed (see FM 6-40).

82. Air Defense Artillery

Although air defense weapons are primarily designed to engage
air targets rather than surface targets, they have the capability
of being utilized in the surface-to-surface role. The exploitation
of this surface-to-surface capability requires a command decision,
based on the relative need for retention of air defense artillery units
in the air defense role and for surface fires. In a surface mission,
air defense artillery unit (s) may be employed as follows:
a. To engage surface targets (ground and waterborne).
b. To provide fire support to other combat units.

83. Armored Amphibians LVT (A), LVTH

The armored amphibians LVT (A) and the LVTH are landing
vehicles armed with a 75-mm howitzer and 105-mm howitzer, re-
spectively. Although designed for close support of a landing force,
units equipped with these vehicles can also function as field artillery.
When employed as field artillery, these units may be either attached
to a field artillery unit or given a reinforcing mission (ch. 8).

84. Howitzer Companies

Each squadron of the armored cavalry regiment has an organic
howitzer company which is similar in composition and equipment
to the firing batteries of self-propelled 105-mm howitzer battalions.
AGO 2696B 57
Although this company will seldom be available to the artillery,
it may, on occasion, be used to supplement field artillery fires. Im-
provisation is necessary if it is desired to employ the three howitzer
companies of the armored cavalry regiment as a field artillery bat-
talion, since they are not organized to function together as an artil-
lery battalion.

Section VII. FACTORS AFFECTING THE EMPLOYMENT OF

CERTAIN TYPES OF FIELD ARTILLERY UNITS
85. General
Not all field artillery units are employed in the same manner.
Certain units differ in the tasks they are designed and equipped
to perform. The employment of these units is discussed in para-
graphs 86 through 90.

86. Field Artillery Searchlight Battery

a. Characteristics. The field artillery searchlight battery is or-
ganic to corps artillery and is organized so that it may be attached
to division, either as a battery or by platoon, depending on the
illumination requirement (FM: 6-115). In addition to the normal
headquarters, administrative, and maintenance elements, the search-
light battery contains three platoons of six 60-inch searchlights
each. This battery has no liaison section and only limited facilities
for survey, communication, and security. Therefore, existing artil-
lery facilities are used by the searchlight battery as far as possible,
and higher and adjacent artillery units may expect to receive re-
quests from searchlight units for additional assistance.
b. Command. The searchlight battery commander acts as the
searchlight adviser to the corps artillery commander, who, in turn,
advises the corps commander in the use of searchlights, units to
be supported, areas to be covered, times of employment, and other
matters pertaining to the overall illumination plan. When a search-
light platoon or the entire battery is attached to a division, the.
searchlight unit commander acts as the searchlight adviser for the
division artillery commander.
c. Planning. Effective employment of searchlights for battelfield
illumination depends on thorough and coordinated planning. Com-
manders of supported units consider illumination capabilities in
planning night operations, and the illumination plan is integrated
into the fire support plan. Illumination plans must be formulated
early enough to permit daylight reconnaissance for searchlight posi-
tions, installation of an adequate communication network, and sur-

58 AGO 2696B
vey control where applicable. The development of the illumination
plan parallels artillery fire planning. Final coordination of the
illumination plan is accompished at corps artillery to insure integra-
tion of searchlight illumination with fire support means (e.g., target
marking) and with other means of illumination (e.g., illuminating
shells and aircraft flares).
d. Employment.
(1) A searchlight battery may be assigned a tactical mission;
it may be attached to a subordinate unit; or it may be
given a special assignment.
(a) For a discussion of tactical missions, see paragraph 59.
(b) When attached to a division, a searchlight unit is usually
reattached to division artillery headquarters. Normally,
one searchlight platoon is sufficient to provide the illu-
mination required in the sector or zone of action of
a division. Attachment of a platoon to the division artil-
lery headquarters, therefore, permits utilization of such
existing artillery facilities as liaison, survey, and com-
munication.
(c) Elements of a searchlight battery may be attached to
an appropriate headquarters for special tasks, such as
illumination of a construction site.
(2) Position area requirements for indirect illumination by
searchlights are similar to those for artillery. For direct
illumination, the positions are selected to give line of sight
coverage of the target area and are sufficiently close to the
target area to permit complete coverage by the searchlights
employed. Position areas are coordinated by the corps
artillery commander or, when searchlights are employed
in support of a division, by the division artillery com-
mander. Indirect illumination (artificial moonlight), is
achieved by diffusion of the searchlight beam (fig. 6) or
by reflection from cloud cover (fig. 7). Satisfactory reflec-
tion is gained with as little as 60 percent cloud cover.
Reflection produces more illumination than diffusion; with
low hanging cloud cover, the illumination is nearly equiva-
lent to that of a full moon. Direct illumination (fig. 8),
is a special purpose use of searchlights which produces
maximum illumination of targets. Searchlights may also
be used to illuminate job sites and to serve as a homing
beacon for army aircraft. Illumination by searchlights is
affected by atmospheric conditions; dense fog, heavy snow-
fall, or heavy rain render the illumination totally ineffec-
AGO 2696B 59
 tive. Natural moonlight decreases the effectiveness of
illumination as does mountainous terrain.
(3) For additional details of searchlight battery employment,
see FM 6-115.

87. The Field Artillery Observation Battalion

a. One observation battalion, consisting of a headquarters, head-
quarters and service battery, three identical observation batteries,
and a medical detachment, is organic to each corps artillery. Head-
quarters and service battery has personnel and equipment for survey

Diffused light

Figure 6. Illumination by diffusion.

Diffused light
Reflected ligh
Figure 7. Illumination by reflection.

60 AGO 2696B
 Figure 8. Direct illumination.

and meteorological operations. Each observation battery has the

necessary survey, flash ranging, sound ranging, and radar equipment
and personnel to operate independently of the battalion.
b. Seven missions performed by the observation battalion are
the-
(1) Acquisition of targets, with particular emphasis on the
location of hostile artillery.
(2) Registration and adjustment of fire of friendly artillery.
(3) Conduct and coordination of corps artillery survey opera-
tions.
(4) Collection and reporting of combat information.
(5) Comparative calibration of friendly artillery.
(6) Preparation of meteorological data and transmission to
artillery units.
(7) Surveillance of friendly artillery fires, to include the loca-
tion of friendly nuclear bursts and determination of their
yields.
c. Technical considerations involved in the employment of ob-
servation units should be left to the unit commander who advises
higher headquarters on the capabilities and limitations of his unit
under existing conditions. The battalion operates more efficiently
under centralized control and, therefore, is usually assigned the
tactical mission of general support. When centralized control is not
feasible, the batteries may be attached to divisions or task forces.

AGO 2696B 61
For capabilities and limitations of the observation battalion and
batteries, see FM 6-120.
88. Cannon-Type Nuclear Field Artillery
a. General. Cannon-type nuclear field artillery is particularly
useful at the division and corps level. An understanding of the
capabilities and limitations of cannon-type nuclear field artillery
will enable the higher commander to employ both his cannon and
missile nuclear artillery more effectively.
b. Capabilities. Although the exact capabilities vary with the type
of weapon, the following capabilities apply to all types of cannon
nuclear artillery:
(1) It is the most accurate fire support means available for
the delivery of nuclear weapons.
(2) It can provide effective delivery of large numbers of non-
atomic projectiles of various types.
(3) It has a shorter minimum range than most types of missile
field artillery.
(4) It is less easily identified and located than missile field
artillery and is, therefore, less likely to attract strong
enemy countermeasures.
(5) It can be employed effectively in either a nuclear (HE in
adjustment) or nonnuclear role without detailed survey,
when observed fire procedures are used.
(6) It has a relatively simple ammunition problem in com-
parison with missile field artillery.
(7) It has a rapid rate of fire, can respond quickly to requests
for fire, and can provide sustained fire.
(8) It possesses considerable mobility.
c. Limitations. The following limitations apply to all types of
cannon nuclear artillery:
(1) It cannot deliver the higher yield nuclear weapons.
(2) Its maximum range is less than that of most types of
missile field artillery.
(3) Nuclear cannon projectiles make less efficient use of fission-
able material than other types of nuclear weapons.
d. Employment. Cannon-type nuclear artillery units are normally
employed in general support of the force as a whole, but may be
given the mission of reinforcing the fires of the artillery of a force,
or may be attached to a task force for an independent action. Move-
ment of cannon-type artillery units may be by battalion, battery,
or individual piece, depending on the situation, enemy capabilities,

62 AGO 2696B
and number of nuclear artillery units with the force. Movements
will normally be coordinated and controlled by a higher artillery
headquarters which will usually specify time, method of movement,
routes, and position areas. Generally, movements should be made
during darkness, inclement weather, or other periods of reduced
visibility. When essential and as an exception to the general rule,
cannon-type nuclear artillery battalions, batteries, or individual
pieces may be held in reserve until the attack of suitable targets
can be achieved with maximum surprise. Positions should be
selected to provide maximum security consistent with the accom-
plishment of mission. Consideration is given to the enemy's gue-
rilla, air, and atomic capabilities.

89. Field Artillery Missile Units

a. General. Field artillery missile units provide the commander
with a fire support means for attacking targets at short, medium,
and long range with a variety of warheads possessing great destruc-
tive force. An understanding of the capabilities and limitations of
field artillery missile units will enable the commander to employ
them more effectively.
b. Capabilities. The exact capabilities of field artillery missile
units vary with the type of missile. As a family of weapons, missiles
can deliver a higher yield nuclear weapon at longer ranges with
more efficient use of fissionable material than is possible with cannon-
type nuclear artillery.
c. Limitations. Field artillery missiles are generally less accurate,
more easily identified and located, less mobile, and have a slower
rate of fire than cannon. In addition, the transportation, storage,
care, and issue of liquid propellants used by some missile units and
the greater survey accuracy required in establishing direction con-
trol for medium- and long-range missile units present problems not
found in other field artillery units.
d. Employment. The employment of field artillery missile units
is similar to that of cannon-type nuclear artillery units so far as
missions, movement, positions, and security are concerned. How-
ever, field artillery missile units or elements thereof may be held in
reserve more frequently than cannon-type nuclear artillery. The
selection of suitable positions for some types of missile units requires
consideration of electronic interference with the guidance system,
which may occur as a result of the operation of electronic equipment
by other units. For further information concerning the employment
of missile units, see appropriate field manuals of the 6-series (app.
I).
AGO 2696B 63
90. Artillery Employment in Chemical and Biolog!cal Warfare
a. General. Various types of field artillery units have a capability
of delivering chemical and/or biological agents to an enemy target.
The proper delivery of these agents offers to the commander a
means of target neutralization which alone or in conjunction with
other weapons may be more efficient than other means. Deeply
dug-in enemy positions present a lucrative target for chemical muni-
tions. For details of chemical and biological warfare, see FM3-5.
b. Unit Capabilities for Chemical and Biological Warfare. The
capabilities of various artillery weapons must be considered in the
determination of the most suitable weapons. Cannon units can
deliver a volume of chemical and biological agents accurately but
at limited ranges. Missile units are capable of covering large areas
with surprise concentrations but the rate of fire is comparatively
low. The use of missile units to deliver chemical and biological
agents must be considered in conjunction with other requirements.

Section VIII. ARMY AVIATION

91. Organization
Army aviation is utilized to expedite and improve ground combat
capabilities and logistical procedures. For a detailed discussion of
army aviation, see FM 20-100.
a. All aircraft organic to the division are assigned to the division
aviation company. The artillery flight of the division aviation com-
pany provides aircraft for division artillery.
b. All aircraft organic to corps artillery are assigned to the corps
artillery aviation company (par. 56k).
92. Capabilities
Army aviation is capable of performing many artillery tasks.
Some of these are-
a. Aerial observation.
b. Aerial photography.
c. Route reconnaissance.
d. Wire laying and radio relay, and message delivery.
e. Evacuation of casualties.
f. Aerial inspection of camoflage.
g. Battlefield illumination.
h. Survey assistance.
i. Column control.

64 AGO 2696B
 i. Air movement of artillery weapons, crews, and supplies.
k. Aerial adjustment of fire.
93. Employment
a. The artillery flight of the division aviation company operates
in direct support of or attached to the division artillery. It normally
functions under the operational control of the division artillery com-
mander or a subordinate unit commander within the division artil-
lery. Decentralization of operational control to subordinate artillery
units may be necessary in order to insure close support and maxi-
mum utilization of aircraft. The method of control used parallels
the requirement set forth by the fire support and maneuver plan.
Other considerations include air traffic control and additional air-
strips and aviation facilities. Every effort is made to have support-
ing aircraft operate from airstrips in close proximity to supported
artillery units.
b. For employment of the corps artillery aviation company, see
paragraph 56k.
94. Airfields
The type of airfield used will depend primarily on the tactical
situation and the availability of suitable landing areas and other
facilities. Landing areas must be free from obstacles and must
provide sufficient length and hard surface for the operation of fixed
wing aircraft.

AGO 2696B 65
 CHAPTER 6
OFFENSIVE COMBAT

95. General
The purpose of offensive action is to destroy the effectiveness
of the enemy's armed forces and his will to fight. The offensive
is conducted as an attack in a war of movement, attack of an
organized position, and the exploitation. In nuclear warfare, action
is characterized by nuclear fires, swift maneuver from dispersed
positions, violent assault, and rapid exploitation. The desired com-
bat power for the attack can be obtained through varied combina-
tions of units and fires. These combinations provide great flexibility
in plans of attack and organization for combat into forces for the
main attack (s), secondary attack (s) and reserves. Nuclear weapons
in reserve provide considerable firepower which to some extent off-
sets the requirement for a large reserve of troops. Allocation of
nuclear fires is an important factor in determining the distribution
of force required.
96. Field Artillery Employment
Field artillery must be disposed and organized to protect the
assembly and attack positions and the movement into them, execute
the necessary fires prior to the attack, furnish continuous support
throughout the action, and protect the attacking units during the
periods of reorganization. The preponderance of artillery firepower
and the priority of fires is normally given to the main attack.
97. Fundamentals of Positioning Field Artillery in the Offense
Field artillery position areas in offensive combat are located-
a. To accomplish the mission.
b. Well forward to exploit the range of weapons, facilitate com-
munication and liaison, and support the attack as long as possible
without displacement.
c. In the zone of the supported unit.
d. To avoid interference with other units.
e. To maintain adequate dispersion between units consistent with
the attainment of effective fire support, and thereby avoid unneces-
sary concentration of troops.
f. To give priority of positions to units providing close support
for elements in contact (par. 74:).

66 AGO 2696B
98. Control
In an advance guard action and in a meeting engagement, control
of artillery is of necessity usually decentralized. As the situation
develops, control is normally centralized as soon as circumstances
permit. Prior to a preparation, control is centralized and remains
centralized as long as possible during the attack. As the attack
develops or the exploitation begins, control may again be decentral-
ized or partially decentralized.
99. Registration
a. Registration increases the accuracy of subsequent fires, per-
mits placing unobserved fires close to friendly troops, and saves am-
munition. Unrestricted registration discloses the artillery positions
and thereby indicates the size and deployment of the force, indicates
the commander's intentions, and invites neutralization. The dis-
advantages of registration can be minimized by using special regis-
tration positions, by keeping the number of registering batteries to
the effective minimum, by registering as late as practicable before
the attack, by registering units simultaneously, by using predicted
fire techniques to limit the requirement for registration, and by the
use of accurate survey.
b. The force commander makes the decision as to whether regis-
tration will be restricted or prohibited. It is rarely necessary to
prohibit registration except when employing free rockets and
guided missiles. When conditions exist which indicate a require-
ment for restriction of registration, the force commander will
coordinate registration.

100. Actions Prior to Attack

Actions of the field artillery prior to the attack include-
a. Development of organization for combat (pars. 51-62) and
preparation of fire plans (ch. 12).
b. Reconnaissance, selection, and occupation of firing positions.
c. Completion of the signal communication system.
d. Establishment of common topographical control, established by
survey or by firing.
e. Systematic organization and coordination of observation.
f. Assembly of supplies and equipment in forward areas.
g. Establishment of required liaison (par. 36 and fig. 5).
h. Registration in accordance with the instructions or policy of
the force commander.
AGO 2696B 67
 101. Meeting Engagements
a. When the advance guard deploys, supporting artillery occupies
position at once to cover the deployment. Usually artillery with the
remainder of the column immediately occupies position to furnish
support. Units that have occupied positions during the advance
guard action may have to displace early in order to be in forward
positions to support an attack by the time it is launched. The artil-
lery moving to positions should be given priority on roads.
b. The early employment of the observation battalion reconnais-
sance, radar, sound, flash, and survey elements is desirable. The
attachment of observation batteries to divisions initially will facili-
tate their early employment.
c. Prearranged artillery supporting fires are not limited to con-
centrations covering the initial advance from the line of departure
but are limited only by the time available for planning and the
extent and accuracy of target locations. Subsequent fires in support
of the attack are called for by air and ground observers and liaison
officers.

102. Exploitation and Encirclements

a. The artillery with an exploiting or encircling force is normally
attached. Artillery attached l;o these forces should have great
mobility and be capable of delivering fire quickly. For these reasons
self-propelled artillery is desirable. Because of the difficulty of
supplying ammunition and fuel to the artillery of the encircling
force, it may be necessary to attach additional transportation.
b. Artillery with a direct pressure force is normally retained
under the control of the force artillery commander initially. As
the action progresses, artillery, may be attached to units making
the most progress. Longer-range artillery usually remains under
centralized control. Its fire mis;sions include interdiction of enemy
routes of withdrawal.

103. Field Artillery Support for Attack of an Organized Position

The preponderance of artillery firepower must be capable of
supporting the main attack. When the main and secondary attacks
are sufficiently close together, the artillery positions should be
selected so as to make the preponderance of the artillery firepower
available to both attacks.
a. The attack of an organized position usually requires the
delivery of a preparation. The situation encountered in each opera-
tion, however, will dictate whether a preparation is required.
b. Fires in support of the attack are prearranged as to location

68 AGO 2696B
and, where justified by combat intelligence, as to time. Fires must
be planned to protect the attacking unit during periods of reorgani-
zation.

104. Field Artillery Support of the Exploitation

a. Artillery with an exploiting force is normally attached. Since
armored and motorized units are especially suitable for the mission
of exploitation, the attached artillery must be highly mobile and
capable of delivering fire quickly. Self-propelled artillery is de-
sirable.
b. Long-range artillery fire missions include interdiction of
enemy routes of reinforcement or withdrawal.

AGO 2696B 69
 CHAPTER 7
DEFENSIVE COMBAT AND RETROGRADE MOVEMENTS

Section I. DEFENSIVE COMBAT

105. General
Defensive operations on the nuclear battlefield are characterized
by flexibility, dispersion, and the necessity for additional defensive
areas to be located in depth. Tactics employed must be capable of
absorbing the initial shock and containing the enemy attack.
a. Objectives of Defensive Combat (FM 100-5). The general
objectives of defensive combat are to gain time pending the develop-
ment of more favorable conditions for undertaking the offensive,
or to economize forces on one front for the purpose of concentrating
superior forces for a decisive action elsewhere.
(1) Under the first of these objectives, a commander may as-
sume the defensive pending the arrival of.reinforcements,
or he may be forced on the defensive by inferiority in fire-
power, numbers, disposition, training, or logistical sup-
port. He may assume the defensive and invite attack as
part of a deliberate plan to win the battle by a counter-
offensive.
(2) Under the second objective, the defensive usually is ex-
pressed in the mission received from higher authority.
This mission may be to hold a vital area pending comple-
tion of the maneuver of other forces, to protect a flank,
or to contain an enemy force while an offensive is being
conducted on another part of the front or in another
theater.
b. Mission. The mission of a force in the defense may be to deny
a vital area to the enemy, to contain an enemy force, to protect
a flank, or to effect maximum attrition and disorganization of the
enemy as a preliminary to offensive action. The mission normally
dictates the type defense selected and the position or area to be
defended. However, such considerations as composition of opposing
forces, the terrain, composition of friendly forces, and security may
favor a different type or area of defense. A defensive mission may
be imposed by the situation, directed by higher headquarters, or
adopted voluntarily. Defensive measures always will be taken, in
70 AGO 2696B
the absence of specific instructions, when an attack has reached its
objective or is unable to continue the advance.
c. Basic Types of Defense. Basically there are two types of de-
fense-the mobile defense and the position defense. The defined
types lie at opposite ends of a scale with a wide range of variations
between. The primary difference between the two types is in the
concept of the commander as to the manner in which the forces are
disposed and the size and intended use of the reserve.
(1) Position defense. When conditions favor or permit the
organization of the battle area into a system of defensive
sectors that afford strong mutual support to one another,
the defending forces are disposed in a relatively compact
form to insure maximum strength of the defense. This
form of defense may be called a position defense. In the
position defense, the bulk of the defending force is disposed
in selected tactical localities with principal reliance placed
on the forces in such localities to maintain their positions
and to control the terrain between them. The reserve is
used to counterattack, to restore the forward edge of the
battle area (FEBA), add depth, provide flank and rear
area security, block enemy penetrations, and to replace
garrisons of defended areas. Many variations of the posi-
tion defense are possible, depending upon the mission,
frontage assigned, terrain, and the size and composition
of available forces, including fire support.
(2) Mobile defense. When conditions are favorable (FM 100-
5), the .mobile defense may be employed. In the mobile
defense, forward defensive areas are occupied by the mini-
mum forces necessary to observe, canalize, block, or impede
the enemy while the remainder of the force is employed
as a mobile striking force.
d. Artillery Employment. Artillery must be prepared to support
all phases of defensive action. It must be capable of being employed
in mass on critical localities, on ground that is lightly held, or
beyond the range of the fires of other supporting weapons; it must
be prepared to fire in any area by rapidly shifting its direction of
fire or by occupying alternate or supplementary positions. Properly
employed artillery firepower may be the deciding factor in the con-
duct of a successful defense of an area.

106. Security Forces

Security forces have the mission of providing early warning of
the approach of hostile forces, gaining time for the main forces
AGO 2696B 71
to prepare for combat, forcing early deployment of the enemy, de-
ceiving the enemy as to exact location of the battle area and ob-
serving the enemy's advance. Friendly aviation, covering forces
(par. 73), the general outpost or reconnaissance and security forces,
and the combat outpost comprise the usual security echelon to the
front. In the mobile defense, the mission normally assigned to the
general outpost or reconnaissance and security force may be exe-
cuted by the covering force. VChen an infantry division is required
to establish a general outpost in the mobile defense, its capability
in accomplishing all aspects of the mobile defense is limited. Artil-
lery is employed in support of ground security forces.
a. General Outpost. The general outpost is normally manned by
elements of divisions or comparable units assigned sectors in the
battle area. It is supported by artillery fires from within the battle
area or from in front of the battle area. These artillery fires may
include nuclear fires. Artillery operating in support of the general
output should represent all calibers of artillery with the main force
in order to deceive the enemy as to the location of the battle area.
Artillery supporting the general outpost should be attached if the
distance from the battle area is too great for centralized control.
Artillery supporting the general outpost from within the battle area
should utilize temporary positions to maintain secrecy of the battle
area. On withdrawal of the general outpost, attached artillery is
released from attachment and occupies previously selected positions
in support of the main force.
b. Reconnaissance and Security Forces. Within their capability,
reconnaissance and security forces perform missions prescribed for
the general outpost and combat outpost. Reconnaissance and secu-
rity forces are used in all types of defense when the area of security
responsibility is large. Under nuclear warfare conditions, the
division may use reconnaissance and security forces more often than
a general outpost because of the more extended and multidirectional
nature of the defense. Reconnaissance and security forces consist
of a series of lateral outposts,, road blocks, observation posts, and
reconnaissance detachments. These forces are provided by the
frontline battle groups or other divisional units. They are supported
by artillery fires from within the battle area, or from in front of
the battle area. These artillery fires may include nuclear fires.
c. Combat Outpost. Suitable terrain forward of the battle area
is occupied by combat outposts which are usually furnished by
echelons, lower than division, holding a sector of the forward edge
of the battle area. The combat outpost is normally supported by
artillery supporting the forward edge of the battle area. Artillery
observers will normally accompany the combat outpost.

72 AGO 2696B
107. Field Artillery Support of the Battle Area
a. General. Since the rapid concentration of artillery fire is es-
sential to a successful defense, centralized control of the artillery
is required. Every effort is made to meet the main attack with a
mass of artillery fire. Deceptive measures are employed to mislead
the enemy as to the amount and location of artillery. Position areas
are selected to provide continuous and effective artillery fire support
throughout the action. Organization of position, observation, survey,
communication, and fire planning are as complete as time and the
situation permit. Artillery movements are coordinated with each
other and with the movement of other forces to insure the most
effective support.
b. Position Areas. The following are fundamentals in the posi-
tioning of field artillery in the defense:
(1) Location.
(a) Artillery is located where it can accomplish the mission.
(b) Artillery, including artillery observation, is echeloned
in depth in order that continuous supporting fire may
be provided in the event an enemy penetration neutral-
izes the position areas and observation of the forward
artillery units.
(c) All division artillery cannon should be able to fire im-
mediately in front of the forward edge of the battle area.
(d) The bulk of division artillery should be able to fire
within the battle area.
(e) Some artillery units are placed in forward positions to
accomplish counterbattery and long-range harrassing
and interdiction fire.
(f) Artillery units with a nuclear capability are positioned
laterally and in depth to provide the most effective con-
tinuous support.
(g) In selecting positions, advantage is taken of natural
defensive features of the terrain and of incidental pro-
tection afforded by reserve units. Access to routes of
withdrawal is considered.
(h) Dispersion of artillery positions consistent with the at-
tainment of effective fire support is sought as a means
of avoiding unnecessary concentration of troops, and
of limiting the neutralization of friendly artillery by
hostile air attack and counterbattery fire, particularly
when the enemy has the capability of employing nuclear
weapons.
AGO 2696B / 73
 (i) Priority of positions is given to units providing close
support for elements in contact (par. 74).
(j) Every effort is made to position field artillery in the zone
or area of responsibility of the supported unit or force,
and to avoid interference with other units.
(k) Battle group artillery must be able to provide close fire
support for its parent unit on commitment.
(2) Occupation of position. Every effort is made to maintain
secrecy in the occupation of position. Position areas are
organized as completely as circumstances will permit.
Camouflage is emphasized. All units prepare their posi-
tions for defense against ground attack, airborne attack,
guerilla action, and infiltration (FM 100-5).
(3) Alternate and supplementary positions.
(a) If artillery units receive severe counterbattery fire or
their positions become otherwise untenable, artillery
commanders may move their units to alternate positions.
An alternate position is so located that the unit can
continue to accomplish the original mission.
(b) Force commanders may designate successive defensive
positions in depth. Artillery supplementary positions
are selected from which fire can be delivered in support
of these defensive positions. A supplementary position
is a position for firing on targets that cannot be attacked
from primary or alternate positions. If artillery mis-
sions assigned in support of planned counterattacks
cannot be carried out from primary or alternate posi-
tions, supplementary positions must be selected from
which such missions can be accomplished.
(c) It is the responsibility of all artillery commanders that
alternate and supplementary positions are selected and
prepared to the extent that circumstances permit.
c. Observation. Field artillery observation should cover the en-
tire defensive sector and should extend as far forward of the main
battle area as possible. All artillery echelons coordinate their ground
observation to insure effective coverage. Particular attention is
given to ground observation covering areas lightly held or gaps
which are to be controlled by fire. Maximum use is made of the
facilities of all artillery and other observation agencies (b (1) (b)
above).
d. Communication. The efficient operation of the artillery com-
munication net is of special importance in order that the flexibility
of artillery fire may be exploited. Due to the dispersion of forces
74 AGO 2696B
on the nuclear battlefield, a great amount of reliance must be placed
on radio communication. However, when time permits, complete
wire lines are installed, lateral lines are laid to provide alternate
means of wire communication, and wire is installed in alternate and
successive positions. Detailed plans for radio communication include
the use of alternate channels.
e. Survey. Survey of all installations is as complete as the situa-
tion permits. Alternate and supplementary positions must be sur-
veyed, to the extent that artillery can displace to these positions and
commence firing immediately with effective massed fire.
f. Fire Planning. Detailed fire planning (ch. 12) is essential for
effective artillery support of defensive operations. In general, fire
plans in the defense are based on fires that-
(1) Delay and disorganize the enemy's approach to the posi-
tion.
(2) Disrupt the enemy's preparation for attack by counter-
preparation fire.
(3) Impede the enemy's attack with close defensive fires in
width and depth throughout the sector.
(4) Break up the enemy's assault on the FEBA by final protec-
tive concentrations and barrages.
(5) Limit penetration of the FEBA by fires within friendly
lines delivered on call.
(6) Destroy enemy forces that have been canalized into killing
grounds within the battle area.
(7) Support the counterattack and limited offensive actions
associated with the counterattack.
g. Nuclear Fire Planning. A thorough study is made of the entire
defensive sector to insure that all potential and known targets suit-
able for nuclear fires are included in the nuclear fire plan. The
majority of the targets are planned for the attack on call of defend-
ing units. Nuclear fire planning in the defense is based on fires as
indicated in f above. Nuclear and nonnuclear fires must be closely
integrated to achieve maximum benefit of their capabilities.

Section II. RETROGRADE MOVEMENTS

108. General
a. A retrograde movement is any movement of a command to the
rear or away from the enemy. Retrograde movements are further
classified as a withdrawal from action, a delaying action, or a
retirement. These retrograde movements may be forced by enemy
AGO 2696B 75
action or may be voluntary. Retrograde movements are usually
covered by a mobile security force which devotes particular atten-
tion to flank security to avoid envelopment of the main forces (FM
100-5).
b. In retrograde movements the mission of the artillery is to neu-
tralize the enemy artillery, to delay the enemy advance, and to assist
the infantry or armor in disengaging from action. In the event the
force commander launches a limited counterattack to assist the
disengagement of units, the artillery must be prepared to support
the counterattack with the preponderance of available firepower.
The air defense of elements moving to the rear and of critical points
along the route is of primary consideration. It is essential that the
leading elements are not stopped and withdrawal routes are not
blocked.
109. Withdrawal From Action
a. A withdrawal from action is the operation by which all or
a part of a deployed force disengages from the enemy. The general
purpose of the withdrawal from action is to regain or preserve
freedom of action. It may be followed by a retirement, delaying
action, or defense of another position. Contact with the enemy is
maintained by reconnaissance or security forces. To avoid enemy
detection, withdrawals from action are accomplished at night or
during periods of poor visibility when possible.
b. For the employment of artillery with the security forces cover-
ing a withdrawal, see paragraph 73. The preponderance of the
artillery firepower is withdrawn with the supported force. Most of
the longer range artillery is moved rearward early. The appearance
of normal artillery fire is kept up by artillery with the security force
and by retaining units 'or portions of units composed of mixed
calibers and types in position to be withdrawn with the last ele-
ments. In the last phases of the withdrawal, artillery support will
be furnished by the artillery supporting the covering, general out-
post, or reconnaissance and security force in front of the next de-
fensive position. Artillery units engaged in the withdrawal are well
stocked with ammunition. Deceptive measures are employed during
the withdrawal.
110. Delaying Action
a. Delaying action is an operation in which space is traded for
time. It is usually employed by covering forces and other security
detachments and is executed most effectively by highly mobile units.
b. The use of, self-propelled artillery in the delaying action is
particularly effective. The employment of artillery in a delaying

76 AGO 2696B
action is similar to that with a rear guard (par 73). Artillery is
usually attached to the delaying forces.

111. Retirement
a. A retirement may be made to extend the distance from the
enemy, to reduce the support distance from other friendly forces,
to secure more favorable terrain, to conform to the disposition of
larger forces, or for employment in another area. When a with-
drawal from action precedes a retirement, the actual retirement
begins when organization of the march formations are completed.
b. Strong artillery support is provided the security forces. Suffi-
cient artillery strength will force early deployment of enemy forces
and permit the retention of flexibility by the security force. The
remainder of the artillery is dispersed in the column or columns to
support the main body or to furnish additional support for the
security force.

AGO 2696B 77
 CHAPTER 8
FIELD ARTILLERY IN SPECIAL OPERATIONS

Section I. GENERAL
112. Introduction
Special operations are those in which the terrain, weather, nature
of the operation, or a combination of these create the need for special
techniques, tactics, training, or equipment. Although treated as
special operations in this manual, such operations are considered
normal by troops operating in situations where the above conditions
prevail. In special operations the basic mission of artillery remains
unchanged, but the basic tactics and techniques may be modified.
Examples of special operations are: amphibious, mountain, jungle,
desert, deep snow, and extreme cold.
113. Plans and Estimates
The artillery commander at each echelon of command is responsi-
ble that a continuous estimate of the situation is made and that plans
are prepared to provide adequate fire support and air defense for the
maneuvering forces. Artillery commanders should seek to insure
that personnel on their own staffs are trained in the detailed plan-
ning of logistical support for special operations when such oper-
ations are contemplated.
a. Information and intelligence on which to base estimates will
often be acquired from agencies outside the control of the artillery.
In certain special operations it will be impossible to verify much of
the information received because of the remoteness or inaccessibility
of the area in which the operation is to Ibe conducted. Plans devel-
oped from estimates that are based on this type of information must
be extremely flexible for adjustment to unforeseeable situations in
the combat area.
b. Artillery plans for special operations will include considera-
tions of-
(1) Liaison and coordination with the appropriate arms and
services of all forces concerned. Close liaison and coordina-
tion must be maintained continuously throughout the plan-
ning of, preparation for, and execution of the operation.
(2) Acquisition, evaluation, and analysis of targets.

78 AGO 2696B
 (3) Coordination of fire support for the attack of targets by
Army, Navy, and Air Force.
(4) Amount and types of artillery and ammunition required
during various stages of the operations.
(5) Initial organization for combat and anticipated changes
during the course of the operation.
(6) Special equipment, clothing, and training required for
units engaging in the operation.
(7) Details of employment of artillery units, to include move-
ment into selected positions areas, registration and fire
plans, and survey requirements.
(8) Special communication equipment and procedures required
for the operation.
114. Training
a. Suitable training areas are normally provided for developing
individual and unit techniques required in special operations. The
training time necessary to attain adequate proficiency will vary from
a few days to several months, depending on the initial state of train-
ing of the units and the type of operation being planned.
b. Artillery training for special operations includes-
(1) The use of special equipment.
(2) Operation, care, and maintenance of equipment under con-
ditions of terrain and weather to be encountered.
(3) Special techniques required in applying the basic artillery
combat principles.
115. Liaison
a. Liaison assumes major importance in special operations. Nor-
mal command and staff liaison is effected. Liaison officers are em-
ployed between major elements involved in the operation. Normal
liaison between echelons within each element is expanded. Liaison
must be established early and maintained continuously to insure
smooth and efficient progress from one phase of planning and prepa-
ration to the next. Exchange of information and coordination of
plans are necessary to assure the commander that artillery is used
to the maximum advantage and that, in the case of joint operations,
provision is made for smooth transition of responsibility for fire
support coordination from one force to another.
b. Liaison requirements during the preparation for and conduct
of special operations of a joint nature may necessitate assigning
this function as an additional duty to staff members and lower
echelon commanders. This procedure, although placing a greater
AGO 2696B 79
burden on designated staff members and commanders, is desirable
because those involved in interservice liaison and coordination are
also directly involved in planning for their respective units.
116. Control
The type of operation and plan of maneuver will determine
whether control is centralized or decentralized initially. When com-
munication exists through which the division, corps, or force com-
mander can quickly control and mass the preponderance of the
artillery firepower, control is centralized. When such communica-
tion does not exist, control is decentralized. If decentralized initially,
,centralized control of artillery should be regained as quickly as
practicable in order that the force commander may employ mass
fires.
117. Meteorological Conditions
Extremes in weather necessitates greater corrections to the firing
data. Rapid changes in weather conditions will make meteorological
(met) data valid for only short periods of time. Under such condi-
tions, there is a need for more frequent registrations and new
meteorological data.

Section II. AMPHIBIOUS OPERATIONS

118. General
a. The complex nature of amphibious operations makes detailed
planning of paramount importance. An outstanding difference be-
tween amphibious operations and other operations is the ship-to-
shore movement. Centralized control is lost from the time of embar-
kation aboard ship until reorganization ashore. During this interval,
which may extend for several weeks, the actions of artillery units
embarked separately may often be governed exclusively by written
orders.
b. Because shipping availability frequently disrupts the unity of
artillery organizations, it is necessary that combat orders be written
in much more detail than orders for other types of operations. Con-
siderations for planning that are unique in amphibious operations
are discussed in paragraphs 119 through 123. For further details on
amphibious operations, see FM 6-101, FM 100-5, and 60-series field
manuals.

119. Initiation of Planning

a. The landing force commander begins planning on receipt of
the initial directive for the operation. The artillery commander
with the landing force insures that liaison is established immedi-

80 AGO 2696B
ately between all artillery echelons. As the broad plans for the
operation are formulated, the artillery commander of the landing
force issues artillery training directives to lower echelons to ready
them for combat along the lines of the proposed plan. On approval
of the fire support plan by the landing force commander, the neces-
sary instructions are prepared to put the plan into effect. The fire
support plan furnishes complete tactical and technical instructions
to the fire support means with the force.
b. In a corps operation, each division artillery commander and
his staff initiate planning on receipt of the corps warning order.
The details of the division fire support plan are completed as soon
as possible after the corps fire support plan is received.
c. The division fire support plan will be detailed. Artillery unit
plans will contain pertinent extracts from and references to the
division fire support plan and to the unit standing operating proce-
dure. Plans of battle group artillery and direct support artillery
are based on the division fire support plan and plans of supported
units.
120. Estimates
a. The landing force commander in preparing his estimate of
the situation requires his artillery commander to make an estimate
of the artillery requirements. The artillery commander's estimate
of requirements must be a continuous process in order that recom-
mendations and plans are kept abreast of the situation,
b. Normally, the initial operational directive indicates the means
to be placed at the disposal of the landing force commander. Based
on the number and size of the major units allocated and on the
terrain, mission, and enemy situation, the landing force artillery
commander makes an estimate of the artillery requirements to
support the force. 'This estimate is made initially to determine
the amount and type required of-
(1) Cannon and missile artillery.
(2) Ammunition.
(3) Special equipment.
(4) Shipping, landing craft, helicopters, and amphibian
vehicles.
c. In arriving at the estimate of artillery requirements, the fac-
tors listed below are given special consideration:
(1) Mission of the landing force. In an amphibious operation
the mission directly affects the shipping and resupply
requirements. The estimated duration of the operation
will have its greatest effect on the amount of ammunition
embarked. If the landing is to be followed by sustained
land operations beyond the beachhead, shipping alloca-
AGO 2696B 81
 tions must be adequate to support artillery ammunition
resupply and replacement requirements. For a short
operation, emphasis is placed on intial embarkation of
ammunition, whereas a long campaign necessitates pro-
vision for resupply of virtually all equipment in addition
to ammunition.
(2) Plan of maneuver of the landing force. Artillery require-
ments will vary with the plan of maneuver of the land-
ing force as well as with the relative -location of landing
beaches. The artillery support problem is much simpler
if the assault force lands on adjacent beaches in a single
sector. The plan of maneuver after seizure of the beach-
head strongly influences the amount of artillery required.
(3) Terrain, weather, and hydrographic characteristics. In
addition to the information normally required concerning
weather and terrain in the objective area, special informa-
tion is needed pertaining to beach area. Gradients and
widths of beaches, prevailing surf conditions, presence
of submerged barriers, texture of sand, and existence of
obstacles inland from the beach will affect the types and
amounts of ships, landing craft, amphibian vehicles, avia-
tion and special equipment required by artillery in getting
on and across the beaches.
(4) Enemy capabilities. Enemy capabilities, based on enemy
strength, composition, disposition, status of supply, rein-
forcements, morale, and training, must be considered and
evaluated in order to determine artillery requirements.
(5) Employment of other fire support means. Estimates of
artillery requirements should include consideration of
landing force weapons capable of augmenting and supple-
menting artillery. These include tanks; air defense artil-
lery; armored amphibians; naval gunfire; and tactical air
support. The required ammunition supply rate for all
these weapons must be considered concurrently with re-
supply difficulties in order to permit them to assume an
effective artillery role for the specified period of the
operation.
d. The armored amphibians are versatile landing force weapons
and can be suitably adapted to a field artillery role, particularly in
the initial stages of an amphibious operation. Initially, these ve-
hicles have the mission of furnishing support to the assault infantry
units and, at a designated time, may assume the field artillery role.
When planning for the employment of these weapons as field artil-
lery, the following should be considered:

82 AGO 2696B
 (1) Reorganization is necessary for proper employment as
field artillery. The existing infantry-artillery liaison sys-
tem is used and the observers of the artillery units fur-
nishing close support fires to the infantry act as observers
for the armored amphibians units. An additional consid-
eration is the requirement for communication equipment
to accomplish their field artillery role.
(2) In making an estimate of the number of amphibious weap-
ons needed, possible losses among the vehicles carrying
out their primary assault role must be considered. A
study of the beach defenses together with experience data
concerning losses should be used as the basis for estimat-
ing the number of armored amphibians required for utili-
zation in a field artillery mission.
e. Naval gunfire is suited to assume some of corps artillery's
missions of reinforcing the fires of division artillery and execution
of general support missions. When planning to employ naval gun-
fire, its shortcomings must be kept in mind. It cannot be readily
massed and its ability to deliver precision or close supporting fires
may be seriously handicapped during periods of reduced visibility.
If the operation progresses inland beyond the range of naval guns,
the estimate must provide for the landing of artillery of the proper
type to replace its fires.
f. The estimate of artillery requirements should be written, be-
cause of its operational importance and the desirability of keeping
a permanent record of the estimate for assistance in future plan-
ning. In determining the artillery requirements, the factors dis-
cussed above are considered in turn.

121. The Field Artillery Plan

a. Organization for Combat. The principles of organization for
combat that apply to land operations are applicable in amphibious
operations. Where combat elements of the division are to land at
the widely dispersed beaches, it may be necessary to attach some
division artillery to assault elements. Other divisional artillery
units should be given a mission of general support or reinforcing.
Centralized control of division artillery is accomplished as soon
as practicable after landing, to provide flexibility of fire support.
Corps artillery battalions should be either attached to division
initially or assigned the mission of reinforcing division artillery.
Amphibian vehicles to be used by the artillery for ship-to-shore
movement should be attached to the artillery for embarkation and
for the period necessary to land the artillery and its ammunition.
Armored amphibians may be assigned primary and secondary
AGO 2696B 83
missions as outlined in FM 17-34. When these units are attached
or placed under the operational control of division artillery, they
will normally be employed in company-sized units.
b. Organizationfor Embarkation.
(1) Division artillery should normally be organized for em-
barkation as a separate embarkation unit. Battle group
artillery will normally embark with the battle groups.
The following personnel are usually embarked as indi-
cated:
(a) Corps artillery and. division artillery commanders with
their fire support coordination personnel are normally
embarked with their respective commanding generals.
(b) Aerial observers and pilots are normally embarked in
the ships transporting the artillery observation aircraft.
(c) Forward observer and liaison parties are embarked with
their appropriate supported units.
(d) The remainder of the artillery should be embarked in
such a manner as to maintain the tactical unity of the
organizations.
(2) It has been found that the landing ship, tank (LST), is,
in most instances, the best ship for transporting artillery.
If it is impractical to beach LST's :in the target area,
medium and heavy artillery should be loaded in landing
craft, utility (LCU), or landing craft, mechanized MK
VIII (LCM (8)) and transported to the objective in land-
iing ships, dock (LSI)). A less desirable means of trans-
port is the attack (APA) or the attack cargo ships
(AKA).
c. Zones of Fire. Principles for establishing zones of fire in land
operations are applicable to amphibious operations. However, a
beachhead operation may be likened to a salient, in that the artil-
lery may have a field of fire greater than 3200 mils. It is very diffi-
cult in such a situation to mass the preponderance of the division
artillery firepower, and it may be several days before all artillery
units participating in a landing can prepare the necessary positions
to cover zones other than their normal zones of fire. With proper
planning and by assigning contingent zones of fire, it will usually
be possible to provide some massing of artillery fires. Assignment
of normal and contingent zones of fires should provide for massed
fires on suspected areas of enemy concentration. Zones are normally
assigned laterally; however, zones in depth may be assigned. In
determining the zones of fire, the artillery commander must con-
sider the necessity for covering dead spaces in the zones of action

84 AGO 2696B
of assault units. Units to the flank may be able to provide fire into
spaces defilated from other units. In such cases, crossfire must be
employed for maximum fire support. Minimum range considera-
tions may also dictate the use of crossfire in order to provide fire
support early in the operation, while the assault units are expanding
the beachhead. If crossfire is impractical, contingent zones of fire
may be assigned to assure coverage of defiladed areas.
d. Position Areas. The landing force artillery commander must
coordinate the assignment of position areas for the artillery units
with the force. Each lower echelon artillery commander must
further subdivide the assigned area for the units of his command.
A map and photo-reconnaissance will be made, considering-
(1) The ability of the artillery to cover the designated zones
of fire.
(2) The coordination of position areas with the location of
supply points, engineer construction, and routes of com-
munication.
(3) In the limited space of the beachhead, few good position
areas will be available and many desirable features such as
defilade, concealment, dispersion, and good supply roads
must be partially or completely sacrificed.
(4) Areas should be selected to provide the maximum possible
security for the comparatively immobile artillery. Medium
and heavier artillery must be located so that a temporary
change in lines will not expose it to enemy small arms fire.
(5) Positions should be chosen so as' to be accessible from the
proposed landing points.
e. Target Information. Artillery intelligence exploits every avail-
able source and agency to locate targets during the planning phase.
Aerial photographs, taken at frequent intervals, must be made and
studied by all echelons. Schedules of targets and priority for attack
are made by the fire support coordination agency. These schedules
are kept current by study of the latest aerial photographs and post
strike analysis reports of air strike and preliminary bombardment
by the advance force. At every opportunity, corrections are fur-
nished to those headquarters previously issued the schedules of tar-
gets.
f. Survey. Artillery intelligence exploits every possible source
and agency to determine the amount of survey control existing on
or near the beachhead. Each echelon of survey makes detailed
survey plans based on complete map and photographic reconnais-
sance. Survey sections are landed as early as possible in order to
insure maximum capability for massing fires.
AGO 2696B 85
 g. Communication.
(1) Radio. The control and coordination of artillery units of
the landing force during the ship-to-shore movement makes
it imperative that a communication plan meeting the re-
quirements of simplicity, reliability, and flexibility be
placed in effect. The artillery communication plan provides
for communication between the force artillery commander,
all subordinate elements, and the tactical logistics group,
whether they are afloat or ashore. It must provide com-
munication between the artillery commander and subordi-
nate elements; to battle group artillery or direct support
artillery; and to forward observers and liaison officers with
the infantry, whether afloat or ashore. Radio channels
assigned must be utilized to establish communication on the
simplest and most flexible net possible. A detailed radio
plan to include all frequencies of artillery units is usually
included as a tab to the artillery appendix to the fire sup-
port plan annex. During the planning phase, communica-
tion equipment that will be needed by other supporting
weapons to communicate with the artillery, must be de-
termined and requested from the supply source and these
units are included in the artillery communication plan.
(2) Wire. Complete wire communication is established at the
earliest practicable moment. Wire communication plans
are detailed and include the proposed line route maps of
all lower echelons. Decentralization of wire laying is
planned. Wire teams are briefed with maps and aerial
photographs on routes for laying of wire nets.
h. Ammunition Supply. The artillery commander of each echelon
must have a detailed ammunition plan. These plans should provide
for the rapid unloading of ammunition and its delivery to cannon
and'missile artillery units in firing positions ashore without confu-
sion as to type, size, type of fuzes, warheads, propellants, or powder
lot number. In addition, each plan provides for delivery of ammuni-
tion to firing units or supply points ashore with minimum rehandling
en route. It must be determined whether palletizing all or a portion
of the artillery ammunition will accelerate or delay its unloading.
Consideration should be given to the amount of organic transporta-
tion that will be landed and its availability for handling ammunition
ashore. Coordination of ammunition unloading with shore party
and control groups personnel is necessary to insure that ammunition-
carrying amphibious vehicles are not detained or diverted to other
use during the unloading phase. Consideration should be given to

86 AGO 2696B
 aerial delivery of ammunition supply directly to artillery positions
by helicopter to reduce beach congestion.
i. Time of Landing. The time of landing of the division and corps
artillery depends on such variables as availability of position areas,
need for artillery ashore, conditions of beach entrances and exits,
and the ability of the shore party to effect the landing. Battle group
artillery lands with the battle groups. Artillery plans usually state
that division and corps artillery units will land on order of the divi-
sion and corps commanders respectively. This requires the corps
artillery and division artillery commanders to make a continuous
study of the situation ashore and recommend the landing of elements
of their respective commands at the most propitious time. Their
study is based on all available information that is received on the
command ships and particularly on the reports of forward observers
and liaison officers ashore. The reconnaissance parties recommend
to the division artillery or corps artillery commander the proper
times for debarkation and landing of the remaining artillery ele-
ments.
j. Reconnaissance. During planning, a continuous reconnaissance
is made by utilizing all available maps and photographs, of the ob-
jective area. If practicable, an air or seaborne reconnaissance by
artillery officers is made within the beach area, and immediate ter-
rain inland to select the best landing beaches, position areas, routes,
and observation facilities. The plan for the ground reconnaissance
includes the size of the party and its composition. Appreciably
larger parties than are used in normal land warfare must be em-
ployed to facilitate the selection and preparation of position area for
the immediate entry into action of the units on landing. Sufficient
guides and communication, survey, fire direction, local security, and
pioneer personnel are included to insure thorough reconnaissance
and rapid preparation and occupation of positions. During planning,
arrangements should be made with the shore party for that unit to
reconnoiter for artillery landing points and artillery LST beaching
areas.
k. Ship-to-Shore Movement. Planning the ship-to-shore move-
ment resolves itself into determining the best procedure for landing
the artillery elements. The best procedure will be determined after
consideration of the factors listed above. This will mean provision
of boats or amphibious vehicles, depending on hydrographic condi-
tions, in sufficient quantity at the proper place and time. The de-
barkation schedule and the boat assignment tables will be set forth
in this plan.
1. Field Artillery Support of the Beach Assault. Artillery to sup-
AGO 2696B 87
 port the beach assault is employed when possible. Considerable ad-
vantage accrues to the infantry, when the artillery is set up to give
normal and continuous fire support throughout the beach assault.
Artillery can bring concentrations in close to the infantry, place
accurate destruction fire on targets susceptible to destruction, and
fire with accuracy at night and during periods of low visibility. Such
support is possible in atoll warfare, waterborne envelopments, and
where the geographical and tactical situation is favorable on large
islands or land masses. The artillery units may be emplaced on
islands adjacent to the assault beaches or on a peninsula or promon-
tory from which fire can be placed on the proposed landing beaches.
The plan must provide detailed plans for supporting fires. The pri-
mary concern is that the main landing area be within effective range
so that the artillery can support the landing area, and the continua-
tion of the attack ashore.

122. Rehearsal
Because of the many details involved, it is essential that the plans
for an amphibious operation be tested by rehearsal to insure that all
units are familiar with the embarkation and debarkation procedures
and techniques. The rehearsal should simulate as closely as possible
the conditions to be expected in the objective area, to include firing
of live ammunition by the units participating.

123. Movement to the Beach

In an amphibious operation, certain elements of an artillery unit
must land prior to their artillery weapons. These elements include
forward observers, liaison personnel, reconnaissance parties, and,
if possible, survey sections. A sequence of landing is essential to an
orderly and well-controlled landing, so that observers will be in
position, liaison will be functioning, reconnaissance and survey will
be complete to the extent possible, prior to the time the firing bat-
teries arrive on the beach.
a. The sequence of landing for a ship-to-shore movement complete
with all elements is given below..
(1) Forward observer parties are landed with each infantry
rifle company.
(2) An artillery liaison party lands with each battle group
command post. Forward observers and liaison officers keep
their artillery headquarters informed as to suitable landing
beaches, exits from the beach, the condition of position
areas, and the progress of elements ashore. Where division
artillery units are attached to the battle groups, provisions

88 AGO 2696B
 must be made for keeping these units informed of the situ-
ation, and for providing position areas ashore.
(3) The artillery reconnaissance parties are landed as early as
the situation permits, to reconnoiter the tentative position
areas and select final positions for the necessary installa-
tions. Being mindful of the time and space factors involved
and the situation ashore, the reconnaissance party com-
mander will recommend to the appropriate headquarters
the time to debark the remainder of the unit. Artillery
survey sections are landed as early as the situation permits
so that maximum survey of the position area can be ac-
complished prior to arrival of the firing batteries.
(4) After the reconnaissance has been completed and when the
beach areas are reasonably free from enemy fire, the ar-
tillery unit is landed on request of the reconnaissance com-
mander. On debarkation, the unit assembles in a rendez-
vous area afloat and then proceeds to its landing beach and
thence to its position area. The remainder of the unloading
activities are a ferrying operation of ammunition, other
supplies, and remaining personnel and equipment from the
ships to the artillery position areas.
(5) Reconnaissance parties of division artillery and corps ar-
tillery headquarters batteries are landed at about the same
time as those of their subordinate battalions. The re-
mainder of these batteries are landed on the request of the
reconnaissance party commander. The division artillery
executive officer is normally placed in charge of division
artillery operations ashore, until the division artillery com-
mander lands. The assistant corps artillery officer or corps
artillery executive officer is normally placed in charge of
corps artillery operations ashore, until the corps artillery
commander lands.
(6) The corps artillery and division artillery commanders and
fire support coordination center personnel move ashore
with the corps and division commanders as the command
post of the echelon is landed. Corps and division fire sup-
port coordination center personnel usually displace ashore
in two echelons, the second echelons, the second displaces
after the first is in operation ashore. Responsibility for
coordination of fire support passes from the naval attack
force to the landing force when the landing force com-
mander opens his command post ashore.
b. When the artillery is to be landed from beached LST's the
AGO 2696B 89
number of elements required to execute the ship-to-shore movement
will be reduced. LST's are moved to the inner LST area to launch
the reconnaissance parties. On request of the reconnaissance party
commander that the remainder of the unit be ordered ashore, if the
tactical situation on the beach permits, the beach is sufficiently clear
of enemy fire, and hydrographic conditions permit, the LST's will be
beached. LST's carrying medium and heavy artillery must be
beached for the debarkation of those units. Those LST's carrying
ammunition will also be beached to facilitate unloading.

Section III. AIRBORNE OPERATIONS

124. General
a. Airborne operations consist of the movement into an objective
area of combat forces with their logistical support forces for the
execution of tactical as well as strategic missions. These forces may
consist of airborne divisions, infantry divisions, air transportable
army missile commands and other air transportable units. Airborne
operations may be joint, using Air Force and/or U.S. Navy aircraft,
or unilateral using Army transport aircraft.
b. Light and medium artillery normally accompanies the assault
echelon of an airborne assault or the initial echelon of an air-landed
operation (FM 57-30). The division artillery of the airborne divi-
sion is trained and capable of entering combat entirely by parachute
assault with the exception of the materiel of the airborne division
missile battery which is air transportable in heavy transport air-
craft. The airborne division light artillery and the infantry division
light and medium artillery is air transportable in medium transport
aircraft (FM 57-30) (FM 57-100) and medium assault aircraft.
Light and medium nondivisional field artillery has the same air
transportability as infantry divisional units equipped with similar
materiel. Heavy cannon artillery and short range missile artillery
is air transportable in heavy transport aircraft (FM 57-30). Very
heavy cannon artillery and medium and long range missile artillery
is not air transportable without extensive disassembly. Light and
aeropack artillery are helicopter transportable as slung loads (dis-
assembly may or may not be required) on light transport helicopters
and as internal loads in medium transport helicopters. Artillery may
support airborne operations from outside the objective area by pro-
viding long-range nuclear or nonnuclear fires.
c. Special factors affecting artillery employment in an airborne
operation are-
(1) Mass preassault nuclear and/or nonnuclear bombardment
of enemy forces and installations in the objective area.

90 AGO 2696B
 (2) Other preassault nuclear and/or nonnuclear fires.
(3) Air defense of the mounting area.
(4) Capability of artillery to rig material for heavy drop para-
chute delivery; transport in aircraft or by helicopter.
(5) Refresher training in air transportation techniques.
(6) Application of rigid security to deny the enemy knowledge
of the planned operation and to preclude his use of nuclear
fires against the departure area prior to the operation
being launched.
(7) The possibility of creating obstacles or excessive contami-
nation in the objective area when nuclear fires are to be
employed in the area prior to landing.
(8) The impracticability of conducting ground reconnaissance
of position areas in the assault objective area, and determi-
nation of accurate declination constants, survey datum and
target intelligence from outside agencies.
(9) Essential communication between the airhead artillery
headquarters and the artillery headquarters of linkup or
supporting forces.
(10) Early establishment of centralized control of artillery at-
tached to battle groups for the assault phase.
(11) The need for a fire coordination line between airborne
assault and linkup forces to prevent fires or the effects of
fires of one force from interfering with the operation of
the other force.
125. Plans. and Estimates
Preliminary plans and estimates for airborne operations normally
originate at theater level (FM 57-30) with the tentative selection
of missions for the airborne units. Joint airborne force develops or
assigns to subordinate airborne task forces for development, detailed
operational plans for specific units. With announcement of the
complete planning directive, concurrent and continued planning is
undertaken at all echelons of the affected units. Techniques and pro-
cedures for airborne planning are contained in FM 57-30. It should
be emphasized that commanders and staffs at each level of command
are included in the planning sessions of the next higher head-
quarters. Similarly, it is desirable that artillery representatives be
included as members of the supported unit's planning groups. This
practice expedites concurrent planning at all echelons through per-
sonal coordination between successive headquarters. During the
early phases, plans must be developed from estimates that may be
based on assumptions and fragmentary information. All plans, how-
AGO 2696B 91
ever, are subject to change as more complete and reliable informa-
tion becomes available to the subordinate units.
126. Training
a. An analysis of the airborne force mission and the elements of
intelligence concerning the drop area and objective will indicate
the type of training that must be stressed. Special attention will
be devoted to training in loading aircraft (TM 57-210). The types
of aircraft that are to be allocated to each unit should be deter-
mined as early as possible. In the event the units are unfamiliar
with the types of aircraft included in the allocation, additional
training in loading will be necessary to insure efficient operation.
Training will include complete rehearsals and practice landing areas
should be selected which resemble the terrain of the actual landing
areas as closely as possible.
b. Although it is desirable to drop or air land the artillery in
areas already secured by the infantry, changing situations may
force artillery units to defend themselves in the drop or landing
zone or to fight their way to designated assembly or position areas.
These probabilities require that artillery units be trained in in-
fantry tactics, to include fire and maneuver and use of individual
weapons. In addition, the artillery must be trained for the follow-
ing eventualities:
(1) Decentralized control.
(2) Movement of pieces by hand.
(3) Communication by radio only.
(4) Defense of own position.
(5) Abnormally large sectors of fire.
(6) Enemy employment of nuclear weapons against the air-
head.
127. Intelligence
Information and intelligence concerning the landing area and
objective will be obtained from higher headquarters and from
agencies not under the control of the artillery (FM 57-30).
The artillery's principal means of supplementing target informa-
tion is through interpretation of aerial photographs. Therefore, it
is mandatory that complete aerial photographic coverage of the
area of operations be available to the artillery commander. In most
cases, photographic interpretation will be the only means of recon-
naissance, selection of positions and routes to assembly areas, and
identification and evaluation of targets.
128. Communication
Radio is the principal means of ground and air-ground communi-

92 AGO 2696B
cation (FM 57-30). Visual signals and prearranged codes can
supplement radio and will furnish quick and reliable communica-
tion, particularly between air and ground elements. Short wire
lines, laid quickly by hand, will facilitate fire direction. Wire laying
by light aircraft for longer distances may be used when feasible.
The communication plan must provide for expansion from decen-
tralized to centralized control and for communication with other
supporting arms and services. The correct use of appropriate signal
operations instructions (SOI) will reduce or eliminate much of the
communication difficulties and confusion characteristic of early
action in the area of operations.

129. Security
Surprise is a requisite for successful airborne operations. The
amount of information that can be divulged to the troops and the
time of its release are regulated at all echelons of command (FM
57-30). Usually, only a few key personnel are briefed prior to
being sealed in the marshalling areas. However, every man is
briefed concerning his role in the operation as soon as security
permits.

Section IV. OPERATIONS IN DEEP SNOW AND EXTREME COLD

130. General
Artillery units operating under conditions of extreme cold are
faced with two main problems; survival and mobility. The season
of the year, equipment, and training affect the survival problem.
Mobility is a greater problem during the warmer months than dur-
ing the colder months. Shelter and heat are major requirements
for troops operating in snow and extreme cold. Concentrations of
troop shelters make profitable nuclear targets. Where the enemy
employs nuclear weapons, casualties may be unusually high because
of direct effects of the explosion, secondary fires, and subsequent
exposure to extreme cold. Where the ground is frozen and no snow
cover exists, personnel are particularly vulnerable to nuclear attack.
For additional information on arctic operations, see FM 31-70,
FM 31-71, and FM 100-5.
131. Plans and Preparation
The types of artillery employed in cold weather operations vary
with the mission, terrain, and transportation available. Tables of
organization and equipment often must be augmented to accomplish
the assigned mission. Personnel and equipment must be made avail-
able well in advance of the operation so that training can be con-
ducted under conditions similar to those anticipated in the opera-
AGO 2696B 93
tion. Troops must be trained in their primary duty prior to enter-
ing into deep snow and extreme cold conditions. Winterization of
all items of equipment and installation of modification kits must
be performed prior to arrival in extremely cold areas.

132. Survey
Survey in snow and extreme cold is slow and tedious. Lenses
quickly become fogged. Computation of data must be done in heated
shelter. Control points are difficult to locate and will normally be
found only along well-established roads and railroads. Because of
deep snow, crevices, and other obstacles natural to arctic terrain
it is often simpler and faster to run a survey by following existing
roads and trails even though the cross-country distance is consider-
ably shorter.

133. Movement
The best time of the year for cross-country movement of heavy
vehicles is during the latter part of the freezeup period and the
first part of the winter period prior to the arrival of heavy snows.
The use of over-snow vehicles increases the mobility of the supply
and reconnaissance echelons of the artillery unit. Self-propelled
artillery weapons are more maneuverable than towed weapons;
however, the present self-propelled artillery is too heavy to allow
it to traverse deep snow (over 36 inches) in winter or muskeg in
summer. In the summer, movement on waterways such as lakes
and rivers is often possible.

134. Positions
a. Supply difficulties greatly influence the selection of position
areas. Positions are chosen for their tactical utility and for pro-
tection from the elements. Prior to occupation of a position, gun
pits, traffic lanes, and snow parapets should be prepared. Alternate
positions should be selected early and prepared as time permits.
Positions should be continuously improved with primary emphasis
on protection of personnel, equipment, and ammunition. Under
winter conditions it is impossible to dig in a position, but parapets
of snow and ice can be erected. In extreme cold, some type of shelter
for gun crews and other personnel will have to be erected and
arrangements made to relieve standby gun crews, guards, and out-
posts as often as every 15 minutes and allow them to return to
heated shelters. If the situation is static, group shelters are
erected for the men.
b. Camouflage discipline must be strictly enforced. Limited
camouflage can be obtained by application of paint. Tracks left in

94 AGO 2696B
snow cannot be effectively covered except by a fresh snowfall, and
even in the arctic there are many periods without snowfall. There-
fore, vehicles and troops must move only by designated trails and
roads to maintain camouflage.
135. Observation
a. During winter months, good observation is limited to a few
hours per day because of the short periods of daylight. Snow cover
reduces depth perception and obscures ground features and land-
marks. Glare of the sun upon the snow is intense and unless per-
sonnel are wearing dark glasses, continued exposure will cau l-
painful snow blindness. Amber filters for observing instruments
are required to reduce eye strain. Personnel operating observing
instruments must be relieved frequently or provided with shelter.
Both rotary and fixed-wing aircraft are excellent observation posts.
Forward observer teams should be well trained in the use of over-
snow equipment and in rock climbing technique.
b. Standard countermortar radar is extremely sensitive to low
temperatures. Heat must be applied to the console before it will
operate when temperatures are low. Heated shelter is required for
plotting personnel.
c. Sound recorders are not affected by low temperatures. Micro-
phones will function satisfactorily at low temperatures and under
4 to 6 inches of dry snow. Time required to establish a sound base
in arctic regions is normally 4 to 5 times that required under normal
conditions. Heated shelter is required for computers and plotters
when temperatures are below freezing or winds are high.

136. Field Artillery Fires

a. At times, especially during extremely cold periods and periods
when temperature changes are sudden, ballistics of weapons and
ammunition are affected. During extremely cold periods, a K factor
of 100 meters or more per thousand is not uncommon. Fuze quick
is ineffective in deep snow, as up to 90 percent of the fragmentation
is absorbed by the snow cover. An air burst with either a variable
time (VT) or mechanical time fuze is most effective against per-
sonnel in the open. Although VT fuzes are adversely affected by
conditions of extreme cold and there is an increase in the number
of malfunctions, it is one of the most effective fuzes for the arctic.
For information concerning the effests of nuclear weapons in snow,
see FM 101-31.
b. Deep snow has an adverse effect on chemical shells. The canis-
ter from a base ejection shell may be smothered in the snow. The
phosphorus shell produces the desired smoke but leaves phosphorus
AGO 2696B 95
particles buried in the snow that may remain a possible hazard
for several days.
c. During extreme cold, the rate of fire will be slow until weapons
have warmed; this is especially true for weapons having a hydro-
pneumatic type of recoil. Preparation of ammunition is slow when
temperatures are low because of the reduced efficiency of personnel.
d. Under conditions of extreme cold, heating blankets or other
means may be necessary to protect missile motors which use solid
propellants.
137. Communications
a. Radio is a rapid and useful means of communication in low
temperatures and areas covered with deep snow. However, dry and
wet cell batteries are seriously affected by extreme cold, both in
storage and operation. The efficiency and life of batteries decrease
in direct ratio to the cold.
b. Wire lines are normally restricted to existing trails and roads
and are vulnerable to all existing hazards. Poles are broken by
storms or unrooted by frost heaves. Wire laying by light aircraft
is economical and should be employed when practicable. It is usually
less time cons-. -ig to lay new lines than to attempt repair of old
ones. Difficul': ~ : ill be encountered when laying cold soaked tele-
phone wire as -. nsulation will break about every 4 inches; there-
fore, wire mug -:, stored in a warm place up to the time of laying.

Section V. MOUNTAIN OPERATIONS

138. General
The standard artillery units of corps and divisions can operate
successfully in mountains, although mountain warfare imposes
special problems concerning mobility, fires, and tactical employment
(FM 100-5). Personnel working in high altitudes perform their
duties with marked loss of efficiency because the decrease of oxygen
causes a need for more frequent rest periods. Commanders must
consider this additional time factor when planning for mountain
operations. This section summarizes those problems which require
particular attention in mountain operations.
139. Mobility
The movement of artillery, in general, is restricted to roads and
improved trails. This characteristic is emphasized in mountainous
areas because the scarcity of adequate roads and trails greatly
limits the choice of avenues of approach to the extent of canalizing
the movement of artillery. In addition, the winding roads and steep

96 AGO 2696B
slopes, characteristic in mountains, cause difficulties in turning
towed weapons and in getting them into and out of positions. Towed
light artillery can sometimes be manhandled under these conditions.
Aeropack artillery and artillery mortars can be moved on unim-
proved trails and thus can be used well forward and in positions
inaccessible to other artillery. Helicopters can be used to trans-
port towed light artillery and mortars into areas that have no road
access. Self-propelled artillery, although able to negotiate sharp
turns and capable of ascending and descending steep slopes is hamp-
ered by tracks slipping on icy roads. This disadvantage may be
partially overcome by the use of grousers.
140. Fires
a. Artillery fire is not as flexible in the mountains as in the plains,
because the choice of positions is restricted and masks are high.
Since howitzers and mortars have arching trajectories, they are
well adapted to mountain warfare. High-angle fire is employed
frequently to reach over masks, behind crests, and into deep valleys.
Adjustment of fires is difficult for targets located on peaks and
reverse slopes. Guns, with their flat trajectories, cannot be used
close to the front except in direct fire roles. Normally, guns are
employed far enough to the rear to take advantage of an increased
slope of fall. Some artillery may be moved forward to provide
long-range interdiction fires.
b. The great majority of artillery fires in the mountains must be
observed, especially close support and defensive fires. Observation
parties must be enlarged to include porters for carrying equipment.
Airplanes and helicopters increase the range of observation and
permit searching of spaces into which ground observers cannot see.
c. Unobserved fires are generally unreliable in the mountains.
Meteorological conditions change rapidly and registration correc-
tions for high-angle fire are valid for only short periods. Effective
transfer of fires is difficult, since altitudes within transfer limits
vary so greatly. It is often necessary to fire a check round in the
vicinity of a target before firing for effect on the target.

141. Ammunition
Impact high explosive is very effective in rocky ground, scattering
stones which in themselves become missiles. Experience has shown,
however, that protracted bombardment with impact explosives of
defensive positions in the mountains does not produce many enemy
casualties. Artillery fires may be used to initiate rock or snow slides
which block supply routes or engulf enemy defenses. VT and time
fuzes are effective, particularly against troops held in reserve on
reverse slopes. Smoke is used but is difficult to control because of
AGO 2696B 97
winds. For information concerning nuclear weapons effects in moun-
tains, see FM 101-31.
142. Targets and Target Location
a. Ideal artillery targets are passes and defiles which form bottle-
necks on the enemy supply route. Interdiction of such targets is
usual. Fire against targets on forward slopes and crests does not
often produce decisive results. Since the defender is usually dis-
persed in small groups, mass fire of many artillery weapons is un-
usual and expensive.
b. Direct observation by ground or aerial observers is the most
reliable means of locating targets in the mountains. Ground ob-
servers usually will be restricted in observation to the next hill mass.
Deep defilade makes it difficult to locate enemy weapons. Army
aviation should be used to search areas defiladed from ground obser-
vation. High-performance aircraft have difficulty in performing ob-
servation missions while avoiding mountain hazards. Much reliance
must be placed on shell reports because of the inefficiency of radar
and sound ranging in mountains. Radar surveillance is adversely
affected by ground clutter, and sound ranging is very difficult because
of echoes. Map and aerial photograph study often discloses probable
gun locations since the enemy is also restricted in his choice of gun
positions. Deep shadows and uneven illumination increase the diffi-
culty of interpreting aerial photographs.
143. Control
Terrain compartmentation often requires the use of multiple col-
umns in the attack. Small forces require artillery support and it
may be necessary to decentralize control of artillery to provide sup-
port for all columns. Portions of general support artillery units may
be detached in order to provide support for units that are separated
by terrain features. However, this tends toward decentralization,
and loss of control, and is not advisable unless absolutely necessary
to provide fire support.
144. Communication
Main wire routes are restricted to roads and are susceptible to
being interrunted by breaks caused by enemy artillery or friendly
traffic. Wire laid cross-country is difficult to maintain and is often
broken by rock and snow slides. The utilization of army aircraft to
lay and me i;'tain wire during mountain operations aids in solving
this problem. Radio communication is used extensively. Antennas
of very high frequency sets, either AM or FM, require careful selec-
tion of sites because of the line-of-sight characteristic of high fre-
quency radio waves.

98 AGO 2696B
 Section VI. JUNGLE OPERATIONS
145. General
Jungle combat is a special operation primarily because the in-
herent difficulties of terrain, climate, and visibility complicate the
vital problems of command, movement, supporting fires, supply, and
evacuation. Normal procedures must be modified, and specialized
equipment must be employed. Training for jungle operations must
include thorough indoctrination on life in the jungle, stressing limi-
tations, advantages, personal hygiene, and care of equipment.

146. Mobility
Jungle conditions impose greater restriction on the movement of
artillery than those encountered in any other type of operation.
Suitable roads and improved trails are almost nonexistent away
from settled areas. Roads must be constructed as the movement
progresses and must be maintained continuously as jungle growth
will quickly reclaim neglected or abandoned roadways. Special
equipment is needed to insure the rapid and efficient construction of
roads that will withstand tropical conditions. Equipment includes
tractors capable of traversing boggy and swampy terrain; bulldozers
for use in roadbuilding, and in preparing positions; and, in some
cases, boats for crossing rivers and flooded swamps and for dis-
placing along shorelines and rivers. The use of helicopters to move
artillery and resupply ammunition will materially assist the mobility
and flexibility of artillery in jungle operations.

147. Fire Capabilities and Limitations

a. As in mountain operations, the flexibility of artillery fire is
reduced by excessive mask, scarcity of suitable position areas, lack of
accurate maps, and restricted observation. High-angle fire will often
be required to clear tall masks surrounding positions. Direct fire
missions will frequently be required in defense of positions against
ground attack. Caves and pillbox emplacements can be destroyed by
field artillery missiles or by heavy and medium cannon artillery used
in a direct fire role. Chemical agents may be used for casualty effect
on these prepared positions and emplacements that are relatively
invulnerable to other weapons. Light artillery can be used to defoli-
ate trees and natural camouflage to expose hidden emplacements.
b. Adjustment of fire on close-in targets is often conducted by the
observer listening for the whistle and burst of the shell and bringing
the burst on the target by creeping. When this method of adjust-
ment is used, firing data must be carefully checked at the fire direc-
AGO 2696B 99
tion center. Observers with adjacent units can assist in the adjust-
ment by giving their sound sensings.
c. Under weather conditions normal to tropical areas, meteor-
ological data are not subject to rapid change and meteorological cor-
rections are reasonably accurate. However, maps are usually so
poor that map data are not accurate and vertical control is often
nonexistent. When artillery registrations are current, surprise fires
by transfers are effective.

148. Observation
a. Observation is extremely restricted by jungle growth and is
often limited to the immediate vicinity of the observer. Observer
parties must be well forward, often accompanying patrols, so that
they can use their limited observation to best advantage and be
aware of the location of forward elements. Parties must be large in
order to carry equipment, lay wire, and provide security. Check
points and known locations are rare and observers must use initia-
tive in devising methods of spotting fire. The observer must know
the slope of fall of the projectile and the height of the trees in the
vicinity of the target to avoid bursts over friendly troops. Often,
close-in targets can be engaged only through use of high-angle fire.
On rare occasions, some observation advantage is gained from high
trees and dominating terrain. Aerial observation from Army air-
craft is efficient for location of distant targets, such as enemy bat-
teries, troop concentrations, bivouacs, and boat movemenits; how-
ever, it is usually necessary for these planes to fly over enemy
territory to gain information of specific targets. Although observa-
tion from light planes may be limited, it is of great assistance to
the artillery and should be employed when possible.
b. Army aircraft can be profitably utilized in jungle warfare in
adjusting fires, locating friendly lines, spotting targets for air
strikes, delivering supplies to forward units, and acting as relay or
control in artillery radio nets. Observers in planes can work with
ground observers to adjust artillery. Often the ground observer can
hear but not see the rounds fall, although he can see the target, and
the air observer can see the rounds but knows only the approximate
location of the target. A combination of their sensings gives the fire
direction center a better picture of the adjustment and speeds up the
delivery of effective fire.
149. Survey
Survey is slow and difficult in the jungle. Control points are few
and maps are poor. Since the advance of the infantry is slow, ex-
tension of survey can usually keep up with forward elements. Target

100 AGO 2696B

area survey is usually very restricted, limiting most survey opera-
tions to position area connected by traverse to observers. Traverse
legs are necessarily short and vertical control is usually extremely
limited. Machete crews assist the survey teams.
150. Target Location
Patrols are the most lucrative source of target locations. Sounds,
flash, and radar may be used for locating targets, but they are
restricted by tree canopy, slow survey, poor trails for moving heavy
equipment, and necessity for clearing fields of operation for the
radar sets.
151. Positions
There are few good gun positions in the jungle. Usually areas
must be cleared with bulldozers and engineer power tools; this is
especially difficult because arcs of fire must be large. In clearing
fields of fire, care must be taken to disturb the tree pattern as little
as possible to avoid disclosing the position to enemy air. In wet
weather, roads into positions must be corduroyed and platforms
must be built under the weapons. Weapons should be closer together
than in open terrain in order to facilitate control and security.
152. Security
When the tactical situation permits, the battle group artillery
should be located within the area of the infantry reserve to take
advantage of the protection provided by the riflemen. The batteries
of a battalion-size unit should be close enough to each other to pro-
vide mutual protection. Each battery must establish a perimeter
defense, and the defense systems of the batteries must be integrated
into a battalion defense plan (FM 6-101). Security must be stressed
when displacing to new positions, since the jungle aids the enemy in
preparing an ambush. The march security precautions discussed in
FM 31-21 are applicable.
153. Ammunition
a. Supply and storage of ammunition is a critical problem in the
jungle and requires constant effort and attention on the part of all
concerned. Since many missions are fired close to friendly troops,
sorting of ammunition must be carefully supervised to insure uni-
form lots. Ammunition must be stored with care to protect it from
moisture, as exposed powder deteriorates rapidly in the humid
jungle.
b. White phosphorus smoke is very often used during adjustment
to facilitate observation and to mark targets for air strikes. Large-
scale smoke screens are not as common as in open terrain. Proximity
AGO 2696B 101
fuzed shell and time fire are generally ineffective because heavy
overhead growth reduces the fragmentation effect. Quick fuze pro-
duces tree bursts below the canopy and is especially effective in
clearing out snipers. Delay fuze, activated by the trees, usually gives
a ground burst similar to that obtained by quick fuze in open terrain.
The proportion of delay fuze to quick fuze is usually greater than
normal. Heavy undergrowth smothers the shell burst, limiting the
burst radius; therefore, artillery fire can be brought in closer to
friendly frontlines, though more ammunition must be used to obtain
good area coverage. Care must be taken to insure that tree bursts
do not occur over friendly troops. Chemical shell may be very effec-
tive because of the longer target exposure resulting from low wind
speeds and stable meteorological conditions under the jungle
canopy. For information concerning nuclear weapons effects in
forests, see FM 101-31.
154. Communication
Radios are used extensively by forward observers and survey
parties; relay stations, such as aircraft, are normally required. Tele-
phone lines are laid when possible, and forward switching centrals
are often installed. Wire laying by light aircraft is economical and
may be employed when possible. Wire crews must be protected while
laying and repairing wire, and extra men are required to act as
porters.

Section VII. DESERT OPERATIONS

155. General
The principal problems confronting artillery engaged in desert
warfare (FM 31-25) are observation and maintenance. Desert
terrain varies widely from low, flat sandy plains to high, rocky,
mountainous areas (FM 100-5). Temperatures also vary from
torrid to subzero according to the latitude and altitude. Arid cli-
mate, with lack of vegetation, is the only common characteristic.
Therefore, artillery tactics and plans must be varied to suit the
conditions of terrain and climate.
156. Observation
a. Ground observation of artillery fires in hot, flat, sandy desert
areas is very difficult because of heat waves, mirages, lack of ele-
vated positions, and frequent dust storms. Distances observed over
flat terrain are deceiving and are usually underestimated. The
absence of identifiable landmarks reduces the value of maps. Aerial
observation, while much better than ground observation, is still
hampered by the above factors.

102 AGO 2696B

 b. Observation in mountainous desert areas is subject to the limi-
tations discussed under mountain operations.
157. Maintenance
Frequent duststorms and sandstorms require a constant, inten-
sive maintenance program to protect all materiel from the abrasive
action of the fine dust and sand. Wear on gun tubes, slides, and
all bearing surfaces, and scouring and pitting of optical instruments
is greatly increased by exposure to these conditions.

'Section VIII. COMBAT IN TOWNS

158. General
As most towns are readily bypassed without materially affecting
the commander's plan of maneuver, only those which occupy key
terrain or those which constitute islands of resistance so large as
to be serious threats to future operations will normally be attacked.
Outlying areas where there are good fields of fire become the
enemy's first line of defense. This line may be fortified with any-
thing from hastily prepared positions to mutually supporting con-
crete emplacements. If these positions are penetrated, the defender
must fall back to the town.
159. Field Artillery Support of the Attack
a. After the town has been isolated, the artillery commander
must prepare to support the two remaining phases of the attack.
In supporting the second phase, which is to penetrate the defender's
initial position, artillery will be centralized and operate in a nor-
mal manner. The artillery commander must have artillery capable
of destroying fortifications and of sufficient range to neutralize
enemy artillery and provide interdiction fires. In the S;econd phase,
the forces holding the town will normally have good observation,
thus forcing friendly troops to displace at night or along concealed
routes. With the successful completion of this phase, the artillery
must displace quickly to support the third phase of the attack.
b. The third phase of the attack, which consists of the advance
through the town, will often require the force commander to decen-
tralize his command into small units which must attack through
separate corridors of the town. This action may necessitate some
decentralization of the artillery, particularly the direct fire ele-
ments. Observation is usually poor and the artillery must depend
almost entirely on forward observers for conduct of fire. Direct
fire artillery should be self-propelled and of sufficient firepower to
destroy designated buildings. Artillery providing close support to
attacking troops must be capable of high-angle fire and, if opposing
AGO 2696B 103
forces are in close proximity, it; may be necessary to withdraw the
attacking forces while artillery concentrations are being fired. The
greater part of indirect fires, however, will be precision fires.
c. Once a built-up area has been hit by nuclear weapons it may
become a formidable obstacle and may provide an excellent defen-
sive area. The plan for employment of nuclear weapons against a
town should provide for leaving relatively clear passage through
some portion of the town. The enemy must be prevented from re-
occupying the town after it has been attacked by nuclear weapons.
For further information concerning nuclear weapons effects against
built-up areas, see FM 101-31.

160. Field Artillery support of the Defense

In the defense of towns, artillery is so emplaced that it can fire
against any attempted envelopment of the town or against hostile
forces within range that are attempting to bypass the town. The
supporting artillery must also be able to deliver the preponderance
of its firepower on the critical avenues of approach and to fire final
protective fires in the form of barrages covering close-in approaches,
such as streets, open areas, and areas containing lightly constructed
buildings. If the enemy makes a penetration, the artillery should
be able to deliver the preponderance of its firepower against the
penetration, and support the counterattack.

Section IX. FIELD ARTILLERY IN RIVER CROSSINGS

161. General
Wide unfordable rivers exercise considerable influence on mili-
tary operations because they impose restrictions on movement and
maneuver. They constitute obstacles to attack and afford natural
lines of resistance for defense. For details of river crossing opera-
tions, see FM 31-60.

162. Support of the Crossing

a. The crossing is supported. from positions as far forward as
secrecy permits. These positions are occupied under cover at dark-
ness or during periods of low visibility at the latest possible time
prior to the attack. When the defender has the capability of em-
ploying nuclear weapons, the attacker must avoid forming large
vulnerable targets on either side of the river. Movements from
rear assembly areas are continuous through the crossing sites.
b. Battle group artillery or direct support artillery may begin
to displace to the far bank when the first phase objectives have
been seized. These units frequently will cross the river on DUKW's

104 AGO 2696B

and rafts. Battle group artillery may cross the river in personnel
carriers. Forward observers and liaison personnel will cross with
the assault elements. The use of helicopters to move light artillery
across the river will materially reduce congestion at crossing sites.
This is of particular importance when the enemy has an atomic
capability. Resupply of ammunition may also be accomplished by
helicopter.
,c. General support artillery units must be prepared to provide
close support for the assaulting troops during the displacement of
close support artillery units.
d. The major part of the artillery crosses the river when it is
determined that continuous effective support can be delivered from
the new positions.
e. Fire support planning must be detailed and coordinated at all
echelons. Centralized controlof artillery is maintained where possi-
ble to provide fire when and where needed. Where crossings are
made on a front sufficiently broad to preclude centralized control
of artillery during the crossing, centralized control is regained as
early as practicable following the crossing. Where necessary, tar-
gets for nuclear weapons may be selected to insure crossing the
obstacle rather than to inflict maximum initial damage on the
enemy. Properly employed, nuclear weapons may eliminate effec-
tive small arms fire on the crossing site and may also eliminate
effective artillery fire from the crossing site by destroying or neu-
tralizing the enemy artillery or its observation. Thus employment
of nuclear weapons will speed up the timing of the operation by
causing some phases to merge with others or to be eliminated
completely; e.g., phase I, the removal of effective direct small arms
fire from the crossing sites, may be merged with phase II, the denial
of ground observed artillery fire on the sites. In river crossing
operations, consideration should be given to maintaining a reserve
of nuclear weapons for employment after the assault crossing
against the mobile counterattacking forces of the defender. The
use of air transported troops to lend flexibility and speed to cross-
ing operations requires close and detailed coordination of support-
ing fires.
f. When nuclear weapons are employed, initial objections are
normally deeper than when only nonnuclear weapons are employed.
These objectives, which may include objectives for airborne assault,
are selected to isolate the defending forces, destroy them in place
with nuclear weapons and offensive maneuver, or force them out
of position. Rapid exploitation follows the assault across the river
obstacle.
AGO 2696B 105
 g. Prior to, during, or immediately after the crossing, artillery
may be.required to-
(1) Furnish illumination either with searchlight or illuminat-
ing shells.
(2) Smoke enemy observation.
(3) Screen movement and crossing noises of the attack force
by fire.
(4) Support feints and demonstrations.
163. Field Artillery Support of a Defense at a River Line
A river obstacle allows the assignment of extremely wide front-
ages. To effectively organize the defense, the unit is assigned great
depth in which to accomplish its mission, giving it space for con-
siderable movement and dispersion.
a. A river obstacle favors the mobile defense. The defense is
organized depending upon the terrain, enemy situation, and forces
available. Artillery is employed to cover all probable crossing sites.
It is also disposed in depth, capable of massing fires on critical
points in the enemy's rear area. Elements of the artillery may be
disposed on the far shore in support of security forces. Of particu-
lar importance is the necessity for coordination to insure the with-
drawal of the artillery with the security forces across the river.
Emphasis is placed on fires which assist in canalizing the enemy,
stall his attack astride the river, and destroy him by fire and coun-
terattack. When the enemy's main crossing is disclosed, artillery
must be prepared to support the counterattack with the bulk of its
fires. Emphasis is placed on maintenance of probable routes of
displacement and in preparation of fire plans and supplementary
positions to support all counterattack plans.
b. The considerations in the employment of artillery for the
position defense are similar to those described in a above. Em-
phasis is placed on preventing the enemy crossing of the river.
c. When the number of suitable crossing sites available to the
enemy is limited, the nuclear fire plan includes provisions for the
disruption of the approaches to the crossing sites on either or both
sides of the river depending on the defensive maneuver plan. A
target analysis is made of the area within the defensive position
for th possible elimination of enemy airheads and bridgeheads by
using nuclear fires. Nuclear fires against the enemy on the friendly
side of the river are exploited by mobile reserves. Nuclear fires on
the enemy side of the river line should be exploited with other artil-
lery fire.

106 AGO 2696B

 Section X. COASTAL FRONTIER DEFENSE
164. General
Coastal frontier defense includes all measures taken by the armed
forces to provide protection against any form of attack at or near
the shoreline and within the zone immediately to the rear. The
basic consideration of the defending force is the defeat and destruc-
tion of the invading force before it lands or while it is attempting
to gain a beachhead. The coastal frontier defense mission of the
Navy is to meet and defeat the enemy while he is still at sea; of
the Air Force to counter enemy air action and carry the defensive
to the enemy both at sea and on the land; of the Army to meet and
defeat the enemy prior to landing or after he has landed. When
artillery is employed in coastal frontier defense it will usually be
as a part of a force of all arms, although it is possible that it may
be required to act alone or in conjuction with air or naval forces.
165. Field Artillery Employment
Artillery as a member of a combined arms force will be primarily
concerned with destroying hostile landing waves before they can
gain a lodgment on the shore and supporting ground troops in the
reduction of any beachhead which may be established. Field artil-
lery gunnery techniques are described in FM 6-40 and other 6-series
manuals. Considerations incident to attack of waterborne targets
are described in FM 44-4.

AGO 2696B 107

 CHAPTER 9
TARGET INTELLIGENCE AND ANALYSIS

Section I. GENERAL
166. Scope
This chapter outlines the intelligence procedures which are used
for the location, confirmation, and analysis of surface targets to
be attacked by all available means of fire support. Section II deals
with target intelligence. Section III describes the functions and
use of target intelligence in target analysis. See FM 30-5 for a
discussion of combat intelligence. Artillery intelligence is a part
of combat intelligence.
167. Use of Field Artillery Agencies
Artillery intelligence agencies are part of the intelligence gather-
ing agencies of the force as a whole. The force G2 in furtherance
of his collection plan takes maximum advantage of artillery agen-
cies in producing combat intelligence. The discharge of this addi-
tional responsibility is enhanced by the artillery's efficient cdmmuni-
cation system, special observation equipment, and ability to coor-
dinate large numbers of observers.

Section II. TARGET INTELLIGENCE

168. General
a. Target intelligence is knowledge acquired by the collection and
processing of all available information pertaining to possible or
actual targets. Artillery intelligence agencies are primarily con-
cerned with the timely recognition, accurate determination of char-
acteristics, and prompt reporting of targets whose destruction or
neutralization will assist the supported unit in accomplishing its
mission. Artillery intelligence agencies are also concerned with
surveillance of targets both before and after their attack by fire
and for collecting and reporting all information of military signifi-
cance.
b. Full exploitation of artillery firepower available to the com-
mander depends on the volume,, coverage, and effective use of avail-
able target information and intelligence. The continuous inter-
change of all information among representatives of fire support

108 AGO 2696B

agencies contributes to the fulfillment of common intelligence needs
and to the end result of target intelligence: delivery of effective fire
against the enemy.
c. Target intelligence begins with target acquisition, which is
the detection, identification (including friend or foe) and three-
dimensional location of a target in relation to a known control point
or datum, and with sufficient accuracy and detail to permit the
effective employment of appropriate weapons by the commander.
169. Effect of Nuclear Weapons on Target Intelligence
a. The target collection effort must be aggressive and continuous
to exploit weapons capabilities. Communication facilities must be
efficiently utilized to insure that target information is disseminated
in the shortest possible time.
b. The employment of artillery, including artillery with a nuclear
capability, requires consideration of the nature, characteristics,
and capabilities of the target to determine suitability for attack.
c. Information leading to the development of nuclear targets nor-
mally will be derived from the evaluated summation of many re-
ports.
d. Concentration of enemy personnel and materiel will probably
be of extremely short duration. To engage these targets before they
disperse, target information must be processed rapidly.
170. Post Strike Analysis
a. After the attack of a target, an analysis is made to determine
the accuracy and effectiveness of the fire. The following should be
investigated:
(1) Number of casualties.
(2) Amount of damage.
(3) Effect against enemy fortifications.
(4) Effectiveness of enemy countermeasures.
(5) The effect of fires on enemy morale and efficiency.
(6) Effect on enemy tactics.
(7) Verification, if possible, of the accuracy of the location of
enemy installations attacked.
(8) Effect of fires on-enemy reinforcement and resupply capa-
bilities.
b. Information for post strike analysis can be obtained from
the following:
(1) Agencies that obtained the target information initially.
(2) Photographic interpretation.
AGO 2696B 109
 (3) Inspection of target area after capture.
(4) Interrogation of prisoner of war reports.
(5) Captured documents, reports, diaries, and letters.
(6) Friendly civilian personnel who observed the result of fire.
(7) Clandestine means.
(8) Communications and electronic intelligence means.
c. Post strike analysis is a responsibility of the headquarters
ordering the fires. Post strike analyses may be made by any fire
support agency capable of obtaining the necessary information. The
fire support plan may contain finstructions for post strike analysis.
d. Artillery agencies make the post strike analyses report and
forward them to the artillery S2. Pertinent data from these reports
are entered on appropriate file cards. This data is analyzed to
determine the comparative effectiveness of artillery weapons, tech-
niques, and ammunition in the attack of specific types of targets.
The artillery commander uses pertinent information regarding
enemy doctrine and practices to increase the effectiveness of
artillery fire. All pertinent information is disseminated to higher,
lower, and adjacent echelons.
e. Artillery agencies are responsible for predicting radiological
fallout from friendly nuclear weapons. Chemical corps agencies are
responsible for predicting fallout from enemy weapons, and for
radiological survey of both eneray and friendly weapons.

171. Counterfire, Countermortar, and Counterbattery Responsibili-

ties
a. Battle group artillery plays an important part in counterfire
operations (FM 7-21). The battle group counterfire agency nor-
mally operates under the centralized control of the battle group
artillery commander who is responsible for the coordination and
direction of its operations.
b. Division artillery has responsibility for the supervision of
countermortar functions within the division (pars. 197-201). Mor-
tars, because of their mobility and relatively short range, frequently
are fired from temporary positions and then displaced rapidly to
avoid counterfire. Speed in obtaining, evaluating, and disseminating
countermortar information must be emphasized.
c. Corps artillery has responsibility for counterbattery functions
within the corps sector (pars. 192-196). A clear distinction be-
tween countermortar and counterbattery functions is not always
possible or desirable. Therefore, the most appropriate means avail-
able must be utilized to locate and attack the weapon concerned.

110 AGO 2696B

 d. Army artillery has responsibility for obtaining information
on enemy long-range field artillery positions beyond the capability
of the corps. Normally, friendly long-range field artillery units are
retained under field army control which gives that echelon the
capability of engaging these targets. Information on enemy long-
range weapons will be sought vigorously. Although all sources of
information must be fully exploited, visual, electronic, and photo air
reconnaissance will normally be required to give current informa-
tion of the locations of these installations.
172. Counterflak
a. Artillery intelligence agencies continuously seek information
on the location of hostile air defense artillery which can interfere
with close air support operations. Enemy air defense weapons can
be effectively neutralized during air strikes and losses or damage
to friendly aircraft minimized by accurately placed artillery fire.
b. Air Force intelligence agencies in conjunction with Army
intelligence agencies insure disseminaton of the latest target infor-
mation on enemy air defense weapons. Corps artillery S2's normally
publish and maintain a current counterflak list, when the situation
permits. Division artillery S2's publish extracts from this list to
facilitate flak suppression fires of the division artillery.
173. Collection of Target Information
Target information is collected by continuous planning and
systematic direction of the collection efforts. Effective utilization
of the sources and agencies available for target information de-
pends on complete knowledge by the artillery S2 of their capabilities
and limitations.
a. Collection Plan. A formal collection plan (FM 30-5) is pre-
pared by the force G2 (S2). The artillery S2 more frequently will
limit his collection plan to a mental analysis of the information
desired and then assign collection agencies to procure the informa-
tion. The observation plan and instructions for coordinating ob-
servation will provide for full utilization of all collection agencies.
The observation plan and instructions for coordination of observa-
tion may be issued orally, in written fragmentary form, in the force
operation order, in the intelligence annex, or in the reconnaissance
and observation appendix to the intelligence annex.
b. Sources and Agencies. A source is the actual origin from which
information is obtained. For a complete discussion of intelligence
sources and agencies, see FM 30-5. Intelligence sources from which
target information is obtained include enemy military personnel,
enemy documents, enemy materiel, enemy signal communications,
AGO 2696B 111
refugees, aerial photographs, and tactical studies. The following
agencies are particularly useful in collecting target information:
(1) Observation battalion (flash, sound, and radar ranging).
(2) Forward observers and observation posts.
(3) Army aviation (visual observation and limited photo-
graphic coverage).
(4) Shelling reports and crater analysis. Chapter 10 contains
detailed instructions on shell and crater analysis reports.
(5) Tactical air reconnaissance.
(a) Visual reconnaissance.
(b) Photographic and electronic coverage of areas and
Largets.
(c) Weather reconnaissance.
(6) Patrols and reconnaissance personnel.
(7) Photographic interpretation. The importance of rapid
photographic interpretation must be emphasized. The film
must be processed, edited, and interpreted and informa-
tion must be disseminated with all speed possible. De-
tailed photographic interpretation to include comparative
interpretation is an efficient means of locating targets at
all levels.
(8) Prisoner of war interrogation personnel.
(9) Clandestine agencies requested through the force G2.
(10) United States Army Security Agency Units.

174. Processing of Target Information

a. Processing is the means by which information is transformed
into intelligence. A complete discussion of the intelligence process
is found in FM 30-5. The sequence for processing information for
combat intelligence is applicable for processing information for
artillery intelligence. The three basic elements are recording,
evaluation, and interpretation.
b. Recording is the systematic arrangement of information to
facilitate its processing into intelligence. The recording function
supports evaluation and interpretation because these are the de-
cisive actions. Unless recording of information is accomplished
quickly and economically, speedy evaluation and interpretation can-
not be effected and the timeliness of intelligence suffers. Proce-
dures used in recording should be simple. For recording techniques,
see chapter 10.
c. Evaluation is the appraisal of an item of information to deter-
mine its pertinence, reliability,. and accuracy.
(1) Pertinence. Information is examined immediately after

112 AGO 2696B

 its receipt by the S2 to determine its relevancy and value.
Is it information of the enemy or of the characteristics of
the area of operations? Is it information of value to the
unit or to higher, lower, or adjacent units? Is it needed
immediately and, if so, by whom? Is it of future value?
These questions should be answered in estimating the
pertinence of the information.
(2) Reliability. The reliability of the source and of the col-
lecting agency must be examined before the information
can be evaluated. To what extent is the source or agency
accurate and reliable? Has the agency sufficient training,
experience, and ability to report accurately the informa-
tion in question? Under conditions existing at the time
(time and space, means employed, visibility, etc.), could
the information have been obtained? These questions
should be answered in estimating reliability of the source
and the collecting agency.
(3) Accuracy. The accuracy of the information must be exam-
ined separately from the reliability of the source or col-
lecting agency. Is the purported fact or event at all pos-
sible? Does it agree or disagree with known facts? Can
the information be confirmed or corroborated from a dif-
ferent source or agency? If the information is at variance
with other information and the'conflicting items cannot
be reconciled, which information is more likely to be cor-
rect? These questions should be answered in estimating
the accuracy of each item of information.
d. Interpretation is the final step in processing. The evaluated
information is analyzed to determine its significance with respect
to information or intelligence on hand and conclusions drawn there-
from. Correct interpretation will lead to accurate conclusions con-
cerning target information. Proper interpretation of target infor-
mation is essential to the employment of effective fire support.
Interpretation of target information is particularly significant when
nuclear fire is contemplated or employed.
175. Dissemination and Use of Field Artillery Intelligence
The artillery intelligence cycle is culminated when the artillery
intelligence is disseminated and put to use. Since artillery intelli-
gence is a part of combat intelligence, the intelligence must be for-
warded promptly to the appropriate G2.
a. Dissemination. Disseminated information should be perti-
nent, concise, clear, accurate, and timely. The recipient should not
be burdened with unnecessary or irrelevant details or with
illogically presented information.
AGO 2696B 113
 (1) Target intelligence is disseminated by most suitable means
such as radio, wire., written messages, conferences, or
intelligence documents.
(2) Representatives of fire support agencies and of the sup-
ported unit keep informed of and transmit all available
information to their parent units.
b. Intelligence Documents.. Intelligence documents commonly
used for disseminating combat intelligence and information are
discussed in FM 30-5. Target information may also be disseminated
by the following means:
(1) Hostile battery, mortar, and flak lists. Lists of hostile
locations are compiled for all interested agencies. Con-
firmed and suspect locations are listed separately. The
lists are numbered, {dated, and published at the direction
of the appropriate commander and are kept current by
publishing additions,, deletions, or changes in paragraph
5 of the artillery intelligence bulletin or in annexes to the
periodic intelligence report of the supported force.
(2) Artillery intelligence and information bulletins (app. II).
Artillery intelligence bulletins may be published at the
direction of the corps artillery and division artillery com-
manders. Artillery information bulletins are published
by the artillery commander (officer) at army or theater
army levels.
(3) Target summaries (app. II). Target summaries consist of
hostile battery, mortar and flak lists, and general target
locations compiled from latest available information. Com-
plete target summaries are numbered, dated, and pub-
lished at the direction of the appropriate commander.
They are kept up to date by publishing additions, dele-
tions, and changes in paragraph 5 of the artillery intelli-
gence bulletin or in annexes to the periodic intelligence
report of the supported force. The target summary may
indicate a recommended priority for each target (par.
179).
(4) Artillery periodic intelligence report (app. II). The artil-
lery periodic intelligence reports (corps and army artil-
lery only) summarize the enemy capabilities, situation,
operations, and weather and terrain. A separate artillery
periodic intelligence report may be prepared, or the infor-
mation normally contained therein may be incorporated
in the periodic intelligence report of the supported force.
The period of time t;o be covered in the report is specified
by higher headquarters or by the appropriate commander

114 AGO 2696B

 in the absence of instructions. Normally the report covers
a 24-hour period.
c. Use of Artillery Intelligence.
(1) Force G2. The force G2 makes use of artillery intelli-
gence in determining relative probability of adoption of
enemy capabilities. Location, disposition, caliber, and ac-
tivity of hostile artillery or mortars furnish indications of
enemy action which, when analyzed with respect to other
information, assist in estimating enemy capabilities.
(2) Artillery use. Artillery intelligence is used-
(a) To assist in the destruction or neutralization of located
targets.
(b) As a factor in allocation of artillery to lower echelons.
(c) As a factor in requesting additional artillery from
higher headquarters.
(d) To assist the commander in the disposition of friendly
artillery and organization for combat.
(e) As a vital consideration, along with the mission of the
force, in determining the available supply rate of am-
munition for subordinate artillery echelons.
(f) To assist commanders in determining the required sup-
ply rate to be requested from higher headquarters for
planned operations.
(g) In planning future operations.

Section III. TARGET ANALYSIS

176. General
a. Target analysis is the examination of potential surface tar-
gets to determine their military importance, their relative priority
for attack, and the capabilities of available weapons for such attack.
This analysis is performed for targets of opportunity as well as
for targets for which prearranged fires have been planned. The
length of time and amount of detail involved in making a target
analysis depends on the amount of information available concern-
ing the target, availability of means of attack, the degree of co-
ordination required, and the urgency for attack of the target. The
analysis may consist of a rapid, mental calculation at lower artil-
lery echelons or a detailed written analysis at division, corps, or
army artillery. Target analysis will assist the commander in
delivering effective fires.
b. Normally, written target analyses will be made only when
time permits and the analyses are needed in connection with the
use of nuclear weapons or in connection with detailed staff planning
for future operations. Attack of heavily fortified positions, deliber-
AGO 2696B 115
ate river crossings, and major amphibious landings and airborne
assaults normally require detailed target analyses during the
planning phase of the operation.
177. Target Analysis Process
a. A precise form for making target analysis such as a checklist
or similar document, may be used. The details of target analysis,
although generally the same at all echelons, vary widely in magni-
tude. The factors to be considered in analysis are shown in figure 9.

Mission and plan of Analysis of target

the force or characteristics, and
supported unit. effect of weather
and terrain.

Tentative
decision
1as to
rd
- effects the I
ldesired.

It it Is determined It
Iu the
the other
ether efec
effects
that no available which could result
means is suitable, from the fires
the tentative satf the available
decis Dtermination
is en ar
revised and the means are
available means nacceptble, the
selection process capable of tentative decision
is repeated. achieving the is revised and
desired effects.electi
process is
repeated.

Determination of other effects

(unwanted distruction or
peril to troops) which I_
could result from use of
each available means.

Comparison of the
suitable available
means to determine
the best means,
method of attack,
and time of attach

Final recommendation or
decision as to effttects
desired, ammunition
expenditure, means, method
and time of attack.

Figure 9. Process of target analysis.

116 AGO 2696B

 b. When it appears, after a brief analysis, that a target may be
suitable for attack by nuclear means, the FSCC or comparable fire
support coordination agency is notified.
c. A form for use in making a target analysis and a procedure for
special weapons target analysis are shown in appendix II.
178. Mission of the Supported Force
a. The concept of operation as announced by the commander to
accomplish the mission becomes the basic consideration in making
a target analysis. Supporting firepower is disposed to aid the accom-
plishment of the mission. The nature and characteristics of the
target do not in themselves dictate the method of attack. The im-
portance of the target, as measured by its capability to influence
the operation, is an important consideration.
b. Because of the potential effect of nuclear firepower, the in-
tegration of nuclear fires with the scheme of maneuver or a plan of
defense is of great importance. When possible, the tactical ad-
vantage gained through the use of nuclear weapons should be fully
and expeditiously exploited through maneuver. For this reason, the
force commander may desire to make the decision concerning the
employment of nuclear weapons, or he may delegate all or part
of this authority to the fire support coordinator and major sub-
ordinate commanders. When time permits, a detailed target
analysis is made prior to the employment of nuclear weapons.
c. Standing operating procedures and policies of the appropriate
commander -must be considered early in making a target analysis.
These policies must be well known to all fire support agencies to
insure rapid, expeditious engagement of targets.

179. Target Characteristics and Effect of Weather and Terrain

a. General. Characteristics of the target include all features
of the target and target area that may influence the decision to
attack it. Targets about which little is known may, and often should
be, taken under fire. However, the more that is known about a
target, the greater is the likelihood that it will be suitably attacked.
Full use of available target intelligence should be made when
conducting target analyses. The artillery S2 is responsible for
ascertaining the target characteristics and recommending to the
fire support coordinator the relative priority of attack for each
target. The principal target characteristics to be considered are
listed below:
(1) Nature of the target.
(a) Composition.
(b) Size and shape.
AGO 2696B 117
 (c) Vulnerability.
(d) Mobility.
(e) Recuperability.
(2) Location of the target. The location of the target may
indicate or eliminate a particular means of delivery. The
proximity of the target to friendly troops, and to enemy
installations protected by the Geneva Convention should
be considered. The probable accuracy of the target
location should be analyzed.
b. Terrain and Weather.
(1) Terrain. Terrain in the target area has a direct bearing
on the vulnerability of the target. Rugged terrain affords
considerable natural cover and makes target location diffi-
cult. Targets that are well defiladed by terrain sometimes
can only be reached by high-angle fire or by aircraft. Cer-
tain terrain provides complete defilade from some angles
of approach but not; from others, thereby influencing the
selection of a means of attack and frequently necessitating
the movement of a weapon to a position from which it can
deliver effective fire. The nature of the vegetation in the
target area should be considered in the selection of am-
munition. Information as to the relief, surface soil condi-
tions, and vegetation in the target area is essential when
considering, nuclear attack. Uneven terrain frequently
limits surveillance of fires to aerial observation and in
some instances completely prevents observation of fires.
Uneven terrain limits sound ranging coverage, reduces
radar coverage, and may reduce the effect of nuclear
weapons.
(2) Weather. Weather greatly affects the capability of attack
by air and to a lesser degree by naval gunfire and artillery.
It is of special importance in evaluating a target for
nuclear or chemical attack. Information as to visibility
at ground level cloud cover, and ceiling is a minimum
requirement.
(3) Joint effects. Terrain and weather jointly affect visibility
of the target and may require further study to determine
a suitable means and method of attack.
c. Target Capabilities. Target capability is the ability, actual or
potential, of a target to influence the accomplishment of the sup-
ported unit's mission. An estimate is made as to the time a target
can exercise its capability. Target capability is an important con-
sideration in determining the priority assigned to the attack of a
target and the weight of fire delivered on a target. The time of

118 AGO 2696B

attack, the effect desired, and the selection of means to be used are
influenced by considering target capabilities.
(1) Priorityfor attack. There is rarely sufficient fire support
to attack simultaneously all targets that it may be desir-
able to engage. Accordingly, the attack of these targets
is usually spread over a period of time. On occasion,
owing to such factors as ammunition shortage or inade-
quacy of available delivery means, it may not be possible
to attack all known targets. Therefore, it is often desir-
able to determine the relative priority of targets for at-
tack. Intelligence and operations representatives work
together in assigning priorities. Priorities do not neces-
sarily indicate the time of attack or the sequence in which
targets will be attacked. The priority assigned a specific
target will frequently depend on the echelon assigning the
priority and the mission of the supported unit. A top
priority target at direct support battalion or battle group
artillery level may have a much lower priority at corps
artillery level.
(2) Priority classification. As a guide in determining priori-
ties for attack of targets, the following may be used:
(a) Priority I. Targets capable of preventing the execution
of the plan of action.
(b) Priority II. Targets capable of immediate serious inter-
ference with the plan of action.
(c) Priority III. Targets capable of ultimate serious inter-
ference with the execution of the plan of action.
(d) Priority IV. Targets capable of limited interference
with the execution of the plan of action.
d. Enemy Countermeasures. The capability of the enemy to in-
terfere with or to prevent effective delivery of fires and his ability
to minimize the effects of the fire as ascertained, if possible. These
factors directly influence the delivery means to be used and the
protection or assistance to be provided the delivery means. Enemy
countermeasures which can be expected include counterbattery, air
defense artillery fire, electronic jamming, and the attack of position
areas by tactical aircraft and guerilla attack.

180. Selection of Type Effect

After examining the characteristics of the target, a tentative
decision is made as to the type of effect and degree of effectiveness
desired. If suitable weapons and ammunition are available, the
tentative decision is confirmed. Common types of fire that may
be selected are described below:
AGO 2696B 119
 a. Destruction fires are artillery fires delivered for the sole
purpose of destroying material objects. Destruction fires may be
accompanied by penetration, blast effect, nuclear radiation, or
incendiary action or by a combination of these actions.
b. Neutralization fires are fires which are delivered to cause
casualties, to hamper and interrupt the firing of weapons, move-
ment, or action and to reduce the combat efficiency of enemy per-
sonnel. A satisfactory degree of neutralization sometimes can be
accomplished by smoking a target or by screening a friendly force
from the target. Illumination at night may assist in effecting
neutralization.
c. Harrassing fires are fires of less intensity than neutralization,
designed to inflict losses or, by threat of losses, to disturb the rest
of the enemy troops, to curtail movement, and in general, to lower
morale.
d. Interdiction fires are fires placed on an area or point to prevent
the enemy from using the area or point. Interdiction fire is usually
of less intensity than neutralization fire.
181. Determination of Suitable Weapons
a. General. The characteristics of available fire support means
must be considered to determine which means is most capable of
producing the desired effect on the target. A less capable means
may be used if time or ammunition limitations preclude use of the
most effective means.
b. Assignment of PrearrangedMissions. Priority in the assign-
ment of prearranged missions to supporting arms should ordinarily
be in the order of artillery, naval gunfire, and air support. Air
support ordinarily is not assigned a mission which can be accom-
plished as well by artillery or naval gunfire, and naval gunfire is
not assigned a mission that is better suited to artillery. This prin-
ciple, however, must not adversely influence the prompt delivery
of available naval gunfire support nor operate to restrict the use
of air support when that arm is available and capable of delivering
the support required.
c. Firepower. Any firepower selected must be capable of pro-
ducing the desired effect on the target and must be able to do so
without causing excessive undesirable effects on the target and in
the target area.
(1) Weapons. The caliber or type, rate of fire, and refire
capability of a weapon must be considered, since it is pos-
sible that the desired effect may be achieved by one weapon
or by more than one weapon of the same type or by
weapons of different types.

120 AGO 2696B

 (2) Ammunition. The target may dictate the type of weapon
and ammunition to use. Neutralization, harassing, and
interdiction of a target can be achieved by fires of lesser
intensity than those required for destruction of a target.
The available supply rate is constantly considered, and
greatest effect possible must be achieved for the amount of
ammunition expended.
(3) Personnel targets. All types of firepower are effective
against personnel. Attack of personnel in the open by light
artillery, light naval weapons, and fighter bombers is ap-
propriate. Projectiles and fragmentation bombs with
variable time fuzes are effective against personnel in the
open. Nuclear firepower is the greatest casualty producer,
but its employment may be limited to the most profitable
targets.
(4) Defensive works. The heavier weapons are best suited to
the destruction or neutralization of bunkers, pillboxes,
dugouts with heavy overhead cover, and other defensive
works. Chemical agents are effective in neutralizing these
positions. For penetration capabilities of various weapons,
see TM 9-1907 and FM 6-40.
(5) Materiel targets. Materiel targets may be rendered in-
effective by neutralization of the operating personnel or by
destruction of the materiel itself. The problems involved
in destruction of materiel targets are similar to those in
destruction of defensive works. Materiel targets are fre-
quently accompanied by personnel and require firepower
means consistent with both target requirements. Air at-
tack with napalm is particularly effective against materiel
targets. Either heavy or very heavy cannon, antitank and
similar type missiles, heavy naval gunfire, or air bombard-
ment is usually required for destruction of heavier types
of materiel. Properly delivered nuclear fire is effective
against all materiel targets.
(6) Large target areas. Frequently, several targets are located
in one large area. Nuclear firepower is particularly effec-
tive against a large area where adequate coverage is either
beyond the capability of nonnuclear weapons or the use of
nonnuclear weapons would result in expenditure of an
excessive quantity of ammunition.
d. Troop Safety. The firepower means selected must be capable
of engaging the target without adversely affecting friendly troops.
The importance of accurately delivered firepower close to friendly
lines must be emphasized. Supported troops must have confidence
in supporting fire and this confidence must be carefully fostered.
AGO 2696B 121
 (1) Accuracy of the means. The means selected must have
sufficient accuracy to accomplish the desired result. Gen-
erally, weapons with a large probable error are not used
for close fires. Naval gunfire delivered in very close sup-
port usually requires adjustment. Close-in targets for
air strikes should be carefully marked, location of friendly
elements should be :made known to the aircraft, and the
strike should be controlled by an air controller in the air
or on the ground.
(2) Effects on target area. If friendly troops are to move into
an area immediately after delivery of fire, the effect of
the fire must not deny movement or safe passage of the
troops. Lingering effects from nuclear, chemical, or
biological attack must be considered. Overdestruction of
the target may result in debris which is an obstacle to
passage by infantry and armored elements and may
actually strengthen l;he enemy defenses.
(3) Effects of weather. The weather conditions in the target
area must be considered. The average wind effect, if blow-
ing toward friendly troops, may prohibit close nuclear,
chemical, or biological attack. Heavily vegetated areas, if
inflammable, may be ignited by incendiaries and the re-
sultant grass and timber fires may jeopardize friendly
troops.
e. Other Factors. Other factors to consider in determining a
suitable weapon for the attack of a target are the need for speed,
the dependability of the weapon, its vulnerability to enemy counter-
measures, and its ability to provide massed fire.
182. Method of Attack
Having selected the type and amount of firepower and the means
of delivery, the effectiveness of the fire can be further increased by
the method of attack. The factors which determine the method of
attack are-
a. Location of the Center of Impact. In a small target area the
fire is placed on the center of the area. In a large target area,
separate centers of impact may be selected to insure adequate cov-
erage. The terrain in the target area is studied and fire is placed
to minimize the protection afforded the enemy by natural cover.
The determination of a suitable height of burst is important to the
success of a nuclear attack.
b. Surprise Fire. The effectiveness of fire can be materially
improved by the delivery of fire without adjustment to obtain
surprise. Surprise reduces the effectiveness of enemy protective

122 AGO 2696B

measures and countermeasures. The principal means of obtaining
surprise fire is to place a large amount of fire on an area in a short
period of time, either by nuclear fires or by using time on target
(TOT) methed (FM 6-40) with nonnuclear fires. The time on
target method requires simultaneous arrival at the target of fire
from several units; success is dependent on accurate survey,
registration, and the application of meteorological corrections. If
the number of units available is not sufficient for an effective time
on target, then the use of weapons with a high rate of fire is
desirable.
c. Density of Fire. Uniform density of fire on all parts of the
target area is normally desirable. This is accomplished by attack-
ing parts of the area successively by one unit or by several units
simultaneously, the latter being more effective.
d. Duration of Fire. Although intense fire of short duration
produces the greatest casualty effect, the mission may require fire
on a target over a longer period of time. The availability of am-
munition frequently will influence the duration and intensity of the
fire. This is the case with harassing and interdiction fires where
the objective is to curtail movement, to disrupt or intermittently
deny use of communication routes to the enemy, and to keep the
enemy unnecessarily alerted with a consequent loss of morale and
efficiency.
183. Time of Attack
The time of attack selected for each target should insure maxi-
mum overall effectiveness of all available fires. The target having
the highest priority for attack is not always attacked first nor is
it always best to attack a target as soon as possible after it is
located. Selection of time of attack is influenced primarily by the
factors listed below.
a. Mobility of the Target. A fleeting target ordinarily has a
higher priority for attack than a static target.
b. Recuperability of the Target. The time required for repair
or replacement of the .target by the enemy should be considered in
selecting the time to attack the target. Additionally, the period
of time during which the target is most critical to the supported
unit should be estimated. A comparison of these times will indicate
a desirable time of attack.
c. Limiting Factors. Although the mobility and recuperability
indicate a desirable time for attack, other factors may necessitate
attack at a less desirable time or with less desirable means. In
some cases, they may even prevent any attack by fire. These factors
are-
AGO 2696B 123
 (1) Nonavailability of suitable weapons.
(2) Priority for attack.
(3) Restrictions on firing.
(4) Ammunition limitations.
(5) Weather.
184. Decision
Having determined the most suitable means, method of attack,
time of attack, and the ammunition to be expended, the decision is
made. The decision sets forth the type and amount of fire to be
employed, the units to fire, the grid reference and altitude of the
desired center of impact, the height of burst if applicable, the time
of attack, safety precautions, and the method of, conducting post
strike analysis.

124 AGO 2696B

 CHAPTER 10
PROCEDURES AND TECHNIQUES FOR HANDLING
TERRESTRIAL TARGET INFORMATION

Section I. GENERAL
185. Scope
This chapter describes the techniques and procedures suitable for
processing and disseminating countermortar, counterbattery, and
general target information. The conversion of target information
into target intelligence is facilitated by the use of the procedures
and techniques described herein.
186. Target Intelligence and Analysis
The procedures and techniques given in this chapter are closely
associated with target intelligence and analysis. The general pro-
cedures involved in the collection and reporting of target informa-
tion, the dissemination of target intelligence, and the use of target
intelligence in target analysis are covered in chapter 9.

Section II. PROCESSING TARGET INFORMATION

187. General
The evaluation and interpretation of target information (ch. 9)
is facilitated by recording and plotting the information on ap-
propriate forms, records, and charts. Only the forms essential for
a clear and concise record of targets should be maintained.

188. Terms
Certain terms, commonly used in processing target information,
require explanation. The terms to be used and the criteria for
their use are determined by the commander. The terrain, the
enemy's employment of artillery, the weather, and characteristics
of the enemy's weapons are considered. Examples of terms that
may be required and suggested definitions are given below:
a. A roving gun location is a location from which a roving gun
(SR 320-5-1) is fired or from which a roving gun is suspected of
being fired.
b. An artillery (mortar) location is an area sufficiently small in
AGO 2696B 125
size to permit efficient attack with available weapons and which
is known or suspected of containing enemy artillery weapons
(mortars).
c. A suspect artillery (mortar) location is an artillery (mortar)
location concerning which there is doubt as to whether it is
occupied, unoccupied, or a dummy position.
d. A confirmed artillery (mortar) location is an enemy artillery
(mortar) position, the existence and location of which has been
verified by sufficient evidence to justify the conclusion that it is
occupied by enemy artillery (mortars).
e. A battery is an enemy artillery position in which is found any
of the following:
(1) Two or more light or medium artillery weapons.
(2) One or more heavy or very heavy artillery weapons.
(3) One or more artillery:missiles (launchers).
f. A confirmed battery location is an enemy artillery position, of
which the existence and location have been verified by sufficient
evidence to justify the conclusion that it is occupied by the number
of weapons constituting an enemy battery of that caliber. An
example of the criteria that may be used in confirming a battery is-
(1) The location has an evaluated accuracy and is associated
with a shelling or radar ranging report which indicates
that an actual battery, not a deception device or installa-
tion, occupies the location.
(2) Direct observation reveals that a battery occupies the
location.
189. Recording Information
Artillery S2's maintain records of two general types: counter-
battery (mortar) records and general target information records.
These records are discussed below.
a. Counterbattery (Mortar) Records.
(1) The artillery counterfire information form (ACIF) (par.
209) is used in recording and transmitting shelling reports
(shelrep) and information relative to hostile battery
(mortar) positions. Information, from this form is
plotted on the hostile battery (mortar) chart, the suspect
location overlay, or the shelrep overlay.
(2) The counterbattery intelligence map is a contour map or
an aerial mosaic of suitable scale and accuracy. A contour
map is preferred. This map is covered with an overlay
on which are plotted appropriate unit boundaries, friendly

126 AGO 2696B

 frontlines, and all confirmed and suspect hostile artillery
locations.
(3) The hostile battery (mortar) chart is a map, photomap,
or grid sheet of suitable scale and accuracy on which unit
boundaries, friendly frontlines, and all confirmed artillery
(mortar) locations or batteries are plotted.
(4) The suspect location overlay is attached to the hostile bat-
tery (mortar) chart and is used in conjunction with that
chart to show suspect locations.
(5) The shelrap overlay is attached to the hostile battery
(mortar) chart and is used in conjunction with that chart
and its other attached overlays. On it are plotted areas
shelled and rays indicating the direction toward enemy
artillery (mortar) activity. The area shelled information
on this overlay is valuable in preparing the material for
inclusion in the periodic intelligence report (par. 175).
The overlay may be changed, as necessary, or may be
changed every 24 hours to coincide with the period covered
by the periodic intelligence report.
(6) The roving gun location overlay, when used, is attached
to the hostile battery chart and is used in conjunction with
that chart to show roving gun activity.
(7) The hostile artillery (mortar) file is a card file in which
is kept a Hostile Artillery (mortar) File Card, (DA Form

()) H( /So | 0 r?2 BB ( ) Mw A Fc

LISTED ON LIST NUOEII
R EVALUATED
ACCURACY SQUARE LETIER DESIONATION
HOSTILE BATTERY(MORTAR)
LOCATION (COUNTEMIORTAR)
OURCOUENTERATIERY FIRE
IRATS
TIR A ACATC E-A DICCOATE
OBSD. IR CONC. NO. FECT
DERERIPTION RACY HOUR BYom BY NO. RDE.

S9a9 i30 v/?/?

So P// == =oo
I/I J302 93 /37 4/ - /aa F /J33o _
.C - 'to /M 1.z(') '%--
4
1/7 59709.A /3p 2 /,7/A jo 90P _0, e af j 4Ce# 30 f/Ct

Adjustedcoordinatesay be au,-entedby coordinates from photo inspetion. HOSTILE ARTILLEY (MORTAR)FILE CARD
**Give unit and type of observation and if fired from photo. (YF 6-20)
HB - HostileBattery H - Hosttiet ortar
DA Form 2186-R. 1 NOV58

Figure 10. A type hostile artillery (mortar) file card.

AGO 2696B 127

 2186-R) (fig. 10) for each suspect artillery (mortar) lo-
cation, roving gun location, and confirmed artillery
(mortar) or battery location. The location designation
and its complete history are recorded on this card. Con-
firmed batteries (mortars), suspect batteries (mortars),
and roving gun locations are filed in separate sections.
b. Records for General Target Information.
(1) The S2 journal is a chronological record of events affect-
ing the S2 section. The format and method of recording is
as prescribed for a staff section journal.
(2) The S2 situation map is a map or photomap of a suitable
scale covered with an overlay on which are posted friendly
and enemy frontlines, division and corps boundaries, and
all available information of the enemy. The map is used
for planning harassing and interdiction fires and fires to
support an attack or defense. Fire plans should be checked
against this map, and against hostile mortar or hostile
charts and associated overlays at division and corps level
to insure that all appropriate targets are attacked.
(3) The general target overlay is an overlay used in conjunc-
tion with the S2 situation map on which are plotted all
enemy locations determined to be targets.
(4) The general target file is a file in which a file card is kept
for each target located, except hostile artillery and mortar
locations. The complete history of the target is recorded
on this card. This file enables the S2 to correlate reports
of enemy activity at a given location. The target file card
is useful in the examination of overrun positions and in
the evaluation of effectiveness of friendly fires and dis-
cerning enemy tactics and technique of employment. The
Hostile Artillery (mortar) File Card (DA Form 2186-R)
(fig. 10) or a similar card may be used for this purpose.
This form may be reproduced locally on 101/4 x 8-inch card.
190. Plotting Targets
The employment of a standard notational system facilitates the
integration of information received in a variety of forms from nu-
merous different agencies into a flexible, simple and usable form.
Although experience or the requirements of a given situation may
indicate improvisation, the following described system permits the
recording of the bulk of information normally received in the S2
section:
a. Plot Description. Each location is plotted on the appropriate
maps, charts, or overlays. The plot should include the location

128 AGO 2696B

name or number; time and date last reported active; description of
the target, such as the number, caliber, and type of weapons; and
the reporting source or agencies.
b. Color Code. Colors may be used in plotting to permit selection
according to accuracy of location. For example-
Red-Accuracy of 100 meters or less
Blue-Accuracy between 101 and 200 meters
Brown-Accuracy between 201 and 300 meters
Green-Accuracy of 301 meters or over
c. Identification of Reporting Source or Agency. The abbrevia-
tions most commonly used to identify the reporting source or agency
are-
SR-Sound Ranging
RR-Radar Ranging
FR-Flash Ranging
Z-Shelling Reports
TAF-Tactical Air Force Observer
POW-Prisoner of War
AOP-Air Observer
OP-Ground Observer
PI-Photo Interpreter
d. Plot Designation. Reported target locations may be designated
by letter combinations or a concentration designation. Hostile artil-
lery and mortars are generally designated by letter combinations
and other targets by a concentration designation, which consists
of a combination of letters and numbers.
(1) Hostile artillery locations are lettered serially in the order
located, as AA (1st location), AB (2d location), AC (3d
location), * * * BA (27th location), * * *. These plots
are placed on the suspect location overlay until confirmed.
When a location is confirmed, the plot is removed from
the suspect location overlay, plotted on the hostile battery
chart, and the letter C (confirmed) is added to the name,
as AAC, BAC, or BBC. The corresponding card in the
hostile artillery file is changed accordingly.
(2) Hostile mortar locations are lettered in the order located,
in a manner similar to that used for designating hostile
artillery locations: MAA (1st location), MAB (2d loca-
tion), and MBB (28th location). These plots are placed
on the suspect location overlay until confirmed. When the
location is confirmed, the letter C is added to the name
of the mortar location, the plot is removed from the suspect
location overlay and placed on the hostile mortar chart,
and the appropriate change is made in the hostile mortar
file.
AGO 2696B 129
 (3) Locations other than hostile artillery or mortars are iden-
tified by concentration designations according to the con-
centration numbering system.
e. Description of Target. An abbreviated description of the tar-
get's composition is included as a part of the plot.
(1) The description of hostile artillery locations includes the
number, caliber (or size), and type of weapons, as-
4/M/H -Four medium howitzers.
1/?/? -One weapon; caliber (or size) and
type doubtful.
3/H/? -Three heavy weapons, type doubtful.
4/150/G -Four 150-mm guns (show exact size
or caliber when known).
1/MR/MSL -One medium range missile (show exact
s.ize when known).
(2) Mortar locations are described as to the number and size
of mortars therein, as--
4/Lt -Four light mortars.
1/? -One mortar, size doubtful.
1/Hv -One heavy mortar.
(3) The larger enemy mortars may be classified as artillery
and incorporated into counterbattery activities. Criteria
for classifying enemy artillery and mortars should be
established by the corps artillery .commander, using order
of battle intelligence and appropriate information of the
enemy as a guide.
(4) General target locations, are described by using an appro-
priate military symbol (FM 21-30), abbreviation, or by
improvising some other intelligible notation.
f. Completed Plot. The completed plot (fig. 11) consists of the
basic symbol, appropriately colored, with notations placed in each
quadrant. A commonly used system for entering notations is given
below.
(1) Upper left--letter combination or concentration number
assigned to the location.
(2) Upper right--date and time last active or reported. (If
derived from photo interpretation report, the date and
time the photo was taken are shown.)
(3) Lower right-agency reporting. More than one may be
shown.
(4) Lower left--description of target.
g. Changes in Target Status. The plots of targets are changed

130 AGO 2696B

 / Blue // Red

AA 081610 MAGC 092100

./Lt/G AOP 4/M PI

z

Suspect cannon location Confirmed mortar location

; Green / Brown

AH 160900 BB 401 181415

1/MR/msl POW Inf Bn TAF

Suspect battery location Location of target other

than artillery or mortar

Note. Colors reflect accuracy of location.

Figure 11. Target plots.

to conform to the target's known status. For example, the color

of the basic symbol may be changed to reflect the report of a more
accurate location or the plot may be removed from the suspect loca-
tion overlay and replotted on the hostile battery (mortar) chart
when the location is confirmed (d above). When a target location
is reliably reported to be vacated, its plot is removed from the
general target overlay or the hostile battery (mortar) chart and,
in the case of artillery (mortars), the plot is re-entered on the
suspect location overlay. Regardless of the type target location now
reported to be vacant, the target file card is retained in the suspect
section of the appropriate file for reference if the location is reoc-
cupied and to facilitate post strike analysis (par. 170).
AGO 2696B 131
191. Shelling Reports
a. Shelling reports are plotted (fig. 12), as received, on the
shelrep overlay.
(1) The basic symbol is a ray whose origin is at the observer's
reported location. However, if the shelling report is based
on measurements taken at the crater or furrow, the area
shelled ((3) below) is the origin of the ray. In the case
of "flash-bang" reports (par. 206), the rays are drawn
with tick marks which correspond to the ranges deter-
mined from reported time intervals.
(2) To permit rejection of false intersections, the rays are
usually drawn according to a color code. For example:
Red -Heavy weapons (caliber or size).
Blue -Medium weapons (caliber or size).
Green -Light weapons (caliber or size).
Brown-Missiles (size or short, medium, or long-
range).
Black -Unknown.

49
- Hostile
Number and caliber mortar
48f mortars chart
48

Time *
active Shelling

.. \47\ Red report

overlay
ACIF number

46

Location
of
~45 _______ ______ ~observer
_______

44
82 83 84 85 86 87 88
Note. Color of ray indicates caliber (or size) of weapon

Figure 12. Shelling report plot of information from artillery

counterfire information form.

132 AGO 2696B

 (3) When the area shelled is reported, it may also be shown
on the shelling report overlay. Notations concerning the
number and caliber (or size) of the shells fired, the nature
of the fire, and the time fired, are desirable.
(4) Notations are placed on the ray to identify the shelrep.
Notations normally include the time of firing; the ACIF
number; information concerning the number, caliber (or
size), and type of weapons; and the flash-bang distance
if reported in item J, ACIF.
b. Shelreps are evaluated on receipt as to accuracy and reliability
(pars. 203-205). When the shelrep is plotted on the shelrep overlay
it is considered in conjunction with the hostile battery chart, at-
tached overlays, and any other pertinent information available. If
the shelrep establishes the activity of a hostile location an entry is
made on the appropriate target file card. If the information con-
cerns hostile mortar activity, the information is entered in the
appropriate quadrant of the plot on either the hostile mortar chart
or the suspect location (mortar) overlay. If the information con-
cerns hostile battery activity, the information is entered in the
appropriate quadrant of the plot on either the hostile battery chart
or the suspect location (battery) overlay and the counterbattery
intelligence map. When appropriate, the information is passed to
the S3 for information and necessary action. When the azimuth
or location is unrelated to any plotted location, a careful study is
made taking into account weapon type and caliber (or size) to
determine likely tactical positions. Intelligence agencies may be
directed to seek further information in these areas.

Section III. COUNTERBATTERY ACTIVITIES

192. General
a. Counterbattery intelligence has as its objective the gathering
of complete information pertaining to hostile batteries. In this
repect, counterbattery intelligence does not differ from other phases
of military intelligence. Its immediate operational objective is at-
tained when the counterfire agencies are provided with sufficient
information, to properly engage the hostile artillery location with
effective counterbattery fires.
b. Counterbattery intelligence serves a broader function when
its product is integrated into the whole of the intelligence effort.
Important tactical deductions, independent of the operation of
attacking hostile batteries, may be derived from positive knowledge
of the enemy artillery strength and dispositions.
AGO 2696B 133
 c. Successful counterbattery intelligence depends on the coordi-
nated employment of contributing intelligence agencies and on the
systematic recording and evaluation of assembled data.

193. Counterbattery Activities

a. Responsibility and Organization.
(1) The army artillery commander is responsible for counter-
battery activities against enemy long-range missile units
beyond the range of weapons and target acquisition
agencies allotted to corps. The intelligence agencies capa-
ble of performing this mission are tactical air reconnais-
sance, US Army Security Agency units under field army
control, and clandestine means.
(2) The corps artillery commander is responsible for all coun-
terbattery activities within the range of the weapons and
target acquisition agencies allotted to corps. He has the
staff and communication facilities to perform this mission.
(3) When distances prohibit effective control of counterbattery
activities by corps artillery, decentralization of this func-
tion, in whole or in part, may be made to a field artillery
group (s). Personnel from corps artillery may be attached
to augment the group capability in the discharge of this
responsibility.
(4) When the operations of a division require the division
artillery to assume the responsibility for counterbattery
activities, necessary counterbattery means must be at-
tached to the division.
(5) The S2 of corps artillery is responsible for supervising the
collection and recording of all possible information of
enemy artillery, air defense artillery, and antitank guns.
From this information, the S2 selects remunerative tar-
gets and transmits to the S3 a detailed description of each
target so that the S.3 can readily decide how the target
is to be attacked.
b. Counterbattery Policy. In every situation it is necessary for
the commander responsible for counterbattery operations to enun-
ciate a counterbattery policy. This policy will be the commander's
concept of the employment of his artillery in the counterbattery
role. The policy is continually scrutinized and revised as necessary
in accordance with the changing situation. The complexity-of the
considerations involved in determining a counterbattery policy
requires detailed staff coordination.
(1) Definition. A counterbattery policy is an expression by

134 AGO 2696B

 the corps artillery commander of his plan of employment
of the artillery to attack hostile artillery in support of the
force commander's mission and plan of maneuver or
scheme of defense. It may include the type of counter-
battery program to be executed, standard methods of
attack of specific targets, and the artillery commander's
concept of his counterbattery criteria as to what should
constitute a suspect battery location and a confirmed
battery location for the specific tactical situation. (For
further explanation of counterbattery (countermortar)
criteria, see par. 197c.)
(2) Types of counterbattery policy. There are three types of
counterbattery policy. These are-
(a) An active policy which is the delivery of counterbattery
fires on all hostile battery locations as soon as they are
located.
(b) A silent policy which is the withholding of counterbat-
tery fires to provide time for all available means to
collect counterbattery intelligence information so that
a more effective counterbattery program can be pre-
pared.
(c) A semiactive policy which is a compromise between the
active and silent policy. For example, such a policy may
be silent except for the delivery of counterbattery fires
on those hostile locations whose fires are causing damage
to friendly elements. Some artillery units may also be
required to follow an active policy while others of corps
artillery follow a silent policy in order not to disclose
the presence of new units or the loss of artillery units
in the force.
(3) Some of the considerations affecting the determination of
the counterbattery policy are-
(a) The mission of the supported force.
(b) A knowledge of the tactics and technique of employment
of the enemy's artillery and other heavy weapons.
(c) The amount and types of artillery in the enemy force
and the degree to which it is active.
(d) A knowledge of the enemy's capability for reinforcing
his artillery.
(e) An estimation of our capability to locate enemy artillery
position.
(f) An estimation of our ability to deliver effective fire on
enemy artillery locations by appropriate means.
AGO 2696B 135
 (g) A knowledge of the strength, status, and morale of
enemy artillery units.
(h) A knowledge of the intensity or type of fire required to
achieve the effect desired upon the enemy artillery loca-
tions.
(i) A knowledge of the enemy capability of locating our
artillery and delivering effective fire on our battery posi-
tions.
(j) Employment of deception techniques to reduce the
enemy's capability for locating our artillery positions.
(k) A knowledge of the communication systems employed by
enemy artillery commanders and the location of enemy
communication installations.
(1) Ammunition available to support the counterbattery
policy.
(4) Selection of a counterbattery policy. The establishment
and application of the counterbattery policy must guard
against the creation of a standard pattern of friendly
artillery fires which will reveal the plan of action to the
enemy. Merely the fact that a counterbattery policy
worked "yesterday" in a similar tactical situation is no
assurance that the same policy will be applicable "today."
A thorough analysis of each situation in the light of the
considerations discussed in (3) above may result in the
establishment of a successful counterbattery policy. When
a semiactive counterbattery policy is selected, the artillery
commander should announce his policy in detail in order
that subordinate artillery commanders and his staff are
fully cognizant of the particulars of such a policy.
c. Execution of Counterbattery Fires. Hostile batteries should
be attacked with surprise fire. Time and ammunition permitting,
batteries once neutralized should be destroyed by fire. The observa-
tion battalion can often determine the accuracy of unobserved fires
by sound, flash, or radar.
d. Evaluation of Counterbattery Fires. During the course of
operations, a continuous evaluation of the effect of counterbattery
fires on hostile artillery should be made (par. 170).
194. Functions
Within the corps artillery headquarters, the counterbattery func-
tion is divided between the S2 and S3 sections.
a. The S2 and his assistants are responsible for producing coun-
terbattery intelligence. Counterbattery intelligence includes the
location and identification of hostile batteries, the study of tactics

136 AGO 2696B

and techniques of hostile artillery employment, and the determina-
tion of enemy artillery capabilities and limitations.
b. The S3 and his assistants are responsible for the delivery of
effective neutralization or destruction of counterbattery fires on the
hostile battery location provided by the S2 and his assistants.
c. Counterbattery intelligence has a scope which carries it beyond
the field of counterbattery activities. Knowledge of hostile artillery
dispositions and strength has an important bearing on tactical deci-
sions affecting the whole force.
195. Agencies Contributing Counterbattery Information
a. There are numerous information agencies directly or indirectly
available to the corps artillery assistant S2, counterbattery intelli-
gence officer (CBIO). The skillful CBIO must coordinate the activi-
ties of these agencies so as to exploit their points of strength and
minimize their points of weakness.
b. The following ageicies are normally available to the CBIO
(ch. 9).
(1) Field artillery abservation battalion.
(2) Corps artillery aviation battery and other army aviation.
(3) Photo interpreters.
(4) Unit shelling reports and shell crater analysis.
(5) Ground observation posts.
(6) Interrogators of prisoners of war and civilians.
(7) Tactical air and reconnaissance aviation.
(8) Communication reconnaissance units.
(9) Higher, lower, and adjacent units.

196. Specific Duties of the CBIO

The CBIO assists responsible members of the corps artillery staff
by furnishing counterbattery information as required to develop
a counterbattery program in the conduct of deliberate operations,
to develop an estimate of the hostile artillery situation for the force
commander and higher headquarters, and to facilitate an intelligent
discrimination in the selection of counterbattery targets of oppor-
tunity. In addition, he-
a. Coordinates the activities of contributing counterbattery intel-
ligence agencies.
b. Collects counterbattery information.
c. Evaluates and interprets counterbattery information received.
d. Records counterbattery information.

AGO 2696B 137

 e. Disseminates counterbattery information.
f. Instructs and familiarizes personnel with the corps in their
counterbattery responsibilities.
g. Provides for post strike analysis.

Section IV. COUNTERMORTAR ACTIVITIES

197. General
a. Countermortar intelligence has as its objective the reduction
of uncertainties related to the location of hostile mortars. Its im-
mediate operational objective is attained when the counterfire
agencies are provided with the information necessary for succssful
attack of known hostile mortars.
b. - The most difficult countermortar problem is locating the posi-
tion, or even the area, from which these weapons are firing. Be-
cause mortars possess the capability of displacing frequently and
quickly, speed in the handling of countermortar information is essen-
tial. Countermortar activities are speeded up by decentralization
to facilitate rapid communication between the sources of informa-
tion and the means for neutralization of hostile mortars; and by
maintenance of the minimum number of records, charts, and forms
required to provide a clear, concise record of enemy mortars.
c. Due to the characteristics and nature of employment, an active
hostile mortar should be engaged as soon as it has been located with
sufficient accuracy and adequate target description to insure delivery
of effective counterfire. In this respect the division commander will
usually follow an active policy,. i.e., hostile mortars will be attacked
with appropriate fire as soon as located. Before the assistant S2,
(countermortar intelligence officer) (CMIO) can correctly utilize
countermortar information, he should receive guidance from his
commander for the development of the countermortar situation.
This guidance from the commander is usually given to him in the
form of certain criteria which define a suspect hostile mortar loca-
tion and the information necessary to confirm a suspect location.
The definitions of a suspect and confirmed mortar location (par.
188) are purposely general in nature and should be modified ,by the
commander to fit the tactical situation. The countermortar criteria
are usually based on the recommendations of the CMIO. Some of
the factors that the CMIO should consider in determining these
criteria are as follows:
(1) Mission of the supported unit.
(2) Hostile mortar activity.
(3) Counterfire ammunition available.

138 AGO 2696B

 (4) Effectiveness of countermortar intelligence.
(5) Enemy tactics and techniques of employment of mortars.
(6) Enemy use of dummy and simulated positions.
d. Countermortar criteria can be changed frequently. Such cri-
teria should not appear in division artillery standing operating pro-
cedures (SOP's); however, the commander's concept of the conduct
of countermortar operations and general definitions concerning
countermortar activities are appropriate data for SOP's.
198. Division Organization for Countermortar Operations
(fig. 13)
Success in countering the activities of hostile mortars is dependent
on the efficiency with which countermortar activities are organized.
A good organization for countermortar activities provides for the
exploitation of all possible sources of countermortar information,
fast and efficient processing of this information, and rapid dissemi-
nation of pertinent information to appropriate personnel and units.
Close cooperation between the supported infantry units, the battle
group artillery, and division artillery is required. In the armored
division the same close cooperation is required of armored infantry
and armor battalions, combat commands, direct support artillery
battalions, and the division artillery headquarters.
a. The coordination of the division's countermortar activities is
the responsibility of the division artillery commander. In the dis-
charge of this responsibility he is assisted by-
(1) The division artillery S2 who is concerned with all intelli-
gence.
(2) An assistant S2, countermortar intelligence officer (CMIO)
(fig. 2). Under the supervision of the S2, he collects, proc-
esses, and disseminates all obtainable information and
intelligence concerning hostile mortars. He advises the
division artillery commander concerning the general em-
ployment of the radar sections of the division artillery
and assists the division artillery S2 in the assignment and
coordination of their sectors of search.
(3) The division artillery S3 who utilizes the division artillery
and reinforcing weapons for the most effective attack of
hostile mortars.
b. The two countermortar radar sections of the infantry division
are organic to the division artillery headquarters battery. These
sections are kept under the operational control of the division artil-
lery S2, and their location and sectors of scan are controlled by
the CMIO. Each radar section is usually emplaced near an artillery
AGO 2696B 139
 Front line personnel

FO

Mortar battery LnO I How btry LnO

~SS2*Counterfire
N t
BC op sgt
~SS3 FDO

*RadMortr
batteryr
LnO How bry LnO

CG CMIO
S2
S3
Notes.S
*Assigned to hq and hq btry dlv arty.
**Orgonic to bottle group hq and svc company, but normally attached to
mortar btry.
Legend.
Artillery channels
--------- Infantry channels
Figure 13. Infantry division organizationfor countermortar operations.

battery or location for ease in maintaining local security, to facili-

tate communications with the nearest counterfire unit, and to facili-
tate the provision of mess and administration (FM 6-21).
c. Divisional field artillery battalions are organized for counter-
mortar activities as follows:

140 AGO 2696B

 (1) The S2 is charged with the location of targets, including
mortars, and the recommendation of fire missions to the
S3. He expedites the flow of information concerning mor-
tars to the battle group artillery, to artillery representa-
tives with supported or reinforced units, and to division
artillery.
(2) The S3 executes countermortar fires according to the exist-
ing situation and availability of weapons.
(3) Each light field artillery battalion organic to the armored
division is authorized a countermortar radar section with
a primary mission of locating mortars. This section is
supervised by the radar officer. He is responsible for the
training, tactical and technical proficiency of personnel,
and maintenance of organic equipment in the section.
d. Countermortar activities within the battle group involve-
(1) The division artillery commander who is responsible for
overall coordination of. division countermortar activities.
(2) The battle group S2 who has unit staff responsibility for
-collecting, evaluating, and disseminating counterfire in-
formation, and who exercises staff supervision of the
operations of the battle group counterfire squad. Counter-
fire information, which includes countermortar informa-
tion, is assembled by the counterfire operations sergeant
who establishes and operates the counterfire center which
is normally located in the battle group artillery FDC. The
counterfire center is the focal point for all counterfire in-
formation originating within the battle group.
(3) The battle group S3 and the battle group artillery com-
mander who coordinate infantry counterfire operations
and artillery countermortar activities. The battle group
counterfire squad is organized and equipped to operate
short range, sound locating instruments for the purpose
of locating enemy weapons. The squad is normally at-
tached to the mortar battery in combat.
(4) The battle group artillery fire direction officer (FDO) who
obtains information from artillery sources and from the
counterfire operations sergeant; utilizes the battle group
artillery and reinforcing weapons for the most effective
attack of hostile mortars located by battle group means;
and provides division artillery with available countermor-
tar information. He is assisted by the battle group artil-
lery intelligence sergeant.
(5) The reinforcing artillery liaison officer who assists the
AGO 2696B 141
 battle group artillery in countermortar activities. He
assists the battle group artillery in obtaining additional
artillery fire and in coordinating the activities of the
counterfire squad with division artillery countermortar
radar.
e. Countermortar activities within the combat command, armored
infantry battalion, and armor battalion involve-
(1) The S2 who is charged with countermortar intelligence.
(2) The S3 who supervises countermortar operations.
(3) The field artillery liaison officer who assists in coordinating
artillery and infantry fires and in disseminating informa-
tion.

199. Communication
As speed is essential to countermortar action, the organization for
countermortar operations must have efficient means of communica-
tion for the flow of information and for calling on the most suitable
weapons for fire. In most instances, the normal communication
systems will suffice, but additional facilities may become necessary
for the rapid transmission of information. Artillery communication
channels are normally utilized for countermortar activities.

200. Methods of Locating Mortars

Enemy mortars may be located by a variety of methods (par.
195). Included in the available methods are-
a. Sound and radar ranging and visual observation (pars. 64 and
87).
b. Mortar reports and crater analysis (pars. 202, 211, and 216-
218).
c. Aerial photographs (par. 173).
d. Studies of enemy-held terrain for probable target locations
(target prediction).
(1) A study of enemy terrain may be made from available
sources, such as maps, aerial photographs, and air and
ground reconnaissance. This and allied information,
together with a knowledge of the enemy's organization
and tactical doctrine for mortars, will enable countermor-
tar personnel to make a reasonable deduction of hostile
mortar locations.
(2) A continuous comparison should be made between the
number of hostile mortars located and the estimated num-
ber on the front to estimate progress being made. An esti-

142 AGO 2696B

 mate of the number of opposing mortars may be derived
from experience, order of battle information, and knowl-
edge of the enemy's situation.
(3) After enemy territory has been overrun, a study of hostile
mortar locations should be made. This will assist in future
countermortar work by revealing the-
(a) Average number of mortars in a unit.
(b) Use of alternate and dummy positions.
(c) Typical location and organization of mortar positions.
(d) Accuracy of countermortar fires.
(e) Efficiency of the countermortar intelligence system.
201. Countermortar Operations
The organization for countermortar activity is decentralized in
order to obtain the maximum speed in dealing with enemy mortars
that are located. The exchange of information between artillery and
infantry is conducted through the artillery representatives at the
infantry headquarters.
a. Countermortar information originating in the armored infan-
try battalion is plotted and interpreted immediately upon receipt by
the battalion S2. When such information indicates a probable
hostile mortar position, fires by the most effective available weapons
are requested without delay. Regardless of the action taken by the
battalion S2, the information should be forwarded to the division
artillery CMIO by the most expeditious means.
b. Battle group artillery and direct support artillery counter-
mortar operations are the same as for any other type target dis-
covered by the artillery except for the priority given countermortar
messages, the emphasis placed on the exchange of countermortar
information with the infantry, and the immediate passing of com-
plete information to division artillery.
c. By selecting those hostile mortar locations which have been
most recently active and are within the zone of the supported unit
or have the capability of firing within the zone, the CMIO should
be able to provide the division artillery S3 with a sufficient number
of locations for a suitable countermortar program. The following
factors will influence the effectiveness of countermortar programs.
(1) Favorable.
(a) Frequent and rapid transmission of all countermortar
information from all units located in the sector of the
supported unit.
(b) Recording the time of most recent activity on locations
shown on the hostile mortar chart and suspect location
overlay.

AGO 2696B 143

 (c) Ability of the CMIO to select properly hostile mortar
locations based upon his past experience and knowledge
of enemy mortar tactics and techniques.
(d) Effectiveness of the staff coordination between the
CMIO and the division artillery S3 section in exchang-
ing timely countermortar information.
(2) Unfavorable.
(a) Indiscriminate attack of all known suspect and con-
firmed locations throughout the zone of the supported
unit.
(b) Failure to attack mortar locations which are outside the
supported unit zone of action but are capable of firing
within the zone.
(c) An increase in hostile mortar activity, and a correspond-
ing increase in the volume of countermortar informa-
tion, which make the CMIO's analysis more difficult.
(d) Excessive expenditure of ammunition with questionable
results due to inaccurate location, inadequate target de-
scription, and indiscriminate attack of locations.

Section V. SHELLING REPORTS

202. General
a. Whenever and wherever hostile cannon, missile, or mortar
shelling or hostile bombing is observed, it must be reported without
delay to the appropriate headquarters which can evaluate and act
upon the information. This report is forwarded in accordance with
the format and procedure prescribed in paragraphs 206 through
210.
b. Shelling and bombing reports form the basis of efficient coun-
teraction to enemy fire. In addition to providing information that
assists in the initial location of hostile weapons, shelling and bomb-
ing reports further aid counterbattery, countermortar, and air de-
fense operations by-
(1) Indicating when enemy weapons are firing.
(2) Indicating which weapons or planes are active.
(3) Indicating number, caliber (or size), and type of active
weapons.
(4) Reporting effectiveness and indicating purpose of enemy
fire.
(5) Aiding in defining enemy fire capabilities.
(6) Furnishing information which permits efficient applica-
tion of additional and confirming means of target location.

144 AGO 2696B

203. Reporting Types of Shells
a. Shells or fragments not positively identifiedishould be reported
immediately to proper authorities. For technique of fragment
analysis, see TM 30-240.
b. To be of maximum value, fragments should be tagged with the
following information:
(1) Date and time shell landed, if known.
.(2) Location where shell was found, as aceurately as possible.
(3) Di'rection from which shell caiie and minethod used in de-
termining that direction (survey of crater, sound, etc.).
(4) Name and organization of person making report.
(5) Reference to shelling report on which this shell was re-
ported, if known.

204. Specific Values of Reports

a. Artillery Shelling (SHELREP) and Mortar Shelling
(MORTREP) Reports. Shelling reports furnish valuable informa-
tion of the disposition and activities of the hostile weapons. By a
detailed analysis of shelling reports, the artillery intelligence officer
obtains information that may permit the location of hostile weapons
and permit effective employment of counterfire.
b. Bombing Report (BOMBREP). Bombing reports provide val-
uable information to the intelligence sections of higher head-
quarters, both air and ground. They are used in preparation of
enemy air order of battle studies. Through proper processing and
analysis, they give indications of enemy air capabilities and intent
as well as new developments, tactics, and doctrine.

205. Detail and Accuracy

The most reliable, accurate, and informative reports of hostile
shelling or bombing are based on visual or electronic observation
supplemented by crater analysis and fragnment' identification. Re-
ports (SHELREP, MORTREP, BOMBRt]P) should be as detailed
and accurate as the necessity for speed will ptermit. No individual
should neglect or delay a report due to lack of co'mplete information.
Fragmentary or incomplete information is often of value in supple-
menting or confirming existing information. All personnel, regard-
less of-.arm or service, must be made aware of the necessity for
promptly. reporting shelling or bombing information that comes to
their attention. However, the greatest volume of usable reports
is submitted by specially trained personnel. Provision should be
made for training of such specialists within units of company size
and larger.
AGO 2696B 145
 206. Content of Shelling Report
Items to be covered in the shelling and bombing report are trans-
mitted in the following sequence:
a. Item A. From. This identifies the source of the report. The
current call sign or code name is used.
b. Item B. Positionof Observer. A map reference is preferred;
however, such a reference must be encoded by the use of a grid ref-
erence code, map template, thrust line, or some other security
means. The location of the observer is essential for plotting the
azimuth reported in item C.
c. Item C. Grid or Magnetic Bearing Azimuth of Flash, Sound,
Origin of Flight Path, or Groove of Shell in Mils or Degrees. The
observer must state whether he is reporting a grid or magnetic
direction, how he determined the direction (whether from seeing
the flash, hearing the sound, observing the flight path, or sighting
along the shell's furrow), and the units of measure (mils or de-
grees) he has used. The direction is measured from the observer
to the enemy weapon. This item is omitted from bombreps. The
azimuth to the suspected hostile area can be determined-
(1) By sound. Estimation of direction by ear is the most com-
mon and the most inaccurate method used. It should be
confirmed by other methods whenever possible. Hearing
the gun fire and measuring the azimuth to the area from
which the sound seemed to come or hearing the passage
of a shell and measuring the azimuth of its apparent course
are the two methods most often used.
(2) By seeing the flash. This method is very accurate. How-
ever, since flash simulators may be used, the location ob-
tained must be con-firmed by other methods wherever
possible.
(3) By observing the flight path. In many cases, the location
of a missile launcher can be determined by observing the
flight path to burnout, and then measuring the azimuth
to the origin of the path.
(4) By crater and furrow analysis (pars. 211-218).
d. Items D and E. Time from (D) and Time to (E). The time.
that the shelling or bombing commenced and ended should be given
accurately. It may be that the weapon's location can be confirmed
by sound or flash locations which were taken at the same time or
that reports of two or more observers may be combined. The re-
port is not delayed until the shelling or bombing ceases. A frag-
mentary report is submitted immediately, followed by a complete
report when obtained.

146 AGO 2696B

 e. Item F. Area Shelled or Bombed. The area shelled or bombed
is preferably identified in the clear by map reference. The precision
with which targets are .attacked by the enemy may indicate the
enemy's employment of forward observers, photographs, map data,
or sound, flash, and radar units. The intensity or the persistency
of shelling or bombing may indicate the value of the target to the
enemy, the status of his ammunition supply, and whether the fire
is for defensive operations or preparation for an attack.
f. Item G. Number, Caliber (or Size), Type of Guns,'Mortars,
Missiles, or Aircraft. The number of guns or mortars is estimated
by the time between individual bursts or by the number of bursts
that occur within a relatively few seconds. Consideration is given to
the caliber of shell and the consequent time needed for reloading.
Fragment identification is a method of determining caliber and
sometimes type of shells. Initially, the caliber may be estimated
as light, medium, or heavy. Difficulty in determining the number,
size, and type of missiles will vary with the missile and the type of
warhead. However, the slow rate of fire and other characteristics
of missiles should make identification relatively simple in many
cases.
g. Item H. Nature of Fire (Omitted for BOMBREP). The na-
ture of fire may generally be classified as registration, destruction,
interdiction, harassing, neutralization, or fire against a specific in-
stallation. Often the nature of fire indicates the necessity for speed
in executing counterbattery fire.
h. Item I. Number and Type of Shells, Bomb, etc. This includes
information regarding the kind of shell (nuclear, high explosive,
time, incendiary, gas, etc.) or bomb (nuclear, fragmentation, clus-
ter, incendiary, napalm, etc.) employed.
i. Item J. Time of Flash to Bang (Omitted in BOMBREP). One
means of establishing the distance from the observer to the gun
is by noting the number of seconds between the time the gun flash
is seen and the sound of the discharge of the gun is heard by the
observer. For practical purposes in computing the approximate
distance between the gun and the observer, it is assumed that flashes
are seen instantaneously and that the speed of sound is approxi-
mately 370 yards (340 meters) per second. The calculation of this
distance which is based on the speed of sound has nothing to do with
the time of flight of the projectile itself.
j. Item K. Damage. This states the damage inflicted, thereby
providing information which might indicate needed changes in pre-
scribed procedure or action. Clear or encoded transmission will
depend on the situation at the time. In some cases, it may be desir-
able to report damage separately by flash message.

AGO 2696B 147

207. General Instructions
a. Because speed is essential to'counteraction, the observer trans-
mits information on shellings and bombing by the most rapid means
available. The items and sequence prescribed in paragraph 206
will be used for all reports.
b. Each report will be preceded by the appropriate code word.
(1) SHELREP (in the case of enemy artillery fire).
(2) MORTREP (in the case of enemy mortar fire).
(3) BOMBREP (in the case of enemy air attack).
c. For ease and speed in transmission, each item of the report
will be identified by a capital letter, e.g., A, B, C, The item title
(number and type of shells, bombs, etc.) will not be transmitted.
d. The message will always be transmitted in the clear except
for-
(1) Item A (par. 206), the unit. The current call sign or code
name is used instead.
(2) Item B (par. 206), the location of the observer. When a
map reference such as a grid reference is used, it must
be encoded.
(3) Item K (par. 206), the damage. For discussion, see par.
206j.

208. Reproduction in Field Message Books

A list of the essential items of information (par. 206) and the
order in which they are to be reported may be made available by
printing the list on a piece of gummed paper and pasting it on the
inside of the field message book.

209. Artillery Counterfire Information Form

If a shelling report is to be combined with information concerning
located hostile weapons and a record of counterfire, the Artillery
Counterfire Information Form (DA Form 2185-R) (figs. 14 and
15) may be used. This form may be reproduced locally on 101/2 x 8-
inch paper. On this form, section I is the shelling report (par. 206);
section II pertains to locations of hostile batteries; and section III
gives data on the action taken by the S3 (FDO).
a. Section II, Location of Hostile Weapon.
(1) Item L, from and time. The designation of the sending
agency and time of message are entered in this item..
(2) Item M, grid reference and accuracy. The grid reference
of the hostile weapon and the estimated accuracy.- of loca-
tion are entered in this item.

148 AGO 2696B

 ARTILLERY CO N TERF I R E INFOR ATION F ORM

RECEIVEDBY (Initias of lriter) FROM TIOE NO.

o.a.g -. L 0LA
0/,O/ . a 7
SECTIONI EELBREP- R - RB (Deeignate which),

A B C D E F G R I J K

SHiO AND
AZIMUTH NUMBRE, NO.
FROM POS OF S TIME TIB AIREA CALIBER NATURE TOFE TIME OF DAMAGE
OF FLASH FROM TO SELLED (or sie), OF FIRE SHELLS FLAS TO (remarks)
OBSR
0 ,eR. ANDTYPE BOMBS, BANG
Flo. PR OF WEAPON ETC.

.PII ,1~4r71~p~l~ l 0 /,7 5r

SECTIONII LOCATIONOF HOSTILE WEAPON SECTIONIII COIUNTEFIREACTION

L M N 0 p Q FILL IN

NIIBER,
FROM GRID MEANSOF TIME CALIBER RUARKS TIME FIRED NO. OF RD FEZE REARKS
AND REF]RENCE LOCATING ACTIVE (or siRe), C/FIRE BY AND PROJECTILE (effeet)
TIME AND ANDTYPE
ACCURACY OF WEAPON

DAForm 2185-R, 1 NOVS8

Figure 14. Artillery counterfire information form (may be

reproduced locally) showing SHELREP recorded.

ARTILLERY CO U N T E RFIRE INFO R M A TOI N FORM

(FRM6-20)
RECEIVEDBY (Initils of riter) ROM ) TIME NO.
iR .. -l . S , / 5r B, /,
Ig 7' /2 /|
SECTIONI SHELRER- MOTREP - BOMREP (Designte which)
A B C D E F G H I J I K

MAC OR
ERID
AZIMUTH NUMBER, NO. AND
FROM POS OF SOUND, TIME TIME AREA CALIBER NATURE TYPE TIME OF DAMAE
OF FLASH FROM TO SHELLED (or size) OF FIRE SHELLS FLASH TO (remarks)
OBSE FURROW,OR ANDTYPE BOMES, BANG
FLT PATH OF WEAPON ETC.
ORIGIN

SECTIONII LOCATION
OF HOSTILE WEAPON SECTIONIII COUNTERFIRE
ACTION
L RM N 0 P Q FILL IN

NUMBER,
FROM GRID -MEANSOF TIME CALIBER |RARS TIME FIRED NO. OF RDFUZE REMARKS
AND REFERNuCE LOCATING ACTIVE (or size), C/FIRE BY ANDPROJECTILE (effect)
TIMY AND ANDTYPE
ACCURACY OF WEAPON

|"F, B5 | t s I I C| I | 5F
U 1 vn e
1/ t *o / She/t8ed' IC' Fz so°/. Fq SlrzedIZLhCe
?aO7 Fmeteps /2 5 /?/r
I'adel 0o&o /3oe Aotj 5'0. yT oP* I
DA Form 2185-R.1 NOV 58

Figure 15. Artillery counterfire information form (may be reproduced

locally) showing location of a hostile weapon and action taken.

AGO 2696B 149

 (3) Item N, means of loca!ting. The source of the information
such as sound, flash, radar, air, or OP is entered in this
item.
(4) Item 0, time active. The time the hostile weapon was
active, including the date if not current, is contained in
this item.
(5) Item P, number, caliber (or size), and type of weapon.
This item contains the number of weapons located, caliber
(or size), and type (guns, howitzers, mortars, or missile).
(6) Item Q, remarks. Any additional information of pertinent
nature, such as observation or determination of construc-
tion of emplacements, location of truck park, activity, or
the effects of fire is entered in item Q. Radar ranging
reports will normally include the coordinates of the impact
area.
b. Section III, Counterfire Action. This section is completed by
the S3 (FDO) after counterfire has been directed against the hostile
weapon's location. This section includes the time of counterfire,
the unit firing, the number of rounds fired (including the fuze and
projectile used), and remarks concerning the effect of the fire.

210. Transmission
All item headings should be included to prevent repetitions of
transmissions to determine whether they are purposely omitted or
overlooked.
a. The shelling report shown in figure 14 may be transmitted as
follows:
SHELREP
ALFA OSCAR PAPA 1
BRAVO 36,5478
CHARLIE GRID AZIMUTH FLASH 1438 MILS
DELTA 1250
ECHO 1255
FOXTROT UNKNOWN
GOLF 2 UNKNOWN
HOTEL UNKNOWN
INDIA 18 UNKNOWN
JULIETT 8 SECONDS
KILO UNKNOWN
b. The radar location shown in figure 15 may be transmitted as
fbllows:
LIMA 1ST HOW BN, 16TH ARTY, RADAR 1257
MIKE 478,6'75 100 METERS
NOVEMBER RADAR
OSCAR 1255
PAPA 1 UNKNOWN
QUEBEC ARE;A SHELLED 490650

150 AGO 2696B

Section VI. LOCATION OF HOSTILE GUNS AND HOWITZERS BY
CRATER ANALYSIS
211. Gun and Howitzer Shell Crater Analysis
a. The direction of flight of a projectile can be determined with
reasonable accuracy from its crater or ricochet furrow. By locating
the crater accurately and measuring the direction of flight of the
projectile, the azimuth of a ray that will pass through or near the
actual artillery position can be obtained. The position area of a
battery may be located by plotting the intersection of the average
back azimuths from two or more widely separately groups of craters
from shells determined to have been fired by the same battery. It
is possible to determine the direction to a battery with fair accuracy
from the back azimuth obtained from one crater or ricochet furrow.
b. In crater analysis, the differences in slopes of fall, burst pat-
terns of the projectiles, directions of flight, and settings of time
fuzes will all aid in distinguishing between hostile artillery units
firing on a given area.
212. Value of Analysis
By analyzing of shell craters, it is possible to-
a. Verify, as confirmed locations, suspected locations that have
been obtained by other means.
b. Detect the presence and approximate location of enemy bat-
teries not previously suspected.
c. Obtain an early indication of the general location or direction
of active enemy artillery.
d. Assist in accomplishing counterbattery intelligence missions.
e. Detect the presence of new types of enemy weapons, new cali-
bers (sizes), or new methods of manufacture of ammunition.
213. Inspection of Shelled Areas
Inspection of shelled areas should be made as soon as possible
after the shelling. Reverse slopes, folds in the terrain, hedgerows,
and buildings in shelled areas offer opportunities for finding rico-
chet furrows and other markings.
214. Survey for Crater Location
The area must be located with sufficient accuracy for plotting on
the appropriate chart, map, or aerial photograph. Deliberate sur-
vey methods are not essential; inspection, or inspection and short
traverse, using the aiming circle for direction and pacing for dis-
tance, is sufficient.
AGO 2696B 151
 215. Determindlion of Directfin I
a. Pattern. A clear pattern produced on the ground by the det-
onating shell gives an indication of the general direction from which
the shell came.
b. tactorsAffecting Pattern.
(1) It must be kept in mind that due to irregularities of ter-
rain and soil cpndiions, the typical shell crater pattern
is the exception, not the rule. The principal parts of the
pattern caused by fragmentation are the marks from. side
spray. There is much less effect from nose spray. Base
spray is negligible with projectiles of guns and howitzers
but appreciable in the case of mortars. The width, angle,
and density of the side spray pattern varies with different
types of projectiles,. the angle of impact, and the projec-
tile's terminal velocity.
(2) In determining direction, consideration miust be given to
the effect of stones, vegetation, stumps, roots, variations
in density and type of soil, and the slope of the terrain
at the point of impact. Out of any group, only those
craters most clearly defined and most typical should be
utilized.
c. Marks on Vegetation arnd Other Subjects. The direction from
which a round was fired often is indicated by marks left as it passes
through trees, snow, arid walls. However, the possibility of deflec-
tion of the shell upon its first impact with such objects should be
kept in mind, and-emidence of such deflection should not be over-
looked.
d. Drift and Wind Effects. Drift and lateral wind effect do not
materially change the direction of the shell's axis during flight, as
the rapidly rotating shell is a type of gyroscope. Usually the rico-
chet furrow, or other path, will be parallel to the plane of fire except
when obviously deflected in azimuth.
e. Ricochet Furrows.
(1) Ricochet furrows usually furnish the best information.
The average direction of a few good furrows from the
same battery will give a -line that passes fairly close to
the battery position. Great care must be taken to deter-
mine that the shell was not deflected before or while mak-
ing this furrow. At the point where a ricochet changes
from a descending to an ascending path, it will often
change directionof flight.
(2) Carefuly remove lcose dirt from the furrow by hands,
leaving the smooth:, hard channel intact. Drive a stake

152 AGO 2696B

 or survey pin at each end of the usable st.raight.part of
the furrow. Set the stakes straight and just ;touching the
.center line of the channel on the same side. These stakes
represent the line of fire, the azimuth of which may be
measulred with an aiming circle (fig. 16).
f. Fuze-Quick Craters.
(1) At small angles of fall, fuze-quick craters furnish infor-
mation nearly as accurate as that from -ricochet furrows.
Judging the direction of the trajectory increases in diffi-
culty with an increase in angle of impact; theriefore, more
craters must be analyzed. If the angle of impact is small
or moderate, the crater generally is pear-shaped. If the
angle of impact is larger, the crater generally is oval with
the least diameter in the direction of flight.
(2) Direction of flight can be found by- . .,
(a) Groove in ground where shell entered (fig.:' 17). Place
a stake in center of channel. Place a second stake on
opposite side of crater. Sight along these to obtain back
azimuth as with ricochet furrows. Position of fuze
tunnel or groove may give a good indication of direction
of fire.
(b) Use of-side spray (hatchet stroke) shown by dirt and
cut.grass. Place a stake near the end of each side spray
(hatchet stroke) that will divide the spray in half (fig.
18). Place the aiming circle as accurately as possible
over the center of the crater and measure the angle be-
tween the stakes. The bisector of this angle is the ap-
proximate line of fire, and its back azimuth can be
determined.

Shell cuts path

though grass Stake set here Aiming circle set up in line with the
2 stakes then measure the established
Groove azimuth of the line of fire

Togun

Stake sethere'

Only initial straight portion used

Shell skids along Effect of
the ground usually air burst
changing direction

Figure 16. Typical ricochet markings.

AGO 2696B 153

 Usually indication Occasionally mark left by fuse at
of side spray front of crater but mark left by
Occasionally slight shell fragments might confuse
evidence of shell evidenceshell circle set up in line with the
oAiming
entering baseof crater 2 stakes then measure the established
Range pole \ _ \ back azimuth of the line of fire
sighted in here - - \ _

Stake set here or Stake set up here

here or both
Area burned by powder shows In deep craters in soft soil, location of
if loose dirt is cleaned out fuse or fuse fragments may give
/A excellent indication of direction
Crater wider than long
Figure 17. Schematic shell crater, fuze-quick.

Aiming circle is set up

here to measure side
spray angle Side spray stake

\ Side spray

- ' °Pt/Line of flight stake set here

Stake set here 'L_,h-
or here
e ,/
or h r :'Fuse leaves at front of crater

_ -- S -,,94 B-- To gun

bi Aiming circle set up in line with
/ gR1\ 5i\Po· er burnt basin the 2 stokes 1henmeasure the
_~ \i11 v
/<!~~ ~ established bac& azilnuti of the
Shell entering base of Side spray line of fire
crater sometime shows

-- -Side spray stoke

Bisecting angle of side
spray gives indication
of line of flightAverage -Average azimuth
azimuth
from these
Figure18. Determinationof direction by side spray.

(c) The average of the back azimuths obtained from (a)

and (b) above, will be more dependable than from either
method alone.
g. Deep Craters. Least reliable directions are derived from deep
craters. However, in soft soil, good approximate directon can be
obtained if a nose fuze has been employed. A nose fuze will form
a tunnel in prolongation of the shell's line of flight. A line of fire
can be established from this tunnel in conjunction with other char-
acteristics. The crater pattern ordinarily will be oval with the least
diameter indicating direction of fire.

154 AGO 2696B

 Section VII. LOCATION OF HOSTILE MORTARS BY
CRATER ANALYSIS
216. Mortar Shell Crater Analysis
Mortar shell crater analysis parallels that of gun and howitzer
shell crater analysis. It is difficult sometimes to differentiate be-
tween the craters of light howitzer and mortar projectiles.
217. Appearance of Craters
The appearance of a typical mortar crater is characterized by
the following:
a. At the front edge (one farthest from mortar position) of the
crater, the turf is undercut (fig. 19) while the back edge is shorn
of growth and grooved or streaked by splinters.

Plan view
i.~,_.
a., G o ~A Line of flight

Front of
crater

Side view of above

a. Hard, burnt inner crater

b. Fuse tunnel
C.Undercut front edge
JdSplinter grooves
Figure 19. Schematic mortar crater.

AGO 2696B 155

 b. When fresh, the crater is covered with loose earth which must
be removed carefully to disclose the firm, burnt, inner crater (fig.
19).
c. The fuze buries itself in the bottom of the inner crater in front
of the point of detonation (fig. 19). In soft ground the fuze will
bury itself to a considerable depth along the line of the trajectory.
d. The ground around the crater is streaked by splinter grooves.
all of which radiate from the point of detonation (fig. 19). The
pattern of these grooves depends on the angle of fall and the type
of soil. The ends of the splinter grooves on the rear side of the
crater frequently will be on an approximately straight line. This
line will be perpendicular to the line of flight when on level ground
or on slopes with contours perpendicular to the plan of fire (fig. 19).

218. Determining Direction to Mortars

Three methods may be used to determine the line of flight from
a mortar crater.
a. Drive a stake in the crater with the top at the intersection
point of splinter grooves (fig.. 20). Carefully remove loose dirt and
look for fins and fuze fragments. Do not disturb the firm sides of
the fuze tunnel; the latter is useful is determining direction. Lay
a stick along the line from the fuze or tunnel to the stake above.
Measure the azimuth of the stick. This is the approximate azimuth
to the mortar.
b. Lay one stick along the ends of the splinter grooves on the
side of the crater toward the hostile mortar and place another stick
at right angles to the first (fig. 20). Measure azimuth of the second
stick.
c. When a definite and regular crater is formed, a stick can be
laid across it along the main axis, that is, dividing the crater into
symmetrical halves. The stick so laid points in the direction of the
mortar (fig. 20).
d. The value of each method described above depends upon the
type and conformation of the ground. It usually will be found that
direction is best determined by a combination of all methods.
e. Determination of the angle of fall (fig. 21) is a valuable aid
in arriving at the range to the hostile weapon. If the fuze hole is
deep and well defined, a long, straight stick should be placed in the
center of the fuze tunnel to reconstruct the terminal portion of the
trajectory of the projectile. With the stick properly placed in the
fuze tunnel, a protractor and plumb bob may be used to measure
the angle of fall. For more accurate results, the mean angle of fall
from a number of craters made by'the same weapon should be used.

156 AGO 2696B

 a~~~ ~Direction
~--.?-,'-:to
'S mortar

I 0 Locating point of detonation

O0 Direction
to mortar

t Direction from splinter grooves

", -"Stick"oDirection _Stick

· ~-~,
, :~:~~~~ ~ to mortar

( Direction from general shape

Figure 20. Determination of the line of flight from a mortar crater.

AGO 2696B 157

 Protractor
Long stake O
inserted in 90
fuse hole Angle of fall

Plumb bob

Stake

Figure 21. Determining angle of fall from a mortar crater.

f. When only one azimuth to the mortar position can be deter-

mined, the range to the position may be found from the angle of
fall (e above) and the type and caliber of weapon are determined
from identification of shell fragments and tail fins. In order to use
this system, counterfire personnel must have available to them the
firing table of the hostile weapons involved.

158 AGO 2696B

 CHAPTER 11
COORDINATION OF FIRE SUPPORT

Section I. GENERAL
219. General
a. Fire support is the most flexible and-one of the principal re-
sources available to the commander for influencing the outcome of
battle. The effectiveness with which he employs this resource in
support of his plan of action may be decisive. The coordination
of fire support is not a new procedure or technique; its basic prin-
ciples have existed for many years. Although established princi-
ples for the coordination of fire support do not change with the
addition of nuclear weapons, its importance is enhanced by the
increased lethality of these weapons.
b. The fire support coordination center (FSCC) is the agency
charged with the accomplishment of fire support coordination at
corps and division. At field army, the fire support section of the
tactical support coordinating agency accomplishes the coordina-
tion of fire support. Establishment of FSCC's at echelons below
division is dependent on the responsibility and functions of the
echelon, the tactical situation, and the desires of the commander.
Normally fire support coordination functions at lower echelons
are exercised informally by the personnel involved through close
liaison, frequent meetings, and flexible communications.
c. This chapter establishes principles, responsibilities, and rela-
tionships, and outlines procedures for planning, coordinating, and
integrating the fires of all weapons of the Army, Navy, and Air
Force employed in support of ground combat operations.
d. The principles, responsibilities, relationships, and procedures
outlined in this chapter are designed to insure maximum results
in the employment of fire support means to support an operation.

220. Principles
a. The supported or force commander, through combat orders,
policies, priorities, or individual decisions employs all fire support
available to his command.
b. The fire support coordinator is the senior artillery officer at
each echelon.
AGO 2696B 159
 c. The organization and procedure for the coordination of fire
support provides for the following:
(1) Adequate control and supervision by the force or sup-
ported commander.
(2) Concentration of fire support means upon any target or
targets.
(3) Distribution of effective fire on several targets
simultaneously.
(4) Prompt attack on targets of opportunity.
(5) Modification of the fire support plan when necessary'to
meet unf6'reseeifibr ,chdn:ihkAiituattohAs.
d. Primary consideration is given to6furfiish'fiig the type of fiire'
support requested.
e. Fire missions are assignedto or requested of the agency that-
can deliver most effectiyely-the required fire within the required
time. When ammunition, tactical, security, 'and"coor'dination per-
mit, the most economical means for delivery of 'fire is used.
f. Coordination must be effected rapidly and decisively in the
attack of targets of opportunity. Fires on such tar'gets 'iuually are
delivered by the most readily available effectivemeans.
g. Fire support missions are accomplished by the lowest eche-
lon which has the necessary means available. Wheni'appropriate
means are not available, assistance is requested from higher..
echelons.
h. Fire support is coordinated at each echelon to the degree to
which it is involved in the mission. Final action isi accomplished
at the lowest echelon which can effect complete coordination of
the fire support mission.
i. The necessary precautions to safeguard friendly troops, air-
craft, vessels, and installations from friendly fires are implement-
ed at each echelon where fire support is coordinated.
j. A common system of target designation must be employed by
all participating fire support agencies.
221. Responsibilities
a. Supported or Force Commander. Coordination of fire sup-
port is a command responsibility. The supported or force com-
mander is responsible for the coordination of all available shp-
porting fires-with each other and with the operations of his
command-and makes basic decisions concerning thae coordination-
of lire support.
b. Fire Support Coordinator. The senior artillery officer at each

160 AGO 2696B '

echelon is the fire support coordinator and principal adviser to the
commander on fire support matters. He is responsible to the com-
mander for the details of fire support coordination, preparation
of the fire support plan, and supervision of its execution. He es-
tablishes and supervises the operation of the fire support coordi-
nation agency.
c. Assistant Chief of Staff, G3 (S3). The G3 (S3) of the force
or supported unit has general (unit) staff responsibility for the
coordination of fire support.
222. Relationships
a. The fire support coordinator effects close coordination with
the G3 (S3) on fire support matters and in the preparation of the
fire support plan.
b. When artillery is assigned or attached to the supported unit
or force, the. artillery officer is both a subordinate commander and
a special staff officer (par. 16). As fire support coordinator,. his
relationship with the force commander is that of a special staff
officer.
c. When artillery is in direct support (par. 59b), the artillery
commander is under the command of the next higher artillery
commander, and his relationship with the supported commander.
is that of an adviser on fire support matters. He discharges the
functions of fire support coordination in a manner similar to a
special staff officer. The assignment of a direct support mission
requires the commander to function as fire support coordinator
for the supported unit. Likewise, the artillery liaison officer repre-
sents the direct support artillery commander at armored infantry
and armor battalion level.

Section II. THE FIRE SUPPORT COORDINATION CENTER

223. Definition
The fire support coordination center is an operating agency of
the force or supported unit co(m'mander in which-the representa-
tives of the force or supported unit and fire support agencies work
together to plan and coordinate fire support. This agency pro-
vides for effective utilization of the fire support means, including
the timely attack of targets and shifting of fires in accordance
with the plans and needs of the force or supported unit.
224. Functions
The personnel of the fire support coordination center-
a. Continually make plans, and allocate, coordinate, and inte-
AGO 2696B 161
grate the several fire support means in accordance with the di-
rectives, policies, and priorities of the supported or force com-
mander to most effectively support the plan of operations of the
force or supported unit.
b. Make detailed analyses of potential nuclear targets.
c. Evaluate and coordinate the requests received for additional
supporting fires.
d. Prepare and coordinate requirements for fire support; coordi-
nate and initiate requests for and direct additional supporting
fires when required.
e. Keep the force (unit) commander and staff informed of the
capabilities of, and actual support rendered by, the fire support
agencies.
f. Advise the force (unit) commander and staff as to the most
efficient and effective employment of the available fire support.
g. Prepare the fire support plan, based on the commander's
policies, plans, and priorities, and coordinate the separate fire
plans in accordance with the plan of maneuver or scheme of
defense.
h. Recommend and implement approved policies concerning
safety measures to protect friendly troops, aircraft, vessels and
installations from friendly fires.

225. Establishment
Fire support coordination functions exist and are accomplished
at all combat echelons. Fire support coordination centers are es-
tablished at these'levels when and with the degree of organiza-
tion that the functions and responsibilities of the level dictate.
226. Location
The location of the FSCC is designated by the force or support-
ed unit commander. At division level it should habitually be lo-
cated at the main command post in close proximity to the G2-G3
sections. In the selection of the command post, consideration is
given to the requirement for reliable communication between the
FSCC and fire support agencies. Procedures must provide for con-
tinuous operation of the FSCC during displacements.
227. Composition
The size and composition of the FSCC is determined by the com-
mander concerned, and may vary to meet the needs of the situa-
tion. In the planning phase of an operation, the FSCC may be
enlarged to expedite the handling of the mass of details involved
in the planning and coordination of fire support. During the

162 AGO 2696B

operation the FSCC may be reduced to the minimum size required
to implement the detailed plans, to effect departure from the de-
tailed plans to meet unforeseen situations, and to engage targets
of opportunity promptly. A typical FSCC may include, in addition
to the fire support coordinator or his representative, the follow-
ing personnel:
a. The G3 (S3) air.
b. The G2 (S2) air or his representative.
c. Representatives from each fire support agency supporting the
unit or force.
d. Target intelligence personnel.
e. Target analysis personnel.
f. Other advisers as required (e.g., chemical officer).
g. Supporting operations and communications personnel.
228. Communications
a. Reliable communication must be established by using exist-
ing facilities where possible, between the FSCC and-
(1) The FSCC's at higher and lower echelons.
(2) The force or supported unit.
(3) The artillery (FDC).
(4) Other fire support agencies.
b. Communication between FSCC's and from then to the sup-
ported unit or force is a command responsibility.
c. The fire support coordinator supervises the establishment of
communication and the internal arrangement of communication
equipment within the FSCC.
d. Each fire support agency and each staff section represented
in the FSCC is furnished the necessary means of communication
and operating personnel by its parent unit.
229. Duties of Personnel
Generally, the duties performed by personnel in the FSCC are
the same at higher and lower echelons. The duties of personnel
of a division FSCC are listed below.
a. The Division Fire Support Coordinator-
(1) Is responsible for establishing the FSCC and supervising
and coordinating the activities of its personnel.
(2) Supervises the preparation of fire support plans and the
planning, allocation, coordination, and execution of all
supporting fires.
AGO 2696B 163
 (3) Reviews fire plans to insure that--
(a) Nuclear, and: nonhuclear fires are fully coordinated.
(b) Unnecessary duplication of fires is eliminated.
(c) The plans of the various fire support agencies are
coordinated.
(d) Adequate fires are planned on targets and critical
areas.
(e) Troop safety criteria are met.
(f) Maximum effective use is being made of fire support
means.
(g) The plans can be implemented with the fire support
means available to the division. If not, he coordinates:
with G3 to secure additional means, or affects modifi-
cations in the plans.
(4) Is responsible for establishing division nuclear safety
lines.
b. The Division Artillery Assistant Executive O/ficer-
(1) Is the principal assistant to the fire support coordinator.
(2) Performs duties as directed by the fire support
coordinator. :
(3) Represents the fire suipport coordinator in his absence.
c. The Division Artillery Operations Representative-
(1) Prepares the fire support plan and the nuclear fire plan;
integrates fire plans and the fire support plan.
(2) Keeps the personnel of the FSCC informed of-
(a) The fire capabilities of the artillery.
(b) The artillery fire support actually rendered.
(3) Provides the division artillery,' fire' direction - center
(FDC) with timely information concerning requirements
for artillery fire support.
(4) Assists thefire support coordinator in determining the
method and priority.of attack of targets.
(5) Is responsible for maintaining of the situation map and
necessary operational records.
(6) Makes estimates as to the most effective means of attack-
ingtargets.
(7) Is responsible for the detailed target analysis of potential
nuclear targets.
:(8): Recommends nuclear safety lines.
(9) Provides pr'edictiohs of the radioactive fallout from
' friendly nuclear weapons.
d. The Division Artillery Intelligence Representative--
(1) Performs functions pertaining to target intelligence.

~164 ' ' iAGO 2696B

 (2) Keeps FSCC personnel informed of the current status
of appropriate targets confronting the division.
(3) Makes estimates of the damage to targets that have been
attacked.
(4) Informs FSCC personnel of intelligence and information
received from artillery sources.
(5) Maintains appropriate target intelligence records, files,
maps, and overlays.
e..The Division G3 Air-
(1) Represents the division G3 in the FSCC.
(2) Keeps personnel of the 'FSCC informed of the tactical
situation; the plan of action. of the division, and any con-
templated changes in the plan.
(3) Keeps the G3 informed of the situation pertaining to fire
support.
(4) Maintains close contact with G3 air and S3 air officers at
higher and lower echelons on matters pertaining to tac-
tical air support.
(5) Coordinates requests received from subordinate units for
air support.
(6) Prepares the division daily requirement for preplanned
air support in coordination with other members of the
FSCC, indicating the priority of each requirement, and,
after approval, forwards the statement of requirements
to the corps G3 air.
(7) Assists in the preparation of the air support and nuclear
support portions of the fire support plan.
(8) Assists in the preparation of the nuclear fire plan.
(9) Prepares the air fire plan; assists in the coordination of
the air fire plan with other fire plans; assists in the inte-
gration of the air fire plan and the fire support plan.
(10) Forwards approved requests for immediate air support
direct to the fire support coordinating agency at field
army headquarters.
(11) Coordinates air missions with other supporting fires;
e.g., arranges with other members of the FSCC for flak
suppression fires,, target marking by artillery or naval
gunfire, and suppression of friendly fires as necessary.
(12) Coordinates with the air liaison officer (ALO) and makes
recommendations to the fire-support coordinator for the
use of air alert aircraft.
(13) Maintains appropriate records pertaining to air fire
support.
AGO 2696B 165
 (14) Coordinates bomb line changes recommended by subordi-
nate units and submits them to corps FSCC or, in emer-
gencies, direct to the fire support coordinating agency at
field army.
f. The Division G2 Air (or His Representative)-
(i) Represents the G2.
(2) Prepares preplanned requests for tactical air reconnais-
sance for submission to corps G2 air.
(3) Coordinates requests for immediate tactical air recon-
naissance missions and forwards these requests direct to
the fire support coordinating agency at field army.
(4) Maintains appropriate records pertaining to aerial recon-
naissance missions requested by and executed for the
division.
(5) Coordinates with G2 air officers at higher echelons on
matters pertaining to aerial reconnaissance and aerial
photography.
(6) Coordinates with the division artillery intelligence repre-
sentative and the division G2 on matters pertaining to
reconnaissance, surveillance, and aerial photography by
divisional units.
(7) Recommends to G2, after coordination with the division
artillery intelligence representative, the distribution of
aerial photographs.
(8) Coordinates with the division artillery intelligence repre-
sentative on target intelligence requirements for photo-
graphic interpretation.
(9) Keeps FSCC personnel informed of the enemy situation,
enemy capabilities, and weather and terrain affecting
operations.
(10) Coordinates aerial reconnaissance missions with support-
ing fires; e.g., arranges with other members of the FSCC
for flak suppression fires and restrictions of friendly
fires as necessary.
(11) Monitors the spot report receiver system.
(12) Establishes target plans and programs in coordination
with the division artillery commander or his operations
or intelligence representative.
g. The Division Tactical Air Liaison Officer (ALO)-
(1) Advises the division commander and staff, including the
fire support coordinator, on matters pertaining to air
operations.
(2) Provides technical assistance in formulating require-

166 AGO 2696B

 ments for tactical air missions, including assistance to
the G3 air in preparing the air fire plan.
(3) Keeps personnel of the FSCC informed of air support
missions in the division area.
(4) Monitors the coordination of ground fire and friendly
air operations.
(5) Receives information from reconnaissance or other tacti-
cal aircraft for transmission to interested ground force
elements.
(6) Obtains forward air controllers required by the division.
(7) Supervises the activities and assignments of forward air
controllers allocated to the division.
(8) Allocates flights, in accordance with the requests of G3
air, to forward air controllers for further direction onto
targets during periods when aircraft have been allotted
to the division and at such other times as authorized.
(9) Maintains liaison with the ALO at corps.
(10) Assists in the preparation of the air support and nuclear
support portions of the fire support plan; assists in the
preparation of the air fire plan and nuclear fire plan.
h. The Division Naval Gunfire Officer (NGFO, Army Officer)-
(1) Advises the division commander and staff, including the
fire support coordinator, on matters pertaining to naval
gunfire support.
(2) Assists in the preparation of the naval support and nu-
clear support portions of the fire support plan.
(3) Assists in the preparation of the ntuclear fire plan.
(4) Prepares the naval gunfire plan, assists in the coordina-
tion of the naval gunfire plan with other fire plans, and
assists in the integration of the naval gunfire plan and
the fire support plan.
(5) Assists, when necessary, in the transmission of firing
data between the observer and the supporting ship(s).
(6) Insures that the supporting ship (s) are informed of the
situation ashore.
(7) Disseminates intelligence obtained from naval sources to
interested agencies.
(8) Coordinates and processes requests from subordinate
units for additional naval gunfire support.
i. The Assistant Naval Gunfire Officer (Navy Officer)-Advises
the naval gunfire officer (army officer) on the techniques and capa-
bilities of naval gunfire, ammunition supply, and communication.
AGO 2696B 167
 j. The Division Staff Chemical Officer. When the division em-
ploys chemical, biological, or radiological agents, weapons, or mu-
nitions, the division staff chemical officer performs the following
duties as a member of the FSCC:
(1) Advises the division commander and staff, including the
fire support coordinator, on matters pertaining to chemi-
cal, biological, and radiological warfare (CBR).
(2) Assists in the preparation of; the fire support plan as
appropriate.
(8) Prepares the chemical, biological, and radiological fire
plans, assists in the coordination of these fire plans with
other fire plans, and assists in the integration of these
fire plans and the fire support plan.
(4) Coordinates and processes requests from lower echelons
for immediate chemical, biological, and radiological
support.
(5) Maintains appropriate records.
(6) Keeps FSCC personnel informed of the chemical, bio-
logical, and radiological situation.

Section III. PROCEDURE

230. General
a. Commander's Concept of Operation. The concept of opera-
tion is a verbal statement or graphic portrayal of a commander's
assumptions or intent in regard to an operation. The concept is
designed to give the overall picture of the operation and is includ-
ed in' plans and orders primarily for additional clarity of, purpose.
The commander's guidance and general plan for the employment
of available fire support, to include his guidance and general plan
for the employment of nuclear weapons, will be included in the
concept of operation.
(1) The commander. may announce his concept of operation
either orally or in written form. When written, the con-
cept is normally contained in paragraph 3a of the opera-
tion order (apps. I]: and III). However, if the concept is
lengthy, it may be issued as a separate annex to the op-
eration order.
(2) The fire support portion of the commander's concept of
operation is the basis for the fire support plan (c below).
b. Guidance for the Employment of Nuclear Weapons. To facili-
tate planning, the commander's basic guidance for the employ-
ment of nuclear weapons should be included in standing operating
procedure (SOP). Modifications in this guidance should be in-

168 AGO 2696B

eluded as necessary in the commander's concept of operation. The
commander's guidance for the employment of nuclear weapons
should include-
(1) The desired result of the nuclear attack. This should in-
clude the damage or casualties desired, or both.
(2) Contingent requirements: for example, no significant
fallout; target(s) to be left undamaged; etc.
(3) The degree of risk to which the commander is willing to
expose his own troops; for example, no more than negli-
gible risk to friendly troops.
(4) Degree of assurance (if other than SOP) that damage,
casualty, troop safety, and contingent requirements will
be met. Generally, there should be a high assurance that
desired results will be achieved.
c. Operation Order. The bulk of the information and instruc-
tion pertaining to fire support is contained in the fire support plan
annex to the operation order. However, the operation order does
contain sufficient information and instructions to'give the support-
ed unis 'an indication of the fire support available to them. Fire
support agencies not under the command or control of the force
commander are'rnientioned in paragraph lb of the operation order.
Fire support agencies under the force commander's control are
listed in appropriate subparagraphs of paragraph 3; as a mini-
mum, artillery organization for combat is given in paragraph 3.
d. Fire Support Plan. The fire support plan is the announce-
ment of the commander's decisions concerning the employment of
fire support. It is the coordinated and integrated plan for the
employment of all fire support available to the commander. The
fire support plan amplifies the fire support portion of the com-
mander's concept of operation (a. above) by providing specific in-
formation and instructions relative to fire support.
(1) The fire support plan is published as an annex to the
force operation order. Its form is, in general, that pre-
scribed for the operation order.
(2) Appendixes to the fire support plan annex are published
as required in whatever form is most appropriate. Listed
below are some of the' appendixes that may be required.
(a) Artillery fire plan.
(b) Naval gunfire plan.
(c) Air fire plan.
(d) Nuclear fire plan.
(e) Chemical, biological, and radiological fire plans, if com-
plicated. Normally, if these fire plans are simple, the

AGO 2696B 169

 necessary information will be included in the fire plan
of the appropriate fire support agencies.
(f) Other plans, instructions, or information, as appropri-
ate.
(3) The fire support coordinator is responsible for prepara-
tion of the fire support plan, and for insuring that the
fire plans for the various means of fire support are co-
ordinated throughout their development and use. He is
further responsible during the operational phase for the
coordinated application of fire support, but the details
of that application are the responsibility of the repre-
sentatives of the fire support agencies concerned.
231. Assignment of Missions
a. Missions are based on targets reported by forward observers,
aerial observers, other sources and agencies, or on fires called for
by the higher or supported unit or force. More than one means of
fire support may be used to attack a target.
b. In selecting the means of fire support for a particular mis-
sion, the supported or force commander and the fire support co-
ordinator may consider the following factors:
(1) Type of fire support requested or called for.
(2) Nature and characteristics of the target.
(3) Effect desired on the target, such as neutralization, de-
struction, interdiction, or harassing fires.
(4) Characteristics, capabilities and limitations of the weap-
on and its ammunition; e.g., accuracy, mobility, range,
yield, and detailed effects.
(5) The most economical means of delivery.
(6) Availability, based on allocations and established priori-
ties, of the various types of fire support means and their
ammunition supply.
(7) Relative difficulty of ammunition supply.
(8) Speed of execution.
(9) Problems of weather and terrain.
(10) Vulnerability of the means to be used.
(11) Effect on morale of enemy and friendly troops.
(12) Effect of suppression of friendly fires during an air
strike, if required.
(13) Communication facilities available.
(14) Safety of friendly troops.
(15) Predicted post-strike condition of the target area.
(16) Tactical benefits to be gained.

170 AGO 2696B

232. Operation
The coordination of fire support is effected without adversely
affecting any of the present methods used for obtaining delivery
of fire.
a. Artillery. When artillery fire is to be employed to attack a
target, the artillery commander determines whether the target is
suitable for attack by available .artillery. If the mission can be
fired by the artillery available to the echelon concerned, it is fired
in the normal manner. If other artillery fires are required, they
are requested from the next higher artillery echelon.
h. Naval Gunfire. When naval gunfire is to be employed to at-
tack a target, it is fired by the direct or general support ship (s) of
the echelon concerned using naval gunfire procedures. If addition-
al naval gunfire is required, assistance is requested of the next
higher echelon.
c. Tactical Air Support. Requests for preplanned tactical air
support are forwarded to each successive higher echelon and from
corps to the fire support coordinating agency at army. Requests
for immediate tactical air support are submitted from battle
group, armored infantry battalion, or armor battalion (combat
command or task force if request originated at this level) direct
to the division G3 air, then direct to the fire support coordinating
agency at army. Such requests are monitored by intermediate
echelons which indicate approval by remaining silent.
d. Nuclear. Nuclear fire requests are processed through com-
mand channels. Procedures are designed to insure rapid trans-
mission and delivery of requests to the commander or his repre-
sentative authorized to act on the request. Requests for nuclear
artillery fires are also sent through fire direction channels to alert
the fire direction center and to insure delivery by using a dual
transmission. The decision to employ or not to employ nuclear
weapons rests with the commander or his designated representa-
tive.

AGO 2696B 171

 CHAPTER 12
FIRE PLANNING

233. General
a. Every artilleryman must know how to plan terrestial fires
and coordinate them with the supported unit. A thorough knowl-
edge of fire planning is necessary if maximum effect is to be ob-
tained from the available artillery support. Fire planning is con-
ducted by artillery headquarters of all levels.
b. Fire planning is continuous. The detail with which artillery
fire plans are made -depends on the time available for planning,
the extent and accuracy of target locations, the type of operation
in which the supported unit or force is to be engaged, and the re-
quirements of the fire support plan of the higher echelon.
c. Fire planning does not cease with the issue of a plan but con-
tinues throughout the operation. Seldom, however, can artillery
fire planning be divorced from the employment of other support-
ing weapons. All elements of the fire support plan (ch. 11) must
be considered in preparing the artillery fire plan.
234. General Factors
The artillery supports the attack of the hostile position by-
a. Attacking enemy defensive areas and emplaced weapons.
b. Destroying hostile command, observation, and communication
installations.
c. Blocking the movement of reserves.
d. Disrupting assembled hostile armored forces.
e. Massing its fires on targets of decisive importance at the criti-
cal moments of the attack.
f. Delivering close supporting fires in accordance with the re-
quests of the supported units.
g. Protecting supported units during their periods of
reorganization.
h. Neutralizing the enemy's artillery, mortars, and similar
weapons.
235. Considerations in Fire Planning
The following factors must be considered in fire planning:
a. The mission of the supported unit.

172 AGO 2696B

 b. The concept of operation of the supported unit commander.
c. Requirementsiof the fire support plan of higher headquarters.
d. The general location, time, duration, and priority of fires
desired.
e. Information of the enemy.
f. Artillery and ammunition available.
g. Other fire support means available.
A. Artillery observation requirements.
i. Common index for terrain, as established by the force and
utilized by the artillery.
j. Emergency signal for lifting or shifting of fire.

236. Planning Process

a. General. Successful operations depend on detailed coordi-
nated plans. The planning process consists essentially of the
following:
(1) Collection of accurate target information (ch. 9).
(2) Selection of targets best suited for attack by the avail-
able artillery (ch. 10).
(3) Estimation of the artillery and ammunition needed to ob-
tain the desired effects on the target (pars. 180-182).
(4) Preparation of a detailed artillery fire plan for the em-
ployment of artillery against known targets and against
any other targets which might be discovered.
b. Battle Group Artillery Fire Planning. The fire planning con-
ducted by battle group artillery is described in detail in FM 6-18
and FM 6-21. In general-
(1) Battle group artillery bases its fire plans on the require-
ments of the division and battle group fire support plans
and the requests for fires of the supported units of the
battle group.
(2) The fires of battle group artillery having a reinforcing
mission are. planned by the reinforced unit. The fires of
division artillery units with a mission of reinforcing bat-
tle group artillery are planned by the battle group
artillery.
(3) The fires of division artillery units having a general sup-
port or general support-reinforcing mission may be
planned in detail by division artillery or may. be allotted
in bulk or in part to direct support reinforced, or battle
group artillery.
AGO 2696B ,73
 c. Battalion Fire Planning. Fire planning conducted by bat-
talions is described in detail in FM 6-101. In general-
(1) Direct support battalions develop their fire plans from
the requirements of the division fire support plan and the
supported unit's requests for fires.
(2) Fires of field artillery battalions having a reinforcing
mission are normally planned by the reinforced unit. The
fires of corps artillery battalions with.a mission of rein-
forcing a division artillery are planned by division ar-
tillery or division artillery battalions, depending on the
manner in which the reinforcing mission is being
executed.
(3) Fires of field artillery battalions having a general sup-
port mission are normally planned in detail by a higher
artillery headquarters.
(4) Fires of field artillery battalions having a general sup-
port, reinforcing mission may be planned in detail by a
higher artillery headquarters or may be allotted in bulk
or in part to the reinforced artillery unit.
d. Group Artillery Fire Planning. Artillery groups, are not re-
sponsible for the preparation of fire plans unless directed to pre-
pare fire plans by the headquarters to which they are attached.
e. Division Artillery Fire Planning. Division artillery fire plan-
ning has as its objective the coordinated field artillery fire support
of the division as a whole. Depending on the situation, fire plan-
ning may vary from the mere checking of battle group artillery or
direct support battalion fire plans in a rapidly moving situation
to the preparation of the complete and highly detailed plans re-
quired in the attack of a fortified position.
(1) A division artillery fire plan is usually initiated by plan-
ning fires for the division general support artillery on
hostile mortar locations, on targets requested by or be-
yond the range of battle group artillery or direct support
battalions, and on targets of interest to the division as a
whole. Fire plans of battle group artillery or direct sup-
port artillery battalions are coordinated, augmented
where necessary by general support and reinforcing fires,
and integrated with the fire plan for the general support
artillery.
(2) The division artillery fire plan, when completed, is re-
produced and disseminated. However, it continues to be
modified as necessary to meet changes in the situation.
f. Corps Artillery Fire Planning. Corps artillery fire planning
has as its objective the coordinated field artillery fire support of

174 AGO 2696B

the corps as a whole. Corps artillery maintains liaison and com-
munication with each division artillery within the corps to facili-
tate prompt action on requests for fire and coordination of fires of
mutual interest. In addition, liaison and communication are main-
tained laterally between corps artilleries and division artilleries
for the same purpose. Flexibility in fire planning is facilitated by
evolving both primary and alternate artillery fire plans concur-
rently from the beginning of the planning phase.
(1) Preparation of the detailed corps artillery fire plan is
initiated with fires being planned in the corps zone on
hostile battery locations, targets beyond the range of
division artillery, and targets of importance to the corps
as a whole.
(2) Artillery fires requested by lower echelons are included
in the corps artillery fire plan.
(3) The corps artillery fire plan is modified as necessary to
meet changes in the situation.
(4) An example of the checklist method of preparing a
schedule of corps artillery fires is shown in appendix IV.
g. Army Artillery Fire Planning.
(1) The army artillery is responsible for detailed fire plan-
ning for the artillery retained under army control. Be-
cause of the capabilities of army artillery, fires are
planned on targets beyond the capabilities of corps artil-
lery weapons, on targets for which fire is requested by
corps, and on targets of interest to the army as a whole.
(2) Coordination with corps must be accomplished if fires
are planned within the corps zone of responsibility or if
the corps' operations may be affected.
(3) The army artillery fire plan is coordinated by the army
artillery commander with the air fire plan, naval gunfire
plan, and nuclear fire plan.

237. Planning Procedure

a. The fire support plan is formulated by the fire support co-
ordinator (par. 221b), as directed by the supported commander.
It amplifies the fire support portion of the commander's concept of
operation (par. 230a) by providing specific information and in-
structions relative to fire support.
b. The fire support plan forms a basis for the preparation of the
artillery fire plan.
c. A good artillery fire plan, like a good organization for combat,
must-
AGO 2696B 175
 (1) Provide adequate support for the supported unit.
(2) Provide massed fires where required.
(3) Use available weapons according to their best capa-
bilities.
(4) Facilitate future operations.
238. Technique of Fire Planning
a. Definitions. The following terms used in artillery fire plan-
ning must be understood before the technique of fire planning can
be discussed:
(1) Fire plan. The tactical plan for using the weapons of a
unit so that their fire missions will be coordinated.
(2) Planned fires. Fires (concentrations) planned on areas
and targets on which a need for fire can be envisaged.
Targets or areas may include known enemy locations,
avenues of approach, suspect observation posts, suspect
weapon locations, assembly areas, critical terrain fea-
tures, industrial locations, communication centers, and
other similar installations.
(3) Prearrangedfire. Planned fire which is to be delivered
at a specified time or for which a need for rapid de-
livery is anticipated and for which firing data are pre-
pared in advance and kept current.
(4) Scheduled fires. Prearranged fires which are to be de-
livered at a specific time during the maneuver or opera-
tion of the supported force. (Time is specified in terms
of before or after H-hour or on accomplishment of a pre-
determined movement; or task.)
(5) On-call fires. Planned fires which are to be fired as re-
quested. These fires may be prearranged or may be
planned as to location only.
(6) Concentration. A volume of fire placed on an area within
a limited time, or an area designated and numbered for
future reference as a possible target.
(7) Group of fires. Two or more concentrations covering a
tactical locality too large to be covered by a single con-
centration. The concentrations within a group of fires
may be fired individually, consecutively, or concurrently.
A group of fires may,'be designated by a letter and num-
eral combination.
(8) Program of fires. Number of concentrations and/or
groups of fires that are planned on targets of a similar
nature and fired in accordance with a time schedule. An
example ' is the countermortar program planned by di-
vision artillery.

176 AGO 2696B

 (9) Series of fires. Number of concentrations or groups of
fires planned to support a maneuver phase. An example
is the series of fires planned on an objective area just
prior to the final assault. A series of fires may be indi-
cated by a code name.
(10) Preparation. Intense prearranged fire delivered in ac-
cordance with a time schedule, in support of an attack,
to disrupt the enemy's communications, disorganize his
defenses, and neutralize his fire support means. Prep-
arations commence prior to, at, or after H-hour and con-
tinue until lifted either on a prearranged time schedule
or on request of the assault elements. A preparation may
include nuclear and nonnuclear fires of naval, ground,
and air means.
(11) Counterpreparationfire. A system of intensive prear
ranged fires delivered when the imminence of the ene-
my attack is discovered. It is designed to break up ene-
my formations; disorganize the enemy's systems of com-
mand, communication, and observation; decrease the ef-
fectiveness bf his artillery preparation; and impair his
offensive spirit.
(12) Barrage. A prearranged barrier of fire designed to pro-
tect friendly troops and installations by impeding ene-
my movement across defensive lines or areas. Its nor-
mal ground use is in the establishment of prearranged
final protective fires which include coordinated employ-
ment of artillery fires, rhine fields, and other barriers,
obstacles, machinegun fire, and infantry mortar fires.
(13) Schedule of fires. A tabular or graphical presentation of
scheduled fires which is fired in a definite time sequence.
The time of starting the schedule may be on call, at a
prearranged time, or on the occurrence of a specific
event.
(14) Supporting fire. Fires delivered while the supported
troops are engaged in either the attack or the defense.
Supporting fires may be prearranged as to both time and
place (scheduled fires), or they may be prearranged as
to location only and fires :n request (on-call fires). Tar-
gets on which fires are not prearranged are known as
targets of opportunity (pars. 239 and 240).
b. Artillery Fire Plans. Artillery fire plans are prepared by
the operations personnel at each artillery echelon in accordance
with instructions relative to fire support. The fire plan has five
component parts-a graphical portion showing the planned con-
centrations, a target list, marginal information which includes
AGO 2696B 177
requests for additional fires, a schedule of fires when appropriate,
and a table of groups of fires when appropriate.
c. Detailed Steps in Preparing the Artillery Fire Plan.
(1) A list of known targets is compiled by utilizing all possi-
ble sources. Maps, photographs, enemy dispositions, and
other sources of information are used to obtain a list of
suspected targets. This information is provided to op-
erations personnel.
(2) Concurrently, the concept of operation of both the force
and the supported un.it commanders and their special
requirements for artillery fire are obtained.
(3) Operations personnel, assisted by intelligence personnel,
study targets to determine the best method of attack.
(4) Concentrations are planned to cover critical areas and
known and suspected targets within the zone of planning
responsibility.
(5) To the extent possible, fires are planned as requested by
lower echelons. However, the special requirements of the
force or supported unit commander, and of higher eche-
lons, are accepted as they are received and included in
the plan.
(6) When time permits, artillery fire plans of lower echelons
are coordinated to insure boundary coverage, eliminate
unnecessary duplication, and to insure conformity with
instructions relative to fire support.
(7) Lower artillery echelons request the next higher artillery
echelon to plan fires on specific targets or areas beyond
the capabilities of weapons available at the lower
echelons.
(8) The next higher artillery echelon supplements the ar-
tillery fire plans of lower artillery echelons with the fires
of available artillery weapons.
(9) Groups, series, and programs of fires are prepared as re-
quired by the appropriate artillery echelon.
(10) Schedules of fire are prepared when appropriate. In
scheduling fires, the capabilities of each unit are deter-
mined in terms of the targets it can attack. Considering
the artillery commander's orders and policies, the fires
of the units capable of attacking the fewest numbers of
those targets selected are scheduled to the extent of their
capabilities. This elimination process is continued until
the attack of the selected targets is scheduled. See ap-
pendix IV.
(11) Throughout the preparation of artillery fire plans, co-

178 AGO 2696B

 ordination is required with supported units; other sup-
porting agencies; and higher, lower, and adjacent ar-
tillery echelons.
239. Targets of Opportunity
Since targets of opportunity are normally fleeting in nature,
they must be taken under fire as quickly as possible. Firing on
targets of opportunity involves essentially the same considera-
tions as for prearranged fires; however, the targets are attacked
immediately as they arise. To attack these targets effectively the
time elapsing between the formation of the target and the attack
must be reduced to a minimum by-
a. Employment of adequate reconnaissance and intelligence
agencies by the commander.
b. Direct exchange of information and/or intelligence to and
from higher, lower, and adjacent units.
c. Employment of a weapon which can most quickly place effec-
tive fire on the target.
d. Having ammunition prepared and ready for use.
e. Rapid analysis of the target and prompt development of the
decision to fire, and subsequent fire order.
f. Close and continuing coordination with interested personnel
and agencies.
240. Nuclear Targets of Opportunity
a. Definition. Nuclear targets may be considered as prearranged
or targets of opportunity. Nuclear targets of opportunity have
the following characteristics:
(1) They are observed in the course of an operation and have
not been previously considered or analyzed.
(2) They have the capability of altering their characteristics
within a period of time to such an extent as to be no
longer a nuclear target. There must be some indication
that the target will retain its characteristics for the
period of time necessary to deliver a nuclear weapon.
b. Delineation Between Nuclear and Nonnuclear Targets of
Opportunity. Targets of opportunity suitable for attack by nu-
clear artillery must be differentiated from targets of opportunity
for nonnuclear field artillery weapons. These differences are dis-
cussed in c through h below.
c. Time Requirements. The time required to deliver nuclear
weapons, after the target information is available, is dependent
on three primary factors. The first of these is the time required to
AGO 2696B 179
process the information into a specific recommendation by the
staff and to permit the commander or his designated representa-
tive to arrive at a decision. If authority to employ nuclear weap-
ons is retained at higher echelons, this time element becomes sig-
nificant. The second factor is the time required after the decision
has been reached and the fire mission has been assigned to the
artillery element. The time required to compute data and prepare
the nuclear weapon for firing can be partially concurrent with
obtaining the commander's approval by issuing timely warning
orders. The third factor is the time required to warn troops and
aircraft within the radius of the weapon effects.
d. Reaction Time. The reaction time varies with the nuclear de-
livery system employed, so that a target suitable for the 280-mm
gun or the 8-inch howitzer may not be appropriate for a system
requiring a longer period of preparation. To be a valid target, a
nuclear target of opportunity must persist for a period greater
than the reaction time for the specific nuclear delivery capability.
With present nuclear delivery systems and present procedures for
processing a target, a target availability time of at least 30 min-
utes is considered necessary for the simplest and most responsive
systems. This time increases with the complexity of the system.
e. Target Size. Consideration must be given to the extreme ra-
dius of effect of nuclear weapons and the area of terrain affected
by these weapons. In this connection, nonnuclear artillery has the
flexibility necessary to attack targets occupying very small areas
as well as those occupying larger areas; the larger areas require
multiple units and a heavy expenditure of ammunition with a
comparatively low order of "target kill." Conversely, nuclear
weapons used to attack small area targets risk an expensive over-
kill. Therefore, the amount of terrain or area occupied by the
target becomes an important consideration in using nuclear
weapons.
f. Target Density. The target should be populated with enough
enemy military personnel and materiel so that the destructiveness
of the nuclear capability will be realized to the desired maximum.
Density becomes a critical factor in evaluating nuclear targets
when the objective is to destroy personnel or materiel. The den-
sity of a target may be more important than its size in considering
its suitability as a nuclear target, since density within a target in-
creases the effectiveness of nonnuclear artillery as well as nuclear
artillery.
g. Tactical Importance. Certain targets may possess sufficient
tactical importance to warrant attack by nuclear weapons without
regard for the size or density of the target. For example, an ene-

180 AGO 2696B

my nuclear delivery means may pose such a threat to the opposing
commander that it becomes an immediate target of opportunity.
Other examples are an attacking force in process of a break-
through that will jeopardize an entire operation; a denial opera-
tion concerned with contamination or barriers rather than per-
sonnel; a beachhead or bridgehead situation threatened with cer-
tain disaster by an identifiable force.
h. Target Information. The timely acquisition of target infor-
mation is essential to enable the commander to properly influence
the action with his available nuclear firepower. All available
sources of information must be fully exploited. In contrast to tar-
gets of opportunity for nonnuclear artillery, visual identification
of a nuclear target of opportunity will be more difficult and will
usually require corroborating information. The artillery forward
observer and the aerial observer are located to provide early infor-
mation of observed enemy activity which may indicate personnel
concentrations or installations suitable for attack by divisional
nuclear artillery. A single observer may be incapable of provid-
ing all of the information required by the commander or his desig-
nated representative in making a decision to employ nuclear weap-
ons; however, his reports constitute a primary source of informa-
tion and at times, as in the case of an enemy breakthrough, may
be the only reliable source of information available.
241. Flak Suppression
Flak suppression missions may be fired by artillery on request
of appropriate tactical air commanders to reduce interference
with close air support missions. These fires must be prearranged
to insure engagement of all known enemy air defense artillery
positions within range of artillery fire. Air force flak intelligence
agencies furnish the target data to appropriate, artillery com-
manders. Requests for and coordination of flak suppression mis-
sions are conducted through the air-ground operations system.
242. Field Artillery Support for Offensive Operations
The artillery fire plan for offensive operations may consist of
a preparation and subsequent fires supporting the attack. The
preparation is normally delivered during the period prior to the
advance of the attacking echelons from their line of departure and
may continue for a short time thereafter.
a. Preparation.
(1) Fires planned for the preparation are usually limited to
known targets and to areas that are strongly suspected
of containing remunerative targets. Targets located dur-
ing the firing of a preparation are engaged by unsched-
AGO 2696B 181
 uled delivery units or by delivery units firing on targets
of lesser immediate importance to the accomplishment of
the mission. Deletion of scheduled fires should be fully
coordinated consistent with the threat imposed and time
available for coordination.
(2) The commander of the attacking force determines wheth-
er there is to be a preparation and its duration. He
considers-
(a) Whether the probable effect of the preparation will
justify the attendant loss of surprise.
(b) Available artillery and the supply of ammunition.
(c) The number of remunerative targets that can be lo-
cated in time to prepare and assign fires.
(d) Whether the effect sought can be accomplished before
the enemy can change his major tactical dispositions
in time to meet the attack. This is of particular im-
portance where nuclear fires are delivered in conjunc-
tion with an exploitation.
(3) Preparations may be divided into phases to permit con-
centration of fires successively on the various types of
targets. The numbe:r, order, and length of phases are
varied to fit the particular situation. Safety measures
for aircraft may require a separate phase for attack of
targets by tactical air. The following example is gen-
eral in nature and does not preclude firing or scheduling
fires on any type of target during any phase:
(4) The approximate time length of a nonnuclear prepara-
tion can be determined by considering the number of
known targets, the planning time for each target, the
number of available field artillery battalions, and the ar-
tillery commander's policy concerning the number of
battalions to use in attacking each target. Planning time
includes the length of time required to fire on a target,
plus the time to shift to a new target. The commander's
policy is the number of battalions to fire on a target; for
example, he may prescribe that 1 medium and 1 heavy
battalion fire on each target in the preparation. In this
case, the policy figure is 2. The formula used is-
Time length (number of tgts X planning time X policy)
of preparation = number of battalions X 1.3
The same formula may be used to find the number of tar-
gets that can be attacked during a preparation of a
specified length. In determining the number of targets,
the 1.3 factor in the formula is disregarded. By substi-
tuting "number of batteries" for "number of battalions"

182 AGO 2696B

 in his formula, it may be used when the commander's
policy is expressed in terms of batteries.
(a) First phase. Corps and army artillery, reinforced as
required by elements of division artillery, execute
counterbattery fires to gain superiority over the hostile
artillery. Units not required for counterbattery fires
interdict routes and neutralize enemy command, com-
munication, and observation systems. Division artil-
lery executes countermortar fires.
(b) Second phase.
1. Corps and army artillery maintain counterbattery
neutralization fires and initiate medium and long-
range interdiction fires. The remaining corps and
army artillery fire on command and communication
centers and reinforce division artillery as required.
2. Division artillery maintains countermortar neutrali-
zation. Reinforced as necessary, division artillery
neutralizes enemy command, communication, and
observation facilities, neutralizes defensive areas,
weapons, reserves, and assembled mechanized units;
and destroys obstacles.
3. Battle group artillery neutralizes enemy communica-
tion and observation facilities, defensive areas, and
weapons.
(c) Third phase.
1. Corps and army artillery continue to maintain coun-
terbattery neutralization fires. Units not required
for counterbattery fires reinforce division artillery
in neutralizing enemy defensive areas and observa-
tion.
2. Division artillery delivers massed fires successively
on defensive areas in the forward portion of the en-
emy position with priority to known defensive ele-
ments that most seriously threaten the success of
the supported unit's attack.
3. Battle group artillery continues neutralization fires
with priority to those defensive elements which
most seriously threaten the success of the supported
unit's attack.
b. Fires Supporting the Attack.
(1) Fires planned in support of the attack are shifted in con-
formity with the movements of the supported unit(s).
Fires are planned in the form of concentrations, groups
of fires, and series of fires to be fired on a time schedule
or on call.
AGO 2696B 183
 (2) Fires supporting the attack are planned by each echelon
to-
(a) Assist the advance of the supported units by attacking
targets as required.
(b) Assist the supported units in gaining fire superiority
on each successive objective so that the assault eche-
lons can close to assaulting distance.
(c) Protect the supported units during periods of reor-
ganization.
(d) Assist in breaking up enemy counterattacks. When
likely assembly areas and routes for enemy counter-
attacks can be determined, concentrations are planned
to be fired on call.
(e) Continue the neutralization of hostile observation.
(f) Continue the neutralization of hostile artillery, mor-
tars, and automatic weapons.
(g) Prevent the enemy from reinforcing, supplying, or dis-
engaging his forces.
(h) Disrupt the enemy's command and communication
systems.
243. Field Artillery Support for Defensive Operations
a. General. For planning purposes, defensive fires are divided
into the following four categcries:
(1) Fires delivered before the enemy forms for the attack.
(2) Counterpreparation.
(3) Fires during the enemy attack.
(4) Fires in support of the counterattack or in support of
limited offensive action associated with the counter-
attack.
b. Fires Delivered Before the Enemy Forms for Attack. Fires
delivered before the enemy forms for the attack include interdic-
tion and harassing fires that will force the enemy into early de-
ployment and fires in support of covering forces and outposts.
(1) Harassing and interdiction fires are usually planned by
division, corps, and army artilleries.
(2) Fires in support of a covering force are usually planned
by the highest artillery echelon with that force. Addi-
tional fire support by the artillery with the general out-
post force and with the main defensive force is planned
to cover the withdrawal of the covering force.
(3) Fires in support of the general outpost force are usually
planned by the artillery with that force. Additional fires
by the artillery with the main defensive force may be

184 AGO 2696B

 planned in support of the general outpost force and will
be planned to cover its withdrawal.
(4) Artillery supporting a covering force or general outpost
force will usually fire from forward positions to prevent
disclosing to the enemy the artillery positions to be used
to support the battle area.
(5) Time of opening fire is decided by the force commander
except for fires in support of a covering force or out-
post. Premature firing will expose the artillery to neu-
tralization and may reveal the plans of the defending
force. Therefore, firing is usually confined to dangerous
or highly remunerative targets.
(6) Harassing and interdiction fires are prearranged to the
maximum extent possible. They are based on studies of
maps, terrain, road nets available to the enemy and all
available target intelligence. Targets suitable for har-
assing fires are hostile batteries, industrial installations,
assembly areas, observation posts, communication cen-
ters, command posts, and leading enemy elements. Inter-
diction fires on communication' centers, harbors, com-
mand posts, road junctions, bridges, and crossroads may
be profitable. These fires should be irregularly spaced
to prevent giving the enemy a predictable pattern of fire.
c. Counterpreparation.
(1) A counterpreparation consists of prearranged fires de-
signed to disrupt the enemy's preparations for an attack.
All the field artillery with the force is involved, but fires
are delivered only on order of the force commander. A
counterpreparation includes fires on suspected assembly
areas, enemy command and observation posts, communi-
cation centers, lines of communication, and hostile ar-
tillery positions.
(2) The general missions for the various echelons preparing
counterpreparation fires are-
(a) Corps and army artillery-Counterbattery and rein-
forcing fires and deepening the fires of the division
artillery.
(b) Division artillery-Neutralizationof known or sus-
pected enemy routes, assembly areas, and attack posi-
tions; of enemy communication, observation, and com-
mand facilities; of hostile forward elements; of known
or suspected assemblies of enemy tanks and reserves.
Divisional medium and heavy cannon artillery and
missile artillery may reinforce the corps artillery
counterbattery fires.
AGO 2696B 185
 (c) Battle group artillery-Neutralizationof enemy attack
positions, enemy observation and communications, and
the most forward hostile elements.
(3) Premature firing furnishes the enemy with counterbat-
tery data for his artillery preparation, indicates to the
enemy what areas are to be avoided in forming for the
attack, and expends, ammunition that may not be re-
placeable.
d. Fires During the Enemy Attack.
(1) If the enemy is successful in launching his attack, artil-
lery fires are delivered to break up the enemy attack for-
mations, to repel his assault on the battle area, and to
limit the enemy penetration.
(2) Planning of defensive artillery fires is centered chiefly at
battle group artillery or at the direct support artillery
battalions. Division, corps, and army artilleries plan
counterbattery fires. Division and corps artilleries also
plan fires to reinforce the final defensive fires of the bat-
tle group artillery or the direct support battalions.
e. Fires Supporting the Counterattack. Fires supporting the
counterattack are prearranged to the greatest extent practicable
and may include a preparation and fires in support of the attack
(par. 242b). Artillery fires during the counterattack are delivered
in close support of the counterattacking force to destroy the ene-
my within the penetrated area and to prevent his reinforcing the
penetrated area.

244. Nuclear Fire Support

a. General. Nuclear fire represents firepower of great magni-
tude and importance to the force commander in the accomplish-
ment of his mission. The use of this firepower may be prear-
ranged on targets capable of exercising significant impact on his
ability to accomplish the mission. While the application of com-
bat power (to include fire and maneuver) must always be coordi-
nated, the magnitude of nuclear fires are such that the commander
may utilize nuclear fires to support his maneuver elements or he
may employ his maneuver elements to exploit nuclear fires. In
either case, integration of his nonnuclear fire support, as well as
other tactical support means, is effected. Since the field artillery
provides the principal nuclear fire support available to the ground
force commander, artillery commanders and staffs at all echelons
must be thoroughly familiar with the characteristics, capabilities,
and limitations of nuclear fire support. The general character-
istics of nuclear fire support are discussed in FM 101-31. Techni-

186 AGO 2696B

cal details and tabulated effects are covered in TM 23-200 and FM
101-31A.
b. Security of Nuclear Fires. Security is of utmost importance
when nuclear fires are to be employed, since advance warning
will permit the enemy to take defensive measures which will
greatly reduce the effectiveness of the nuclear fire. Only those
units involved in the delivery of the nuclear weapon, and friendly
units affected (to include flash blindness), should be informed of
the impending nuclear burst. Notification must be given at the
latest possible time which will permit the delivery agency to ac-
complish its mission and permit the friendly troops to take neces-
sary safety measures and to adequately plan exploitation. Se-
curity of nuclear attack must be stressed in the training of all
combat troops.
c. Nuclear Fire Plan. The considerations, procedures, and gen-
eral steps in the planning process for nuclear fires are essentially
the same as those for nonnuclear field artillery fire planning (pars.
235-237). Plans for nuclear fires are normally published in a
nuclear fire plan but may be included in the fire plan of the ap-
propriate fire support agency. In any case, the nuclear and non-
nuclear fires must be carefully and fully coordinated for maximum
effect. The nuclear fire plan is normally prepared in the FSCC at
division and corps level and in the fire support section of the tac-
tical support coordinating agency at army level. The determina-
tion of suitable nuclear targets and means of attack are based on
detailed target analyses accomplished in the fire support coordina-
tion center under the supervision of the fire support coordinator.
d. Preparationof the Nuclear Fire Plan. The nuclear fire plan
is prepared in essentially the same form as the artillery fire plan
(par. 238b and c and app. III). However, the technique of nuclear
fire planning differs in the following respects:
(1) Potential nuclear targets are normally analyzed in great-
er detail than nonnuclear targets.
(2) Tick marks (FM 6-40) are used to show the location of
desired ground zero (DGZ).

AGO 2696B 187

 CHAPTER 13
FIELD ARTILLERY FIRE DIRECTION

Section I. ORGANIZATION AND OPERATION

245. General
a. This chapter covers the principles, procedures, and organiza-
tion required for field artillery fire direction at the field artillery
group, division, corps and army artillery echelons. For informa-
tion on fire direction at battery and battalion levels, see FM 6-40
for cannon type field artillery and appropriate field manuals in the
6-series for missile artillery.
b. Field artillery fire direction is the tactical employment of ar-
tillery firepower, the exercise of tactical command of one or more
artillery units in the selection of targets, the concentration or dis-
tribution of fire, and the allocation of ammunition for each mis-
sion. Fire direction also includes the methods and techniques used
in fire direction centers to convert fire missions into appropriate
fire commands.
246. Responsibilities
a. The artillery commander is responsible for artillery fires and
commands all artillery units assigned or attached to his command
but not further attached to other organizations.
(1) The army artillery commander does not command artil-
lery units assigned or attached to the corps.
(2) The corps artillery commander does not command artil-
lery units assigned or attached to the divisions. He may
exercise a degree of control over these units in the name
of and as prescribed by the corps commander. When
specifically authorized by the corps commander, the
corps artillery commander may direct the artillery with
a division to fire on targets of importance to the corps.
(3) The division artillery commander does not command ar-
tillery units assigned or attached to the battle groups.
When specifically authorized by the division commander,
the division artillery commander may direct the artillery
with the battle groups to fire on targets of importance to
the division. For additional information on battle group
artillery, see FM 6-18.

188 AGO 2696B

 b. The artillery commander establishes and operates a fire di-
rection center (FDC) to insure-
(1) Continuous, accurate, and timely artillery fire support
under all conditions of weather, visibility, and terrain.
(2) Coordination of artillery fires and integration with the
fires of other fire support means.
(3) Flexibility of artillery fires sufficient to engage all types
of targets.
(4) Prompt massing of artillery fires of all available units
in any area within range.
(5) Rapid delivery of artillery fire within the zone or sector
of the supported unit or force.
(6) Control of artillery fire through orders, policies, and
priorities and by means of adequate liaison and com-
munication.
(7) Implementation of safety measures.
(8) Target intelligence.
247. The Fire Direction Center
a. Definition. The artillery fire direction center is the element
of the artillery headquarters that consists of operations, intelli-
gence, and communication personnel and equipment by means of
which the artillery commander directs artillery fires. Details con-
cerning the operations of FDC's at battalion and lower echelons
are contained in FM 6-40 for cannon-type field artillery and in
appropriate field manuals in the 6-series for missile field
artillery.
b. Location. The need for concealment, dispersion, reliable com-
munications, access routes, and other tactical considerations in-
fluence the location for the FDC. However, 'the most important
factor in determining the location of the FDC is the requirement
to exercise control of the fires of subordinate artillery units.
c. Organization. The organization of the fire direction center is
varied to meet the requirements and conditions existing at each
echelon.
(1) Group FDC. The field artillery group ordinarily is at-
tached to another'artillery headquarters. Hence, group
FDC usually is not directly concerned with coordination
with the supported unit or with target intelligence to the
same degree as other echelons. When the group is oper-
ating as the artillery headquarters for a task force or
similar organization, the group FDC functions like a
division artillery FDC. When distances preclude effec-
AGO 2696B 189
 tive control of artillery units by corps artillery, the group
FDC may be called on to assume certain counterbattery
functions usually performed at corps artillery. In this
case, the group staff may be augmented to facilitate the
discharge of this additional responsibility. Group FDC
operates under the supervision of the S3.
(2) Division artillery FDC. Division artillery must coordi-
nate its fires closely with the supported unit and is vitally
concerned with target intelligence. In addition, it co-
ordinates the division countermortar activities. The di-
vision artillery FDC operates under the supervision of
the S3.
(3) Corps artillery FDC. The corps artillery FDC operates
in much the same manner as the division artillery FDC.
It coordinates counterbattery activities. The corps ar-
tillery FDC operates under the direct supervision of the
corps artillery executive officer.
(4) Army artillery FDC. The army artillery FDC is con-
cerned with control of the artillery units retained under
field army control and with arrangements for obtaining
target intelligence. The army artillery FDC operates
under the supervision of the army artillery S3.
d. Duties of Personnel. For duties of the artillery S2 and S3,
see paragraphs 26 and 27. Additional duties of the S3 and duties
of other members of the FDC are listed below:
(1) Artillery group S3. The duties of the artillery group S3
are to-
(a) Supervise the operation of the FDC.
(b) Receive and record data from artillery units and other
sources pertaining to artillery fire capabilities, re-
quests for fire, enemy and friendly information, and
displacement plans.
(c) Maintain an operations map or chart to include fire
capabilities, zones of fire, no-fire line, 0-0 line, bomb
line, and nuclear safety lines when appropriate and
disseminate this information to lower artillery units.
(d) Maintain an accurate ammunition record of the total
expenditures and the amount on hand for designated
artillery units.
(2) Division artillery S3.. The duties of the division artillery
S3 are to-
(a) Perform the duties in (1) above.
(b) Supervise the execution of artillery nuclear fires.
(c) Prepare countermortar plans and supervise their
execution.

190 AGO 2696B

 (d) Prepare counterbattery plans and supervise their exe-
cution when the division is operating alone.
(3) Corps artillery S3. The duties of the corps artillery S3
are to-
(a) Perform the duties in (1) and (2) (b) above.
(b) Prepare counterbattery plans and supervise their
execution.
(4) Army artillery S3. The duties of the army artillery S3
listed are to-
(a) Perform the duties in (1) and (2) (b) above.
(b) Prepare counterbattery plans and supervise their
execution.
(c) Advise the army engineer of survey requirements for
army artillery units.
(d) Maintain an operations map or chart to include the
fire capabilities of army artillery, fire capabilities of
corps artillery weapons which have nuclear capabili-
ties, no-fire line, 0-0 line, bomb line, and nuclear safe-
ty lines when appropriate.
(e) Disseminate information on no-fire lines and other
limitations on firing to army artillery units.
(f) Maintain a record of army artillery ammunition re-
ceived, expended, on hand, and available from sources
outside the army area for allocation to the army.
(5) Counterbattery intelligence officer (S2 section, corps ar-
tillery only). For duties of the counterbattery intelli-
gence officer (CBIO), see chapter 10.
(6) Countermortar intelligence officer (S2 section, division
artillery only). This officer's duties are similar to those
of the counterbattery intelligence but are related to ene-
my mortar activities (ch. 10).
(7) Photo interpreter.
(a) Locate enemy targets by study of aerial photographs.
(b) Disseminate information on targets located.
(c) Assist S2 as directed.
Communication (ch. 14).
(1) The FDC is the center of field artillery tactical communi-
cation nets. Communication is provided to higher, low-
er, and adjacent FDC's. Command and fire direction
radio nets parallel the wire nets to supplement them or
replace them entirely in rapidly moving situations or in
the event of wire failure. When necessary to augment
artillery communication systems, sole user circuits for
fire direction purposes will be provided in the division
AGO 2696B 191
 and army area communications systems. Instructions
regarding the installation and operation of communica-
tion systems are published in SOI's, SSI's, SOP's and
orders.
(2) Type communication nets available for fire direction at
field artillery group, division artillery, corps artillery,
and army artillery are discussed in chapter 14.
f. Forms, Records, Reports, and Charts.
(1) S3 section.
(a) Planning chart. The planning chart (a map or map
substitute) is a chart used with a concentration and
target overlay, a fire capabilities overlay (fig. 22), and

2 e20 2FoJ23

lL~I
~2t1~~jl6 L

Typical dead area

Figure 22. Fisre capabilitiesoverlay.

192 AGO 2696B

 copies of fire plans (artillery, air, nuclear, and naval
gunfire). It is maintained for the purpose of exercis-
ing tactical control of artillery fire.
(b) Operations chart. An operations chart is maintained
to keep abreast of the tactical situation. Overlays de-
picting the friendly and enemy situation and the fire
capabilities of the unit or units concerned and fire
plans (artillery, air, nuclear, and naval gunfire) are
used in conjunction with this chart.
(c) S3 journal. The S3 journal is a section journal in
which all incidents, messages, and orders affecting the
S3 section are recorded with an entry describing the
action taken, if any. Copies of messages and orders
sent and received and the record of fire missions are
attached to and become a part of the S3 journal. At
specific intervals the journal is closed and made a part
of the unit journal.
(d) Record of fire missions. The record of fire missions
(DA Form 2184-R) (fig. 23) is a locally reproduced
record on 101/2 x 8 inch paper which shows each fire
mission handled by the FDC. It includes for each tar-
get the concentration number, source, description, lo-
cation, unit(s) firing, time fired, type and amount of
ammunition fired, estimated effect, and other appro-
priate information.
FDC: I Corps Arty

RE C0 R D 0 F F I R E N I S S I 0 NS From: 010001 April 19

(FM 6-20)
To: 012400 April 19

CONC TIME FIRED AMMNNITION

SOURCE DESCRIPTION LOCATION ASSINED TO EFFECT
NUMER* From To Type Aouont

E Io Aobr
. i
st ated $671b9 Id
2 n 11i#S 11309 0R 18 O2 a..l ti..e
CO dillinl 70th Arty BP 6 ney
in hill 504 dlper... d

DA Form 2104-R, 1 NOV 58

Items typed in italics are for illustration purposes only

Figure 23. A type record of missions.

AGO 2696B 193

 (e) Periodic operations report. The periodic operations
report is -a report which summarizes unit activities.
It is submitted daily or as prescribed by the com-
mander. The form is normally prescribed by the com-
mander. Any item noted in the periodic operations re-
port will also be noted in the S3 journal. Therefore,
the periodic operations report is a summary of the S3
journal.
(f) Command report. The command report is a periodic
narrative summary of events from the point of view of
the commander. It; is the medium through which the
commander may record, review, and evaluate the over-
all activities of his command. The report is prepared
under the supervision of the S3, but must be signed
by the organization commander (SR 525-45-1).
(2) S2 section. For a discussion of the records, reports, and
charts maintained by the S2 section, see chapter 10.
g. Operations. The FDC operates in accordance with the princi-
ples, procedures, and requirements discussed above and with the
orders and policies of the artillery commander. The detailed oper-
ations of the S2 section relative to target intelligence and the proc-
essing of target information are discussed in chapter 10.
h. Assignment of Fire Missions. The procedures involved in at-
tacking targets and in handling fire missions are discussed in FM
6-40 and in appropriate 6-series field manuals pertaining to field
artillery missile units. The general procedures pertaining to the
assignment of fire missions are outlined below.
(1) Groups. Group FDC assigns fire missions direct to its
attached battalions. When missions are assigned from
corps or division artillery FDC direct to battalions of
the group, group FDC monitors and records them.
(2) Division artillery. Division artillery FDC normally calls
on division general support units and on corps reinforc-
ing units for fire missions. Battle group artillery and di-
rect support artillery units are not called on for addi-
tional fires unless warranted by the importance of the
mission. If additional artillery fire is desired, the FDC
notifies the corps artillery FDC. Air or naval support is
requested through the FSCC. Division artillery partici-
pates in the planning of artillery nuclear missions and
assigns nuclear missions to organic, attached, or rein-
forcing artillery.
(3) Corps artillery. Corps artillery FDC may assign fire
missions to corps groups or battalions that have tactical

194 AGO 2696B

 missions of general support; reinforcing; or general
support-reinforcing. Corps artillery may call on the ar-
tillery with the division to participate in important mis-
sions. In doing so, the term "all available artillery" is
employed, meaning that the fires of those units engaged
in more important missions are excluded. Requests for
additional artillery fire go direct from corps artillery
FDC to army artillery FDC. Requests for air or naval
support received at corps artillery FDC are referred to
the corps fire support coordination center.
(4) Army artillery. Army artillery FDC will assign fire mis-
sions to the field artillery units retained under army con-
trol. Army artillery may call on the corps artillery to
participate with certain units in important missions. Air
or naval support requests received at army artillery FDC
are referred to the fire support coordinating agency.

Section II. MASSING THE FIRES OF MORE THAN ONE BATTALION

248. General
The massing of the fires of more than one battalion is dependent
on the following requirements:
a. Common survey control or common registration for all
battalions.
b. Adequate communication facilities to accomplish coordination
and control of the firing.
c. Adequate time for all battalions to prepare to deliver fire.
d. Fire capabilities of the battalions.
e. Centralized control.
249. Battalions to Fire
The battalions capable of firing on a target are determined from
the artillery fire capabilities chart. In order to avoid diverting
battle group artillery or direct support artillery from its primary
mission, artillery units in general support normally are used when
additional fire is necessary. When a unit requests additional fire,
the artillery commander or his authorized representative at the
fire direction center must decide whether to grant the request, the
number of battalions to fire, and the amount of ammunition tb be
expended. The unit requesting the fire is informed of the decision.
250. Assignment of Missions
a. Chart Location of Target Known. The chart location of the
target may be determined by survey, by restitution from aerial
AGO 2696B 195
photographs or from a study of the ground by commanders,
ground observers, or aerial observers. In assigning missions to
battalions, the fire direction center includes in its order the co-
ordinates and altitudes of the target, the concentration number,
the nature of the target, the amount and type of ammunition, the
method of fire, and the time of opening and/or lifting fire. Fire on
these targets should be delivered without adjustment whenever
practicable.
b. Chart Location of Target Unknown Initially. A battalion
adjusting on an important target may make a request to the fire
direction center of the next higher artillery headquarters for addi-
tional fire. When the battalion makes this request, it gives the
approximate coordinates, concentration number, description of
the target, and states that correct coordinates and altitude will be
reported later. The artillery commander, or his representative,
decides which battalions are to fire on the target, sends them
warning orders, and informs the requesting battalion what addi-
tional fire it will receive. Communication lines are kept open. As
soon as the battalion requesting the fire determines the correct
coordinates and altitude, these data are sent to the fire direction
center of the next higher artillery headquarters and from there to
the battalions designated to fire the mission.
251. Method of Attack
The size and nature of the target will govern the distribution of
the fire of the battalions. When the target area is large, each bat-
talion may be assigned a part of the target.
252. Precautions
a. Massing Fires in Close Support of Troops. When massing
fires in close support of troops, the utmost precaution must be
exercised. There are inherent; inaccuracies in all types of firing
charts. Registration near the target or the firing of check rounds
on the target must be made to avoid firing on friendly troops.
b. Firing of Units Other Than Battle Group Artillery or Direct
Support Artillery. The fire direction center of a general support
or reinforcing battalion, whose observers locate targets inside no-
fire lines must coordinate with the battle group artillery or direct
support artillery concerned before attacking such targets.
253. Procedure in Massing the Fires of More Than One Battalion
on a Target of Opportunity
a. When a single battalion takes under fire a target of oppor-
tunity which requires additional fire, that battalion may request
additional fire from higher headquarters.

196 AGO 2696B

 b. The single battalion will start the adjustment and send to the
fire direction center of the next higher artillery headquarters a
message which will include the following elements:
THIS IS (name or number) BATTALION;
NOW ADJUSTING (or FIRING) ON (nature of target);
SIZE OF AREA (may be omitted);
APPROXIMATE COORDINATES ( ), ALTITUDE ( );
REQUEST ADDITIONAL FIRE;
CONCENTRATION NUMBER ( ).
c. The higher artillery headquarters S3 receives the above
message. He plots the coordinates and, according to his fire capa-
bilities chart, selects the additional battalions that are to fire the
mission.
·d. The selected battalions are alerted and given the following
message:
THIS IS (call sign);
FIRE MISSION;
FIRE (number VOLLEYS SHELL (type) FUZE (type);
APPROXIMATE COORDINATES AND ALTITUDE ( );
CENTER RANGE (or RANGE SPREAD);
WHEN READY (or AT MY COMMAND);
ADJUSTED COORDINATES LATER;
CONCENTRATION NUMBER ( ).
e. The adjusting battalion will complete the adjustment, replot
the target, and send the following message to the next higher
artillery headquarters fire direction center:
ADJUSTED COORDINATES ( );
ALTITUDE ( );
NOW FIRING FOR EFFECT;
CONCENTRATION NUMBER ( ).
f. The adjusted coordinates and altitudeare relayed to the other
battalions.
g. When an enemy battery is a target of opportunity and is
listed in the hostile battery list, the S3 may transmit the fire mis-
sion by referring to the grid square and name of battery shown
in the hostile battery list.
h. After fire for effect has been completed, the adjusting bat-
talion may be able to determine that the target has moved or is
moving. In this case, the battalion fire direction center may send
the following message to the next higher artillery headquarters
fire direction center:
THIS IS (name or number) BATTALION;
TARGET HAS MOVED (so many) METERS NORTH
(SOUTH) (so many) METERS EAST (WEST);
REQUEST FURTHER ADDITIONAL FIRE.
AGO 2696B 197
 ^HAIPTER 14(
COMMJN ICATION

254. General
The ability of field artillery to render effective fire support de-
pends on efficient communication. The artillery commander must
rely on his communication system in controlling elements of his
command, in gathering information and disseminating intelli-
gence, and in coordinating the fires of his units. Responsibility
for all communication rests with the commander at each echelon.
The commander exercises this responsibility through his staff
communication officer, who prepares communication plans and
orders and directs and supervises the installation, operation, and
maintenance of the communication system and the training of
personnel in the use of the various communication means avail-
able.

255. Means of Communication

Wire, radio, and messengers are the principal means of com-
munication available to artillery. The term wire includes wire
terminal and radio link equipment. Messengers may travel by air-
craft or ground vehicles. Other means available are sound and
visual signals. No single communication means is considered pri-
mary or is relied upon exclusively. Each communication means is
supplemented by a different communication means when possible,
and alternate communication capabilities within each means are
established as time permits. Wire and radio communications are
discussed in this chapter; for a discussion of other means, see
FM 24-5.

256. Communication Discipline and Security

The speed required in processing firing data and the volume of
message traffic handled make an orderly procedure necessary.
Message brevity and net operating discipline are necessary in both
wire and radio communication. No electronic transmission means
is considered secure. Classified messages are encoded or encrypted
prior to transmission by electronic means unless authorization to
be sent in clear has been determined by competent authority.
Communication security means available include various types of
codes and ciphers as well as mechanical and electronic cipher de-
vices. Personnel must be thoroughly familiar with and practice
security measures.

198 AGO 2696B

257. Area Communication Systems
The area communication system, installed by Signal Corps, is
used to supplement and augment artillery communication systems.
The area system primarily offers a means for expeditiously estab-
lishing a wire network between artillery elements where the
length of lines required is beyond the capability of the units to
establish or maintain. Where the primary use of the area system
is handling of logistic and administrative traffic, artillery units
use the area system on a common-user basis. However, artillery is
provided with sole-user circuits when using the area system as a
means for transmitting artillery fire control traffic. The artillery
communication officer must be provided with early information of
impending displacements in order to complete necessary liaison
with the agency responsible for displacement of the area system
stations. For detailed information on operation of area systems,
see FM 11-10.

258. Priority of Installation

In the establishment of artillery communication systems, priori-
ty of installation is given to elements of the system concerned with
fire support. During movements, and in the initial phase of posi-
tion occupation, reliance is placed on radio. Wire circuits are in-
stalled to parallel radio channels as soon as the situation permits.

259. Principles of Communication

The communication system employed by any artillery unit is
dependent on the command structure and the type of mission in
which the unit is engaged. The communication system is con-
tinually expanded and improved. Responsibility for establishing
the communication system is determined in accordance with the
following principles:
a. Superior to Subordinate. The higher or superior unit is re-
sponsible for establishing and maintaining communication with
the lower or subordinate unit. This principle fixes responsibility
in those cases where a conflict of responsibilities exists. For pur-
poses of communication responsibility, an attached unit is con-
sidered a subordinate unit.
b. Supporting to Supported. A unit supporting another unit is
responsible for establishing and maintaining communication with
the supported unit.
c. Reinforcing to Reinforced. A unit reinforcing the fires of
another unit is responsible for establishing and maintaining com-
munication with the reinforced unit.
d. Lateral Communication. Lateral communication between ad-

AGO 2696B 199

jacent units is established and maintained as directed in the com-
munication plan of the next higher commander.
e. Joint Responsibility. Although one unit is specifically charged
with establishing and maintaining communication with another
unit, it is only through the joint effort of all concerned that com-
munication is assured. If communication is lost, its immediate
reestablishment is the joint responsibility of all units affected.

260. Communication Planning

Communication planning is a continuous operation beginning
with the commander's estimate of the situation. Communication
planning is conducted concurrently with operational planning, and
is coordinated with other staff officers. Communication planning
follows the normal phases of headquarters planning described in
FM 101-5. An initial estimate of the communication require-
ments is made to implement the operation plan of the commander.
Based on this estimate, a plan :is formulated which is properly in-
tegrated with the plans, SOI and SSI, of higher headquarters.
Orders are issued based on this communication plan. When writ-
ten, the orders normally are included as part of the operation or-
der. The estimate provides a basis for development of the plan
and the plan provides a basis for preparation of the order. Esti-
mates are revised during the operation to keep pace with the
changing tactical situation. Resultant changes to the operation
order may be either written or oral. In addition to the above, the
communication plan includes any administrative details necessary
to clarify or coordinate signal activities of the affected units, to
include wire recovery responsibilities and radio retransmission
requirements.

261. Signal Operation Instructions and Standing Signal Instructions

a. Signal Operation Instructions. Signal operation instructions
(SOI) are a series of standing orders issued periodically for the
technical control and coordination of the signal communication
within a command. They include items covering codes and ci-
phers, radio call signs and frequencies, a telephone directory, and
visual and sound signals. The SOI is prepared by the signal officer
and conforms to the SOI of the next higher unit. The SOI for a
task force is prepared by the headquarters controlling the mission.
Normally, units smaller than a division issue extracts of the divi-
sion SOI. When authorized by higher headquarters, units of
corps artillery and division artillery may prepare brevity codes,
operation codes, map codes, and prearranged message codes as
required.
b. Standing Signal Instructions. Standing signal instructions

200 AGO 2696B

 (SSI) are prepared by the signal officer. The SSI contain instruc-
tions for use of the SOI and operational data which are normally
not subject to frequent change.
262. Wire
a. General. Installation of a wire system is started as soon as
the situation permits. Wire circuits parallel radio channels and
take over the communication load as they are installed. Wire sys-
tems are expanded and improved by the installation of additional
locals, duplicate circuits, and lateral lines, until the wire net ful-
fills the communication requirements of the situation.
b. Capabilities and Limitations. Wire communication provides
a higher degree of personal contact than any other means. Opera-
tion of the equipment involved is comparatively simple. It is the
most stable communication means, being almost entirely free from
the effects of electrostatic disturbances, and capable of prolonged
periods of trouble-free operation. Wire also offers a greater de-
gree of security than radio and is not subject to enemy jamming.
c. Systems. For type wire communications employed in field ar-
tillery groups and corps artillery, see figures 24 and 25. For type
wire communication employed in the division artillery, see ap-
propriate 6-series field manuals (app. I). Because of the distances
involved, army artillery will normally rely on the area communi-
cation system for wire communication. Through coordination with
the corps signal officer, corps artillery may also use the division,
corps, and army communication system. This will facilitate wire
communication with artillery groups whose headquarters are lo-
cated in the vicinity of a communication center of the division or
army area communication system.
263. Radio
a. General. Radio is an essential means of communication for
highly mobile elements. It is especially suitable for motor move-
ments, during displacements, and in fast-moving situations. Ra-
dio supplements wire communication and replaces wire in the
event of its failure.
b. Capabilities. Radio sets are readily transportable and may be
operated from moving vehicles and aircraft or from fixed posi-
tions. No physical circuits are required to establish communica-
tion. Radio offers the fastest and most dependable method for
long-range communication.
c. Limitations. Because radio equipment is complex, operator
and repair and maintenance personnel require extensive individu-
al specialized training. Likewise, since radio messages can be in-
AGO 2696B 201
 To each fire
unit op

comm Sy

To div ar t y =
when rein oco

Locals

From corps arty op

Other attached From corps arty.

units

Figure 24. Field a rtillery group wire system.

tercepted by a determined enemy, encoding or enciphering and

use of authentication systems are required to offset enemy inter-
ception capabilities. These countermeasures are time-consuming
and delay handling of message traffic. Finally, radio is subject
to enemy jamming and affords the enemy a means of locating ra-
dio transmitters and thereby command posts and other installa-
tions. Countermeasures to offset the jamming capabilities of an
enemy are time-consuming to install and are unusable while the
set is in movement.
d. Systems. For type radio systems employed in field artillery
group, corps artillery, and army artillery, see figures 26, 27, and
28. For type radio communication employed in the division, see
appropriate field manuals in the 6-series (app. I).
264. Air Alert Information
Corps air defense artillery units provide air alert information
to corps units on the special purpose warning net. Division artli-
lery receives and evaluates this information for divisional units.
Warning to divisional units is made by division artillery on a
similar warning net. For further details on air defense artillery,
see appropriate field manuals in the 44-series.

202 AGO 2696B

 o ,~ ~ Jo

=
4'-~~~~~~~~
0 cc Sa
. E0 ~

O. c
z~~~~
: : eo~o
'o)a C
~o

~~~~~~~~~~~ . BU aS+.
AG 2 I V .2

-o° zIU

AGO 2696B 203

o ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~t

203
 3)
cNote 3;)
(Note Ot,r (Note 41) Gp 1

0 %c lX x F X X K *11ZCI M- THfSHfXI Cl

CF- CF

T.
CO- tx-OVN
V S2/3 ConmmOHl btry Sv O Sv
t
-CF Corps Corps Dl, Di Corps Worning TAO Corps
A
orty ortr Fl oaly CF orty F orty U rty CI
F~q L zf (noft2) (nolte I) (notl )

Op- - - - - - -' Rod dto

Notes. Legend
I. When otch or reint. C Commondnet
2. Corps orty F2 when 0tch to di. F Fire direction net
3. Atch FA fire unit. I Intelligence net
4. When otch. M Met net
(I Receiver only
U Utility net
TAO Tocticol olr obnet (TAF)
- FM net
N- AM net

Figure 26. Type radio system, field artillerygroup.

204 AGO 2696B

 C9

Z0

N tO0 la .- -, c

- oh. rZj *0
-
p.S
£ P

c .: -

to~~~

BE N- 0

C
ED
zz
'U. r
eu~~~~
CY ~O0a
1- O 1

itC I

LL~~OL -
s~~~~~~ L6 ~~ ~~~a
-

(n e *
x~~~

I-

CU
p 4 ( .
U o*0 c 10 o~~~~U

1 - .0
4
II -c
%-

%~~~~~~~
0 OC

-0 -

AGO 266B 20

AGO 2696B 205

 Med rn msl

orty control)

re tained
When

Army

Army FSC -< Op -Rod Sto

Note Agency Legend
Furnished by army C Command net
signal battalion. F Fire direction net
Receiver only
- FM net
X AM net

Figure 28. Type radio system, army artillery.

206 AGO 2696B

 CHAPTER 15
AMMUNITION SUPPLY

265. General
The effectiveness of an ammunition supply system is measured
by its ability to supply the required amount and type of service-
able ammunition to using troops when they need it. Class V sup-
plies directly influence tactical operations and are, therefore, con-
trolled by all commanders in the tactical chain of command. The
ammunition supply system is designed to permit resupply quickly
and informally. The ammunition supply system, known as the
continuous refill system, is based on possession of ammunition by
the using units of a fixed basic load of ammunition which will be
replenished as used (FM 6-101, FM 9-6, FM 100-10, and FM
101-10).
266. Class V Procedures
a. Required Supply Rate. The required supply rate is the
amount of ammunition for each type weapon, expressed in
rounds per weapon per day, required to sustain operations of a
designated force without restriction. Artillery commanders at
battle group, division, corps, and army, in conjunction with the
force G3- (S3) and G4 (S4), make recommendations to the force
commander as to the quantity of artillery ammunition needed to
support future tactical operations. These estimates should be
based on the mission, experience data, factors in the theater,
knowledge of the enemy capabilities, and the proposed plan of op-
eration. The quantity of ammunition requested by each echelon
is reviewed, evaluated, and consolidated at the next higher eche-
lon. Final determination of the ammunition allocation is made at
theater army level. Careful consideration must be given to the
types and sizes of available artillery weapons and units, the pro-
posed plan, the expected use of nuclear weapons, and the duration
of the operation in order to arrive at an accurate required supply
rate.
b. Available Supply Rate. The available supply rate is an-
nounced by the army commander for the period covered. This
rate is based on allocations of credit from higher headquarters
and the tactical requirements of the corps and other elements of
the army. The corps commander will announce a detailed appor-
tionment of artillery ammunition to the corps artillery units and
AGO 2696B 207
divisions of the corps, based on recommendations of the corps ar-
tillery commander. Ammunition is allocated at division level in a
similar manner. The supply rate among units of the same type
frequently varies with the mission, targets available, and plan of
the supported force. Authority from the next higher commander
is required for a unit to exceed its available supply rate. The avail-
able supply rate may be published in the administrative order of
the force and paragraph 4 of the fire support plan annex to the
force operation order or as a fragmentary order.
267. Maintenance of the Basic Load
a. A basic load of ammunition is a prescribed quantity of am-
munition authorized to be in the possession of a unit. It is car-
ried by the individuals and vehicles of a unit. All commanders
must insure that units maintain their basic loads at the prescribed
level. Failure to maintain the basic load will cause an unantici-
pated depletion of reserves of ammunition within the army, since
ainmunition issued initially or for replenishment of the basic load
is considered as ammunition expended and is not included in the
theater supply level. Hoarding above the basic load may impair
mobility of units, cause ammunition to be abandoned and, in ag-
gravated cases, deny commanders the opportunity to exploit tac-
tical opportunities because of maldistribution.
b. Units arriving in the theater of operations less basic loads of
ammunition may draw ammunition at any designated supply in-
stallation by presenting an authenticated ammunition requisition
bearing the statement, "Initial issue quantities are within author-
ized allowances."
c. Units replenish their basic loads and draw ammunition for
immediate consumption from designated ammunition supply
points on presentation of an authenticated ammunition requisition
bearing the statements "Required to replenish basic load (re-
quired for immediate consumption). Expenditures are within au-
thorized available supply rate." The statement, "Required for im-
mediate consumption," will be interpreted to mean that ammuni-
tion will be expended within :24 hours subsequent to withdrawal
from the ammunition supply point. Replenishment of the basic
load in an active situation may be made concurrent with, in antici-
pation of, or after expenditures. For example, an infantry divi-
sion preparing to defend against an enemy attack may stockpile
ammunition at weapon positions and draw ammunition from the
ammunition supply point on the basis that it is required for im-
mediate consumption.
d. The exact quantity of ammunition in the possession of a unit
may temporarily exceed the basic load. A unit drawing ammuni-

208 AGO 2696B

tion on the basis that it is required for immediate consumption is
in effect drawing ammunition in anticipation of a requirement.
This temporary overage may be frequent and normal during sus-
tained fighting. However, when it occurs, it will not be reported
as an overage unless the overage is excessive and is held by the
unit for a period in excess of 24 hours. Unit commanders must
prevent temporary overages from becoming excessive or pro-
longed.
268. Nuclear Class V Procedures
a. In general, nuclear ammunition supply procedures parallel
those for nonnuclear ammunition. Combined arms force com-
manders at each echelon will be authorized to expend a specific
number of nuclear weapons during a stated period. The author-
ized number of nuclear weapons (identified by type of nuclear
component and/or shell, warhead, or bomb) will be the nuclear
ammunition available supply rate (ASR) for the period. The
ASR for nonnuclear ammunition is expressed in rounds per weap-
on per day for a stated period. The stated periods for nuclear and
nonnuclear ASR's may not be the same. Within the basic load of
each unit, the percentages of nuclear and nonnuclear projectiles
or warheads and the number and type(s) of nuclear components
are specified by appropriate commander, dependent on the avail-
ability and expected extent of use of nuclear weapons. It is un-
likely that all units of the same type will carry the same percent-
age of nuclear and nonnuclear ammunition, or the same number
and type of nuclear components.
b. Corps and divisional units having a nuclear capability draw
nuclear ammunition from the appropriate ammunition supply
point or depot designated in the army administrative order.
c. Long-range missile battalions are retained under field army
control and ordnance units for supplying all components are lo-
cated to best support the delivery unit. If the long-range missile
units are located in the forward area, ammunition will be drawn
from forward supply points.
d. Nuclear ammunition supply must be carefully planned for
artillery units with a nuclear capability. Changes in organization
for combat and shifting of these units during an operation should
be closely coordinated with higher headquarters to insure prompt,
adequate nuclear ammunition supply throughout the operation.
269. Exceptional Situations
Occasionally, it may be necessary for a unit to obtain and hold
.ammunition in excess of its basic load. An example is an artillery
unit supporting a force in a passage across a terrain obstacle. Un-
AGO 2696B 209
der such circumstances, army authorizes a specific quantity of
ammunition in excess of basic load to be in possession of the unit
for a stated period of time. The quantity of this authorized excess
ammunition on hand is reported daily so that an accounting of
the army tactical reserve may be made. These reports may be
made to the army ammunition officer through regular command
channels, or to the supply installation supporting the unit. The
unit commander holding this authorized excess ammunition has
the same responsibility for conserving, safeguarding, and displac-
ing it as he has for his own basic load.

210 AGO 2696B

 APPENDIX I
REFERENCES

AR 10-5 Department of the Army.

(C) AR 190-60 Physical Security of Army Atomic.
Weapons (U).
AR 220-5 Designation and Classification of Units.
AR 220-50 Regiments; General Provisions.
AR 220-60 Battalions: General Provisions.
AR 310-1 General Policies.
AR 320-50 Authorized Abbreviations.
AR 525-30 Army Missiles.
AR 525-50 Army Air Defense Operations.
SR 220-150-5 Assignment of Separate Nondivisional Bat-
talions and Companies.
SR 320-5-1 Dictionary of United States Army Terms.
SR 525-45-1 Command Report (Reports Control Symbol
CSGPO-28(R1)).
FM 3-5 Tactics and Techniques of Chemical, Bio-
logical, and Radiological Warfare.
FM 5-15 Field Fortifications.
FM 5-20-series Camouflage.
FM 6-18 Mortar Battery, Infantry Division, Battle
Group.
FM 6-21 Division Artillery, Infantry Division.
(S) FM 6-25 Field Artillery Missile Group (Heavy) (U)
(C) FM 6-30 Field Artillery Missile Battalion, Corporal
(U).
(S) FM 6-30A Field' Artillery Missile Battalion, Corporal
(U).
FM 6-40 Field Artillery Gunnery.
FM 6-50 4.2-Inch Mortar M30.
FM 6-60 The Field Artillery Rocket, 762-mm.
(S) FM 6-60A The Field Artillery Rocket, 762-mm
(Atomic) (U).
FM 6-61 Field Artillery Battalion, 762-mm Rocket.
(S) FM 6-61A Field Artillery Battalion, 762-mm Rocket
(U).
FM 6-96 280-mm Gun T131 on Carriage T72.
FM 6-101 The Field Artillery Battalion.
FM 6-115 The Field Artillery Searchlight Battery.
AGO 2696B 211
 FM 6-120 The Field Artillery Observation Battalion
and Batteries.
FM 6-135 Adjustment of Artillery Fire by the Com-
bat Soldier.
FM 6-140 The Field Artillery Battery.
FM 6-160: Radar Set AN/MPQ-10.
FM 7-10 Rifle Company, Infantry Regiment.
FM 7-21 Headquarters and Headquarters Company,
Infantry Division Battle Group.
FM 7-24 Communication in Infantry and Airborne
Divisions.
FM 7-40 Infantry Regiment.
FM 7-100 The Infantry Division.
FM 8-10 Medical Service, Theater of Operations.
FM 9-5 Ordnance Service in the Field.
FM 9-6 Ordnance Ammunition Service in the Field.
FM 9-10 Ordnance Maintenance and General Supply
in the Field.
FM 11-10 The Signal Battalion, Infantry Division.
FM 11-16 Signal Orders, Records, and Reports.
FM 11-151 Defense Against Electronic Jamming.
FM 17-1 Armor Operations; Small Units.
FM 17-34 Amphibious Tank and Tractor Battalions.
FM 17-35 Armored Cavalry Units, Armored and
Infantry Divisions.
FM 17-70 Signal Communication in the Armored
Division.
FM 17-100 The Armored Division and Combat
Command.
FM 20-32 Employment of Land Mines.
FM 20-100 Army Aviation.
FM 21-5 Military Training.
FM 21-6 Techniques of Military Instruction.
FM 21-26 Map Reading.
FM 21-30 Military Symbols.
FM 21-40 Defense Against CBR Attack.
FM 22-5 Drills and Ceremonies.
FM 24-5 Signal Communications.
FM 25-10 Motor Transportation, Operations.
FM 30-5 Combat Intelligence.
FM 30-7 Combat Intelligence; Regiment, Combat
Command, and Smaller Units.
(C) FM 31-5 Landing Operations on Hostile Shores (U).
FM 31-15 Operations Against Airborne Attack,
Guerilla Action and Infiltration.

212 AGO 2696B

 FM 31-21 Guerilla Warfare and Special Forces
Operations.
FM 31-25 Desert Operations.
FM 31-50 Combat in Fortified Areas and Towns.
FM 31-60 River-Crossing Operations.
FM 31-70 Basic Cold Weather Manual.
FM 31-71 Northern Operations.
FM 31-72 Mountain Operations.
FM 44-1 Antiaircraft Artillery Employment.
FM 44-2 Light Antiaircraft Artillery (Automatic
Weapons).
FM 44-3 Light Antiaircraft Artillery (Skysweeper).
FM 44-4 Medium and Heavy Antiaircraft Artillery.
FM 44-8 Antiaircraft Operations Center and Anti-
aircraft Artillery Information Service.
FM 55-37 Transportation Battalion, Infantry Divi-
sion.
FM 57-20 Airborne Techniques for Divisional Units.
FM 57-30 Airborne Operations.
FM 60-5 Amphibious Operations Battalion in As-
sault Landings.
FM 60-30 Amphibious Operations; Embarkation and
Ship Loading (Unit Loading Officer).
FM 72-20 Jungle Operations.
(S) FM 100-1 Field Service Regulations Doctrinal Guid-
ance (U).
FM 100-5 Field Service Regulations; Operations.
FM 100-10 Field Service Regulations; Administration.
FM 100-11 Signal Communications Doctrine.
FM 100-15 Larger Units.
FM 101-1 The G1 Manual.
FM 101-5 Staff Officers' Field Manual; Staff Organi-
zation and Procedure.
FM 101-10 Staff Officers' Field Manual: Organization,
Technical, and Logistical Data.
(S) FM 101-31 Staff Officers' Field Manual: Atomic Weap-
ons Employment (U).
(S) FM 101-31A Staff Officers' Field Manual: Atomic Weap-
ons Employment (U).
FM 110-5 Joint Action; Armed Forces.
TM 6-200 Artillery Survey.
TM 6-242 Meteorology for Artillery.
TM 9-1901 Artillery Ammunition.
(C) TM 9-1907 Ballistic Data, Performance of Ammunition
(U).
(C) TM 23-200 Capabilities of Atomic Weapons (U).
AGO 2696B 213
(C) TM 30-240 Soviet Projectile Identification Guide (U).
(S) TM 39-0-1 Numerical Index to Joint Special Weapons
Publications (U).
TM 57-210 Air-Movement of Troops and Equipment.
DA Pam 39-1 Atomic Weapon Employment.
DA Pam 39-3 The Effects of Nuclear Weapons.
DA Pam 108-1 Index of Army Motion Pictures, Film
Strips, Slides, and Phono-Recordings.
DA Pam 310- Military Publications Indexes.
series
TC 9-2 The Ordnance Class V Support System.

214 AGO 2696B

 APPENDIX II
FORMS AND EXAMPLES

1. Form for Operation Order and Operation Plan

(FM 101-5)

(Classification)
(Changes from oral orders, if any.)
Copy No.
Issuing headquarters
Place of issue (may be in code)
Date-time group (time of signature)
Message reference number
Operation order
(Type, serial number, and/or title.) (Note 1.)
References: (Maps, charts, and relevant documents.) (Note 2.)
Time zone. (Used throughout the order; if unnecessary, omit.)
Task organization. List here, when appropriate, the task subdivi-
sions or tactical components which will comprise the command,
together with the names and ranks of the commanders. When a
task organization is not listed, this information is included in
paragraph 3 or in an annex.
1. SITUATION. Such information of the general overall situation
as may be essential for subordinates to understand the cur-
rent situation.
a. Enemy forces. Composition, disposition, location, movements,
estimated strengths, identifications, and capabilities.
b. Friendly forces. Pertinent information of own forces, other
than those covered by the operation order, which may di-
rectly affect the action of a subordinate.
c. Attachments and detachments. When not shown under task
organization, list here units attached to or detached from
the issuing unit together with the times they are effective.
When shown under task organization, list here an appro-
priate reference.
d. Assumptions. (This paragraph is applicable to operation
plans only.) Assumptions used by the commander as a

(Classification)
AGO 2696B 215
 (Classification)
basis for the plans; normally applicable only to higher
planning echelons.
2. MISSION. A clear, concise statement of the task which is to be
accomplished by the commander and its purpose.
3. EXECUTION. In the first- subparagraph, give the concept of
operation (note 2). In separate lettered subparagraphs, give
the specific tasks of each element of the command charged
with the execution of tactical duties including the organiza-
tion for combat, if not already given under task organization.
In the final subparagraph, titled "Coordinating instructions,"
give details of coordination and control measures applicable
to the command as a whole and instructions applicable to two
or more elements which are necessary for coordination or the
general conduct of the operation, the repetition of which in
the other subparagraphs of paragraph 3 would be cumber-
some.
4. ADMINISTRATION AND LOGISTICS. Instructions concern-
ing administrative matters including logistical arrangements
for the conduct of the operation. These instructions are fre-
quently included in an annex or separate document to which
reference should be made.
5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL. Instructions concerning signal
and command including reference to a standard plan or an-
nex - rendezvous, location, and movements of commander
and command posts, statement of command relationship, axis
of signal communication, recognition and identification in-
structions, electronic policy, code words, code names, and liai-
son, as appropriate.
Acknowledgement instructions.

Commander
Annexes
Distribution
Authentication
Notes. 1. The type of operation order is usually indicated in
combined or joint operations. Within a single serv-
ice, the type of operation order is normally omitted.
When required, a code title may also be included.
2. For information which is normally included in the
concept of operation, see paragraph 230.

(Classification)

216 AGO 2696B

2. Suggested Form for Fire Support Plan Annex To Force Opera-
tion Order (Division)
The following form is adapted from the five paragraph opera-
tion order and is applicable, with appropriate changes in word-
ing, to fire support plans at other echelons. Normally do not re-
peat instructions or items of information contained in the division
standing operating procedure. Do not repeat the operation order
or current administrative order except on matters pertaining to
division missions, concept of operations, and fire support.

(Classification)
Copy No.
Issuing headquarters
Place of issue (may be in code)
Date-time group (time of signature)
Message reference number
Annex (fire support plan) to operation order
References: Maps, charts, or other relevant documents.
Time zone. (Used when the operation will cross a time zone; if
unnecessary, omit.)
1. SITUATION. State in a, b, and c below so much of the general
situation as is deemed essential for commanders and staffs of
fire support units to know concerning-
Enemy capabilities which can affect fire support agencies.
Fire support units which will support the division or rein-
force fires of division units.
Fire support units which are attached to, or detached from,
the division.
a. Enemy forces. Refer to the current intelligence publication
covering the enemy situation. If pertinent, refer to any
particular enemy capability, such as his air capability,
which may have a definite impact on fire support agencies.
(Source: Division or division artillery intelligence repre-
sentative.)
b. Friendly forces. State so much of the corps mission as is re-
quired for coordinated action by recipients of the fire sup-
port plan. Then list the unit(s) furnishing air support to
corps or army. Follow with a statement of fire support
units, not organic or attached, on which the division may
call directly for fire support (e.g., corps "GS, reinf" or

(Classification)
AGO 2696B 217
 (Classification)
"reinf" FA (including missile) battalions or groups, or
naval units in GS or DS).
(Source: G3 air or division artillery operations repre-
sentative.)
c. Attachments and detachments. List fire support units now
attached, or which are attached or detached by the opera-
tion order, together with the effective time and date.
(Source: G3 air or division artillery operations repre-
sentative.)
2. MISSION. State the mission of the division.
(Source: G3 air.)

3. EXECUTION. In separate lettered subparagraphs, give a brief

concept of the operation, then indicate fire support to be ren-
dered by available fire support agencies, such as air, artillery,
and naval gunfire. When available, nuclear, chemical, biologi-
cal, and radiological weapons, although not separate fire sup-
port agencies, are also listed separately to indicate the im-
portance attached to their support. List fire support agencies
in alphabetical order.
a. Concept of operation of the division. State briefly the con-
cept of operation of the division with emphasis on fire sup-
port. Include priorities of fire support, whether they are
for the duration of the operation or for a specified number
of hours. In the latter case, specify the limiting hours. List
priorities separately for air, artillery, and naval gunfire,
unless they are all for the duration of the operation with-
out qualification. (Source: G3, G3 air, or FSC.)
b. Tactical air support.
(1) General.
(a) General information on tactical air support avail-
able at corps or army.
(b) Commander's desires on use of tactical air support,
other than that specifically allocated, which may
become available.
(2) Allocations.
(a) By higher headquarters (and not further allocated
to subordinate units).

(Classification)

218 AGO 2696B

 (Classification)
(b) To subordinate units (tactical air support, or tactical air
control agencies such as forward tactical air con-
trollers (FAC) and tactical air control teams
(ACT)).
(3) Miscellaneous. Miscellaneous instructions and informa-
tion concerning tactical air support or the method and
time of requesting preplanned tactical air missions when
such instructions are not covered by standing operat-
ing procedure (SOP) or when they constitute a change
to the standing operating procedure. The last item is
a reference to the tactical air fire plan appendix.
(Source: G3 air.)
c. Artillery support. This subparagraph contains information
for, and instructions to, artillery units organic, attached,
or under the fire control of division artillery. (For ex-
ample, corps artillery units with a mission of "reinf 20th
Inf Div Arty" are under the fire control of 20th Inf Div
Arty, but units with the mission of "GS, reinf 20th Inf
Div Arty" are not under the fire control of 20th Inf Div
Arty.)
(1) General. Give information of the echelons of artillery
such as corps and division artillery, which will support
the operation; information of a preparation, if any,
and its duration; and any restrictions placed on the
use of higher echelon artillery with a primary mission
of reinforcing division artillery.
(2) Artillery task organization. This subparagraph may be
used when specific batteries are placed under division
artillery control and/or are to operate under control
of an artillery headquarters other than that to which
assigned. Under each headquarters will appear the
battalions, batteries, or platoons comprising the artil-
lery organization. This subparagraph is for use with-
in a division, having organic one light battalion and
one rocket/howitzer battalion, to reflect the rearrange-
ment of elements to support a maneuver. If this sub-
paragraph is not used to show the artillery task or-
ganization, it is used for organization for combat, and
attachments and detachments within the artillery of

(Classification)
AGO 2696B 219
 (Classification)
the force are shown, as well as assignment of missions
to each element.
(3) Organization for combat.
(a) Division artillery. Give organizations for combat of
artillery units organic or attached to the com-
mand. A mission or mission type order must be
assigned to each. List field artillery groups at-
tached to the division and show elements thereof.
List division artillery units, organic or attached,
in numerical sequence by regimental number.
When units to be listed are from the same regi-
ment, battalions are listed in numerical sequence
and batteries alphabetically. Batteries assigned
a separate tactical mission under direct division
artillery control are listed separately in alpha-
betical sequence immediately following the parent
battalion.
(b) Reinforcing artillery. (Use numerical designation
here if only one group or battalion.) Give instruc-
tions to any artillery units, not organic or at-
tached, which have a mission of "reinforcing" di-
vision artillery.
(4) Miscellaneous. Give miscellaneous instructions and in-
formation for artillery units, such as instructions on
scheduling of fires, and position areas and zones of
fire (usually reference to an appendix). The last item
is a reference to the artillery fire plan.
(Source: Artillery operations representative.)
d. Atomic support. (When applicable.) This subparagraph is
similar to the air support subparagraph and gives the gen-
eral plan of employment and, if appropriate, allocations of
units and weapons. The last item titled "Miscellaneous" is
a reference to the nuclear fire plan.
(Source: G3 and artillery operations representative.)
e. Chemical, biological, and radiological support. (When ap-
plicable.) (See d above on nuclear weapons.) There may
be separate fire plans attached as appendixes if extensive
use of chemical, biological, and radiological weapons is
made; otherwise, the detailed use of special purpose weap-

(Classification)

220 AGO 2696B

 (Classification)
ons for the operation is contained in the air fire plan, ar-
tillery fire plan, or naval gunfire plan.
(Source: G3 and chemical officer.)
f. Naval support. (When applicable.) This subparagraph is
similar to the air support subparagraph, and gives general
information, allocation of support from higher headquar-
ters, plus suballocations of fire support and of control per-
sonnel to lower echelons. These are followed by miscel-
laneous instructions. The last item under "miscellaneous"
is a reference to the naval gunfire plan.
(Source: NGO.)
g. Coordinating instructions. This is the last subparargaph in
paragraph 3. Its actual letter designation depends on the
number of fire support agencies available.
(1) Give instructions applicable to two or more fire support
agencies, such as procedures for marking of air strikes
by ground fires, restrictions on firing by ground or
naval weapons while friendly aircraft are conducting
air strikes, procedures for coordinating flak suppres-
sion fires, and the time that fire plans must be sub-
mitted to the agency responsible for fire support
coordination.
(2) Miscellaneous troop safety instructions, such as per-
missible exposure to radiation, protection during nu-
clear strikes, and notification to subordinate units of
impending use of nuclear weapons by friendly forces,
are also included when applicable.
(3) Items of general interest to all units, such as the location
of the bombline, may be included.
(Source: G3, G3 air, and FSC.)
4. ADMINISTRATION AND LOGISTICS.
a. Refer to the current administrative order.
b. List any special administrative instructions applicable to this
operation, and of concern to fire support agencies, such as
a directive to dump ammunition in excess of basic load on
position.
c. State only items which are of interest to fire support agencies
which require special emphasis, or which have changed

(Classification)
AGO 2696B 221
 (Classification)
since the administrative order was published. These may
include the location of the division ammunition office
(DAO) and appropriate available supply rates.
(Source: G3, G4, and division artillery operations
representative.) "
5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL.
a. Signal. Refer to the current signal annex and index to the
signal operations instructions (SOI), if appropriate.
(Source: G3 air, division artillery operations representa-
tive, or signal officer.)
b. Command. State locations of the agency(s) responsible for
fire support coordination, if other than that prescribed by
SOP. Their locations may be shown, if desired, even when
located as given in the SOP.
(Source: G3 air, division artillery operations representa-
tive, or units.)
Acknowledgements instructions.
FOR THE COMMANDER (if applicable):

Signature (or typed name of com-

manding general or chief of staff)
Appendixes
Distribution
Authentication (on copies not signed)

(Classification)

3. Suggested Form for Target Analysis

The following form for target analysis insures a logical and
orderly examination of all the factors to determine the most effec-
tive means of attacking the target.

(Classification)
1. SITUATION AND COURSE OF ACTION
a. Situation of opposing forces.
(1) Enemy situation-include information that will aid in
target analysis.

(Classification)

222 AGO 2696B

 (Classification)
(2) Friendly situation-include information that will aid in
attacking the target.
b. Target characteristics.
(1) Target description-include type (personnel, materiel,
terrain features), numbers of personnel, quantity of
materiel, and activity.
(2) Vulnerability-include type and amount of cover, type of
materiel, type of construction, mobility, and density of
personnel and materiel.
(3) Physical location and altitude-include grid reference
and. altitude of target, location with respect to sup-
ported unit and terrain features, and proximity to
friendly troops.
(4) Accuracy of location-give estimated accuracy of target
location.
(5) Size and shape of target area-give the dimensions and
shape of the target area, and distribution of personnel
and materiel within the area.
(6) Terrain and weather-include brief analysis of weather
and terrain in the target area; include any terrain
features affecting the means and methods of attack.
c. Target capabilities-discuss the capabilities of the target, as
they affect the accomplishment of the mission of the sup-
ported unit; if a terrain feature(s), show how it affects
enemy capabilities.
d. Other factors-list and discuss any or all of the following
factors and any additional ones that will affect the choice
of firepower, delivery means, and method of attack:
(1) Urgency of attack-usually determined by the type of
target (static or fleeting) and its capabilities.
(2) Enemy countermeasures-state ability of the enemy to
minimize the effects of firepower; consider capabili-
ties of the enemy to prevent effective delivery and to
bring countermeasures against delivery means after
attack.
(3) Enemy discipline and morale-state factors that will aid
in determining the amount of firepower required to
neutralize personnel targets.

(Classification)
AGO 2696B 223
 (Classification)
(4) Creation of obstacles-discuss any considerations con-
cerning desirability or undesirability of creating ob-
stacles by attacking the target.
(5) Civilian casualties-show approximate number of civil-
ians in the target area and the estimated effect of caus-
ing excessive casualties.
(6) Surprise-discuss any particular methods desired to ob-
tain surprise, including least expected time of attack,
means of delivery, and restrictions on registration.
e. Means of attack-note all available types of firepower and re-
quired amounts with which it would be practicable to at-
tack the target; show most practicable delivery means in
each case.
2. ANALYSIS OF MEANS OF ATTACK. Discuss the applica-
tion of each means of attack on the target characteristics
(par. lb), target capabilities (par. Ic), and other factors
(par. Id). For each means of attack, include-
a. Location of center of impact which will obtain greatest effect;
include optimum height of burst for nuclear weapons.
b. Effect of available supply rate.
c. Estimate of enemy casualties and materiel damage.
d. Estimate of civilian casualties.
e. Estimate of obstacles created.
f. Precautions required for friendly troops.
Note. The analysis of each of the means of attack may be
shown in an annex.
3. COMPARISON OF MEANS OF ATTACK. Summarize the
outstanding advantages and disadvantages of each means of
attack and determine which offers the most promise of
success.
4. DECISION OR RECOMMENDATION.
a. Type and amount of firepower and delivery means.
b. Unit(s) to fire.
c. Grid reference and altitude of desired center of impact;
height of burst when applicable.
d. Time of attack.
e. Safety precautions, special coordination, and warnings
required.
f. Method for determining post attack analysis.

(Classification)

224 AGO 2696B

4. Suggested Procedure for Nuclear Weapons Target Analysis
The following procedure insures an orderly method for deter-
mining the most effective nuclear weapons for attack of a target:

(Classification)
1. DETERMINE RADIUS OF TARGET (RT).
a. If one dimension is more than twice the other dimension, di-
vide into two or more targets.
b. Formulas: rectangle 0.564 ,/a x b; ellipse 0.5 /a x b;
triangle 0.398 Jh x b.
2. DETERMINE A TRIAL CIRCULAR ERROR PROBABILITY
(CEP).
a. Check all delivery means available and compute each CEP.
b. Check predicted fires and conversion factors.
c. Select a trial CEP which includes those delivery means to be
considered.
3. DETERMINE MINIMUM REQUIRED RADIUS OF DAM-
AGE (R,,).
a. Use applicable rapid damage chart or nomograph based on
fixed 90 percent probability.
b. If probability is other than 90 percent, standard P (f) nomo-
graphs (FM 101-31A) must be used.
4. DETERMINE MINIMUM ESSENTIAL YIELD OR MINI-
MUM STOCKPILE WEAPON AND YIELD.
a. Check criteria (immediate or delayed casualties; severe or
moderate damage).
b. Check casualty radii (blast, nuclear) ; for damage, check only
blast radii.
5. SELECT TENTATIVE WEAPON AND DELIVERY MEANS.
a. Select an available delivery means.
b. Select an allocated weapon that meets the minimum essential
yield.
6. DETERMINE MINIMUM HEIGHT OF BURST (HB).. In-
sure that the minimum Hi meets the commander's require-
ment (degree of assurance) for no significant fallout con-
tamination.

(Classification)
AGO 2696B 225
 (Classification)
7. CHECK TROOP SAFETY AND CONTINGENT REQUIRE-
MENTS.
a. Check compliance with commander's requirements for each
weapon to be used. -
b. Check all criteria; blast, nuclear radiation, and thermal
radiation.
c. Compute offset, if. necessary. (Other technical courses of ac-
tion may be resorted to as indicated in chapter 11, FM
101-31.)
8. DETERMINE ACTUAL FRACTIONAL PROBABILITY
(P(f)).
a. Use actual CEP of selected delivery means and actual (R.,) of
weapon.
b. Use appropriate variability.
c. If desired ground zero (DGZ) is offset for troop safety or
other reasons, use d (amount that DGZ is offset from tar-
get centers).
d. Use applicable rapid damage chart or nomograph, based on a
fixed 90 percent probability.
e. If probability is other than 90 percent, standard (P (f))
nomographs (FM 101-31A) must be used.
9. RECOMMENDATIONS. Li4st recommendatioAs as to-
a. Weapon (s).
b. Delivery means.
c. Height(s) of burst.
d. Desired ground zero (s).
e. Time between bursts (if required).
f. Troop safety precautions.

(Classification)
5. Suggested Form for Corps or Division Artillery Intelligence Bul-
letin

(Classification)
Issuing section and headquarters
Place
Time and date
Artillery Intelligence Bulletin No.

(Classification)

226 AGO 2696B

 (Classification)
1. GENERAL. Discuss frontline progress, latest locations, and
friendly activities of particular interest to artillery.
2. ENEMY SITUATION
a. Artillery. Include changes in dispositions, compositions, and
strengths of hostile artillery since the last bulletin. Discuss
briefly the composition of each group identified by such
sources as sound and flash ranging, observed missions,, and
shelling reports. Include newly occupied or suspect areas
to focus observation into these areas.
b. Infantry. Give any information of interest, such as new lo-
cations, extracted from bulletins of higher headquarters,
from G2 reports, and from own sources.
c. Armor. Similar to b above.
d. Air. State any change in enemy air capabilities.
e. Nuclear. State any change in enemy nuclear delivery capa-
bilities.
f. Other elements. Similar to b above.
3. ENEMY OPERATIONS.
a. Artillery. Review the time, place, and quantity of shelling
received in the areas occupied by division and corps troops,
with specific reference to fire placed on friendly artillery.
Mention noteworthy changes in the quantity of enemy
shelling, to include comparison of the day and night
volumes, increase or decrease of the caliber of shells em-
ployed, new areas attacked and old target areas abandoned,
and type of targets receiving special attention.
b. Infantry. Give any information of interest, such as counter-
attacks, extracts from bulletins of higher headquarters,
from G2 reports, and from own sources.
c. Armor. Similar to b above.
d. Air. Summarize enemy air activities.
e. Nuclear. Summarize enemy's employment of nuclear
weapons.
f. Other elements. Similar to b above.
4. MISCELLANEOUS.
a. A statement of the weather conditions is published daily.

(Classification)
AGO 2696B 227
 (Classification)
b. Review effect of outstanding fire missions with credit to units
firing.
c. Give information, as necessary, regarding maps and photo-
graphs.
d. Describe new developments in the technical and tactical as-
pects of the hostile artillery, which are of definite interest
to all echelons of artillery.
5. TARGET LOCATIONS.
a. Hostile battery (mortar) locations. Give additions and dele-
tions to the current hostile battery (mortar) list.
b. General target locations. Give additions and deletions to the
current general target list.

Signature

(Classification)

6. Suggested Form for Army or Theater Army Artillery Information

Bulletin

(Classification)
Headquarters
Place
Time and date
Artillery Information Bulletin No.
TABLE OF CONTENTS. List the title of each section and ar-
ticle, security classification, and page number.
INTRODUCTION. Include any pertinent remarks desired by the
artillery commander (officer).

Section I. ARTILLERY PERSONNEL AND ORGANIZATION

Include articles concerning--
1. New arrivals in the artillery.
2. Lists of staff members and commanders of artillery units.
3. Changes in tables of organization and equipment.
4. Other personnel or organizational information.

(Classification)

228 AGO 2696B

 (Classification)

Section II. OPERATIONAL PROCEDURE

Include articles concerning--
1. Any changes in artillery doctrine.
2. Uses of various types of photographs.
3. Employment of field artillery searchlights.
4. Lessons learned in previous campaigns.
5. Various methods of attack of targets.
6. Meteorological data.
7. Sun azimuth tables.
8. Successful improvisations.
9. Other operational procedures.

Section III. INTELLIGENCE

Include articles concerning-
1. Prisoner of war interrogation.
2. Enemy measures against friendly methods of attack.
3. Enemy methods of fire.
4. Enemy employment of nuclear weapons.
5. Enemy tactical ruses.
6. Comparison of hostile and friendly artillery methods, equip-
ment, etc.
7. Enemy organization.
8. Enemy counterintelligence measures.
9. Other intelligence matters.

Section IV. MATERIEL, SUPPLY, AND EQUIPMENT

Include articles concerning-
1. Test firing against enemy materiel.
2. Characteristics of new weapons and fuzes.
3. Comparative armor penetration for various weapons.
4. Ammunition expenditures.
5. Other items of interest pertaining to materiel and ammuni-
tion.

(Classification)
AGO 2696B 229
 (Classification)
Section V.
MISCELLANEOUS ARTICLES OF GENERAL INTEREST
Include articles concerning--
1. Lessons learned in other theaters.
2. Operations of particular units.
3. Other matters of general interest.
Note. Any charts, photographs, or illustrations desired or
essential for clear understanding of any articles are included.

Signature
Annexes
Distribution
Authentication

(Classification)
7. Suggested Form for Artillery Periodic Intelligence Report

(Classification)
Copy No.
Issuing unit
Place of issue
Date-time group (time of issue)
PERIODIC INTELLIGENCE REPORT NO.
Periodcovered: (date and time to date and time)
Maps:' (Those needed for an understanding of the report.)
1. ENEMY SITUATION AT END OF PERIOD.
a. Enemy frontline (or nearest elements). Location and nature.
b. Organization of position. Trenches, emplacements, observa-
tion posts, command posts, obstacles, etc.
c. Artillery and mortars. (Care must be taken that statements
regarding the hostile artillery are essentially true and are
not unwarranted assumptions.)
(1) New locations, types,, and calibers (or sizes), including
newly occupied or suspect areas.
(2) Estimated combat efficiency (strength, degree of train-
ing, morale, and other pertinent factors).

(Classification)

230 AGO 2696B

 (Classification)
(3) Composition is discussed briefly, including designation of
units and the source of information, such as sound and
flash ranging, observed missions, and shelling reports.
(May be submitted as an annex to the report.)
d. Other targets. Any other targets located, such as:
(1) Reserves and other forces.
(2) Supply establishments and routes, bridges, and bypasses.
2. ENEMY OPERATIONS DURING PERIOD.
a. General summary. Artillery action of enemy forces as a
whole.
b. Artillery operations.
(1) Reports of shelling to include the time, place, and quan-
tity of shelling received in the areas occupied by divi-
sion and corps troops, with specific reference to coun-
terbattery fire placed on friendly artillery. Mention
noteworthy changes in the quantity of hostile shelling,
to include comparison of the day and night volumes,
increase or decrease of the caliber shells employed,
new areas attacked and old target areas abandoned,
and type of targets receiving special attention.
(2) Shifts in hostile artillery areas.
(3) Other pertinent enemy actions.
c. Operation of component elements. (Derived from artillery
sources.)
(1) Air defense artillery.
(2) Armor.
(3) Aviation.
(4) Engineers.
(5) Infantry.
(6) Employment of nuclear weapons.
d. Miscellaneous. Enemy activities, movements, or changes
since last report, not conveniently included in b and c
above.
3. OTHER INTELLIGENCE FACTORS.
a. Estimated enemy casualties caused by artillery fire and pris-
oners captured by the artillery troops.

(Classification)
AGO 2696B 231
 (Classification)
b. Morale.
c. Terrain.
d. Supply and equipment.
e. Enemy's probable knowledge of our artillery situation-ob-
servation (evidence of employment of sound and flash
ranging), reconnaissance, prisoners and documents lost by
us, civilians, etc.
f. Enemy counterintelligence measures. (Use of concealment,
smoke, radio and radar jamming, deception, ruses, etc.)
g. Weather, visibility, and meteorological conditions.
h. Any enemy intelligence not specifically covered elsewhere in
this report.
4. COUNTERINTELLIGENCE. Brief resume of enemy counter-
intelligence activities derived from artillery sources.
a. Espionage.
b. Sabotage.
c. Propaganda and rumors.
d. Miscellaneous.
5. ENEMY CAPABILITIES. (This paragraph is particularly ap-
plicable to the S2 of corps artillery.) A discussion of each
course of action open to the enemy that may interfere with
the accomplishment of our artillery mission. To assist the
G2, the discussion of courses of action open to the enemy ar-
tillery should include the capabilities of delivery of nuclear
and nonnuclear fires on all components of the force. For each
enemy capability, the effect of time, terrain, general position
areas of hostile artillery, ammunition supply, and other fac-
tors in the situation should be evaluated. The earliest esti-
mated time at which the enemy can put each course of action
into effect should be stated. When applicable, the possible
result of the enemy's adoption of any capability should be
included.

Signature
Annexes
Distribution
Authentication

(Classification)

232 AGO 2696B

8. Example of Target Summary
The form suggested for the target summary is divided into two
parts, (1) a hostile battery (mortar) list, and (2) a general tar-
get list. This first part of the form can be published as a hostile
battery (mortar) list. If desired, the recommended priority for
each target may be given.

(Classification)
S2 section, Hq I Corps Artillery
FORT SILL, OKLAHOMA
7 March
TARGET SUMMARY NR 8
This summary supersedes all previous target summaries and
hostile battery lists published by this headquarters.
1. HOSTILE BATTERY LIST
a. Confirmed.
Grid Name or Grid
square cone nr reference Alt Accuracy Description iSource

3489 CAC 34928948 300 50 1 railway gun PI, sdrng

3697 CDC 36909732 400 100 1 ? Sdrng
3698 CFC 36249862 350 50 4 how, probably PI, flrng
105-mm, 200-
yd front, in
line, facing
SW, well dug
in
3799 CGC 37089920 250 50 4 hv ADA PI, TAF
3892 BBC 38769222 350 100 2 ? Sdrng
4391 BMC 43989196 400 50 4 It wpn FO, 1st
How Bn,
27th
Arty
4396 CVC 43349670 300 50 1 gun, probably PI, Z
155-mm, fac-
ing SE, dug
in
4489 CPC 44588910 95 100 2 hv wpn Flrng
4490 BQC 44189014 295 10 3 med how PI, Z

(Classification)
AGO 2696B 233
 (Classification)
Grid Name or Grid
square eonc nr reference Alt Accuracy Descrintion Ssu-ce

4495 BXC 44709508 285 50 3 It wpn OP, 5th

FA Bn,
19th
Arty
4496 CLC 44069628 185 100 6 It wpn Flrng,
aobsr
b. Suspect.
Grid "Name or Grid
square cone nr reference Alt Accuracy Description Sollrce

3696 CU 36919692 ___ 200 4 med wpn TAF

3798 CY 37389830 ___ 250 3 ? POW
4390 CM 43669068 ___ 150 2 launcher POW
4489 CR 44328966 ___ 300 3 SP wpn Civ rept
4590 DA 45659055 ___ 50 Dummy (4 PI
guns)
2. GENERAL TARGET LIST
a. Confirmed.
'Grid Name or Grid
square conc nr reference Alt Accuracy DescriDtion iSource
3490 EE22 34129060 320 100 CP TAF, PI
3696 AB100 36109686 240 50 Airstrip Aobsr
3699 EE37 36829908 300 100 Class III dump, POW, PI,
200-yd civ rept
long, facing E
4490 EE41 44229060 300 100 Veh park, in Flrng, PI
trees, 100-yd
radius
4489 AC125 44308946 90 50 SP wpn, veh FO, 3d FA
actv Bn, 9th
Arty,
flrng
b. Suspect.
Grid Name or Grid
square cone nr reference Alt Accuracy Description Source
4391 AD66 43229138 ___ 100 Possible assy Aobsr,
area, in trees, TAF
considerable
actv
4495 EE98 44909520 ___ 100 1 sit Flrng,
POW
4391 E101 43089128 ___ 50 OP PI, POW

(Classification)

234 AGO 2696B

 (Classification)
J. J. BLACK
S2
Distribution

(Classification)
9. Example of Artillery Annex to a Corps Standing Operating Pro-
cedure
Note. The SOP is published in the form that is most effective for the com-
mand. Regardless of form, the SOP is published by authority of the commander
(it is a combat order in its own right) and carries the same weight as other
orders in instructions. Although an SOP is based on the several field manuals,
it does not repeat material specifically treated in the manuals. This example
is for illustrative purposes only.

(Classification)
Copy No.
I Corps
FORT SILL, OKLAHOMA
15 March
Annex B (I Corps Artillery SOP) to SOP, I Corps

Section I. GENERAL
1. REFERENCE. SOP I Corps.
2. APPLICABILITY. Artillery with I Corps.
3. PURPOSE. This SOP standardizes normal procedures; it ap-
plies unless otherwise prescribed.
4. UNIT PROCEDURE. Subordinate unit issues SOP to conform.
5. DEFINITIONS.
a. Field artillery-All units assigned a field artillery tactical
mission.
b. All available artillery-All field artillery except that engaged
in firing a close support mission.
c. Close support mission-A fire mission requested by or de-
livered for a unit on a target that may immediately affect
the supported unit.

(Classification)
AGO 2696B 235
 (Classification)

Section II. PERSONNEL AND ADMINISTRATION

(As a matter of convenience for subordinate units, corps artil-
lery might extract items from corps SOP relative to replacements,
decorations, awards, leaves, promotions, reports, morale activities,
and other pertinent subjects.)

Section III. INTELLIGENCE

6. OBSERVATION. 0-0 line prescribed when appropriate by
corps artillery.
a. Ground OP.
(1) Initially, minimum of one per corps field artillery bat-
talion.
(2) Area of responsibility, initially, is same as zone of fire.
b. Air (par. 16).
7. CONDITION OF AIR RAID WARNING. As announced by air
force (par. 17).
8. REPORTS.
a. Visibility.
(1) Report of visibility will indicate-
(a) Location of OP.
(b) Primary area of responsibility.
(c) Other designated areas of responsibility.
(d) Dead space.
(e) Area within limits of effective observation.
(2) All OP's submit report by telephone or radio immediately
on occupancy.
(3) Submit visibility diagram as soon as practicable.
b. Shelling report.
(1) Submit promptly by most expeditious means.
(2) Forward fragments by most expeditious means.
(3) Send reports and fragments through artillery channels
Jto corps artillery.
(4) Areas of responsibility as established in corps SOP.
c. Tactical employment of nuclear weapons. (Extract from
corps SOP for emphasis.) By fastest practicable means

(Classification)

236 AGO 2696B

 (Classification)
forward information indicating enemy capabilities for
tactical employment of nuclear weapons, such as:
(1) Withdrawal of enemy frontline units.
(2) Security detachment protecting movement of materiel.
(3) Location of enemy weapons capable of delivering nuclear
missiles, projectiles, or bombs.
(4) Enemy training in nuclear warfare.

Section IV. OPERATIONS

9. FIRE CAPABILITIES.
a. Division artillery.
(1) Report to corps artillery immediately the grid reference
and azimuth of center of zone of fire of all cannon
batteries.
(2) Report the grid reference of firing position of missile
battery.
(3) When practicable, follow initial report with fire capabili-
ties overlay indicating-
(a) Grid reference of each cannon battery and each fir-
ing position for missile battery.
(b) Minimum and maximum range of each cannon
battery.
(c) Lateral limits of each cannon battery.
(d) Areas in which specific units cannot fire.
b. Corps field artillery battalions.
(1) Report immediately through artillery channels to corps
artillery the grid reference and azimuth of center of
zone of fire of each cannon battery and firing positions
of each missile battery.
(2) When practicable, follow initial report with fire capabili-
ties overlay indicating for each battery the informa-
tion in a(3) above.
10. CONCENTRATION AND TARGET DESIGNATION
a. A system of designating concentrations is established to pre-
vent duplication and to indicate the planning source.
Corps prescribes the use of a two-letter prefix in desig-
nating concentrations. Corps assigns the first letter indi-

(Classification)
AGO 2696B 237
 (Classification)
cating the division and prescribes the manner in which
the second letter will indicate the battle group, unit, in-
stallation, or other planning source.
b. Within the corps, a letter is assigned to each division with
which to designate division concentrations. Corps units
other than divisions are assigned two letters with which
to designate their concentrations. Corps unit letter desig-
nations are as follows:
Unit Prefix
1st Infantry Division _____-___-_____ A
2d Infantry Division _____-_________ B
3d Infantry Division _____-_________ C
4th Armored Division. ____-_________ D
Corps artillery FDC --__________--_ EE
c. Within the infantry divisions, the divisional unit letter
designations will use the first letter assigned by corps and
will be as follows:
Unit Prefix
1st Infantry Division ____-__.______ A
2d Battle Group, 15th Infantry ______ AA
3d Battle Group, 19th Infantry ______ AB
1st Battle Group, 20th Infantry ______ AC
1st Battle Group, 23d Infantry _______ AD
2d Battle Group, 25th Infantry ______ AE
1st Howitzer Battalion, 17th Arty ____ AF
Battery A _.----_------------___ AG
Battery B _.---------_-_-------_ AH
Battery C ____________-_________ AJ
Battery D _.----_--------------_ AK
Battery E _ _
.-------------------
AL
2d FA Battalion, 18th Arty _________- AM
Battery A _.-------------------_ AN
Battery B _ _--------_
.---------- AP
Battery C _______-__- - -_________ AR
Battery D _ __----------_
.------- AS
Division artillery FDC -___- ________ AT
Air ----------------------------- _ AW
Naval _.--------------__---------_ AX
Attached units _.-----------------_ AY, AZ

(Classification)

238 AGO 2696B

 (Classification)
d. Within the armored divisions, the divisional unit letter
designations will use the first letter assigned by corps and
will be as follows:
Unit Prefix
(4th Armored Division ------------ D)
7th Howitzer Battalion, 13th Arty ___ DA
9th'Howitzer Battalion, 14th Arty ___ DB
11th Howitzer Battalion, 15th Arty ___ DC
12th FA Battalion, 12th Arty ------- DD
Battery A ______-_______-______. DE
Battery B ______-______________- DF
Battery C -_____-____-___------- DG
Battery D ____-__-_________-___- DH
Division Artillery FDC ______-- ____ DJ
Air ______________-___________--__ DL
Naval -___-________-______________ DM
Attached Units ________________- _ DN, NP, etc.
Note. The letters I, O, Q, U, and V are omitted to avoid
possible confusion.
e. Groups of fires will be designated the same as concentrations
are designated, except that the numeral will be placed be-
tween the letters. For example, the first group of fires
designated by the 1st Howitzer Battalion, 17th Artillery,
will be designated A1F.
f. Hostile artillery suspect locations are identified in the order
located by the use of letters: AA (1st location), AC (3d
location), BA (27th location). When the artillery loca-
tion is confirmed, the letter C is added: AAC, ACC, BAC.
g. Hostile mortar suspect locations are identified by the use of
the letter M plus a second and third letter assigned alpha-
betically as the locations are identified: MAA (1st loca-
tion), MAB (2d location), MBB (28th location). When
the mortar location is confirmed, the letter C is added.
h. Series of fires and programs of fires will be designated by
code names.
i. Enemy batteries and mortars will be designated by letter
combination as described in chapter 11, FM 6-20.-

(Classification)
AGO 2696B 239
 (Classification)
11. LOCATION OF SUPPORTED UNITS.
a. Corps artillery
(1) Direct support -battalion. Report immediately to next
higher headquarters all changes in location of sup-
ported unit including planned and actual patrol
activity.
(2) All other field artillery units and field artillery head-
quarters. Report to next higher headquarters changes
observed.
(3) Corps artillery army aviation officer. Report to corps
artillery changes observed.
b. Division artillery. Disseminate all changes in location of
supported unit, including planned and actual patrol ac-
tivity, to corps artillery, subordinate units, and adjacent
units.
c. No-fire line (NFL).
(1) Battle group artillery (direct support battalion).
(a) A NFL will be designated by the battle group ar-
tiliery (direct support battalion) in coordination
with the battle group (combat command).
(b) Change to NF:L will be reported immediately to
next higher artillery headquarters.
(2) All artillery units obtain clearance from appropriate
battle group artillery (direct support battalion) prior
to firing which results in effects short of the NFL.
(3) Corps artillery and division artillery coordinate NFL
as required and disseminate the location and changes
to higher, lower, and adjacent units.
12. FIRE MISSIONS
a. When practicable, a surveyed firfing chart will be employed
by all field artillery units.
b. Execution.
(1) When a field artillery headquarters receives more than
one fire mission simultaneously, fire will be delivered
first on that target or targets considered to be most
important.

(Classification)

240 AGO 2696B

 (Classification)
(2) Normally a close support mission will be given priority.
(3) Unless otherwise engaged, field artillery units will re-
spond to appropriate requests for fire from supported
units regardless of tactical mission.
c. Emergency massed fires.
(1) Request over corps artillery fire'direction (F) net. In-
sert after "fire mission" the code word (par. 30) for
such fires.
(2) Corps artillery will publish periodically a code word for
emergency massed fires.
(3) All available field artillery units will execute this mis-
sion if it is within their capabilities.
(4) One volley will be fired unless otherwise specified.
(5) Units will report execution of mission to the next high-
er headquarters.
13. FIRE PLANNING.
a. General. The corps artillery fire plan will be based on-
(1) The announced policies of the corps commander.
(2) The corps fire support plan.
b. Coordination. Fire plans will be forwarded to the next high-
er artillery headquarters for coordination. Coordination
will be effected throughout operations as requirement oc-
curs and by the most expeditious means.
14. SECURITY.
a. Groups coordinate security of subordinate units.
b. Groups and separate field artillery units plan will provide
for protection and security of perimeters, march columns,
and convoys.
15. REGISTRATION.
a. As soon as possible, unless otherwise directed.
b. Corps artillery units report' location of registration point
and time of registration to corps artillery FDC.
c. Preparation will be made for high-burst registration.
16. CORPS ARTILLERY AVIATION COMPANY.
a. Airfields.

(Classification)
AGO 2696B 241
 (Classification)
(1) Corps artillery designates airfields for aircraft not allo-
cated to groups and for base maintenance facilities.
(2) Groups designate airfield for flights allocated to them.
(3) Group is responsible for coordinating with corps artil-
lery headquarters regarding location of aircraft of
flights placed under operational control of the group.
b. Operation.
(1) Corps artillery coordinates the schedules for surveil-
lance missions for aircraft retained under corps ar-
tillery control.
(2) Division artillery coordinates the schedules for surveil-
lance missions for aircraft under division artillery
control.
(3) Observers will be provided by the artillery unit utilizing
the aircraft.
c. Communication.
(1) Aircraft allocated to units will operate in appropriate
unit radio net. Group airfields maintain communica-
tion with the aviation company by operating on the
aviation company command channel and with group
by operating on the group command channel.
(2) Aviation company aircraft, not allocated to units, will
operate on corps artillery utility net or as directed
by corps artillery.
1.7. CONDITIONS OF AIR RAID WARNING.
The Air Force is responsible for determining the condition of
air raid warning which will be announced to the corps air
defense artillery control center (ADACC). The condition of
air raid warning is indicated by a color code name:
a. Red-air attack imminent.
b. Yellow-air attack probable.
c. White-all clear.
18. OBSERVATION BATTALION.
a. The observation battalion will establish a survey informa-
tion center (SIC) in the vicinity of the corps artillery
FDC.

(Classification)

242 AGO 2696B

 (Classification)
b. Subordinate units coordinate survey plans with SIC.
c. Schedule of meteorological messages will be announced by
corps artillery.
19. FIELD ARTILLERY SEARCHLIGHT BATTERY. See para-
graph __----, corps SOP.
a. Employment of searchlight illumination as directed by corps
commander.
b. Battlefield illumination by searchlight will be coordinated
by S2, corps artillery.
20. FIRE SUPPORT COORDINATION.
Note. Inasmuch as fire support coordination is of interest
to units other than the artillery, this paragraph is extracted
from the corps SOP and included in the artillery annex for
emphasis.
a. Reference: FM 6-20.
b. Safety procedures.
(1) Bomb line.
(a) Divisions forward, recommended bomb line location
to corps FSCC.
(b) Corps FSCC coordinates bomblines recommended
by divisions and forwards recommended bomb-
line location to the army fire support coordina-
tion agency.
(2) When ordered, one of the plans given below will be
placed in effect or a flak suppression program may
be directed.
(a) Code words. Corps SOI.
(b) Plan Whiskey. No trajectory will cross or come
within a specified distance either side of a line
defined by two grid references. The distance
either side of the defined line will be 500 meters
unless specified in the transmission of the plan.
For example, "Execute Plan Whiskey, target
area, 5135 to 5237, time 1020 to 1040." On re-
ceipt of this order, all fire will be suspended over
this area (500 yards either side of a line from
grid reference 5135 to grid reference 5237) from

(Classification)
AGO 2696B 243
 (Classification)
1020 to 1040 hours. If a wider area is required,
the order may be "Execute Plan Whiskey, target
area 5135 to 5237, distance 1,000 meters, time
1020 to 1040."
(c) Plan Victor. No trajectory will pass over or into
an area defined by a circle with an ordinate over
1,100 feet. The radius of this circle will be 2,500
meters unless otherwise specified. This plan
may be used when planes come no lower than
1,500 feet. The order to implement this plan is
similar to (b) above; for example, "Execute
Plan Victor target area 5133, time 1020 to 1040."
(d) Plan November. No trajectory, other than small
arms, will pass over or into an area defined by a
circle of a stipulated radius. The radius of this
circle will be 2,500 meters unless otherwise spec-
ified. This plan may be used when planes oper-
ate at very low altitude. It is the same as Plan
Victor except the ordinate of the support fire is
not considered. All fire is suspended. The size
of the area may be changed by specifying a ra-
dius if different from 2,500 meters. The order to
implement this plan is announced as in (c)
above.
c. Fire support planning and fire support plans: FM 6-20.
d. Fire planning and fire plans: FM 6-20.

Section V. LOGISTICS
21. GENERAL. Conform to paragraph _____, Logistics, SOP, I
Corps.
22. AMMUNITION. Corps artillery informs subordinate units of
available supply rate.
23. EVACUATION. Units directed to nearest clearance station.
24. SERVICES. Subordinate units inform corps artillery of serv-
ice requests.
25. MAINTENANCE. Conform to paragraph ___, Logistics, SOP
I Corps.

(Classification)

2.44 AGO 2696B

 (Classification)
26. CALIBRATION PROCEDURE FOR ARTILLERY. See para-
graph ___, Logistics, SOP I Corps.
27. REPORTS.
a. Ammunition report. Report amounts of ammunition in ex-
cess of basic load every 24 hours as of 2400 hours.
b. Equipment shortage report. Conform with paragraph... ,
Logistics, SOP I Corps.
c. Unit equipment status report. Conform with paragraph
_., Logistics, SOP I Corps.

Section VI. COMMAND

28. COMMAND POSTS. Report movement and location to corps
artillery.
29. LIAISON.
a. Corps artillery maintains liaison with-
(1) Corps headquarters.
(2) Artillery headquarters of the adjacent corps on the
right.
(3) Each division artillery headquarters with the corps.
(4) Air reconnaissance support battalion or elements at ap-
propriate reconnaissance airfield.
(5) Separate corps task force.
b. Division artillery maintains liaison with artillery headquar-
ters of adjacent division on right.
30. COMMUNICATION.
a. General. Conform to corps SOI and SSI. All communication
officers extract information as necessary and as author-
ized.
b. Radio nets. As described in FM 6- and FM 44- series.
c. Wire system.
(1) General.
(a) Wire system parallels established radio net.
(b) Install wire at the earliest time to permit transfer
of communication load from radio to wire.

(Classification)
AGO 2696B 245
 (Classification)
(c) Reconnaissance parties will include appropriate
wire vehicles.
(2) Corps artillery installs wire circuits, including sim-
plexed circuit, to the following units.
(a) Field artillery observation battalion (including a
duplicate circuit).
(b) Division artillery (including a duplicate circuit.)
(c) Group headquarters.
(d) Separate battalions operating directly under corps
artillery control.
(e) Direct support battalions operating directly under
corps artillery control.
(f) Corps artillery aviation battery.
(g) Field artillery searchlight battery.
(3) Priority of installation of trunk circuits by field artil-
lery groups is as follows:
(a) Battalions of the group.
(b) Reinforced artillery headquarters.
(4) Security.
(a) Telephone messages of a directive nature are
authenticated.
(b) Evidence of wire cutting or tapping will be re-
ported immediately.
(5) Wire nets for corps artillery units are described in FM
6-series.
d. Corps artillery fire direction nets F1 and F2.
(1) General. Corps artillery FDC acts as NCS. See SOI for
call signs.
(2) Battalions normally do not operate in the corps artillery
FDC nets, but those battalions with a nuclear capa-
bility continuously monitor the F1 net and transmit
during atomic missions only.
(3) Additional fire support may be requested by division ar-
tillery or group.
(a) Requests will include previously designated code
words. If selected battalions are desired, each
battalion is designated by its call sign in the
transmission.

(Classification)

246 AGO 2696B

 (Classification)
(b) Procedure for requesting additional fire:
(Net call sign) THIS IS (division artillery or
group call sign) (code word)
FIRE MISSION
GRID REFERENCE -____ ALTITUDE__ -__
DESIGNATION OF TARGET _____VOLLEYS
(Omit if one Bn volley is desired.) TOT (when
ready).
(c) If the corps artillery approves the request, it will
rebroadcast on the F1 or F2 net or both nets. If
mission is TOT, the following will be added at
the end of the transmission:
WHEN I SAY TIME, IT WILL BE EXACT-
LY MINUTES UNTIL TIME ON
TARGET 10 SECONDS, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1,
TIME. IT IS EXACTLY __ MINUTES
UNTIL TIME ON TARGET. OUT.
(d) Rebroadcast by corps artillery constitutes a check
and is the order to fire.

(Classification)
AGO 2696B 247
 APPENDIX III
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLE, PLANNING FIELD ARTILLERY
OPERATIONS AND FIRE SUPPORT

1. Purpose and Scope

The purpose of this appendix is to illustrate the material pre-
sented in the text relative to fire support. The methods by which
the various instructions and information pertaining to fire sup-
port (particularly field artillery) may be published are also shown.
The example sets forth those aspects of fire planning that are of
particular concern to field artillery personnel.
2. Situation
a. Aggressor forces employing nuclear weapons landed on the
east coast of the United States and, after initial success, were
contained in a beachhead. First U. S. Army has now concentrated
sufficient force to initiate operations designed to eliminate Ag-
gressor's beachhead.
b. Ninth TAF and Naval Task Force 38 are supporting the op-
erations of First Army.
c. I Corps, a part of First U. S. Army, has the mission of driv-
ing south, parallel to the coast line, to clear Aggressor from zone.
Included in I Corps are the ]st, 2d, and 3d Infantry Division and
the 4th Armored Division.
3. Corps Operation Order
a. First Army commander instructs I Corps commander to
seize crossing sites over PENN River. This operation is a part of
the First Army attack scheduled for 9 Jan __------, with the
seizure of Jerseytown as the initial army objective.
b. I Corps Commander gives his concept of operation to his staff
and subordinate (corps artillery and division) commanders, in-
cluding his mission and tentative plan. Based on this briefing,
warning (fragmentary) orders are disseminated within the corps
to alert units and initiate planning.
c. The corps staff, including the fire support coordinator, fol-
lows the planning processes described in FM 101-5 and, after
securing the commander's approval, prepares the corps operation
order. As a part of the planning process, the corps FSCC obtains
allocation of aircraft for planing from the army tactical support

248 AGO 2696B

coordination agency to support the commander's tentative plan.
The corps artillery commander determines that sufficient remun-
erative targets and adequate amounts of artillery and ammunition
are available to warrant a 30-minute preparation, if desired by
the corps commander. He also outlines the artillery organization
for combat for inclusion in the operation order.
d. The corps operation order, shown below, is a formalization
and extension of the corps commander's concept of operation and
fragmentary orders (b above). It gives his staff and subordinate
commanders written instructions and information.

(Classification)
(No change from oral orders)
Copy No. 5
I Corps
OCEAN CITY (1919), NEW JERSEY
061000 Jan _
G232
Opord 11
References: Map, UNITED STATES, 1=50,000, CAPE MAY,
BURGOYNE, CARTHAGE.
1. SITUATION.
a. Enemy forces. Annex A, Intelligence.
b. Friendly forces.
(1) First Army atk 090515 Jan, seizes JERSEYTOWN, and
continues atk to the SE.
(2) Elmt of Ninth TAF spt First Army with minimum allo-
cations of 100 TAC bmr and 300 ftr-bmr sorties daily
for the period 090500 Jan to 120500 Jan. Priority to
I Corps until JERSEYTOWN is seized.
(3) 1st FA Msl Gp (Redstone) : GS First Army; priority of
fires to I Corps.
(4) Naval TF 38 spts First Army; Naval Fire Support Group
(TG 38.1) spts I Corps.
c. Attachments and detachments. Annex B, Troop List.
2. MISSION. Corps atk 090515 Jan, seizes crossing sites over
PENN River in zone, prepares to continue atk to the SE.
Annex C, Op Overlay.

(Classification)
AGO 2696B 249
 (Classification)
3. EXECUTION.
a. Concept of operation.
(1) General. Corps atk with 3d, 1st, and 2d Inf Div abreast,
3d Inf Div on east (left), 1st Inf Div in center; pene-
trates enemy defenses following nuclear and nonnu-
clear preparation. The 1st Inf Div makes main atk
with 4th Armd Div passing through 1st Inf Div after
seizure of obj 3.
(2) Maneuver.
(a) Breach enemy main defensive position with armored
and infantry attack combined with nuclear weap-
ons to break through rapidly to the second de-
fensive area.. Second defensive area must be
reached quickly prior to its occupation in strength
by the enemy. Passage of the 4th Armd Div and
seizure of crossing sites at PENN River must be
expedited.
(b) Early relief of the 4th Armd Div by the 1st Inf Div
and maximum spt at the PENN River will be
provided.
(c) Continue attack to SE of corps objective on order.
(3) Fire support.
(a) Artillery. Normal rates of fire continued until
090445 Jan. Artillery with corps fires a 30-minute
preparation initiated by the nuclear attack. Prior-
ity of fires initially to the 1st Inf Div, then 4th
Armd Div on passage through 1st Inf Div. Ap-
pendix I, Arty Fire Plan to Annex D, Fire Sup-
port Plan.
(b) Tactical Air. Prior to D-1, all available tactical air
spt will be employed on the interdiction program
with emphasis on class III and V installations. On
D-1, emphasis of tactical air spt missions will be
shifted to the attack of enemy command and com-
munication installations. On D-Day maximum air
effort to close spt and interdiction, Appendix 2,
Air Fire Plan to Annex D, Fire Support Plan.
(c) Nuclear. Corps has been allocated 30 nuclear weap-
ons of ALFA, BRAVO, CHARLIE, DELTA, and

(Class:ification)

250 AGO 2696B

 (Classification)
ECHO types; 15 of these are further allocated to
divisions. Of the weapons retained by corps, 3
BRAVO (10-KT) and 1 CHARLIE (20-KT) will
be employed on targets in the initial attack of the
main defensive zone; 2 ECHO (75-KT) weapons
will be employed on enemy reserves in the JER-
SEYTOWN area; 1 CHARLIE (20-KT) weapon
will be held on call to expedite passage of the 4th
Armd Div. Corps will reserve 8 weapons for em-
ployment against deep on-call targets and targets
of opportuinty in the corps zone. Surface bursts
will not be employed. Maximum damage to ag-
gressor personnel and armor without exceeding
negligible damage to friendly troops. A nuclear
preparation will be fired 090445 Jan. Appendix 3,
Nuclear Fire Plan, to Annex D, Fire Support
Plan.
(d) Naval. Naval Fire Support Group (TG 38.1) sup-
ports the corps with 2 BB, 4 CA, 1 CL, and 2 DD.
Appendix 4, Naval Gunfire Plan, to Annex D, Fire
Support Plan.
b. 1st Inf Div:
Atch: 1st How Bn (105-mm, SP), 40th Arty
1st How Bn (155-mm, SP), 50th Arty
c. 2nd Inf Div:
Atch: * * *
d. 3d Inf Div:
Atch: * * *
e. Corps Arty:
(1) 4th Armd Div Arty; GS-reinf 1st Inf Div Arty; revert to
control of 4th Armd Div upon commitment.
(2) 101st FA Group: GS-reinf 1st Inf Div Arty.
(3) 102d FA Group: GS-reinf 2d Inf Div Arty.
(4) 103d FA Group: GS.
(5) 104th FA Group: GS, prepared to reinf 4th Armd Div
Arty on order.
(6) Btry A (Slt), 33d Arty: GS.
(7) 1st Obsr Bn, 37th Arty: GS.

(Classification)
AGO 2696B 251
 (Classification)
(8) 1st How Bn (105-mm, SP), 40th Arty: Atch 1st Inf Div.
(9) 2d How Bn (105-mm,. SP), 40th Arty: Atch 3d Inf Div.
(10) 1st How Bn (155-mm, SP), 50th Arty: Atch 1st Inf Div.
(11) 1st Msl Bn (Honest John, SP), 82d Arty: GS.
(12) 2d Msl Bn (Honest John, SP), 82d Arty: GS.
(13) 3d Msl Bn (Honest John, SP), 82d Arty: GS.
(14) 1st Msl Bn (Cpl), 91st Arty: GS.
(15) Corps Arty Avn Co: Spt I Corps Arty.
(16) Annex D, Fire Support Plan.
f. Air Defense Artillery:
* * * * * * *

m. Corps Res. 4th Armd Div pass through 1st Inf Div on corps
order on seizure of obj 3.
n. Coordinating instructions.
(1) Hourly reports of location of leading elements to this
headquarters.
(2) Prior to attack, movement of units other than routine ad-
ministrative and supply convoys will be made during
the hours of darkness.
(3) EEI. Will the enemy employ nuclear weapons in I Corps
zone? If so, when, where, how many, what yield, by
what delivery means?
(4) Troop safety instructions.
(a) All personnel not in lightproof shelters will wear
goggles or cover eyes with opaque material from
090440 to 090450 Jan.
(b) Remainder of troop safety-SOP.
4. ADMINISTRATION AND LOGISTICS.
a. Army AdminO 6.
b. Corps AdminO 5.
5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL.
a. Signal. Annex F, Sig Index 1-66, SOI, eff 090001 Jan.
b. Command. Divisions report locations of alternate command

(Classification)

252 AGO 2696B

 (Classification)
posts.
Acknowledge.
LIGHTFOOT
Lt Gen
Annexes: A-Intelligence (omitted)
B-Troop List (omitted)
C-Operation Overlay (omitted)
D-Fire Support Plan
E-Engineer (omitted)
F-Signal (omitted)
Distribution: A
III Corps
OFFICIAL:
/s/ Smith
SMITH
G3

(Classification)
4. Corps Fire Support Plan
a. Having heard the corps commander's oral announcement of
his concept of operations, the corps artillery commander as fire
support coordinator initiated action, through the FSCC, to pre-
pare the fire support plan. The fire support plan is evolved in close
coordination with the corps commander and his staff to reflect
and amplify the commander's concept of operations.
b. The fire support plan is issued as an annex to the corps opera-
tion order. It forms the basis for the detailed fire plans of the
available fire support means and the divisions' fire support plans.
Such appendixes are issued as required to support the fire support
plan. An appendix may be issued for the artillery fire plan, the
nuclear fire plan, the air fire plan and the naval gunfire plan, a
target summary, and other appropriate plans or data relative to
fire support. The fire plan appendixes are issued on completion of
the necessary coordination and integration within the FSCC; the
distribution of the fire support plan annex is not delayed pending
preparation, coordination, or integration of the appendixes. Ap-
pendixes to the fire support plan annex are issued in whatever
form is most appropriate.
c. The corps artillery fire plan is developed simultaneously with
the fire plans of the subordinate units and is coordinated with
them. The corps artillery fire plan normally shows only those
AGO 2696B 253
fires planned by the, corps artillery headquarters and those fires
requested by subordinate units.
d. The naval gunfire and air fire plans are prepared in the
FSCC in accordance with the agreements reached between Air,
Navy, and Army representatives. The naval gunfire and the air
fire plans are not orders-to the Navy or Air Force; they are issued
to present information'to the force as a whole.
e. Appendixes (corps artillery fire plan, etc.) which would be
issued to support the corps fire support plan have been omitted
from this example; the appendixes issued by corps reflect and
amplify those issued by the divisions.
f. The fire support plan annex shown below is issued to accom-
pany the corps operation order.

(Classification)
Copy No. 2
I Corps
OCEAN CITY (1919), NEW JERSEY
061000 Jan
EW 23
Annex D (Fire Support Plan) to Opord 11
References: Map, UNITED STATES, 1:50,000, CAPE MAY-
BURGOYNE--CARTHAGE
1. SITUATION.
a. Enemy forces.
(1) Annex A (Intelligence) to Opord 11.
(2) En air capable of 40 bomber and 150 fighter bomber sor-
ties daily in zone of I Corps.
b. Friendly forces.
(1) First Army attacks 090515 Jan, seizes JERSEYTOWN,
and continues attack to the SE.
(2) Elm of Ninth TAF spt First Army with minimum alloca-
tion of 100 TAC brnr and 300 ftr-bmr sorties daily for
the period 090500 Jan to 120500 Jan. Priority to I
Corps until JERSEYTOWN is seized.
(3) 1st FA Msl Gp (Redstone): GS First Army; priority of
fires to I Corps.
(4) Naval TF 38 supports First Army; Naval Fire Support
Group (TG 38.1) supports I Corps.

(Classification)

254 AGO 2696B

 (Classification)
c. Attachments and detachments. Annex B (Troop List) to
Opord 11.
2. MISSION. Corps atk 090515 Jan seizes crossing sites over
PENN River in zone, prepares to continue atk to the SE.
Annex C (Op Overlay) to Opord 11.
3. EXECUTION
a. Concept of operation. Corps atk with 3d, 1st, and 2d Inf Div
abreast, 3d Inf Div on east (left), 1st Inf Div in center;
penetrates enemy defenses following nuclear and nonnu-
clear preparation; 1st Inf Div makes main atk with 4th
Armd Div passing through 1st Inf Div after seizure of
GORDONTOWN. The enemy main defensive position will
be breached with armored and infantry attack combined
with nuclear weapons to break through rapidly to the sec-
ond defensive area. Second defensive area must be reached
quickly prior to its occupation in strength by the enemy.
Passage of the 4th Armd Div and seizure of crossing sites
at PENN River must be expedited. Early relief of the 4th
Armd Div by the 1st Inf Div and maximum support at the
PENN River will be provided. The atk will be continued
to SE of corps objective on order. Surface bursts will not
be employed. Maximum damage to aggressor personnel
and armor without exceeding negligible damage to friendly
troops.
b. Tactical Air Spt
(1) General.
(a) Effective immediately and until D-1, all available
tactical air support concentrates on attack of
known enemy class III and V supply installations.
(b) On D-1, all available tactical air interdict between
lines _ and , concentrating on
lines of communication and command installation.
(c) On D-day, maximum tactical air effort to close spt
and interdiction.
(2) Allocations.
(a) I Corps is allocated for period 090500 Jan to 120500
Jan:
1. 40 TAC bmr sorties daily.
2. 100 ftr-bmr sorties daily.

(Classification)
AGO 2696B 255
 (Classification)
(b) Suballocations submitted are:
1. 16 ftr-bmr on air alert from H to H + 1 over
corps zone to be assigned missions as cleared by
corps FSCC, armament mixed load.
2. 20 ftr-bmr sorties to 1st Inf Div for period 090500
Jan to 090800 Jan.
(c) Priority to 4th Armd Div for ftr-bmr column cover
during movement.
(d) Allocation of FAC:
1st Inf Div-7
2d Inf Div-4
3d Inf Div-4
4th Armd Div--3 until committed, then 7.
(3) Miscellaneous.
(a) Requests for preplanned air support daily to corps
FSCC by 1530 hours.
(b) App 2, Air Fire Plan.
c. Arty Spt.
(1) General.
(a) Arty with the Corps will spt the attack with prepa-
ration H-30 minutes to H-hour.
(b) Normal arty fires prior to H-30 minutes.
(c) Corps heavy cannon and short-range missile arty
units will have priority of corps unit position
areas in zone of 1st and 3d Inf Div.
(2) Organization for combat.
(a) 4th Armd Div Arty.
GS, reinf 1st Inf Div Arty; revert to control 4th
Armd Div on order.
(b) 101st FA Gp.
2d How Bn (155-mm, SP), 50th Arty.
2d How Bn (155-mm, Towed), 51st Arty.
1st How Bn (8-in, SP), 70th Arty.
2d How Bn (8-in, SP), 70th Arty.
GS, reinf 1st Inf Div Arty.
(c) 102d FA Gp.
3d How Bn (155-mm, SP), 50th Arty
4th How Bn (155-mm, SP), 50th Arty
3d How Bn (155-mm, Towed), 51st Arty

(Classification)

256 AGO 2696B

 (Classification)
4th How Bn (155-mm, Towed), 51st Arty
3d How Bn (8-in, SP), 70th Arty
GS, reinf 3d Inf Div Arty
(d) 103d FA Gp.
1st Gun Bn (155-mm, SP), 60th Arty
1st Gun Bn (155-mm, Towed), 61st Arty
4th How Bn (8-in, SP), 70th Arty
1st How Bn (8-in, Towed), 71st Arty
2d How Bn (8-in, Towed), 71st Arty
GS.
(e) 104th FA Gp.
5th How Bn (155-mm, SP), 50th Arty
6th How Bn (155-mm, SP), 50th Arty
7th How Bn (155-mm, SP), 50th Arty
2d Gun Bn (155-mm, SP), 60th Arty
3d Gun Bn (155-mm, SP), 60th Arty
3d How Bn (8-in, Towed), 71st Arty
GS, prepared to reinf 4th Armd Div A.rty on order.
(f) Btry A (Slt), 33d Arty: GS.
(g) 1st Obsr Bn, 37th Arty: GS.
(h) 1st How Bn (105-mm, SP), 40th Arty: Atch 1st
Inf Div.
(i) 2d How Bn (105-mm, SP), 40th Arty: Atch 3d Inf
Div
(j) 1st How Bn (155-mm, SP), 50th Arty: Atch 1st
Inf Div.
(k) 1st Msl Bn (Honest John, SP), 82d Arty: GS.
(1) 2d Msl Bn (Honest John, SP), 82d Arty: GS.
(m) 3d Msl Bn (Honest John, SP), 82d Arty: GS.
(n) 1st Msl Bn (Cpl), 91st Arty: GS.
(o) Corps Arty Avn Co.
Fit Gp A: (4 L-19s, 2 H-13s) Atch 101st FA Gp.
Fit Gp B: (4 L-19s, 2 H-13s) Atch 102d FA Gp.
Fit Gp C: (4 L-19s, 2 H-13s) Atch 104th FA Gp.
Btry (-): GS.
(3) Miscellaneous.
(a) 1st Inf Div Arty schedule fires 4th Armd Div Arty
H-30 minutes to H-hour, and fires of 101st FA Gp

(Classification)
AGO 2696B 257
 (Classification)
H-15 minutes to H-hour; 2d Inf Div Arty sched-
ule fires 102d FA Gp H-15 minutes to H-hour.
(b) App 1, Arty Fire Plan.
d. Nuclear Spt.
(1) General. Corps has been allocated 30 nuclear weapons of
ALFA, BRAVO, CHARLIE, DELTA, and ECHO
types; 15 of these are further allocated to division. Of
the weapons retained by corps, 3 BRAVO (10-KT)
and 1 CHARLIE (20-KT) weapon will be employed
on targets in the initial attack of the main defensive
zone; 2 ECHO (75-KT) weapons will be employed on
enemy reserves in the JERSEYTOWN area; 1 CHAR-
LIE (20-KT) weapon will be held on call to expedite
passage of the 4th Armd Div. Corps will reserve 8
weapons for employment against deep on-call targets
and targets of opportunity in the corps zone. A nu-
clear preparation will be fired 090445 Jan.
(2) Allocation. Type of weapon
A BCorpsD E
(a) Corps 3 4 4 2 2
(b) Ist Inf Div 2 3 2
(c) 2d Inf Div 1 1
(d) 3d Inf Div 1 I1
(e) 4th Armd Div 1 1 1
(3) Miscellaneous. App 3, Atomic Fire Plan.
e. Naval Spt.
(1) Allocation of naval gunfire support.
Corps - 1 BB, 1 CA: GS.
1st Inf Div - 1 BB, 2 CA for GS missions until
passage of 4th Armd Div.
I CL for DS missions.
3d Inf Div - 1 CA for GS missions.
2 DD for DS missions.
4th Armd Div (on passage through 1st Inf Div) -
1BB,
2 CA for GS missions.

(Classification)

258
258 AGO 2696B
 (Classification)
(2) Allocation of control personnel.
NGFL iNGF
SFCP Iteams teams Air spot

Corps - - 1 1
1st Inf Div 10 5 1 5
3d Inf Div 10 5 1 5
4th Armd Div 9 3 1 4
(3) Miscellaneous. App 4, Naval Gunfire Plan.
f. Coordinating instructions.
(1) Report of post strike analysis of targets to corps on com-
pletion of study by fire support agency.
(2) Air Fire Plan, Arty Fire Plan, Naval Gunfire Plan, Nu-
clear Fire Plan, prepared by div to :reach corps by
081200 Jan.
(3) App 5, Target Summary.
(4) All personnel not in lightproof shelters will wear gog-
gles or cover eyes with opaque material from 090440
to 090450 Jan.
4. ADMINISTRATION AND LOGISTICS.
a. Army AdminO 6, I Corps AdminO 5.
b. Aval Sup Rate, 9-12 Jan.
(1) Nonnuclear (rds per wpn per day).
4.2-inch Mort-150
105-mm How-150
155-mm How-100
155-mm Gun-80
8-inch How-60
762-mm Rkt-3 rd per launcher per day
(2) Nuclear.
ALFA-8
BRAVO-9
CHARLIE-9
DELTA-2
ECHO-2
5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL.
a. Signal.
(1) Index 1-66, SOI, eff 090001 Jan.
(2) Joint SOI 22-3a, eff 081200 Jan.

(Classification)
AGO 2606B 239
 (Classification)
b. FSCC.
(1) Corps FSCC (195342).
(2) Other FSCC's, rept loc.
Acknowledge.
LIGHTFOOT
Lt Gen
Appendixes: 1-Arty Fire Plan (omitted).
2-Air Fire Plan (omitted).
3-Nuclear Fire Plan (omitted).
4-Naval Gunfire Plan (omitted).
5-Target Summary (omitted).
Distribution: A
III Corps
OFFICIAL:
/s/ Smith
SMITH
G3

(Classification)
5. Division Operation Order
a. The division commanders, having received the corps com-
mander's concept of the operation and fragmentary orders (par.
3, this app.), in turn issue their concepts and orders to their staffs
and their artillery and battle group commanders. Thus the plan-
ning process begins in the divisions prior to receipt of the corps
operation order. By maintaining close liaison with the corps staff,
the division staff, includng the fire support coordinator, obtain ad-
ditional pertinent information on which to base estimates, plans,
and orders. Similarly, the subordinate units of the division are
kept appraised of developments in the planning.
b. On receipt of the corps operation order, final modifications
are made in the division plan and the division operation order is
issued. The order (overlay type) of the 1st Inf Div is shown in
figure 29.

6. Division Fire Support Plan

a. The division fire support plan is prepared in conjunction with
the plan of operations according to the division commander's
tentative plan. Although based on the corps fire support plan, its
preparation begins before receipt of the corps fire support plan.
Close liaison between the fire support representatives both at

260 AGO 2696B

 25 (Classification)

Copy Nr 2 + 90
Isot Int Oiv
BRIGANTINE (1687),NEW JERSEY

WL 36
~~~~~~~~~~~~~070830
JAN ~~~I. SITUATION
a. Enmy forces. Anne. A, Intelli.1 nc
0. Friendly forces.
Opord 12 Ii) I CorPS.000r09015 J..n. s .t se* ...itA-it-. -e Pv
'E.. B ic Jlrson. prepare
s to
Reference Mop, UNITED STATES, 1:50,000, CAPE MAY, BURGOYNE,CARTHAGE2) t0.t.tArd Ol tI, BtrE l; it si. fi .
3vI
Es ninth TAr PAtFirst Arl with lini allOcation
mur of I00 TACb.r snd 300 ftr-br

I A*)i TP
SI
F AA t Frr.t Ar i rlI rt, 3...ort OroA (IT 3a.i1 t ICr-

iti
I(t) let
Diro( .....
IA G ilf o
Ird
f0th rt: FrAS,

At. f ira t
edetone) :prior
"ln I Crs:

ray: itt of fireo

r 1 a tn 2t0iAdrt,:r reorta to

to I Corp..
ContrelAtit AEd

c. Attechcents detachient·. Atch Id 05I100 JEn. e ffective

I 1 5 1 -·,e 511.
atl hos P IlSS-a.
a to P
both Arty.
Both Arty.

2. MISSION.
Di k51
0l0ur1 is
B
a JfGO-0TO:
n e a o th rd '"the
Din fter rli.v.
im
'rid, Oii;_o
ID1v A Arden
n fI
atterae per.t T AcerrIe
ArACirAP p .T ty
icor:prpr trotetin. .0 toSE.
A. Cnce oof oper
t ation.
(I) Oenaral. The atArill a rapid exploitation of nuatier fires. Surprnie II Aitel.
Oaxisu.
,ill dieperaiOn conslitent ith thIe accoepillh/ent of ipeion t bemintained
throughout th operstlotn.
(2) niil er.
aneuv itr The dti lt pith thte Tk Sn,
, th Armo
-
r : let 2 , 5d Inft Ard 2d 5.
25th In;t onth -eit ailng
-lft) r h maintoao unde
ts id dlvl lon
n -tro l Ths BOc

b l00t
gr. tThe etfollowing
be all
, gth
2th Tnf weapons.
and Four
d delivery ofInnuclarll InitOi Oitreserve,
--
\,~~~~~,, ~~~ ~
preparation
artillery O/\8Cttisei)
air
A tvPtil50IAL
tealont
w111
employed
b SOx-nonnuclemr
It firaI.
ItlptdaITminute nonatomic
8 Pit Tttnd it.
h Arrby P- and nivfl
nuPAar

isdoma trlendtytroops,
A x nne B* re Supp
ort P0,n.
215 LC
2~\~ _ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b*A 2p inh
1 o. 6 lAtInf:
irch to aoria.
Folo and st let TKl.
G0rInf:
Ithrr.In ·
tl

a. 2d Be, 25th Inf; Support by ffre elk i1t T. In. On pillage Of let TK, In. trotet d east
...

65 1~~~12 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~rch:
p BSL I +d $SLl
\OF
lj'tL
t
o, C
Inf jh
t2th rv
O

P~~~~~~~X so#_ ~~~~~(1 t nop Sn,Ith Arty

try A, lAt HowBn

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~LD
5) .i ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~RPln
(CLD c~~is~ (2)
PortA,
top
lt
1dfo Sn
Sn, cOth Arty, Ar-parr
ed FA Sn. eothhrtr
to spat I SO. 2A InA. on ordar.

Figur~ 29.~~
division4~
I~ opera~~atry C. Ise too an
LC tat'Bow etry O. a
St 0. ist 0B. s.

Po~~
~Brigade
~ ~~ ~ ~~ ~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~BIetry
Brigaddc~
BI
Pt Brig.
Po~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Spport
C, 2d IA Sn. ilth
try , 2d IAan. lth
Arty: o0
Arty: AS
I lt hop Sn. cOthArtl: D0 irtTk Sn, l5th Ar..r
A) lettow Pn coth Artt: Os
ASL ) ( · . loye ......
portPI..
A. ratTk Sn, Oth Areor: teipeAbSA: on order .i.eobJ)A. AlIst ..
e..ee of 4th AredDiv
on epieure o} a.
h. it RPeon to, 2th Car: atch to let Brig.
i. ratEngr Sn.
It I tp. rt istr,,Pri sod l.t 0 n,. AOthArmor. pith An. o...n. eaph.
1 nn2x cp Eneineer.

3d
05. I9th Int. Priority of employlent in zone of let Bo. 2dd Int.
12 let ea, 0th Inf. Priority off eplor.ant Brg.
in eone of let
0. CoordlnrtlnA tnitruotlons.
It] N lsut eallaatnce to pallAee o fctth red Oiv.
10] EEr: OIt th eney e.ploy nucla.r weapons in the di pon. It Ao.shcn, h.,.r. hoc
many, Ahet ytild. end bS what dalivcery eanl?
(0] Troop safety.
(el All pere not
onnel
in lightnroof atitrp
i Ill sear
eI ..Ae r o..
with
-ro eye
er
poppaue
atarial fros O9OqO 0o090qSO Jan.
(b) Pera naet forord of AOLI w t1 be in t or q-foot
4n-p deep foetalpa ffom 090O0
0

ASL 2 ( nA tro. forofrd A OSL pIthout ctna... tr. p do...l.on...... .

Subordinate units pittte notitied of nucler fires through commendandfire
direotion chunn il.,

. ADIOItISTRATION
ANDLOGISTICS.AdminO8.
5. COlIAOnANODIGtAL. Indi 8-i1, SOl.
Ackncoledge

Anneos.: A Intellgen ce (omitted).

C- Enginesr (omittedl.
Ositributiof: Ad ,

w~~ ~~~~
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~15 t''7 nsL 2 ~~~~~~~~~~ Ad Intf Di
oi~~~~~~~~~~~~trlaution:
Yth Arid OIv ~~~~~~~~~+
l~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~IOIet
PA BA

(Classification)
Figure 29. Infantry division operation order.
 (Classification) 25

Copy Nr 3
Ist Inf Div
BRIGANTINE (1687),NEW JERSEY
072200 Jan

1 3 ~~x
3 ~Appendix
~ ~~~ 1 (Air Fire Plan) to Annex B (Fire Support
Plan) to Opord 12.
Mop: UNITED STATES, 1: 50,000, CAPE MAY,

1. Abn FAC, call sign THUNDER 12or 14

available on request through div G3 air.
2. Target direction post SCARECROW available
for night or bad weather bombing.
2X} _
2~~~~~XI
_ % -
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
\4.
~ 3. Air Safety. SOP.
Flak suppression fires on request; coordinoted
X by dlv FSCC.
5. Mark frontlines with code of day on request
of Air Force.
LC \ 6. Target morking--l round red smoke; alternate
, to It round green smoke--on request.
O O18EO> 7. Emergency signal lIft alrstrike; white star
OAR9OO5 [ parachute.
8. Emergency code word to lift air strike :JACKPOT.
Acknowledge.

GREEN
Maj Gen

?p X go OFFICIAL:
/s/ Brown
BROWN
03

65

rectioie
VA,o-Vt Tqtnr Description Location Timeon tat AtL means Control Remarks
AR901 Rifle co 23397731 On call 4 ftr/ bmr Coordinates mk center
Rocket/nopolm area of activity.
Mk w/smoke on
AR902 Rifle co 19737760 090515Jan 4 ftr/ bmr fitwmldr.FAC
Napalm Ist Tank Bn,
16th Armor

AR903 CPin woods 21507580 090520Jan 4 fltr/bmr Area tgt. No ground

Rkt/nopolm obsr in fit rept.

AR904 Ammo dump 18117230 090530Jan 4 fltr/bmr

18417280 Rkt/nopalm

Mk w/smoke on
AR905 OPon hill 16907450 On coll 4 fltr/bmr callfltldr. FAC
INapalm w/2d BG,15th nf

(Classification)

Figure SO. Division airfire plan.

corps and division FSCC and the artillery FDC is maintained to
acquaint corps with division requirements and to inform division
of corps decisions. Similarly, fire support representatives at sub-
ordinate echelons maintain contact with representatives in the di-
vision FSCC and in the division artllery FDC. The division plan
of operations and the fire support plan are evolved at the same
time so the fire support plan annex can accompany the division
operation order (par. 5, this app.) when it is issued.
b. As at corps, the fire support plan annex is issued with such
appendixes as are readily prepared. Those, such as supporting
fire plans, which require more time for preparation, are issued
later. The fire support plan annex issued by the 1st Inf Div is
shown below.

(Classification.)
Copy No. 2
1st Inf Div
BRIGANTINE (1687), NEW JERSEY
070830 Jan
DL 142
Annex B (Fire Support Plan) to Opord 12.
References: Map, UNITED STATES, 1:50,000, CAPE MAY
-BURGOYNE-CARTHAGE
·1. SITUATION.
a. Enemy forces.
(1) Annex A (Intelligence) to Opord 12.
(2) Enemy air capable of 40 bomber and 150 fighter-bomber
sorties per day in zone of I Corps.
b. Friendly forces.
(1) I Corps atk 090515 Jan, seizes crossing sites over PENN
River in zone, prepares to continue atk to the SE.
(2) Elmt of Ninth TAF spt First Army with minimum allo-
cation of 100 TAC bmr and 300 ftr-bmr sorties daily
for the period 090500 Jan to 120500 Jan. Priority to
I Corps until JERSEYTOWN is seized.
(3) Artillery support.
(a) 1st FA Msl Group (Redstone): GS First Army; prior-
ity of fires to I Corps.

(Classification)
AGO 269CB 261
corps and division FSCC and the artillery FDC is maintained to
acquaint corps with division requirements and to inform division
of corps decisions. Similarly, fire support representatives at sub-
ordinate echelons maintain contact with representatives in the di-
vision FSCC and in the division artllery FDC. The division plan
of operations and the fire support plan are evolved at the same
time so the fire support plan annex can accompany the division
operation order (par. 5, this app.) when it is issued.
b. As at corps, the fire support plan annex is issued with such
appendixes as are readily prepared. Those, such as supporting
fire plans, which require more time for preparation, are issued
later. The fire support plan annex issued by the 1st Inf Div is
shown below.

(Classification)
Copy No. 2
1st Inf Div
BRIGANTINE (1687), NEW JERSEY
070830 Jan
DL 142
Annex B (Fire Support Plan) to Opord 12.
References: Map, UNITED STATES, 1:50,000, CAPE MAY
-BURGOYNE-CARTHAGE
·1. SITUATION.
a. Enemy forces.
(1) Annex A (Intelligence) to Opord 12.
(2) Enemy air capable of 40 bomber and 150 fighter-bomber
sorties per day in zone of I Corps.
b. Friendly forces.
(1) I Corps atk 090515 Jan, seizes crossing sites over PENN
River in zone, prepares to continue atk to the SE.
(2) Elmt of Ninth TAF spt First Army with minimum allo-
cation of 100 TAC bmr and 300 ftr-bmr sorties daily
for the period 090500 Jan to 120500 Jan. Priority to
I Corps until JERSEYTOWN is seized.
(3) Artillery support.
(a) 1st FA Msl Group (Redstone): GS First Army; prior-
ity of fires to I Corps.

(Classification)
AGO 2696B 261
 (Classification)
(b) 4th Armd Div Arty:
7th How Bn (105-mm, SP), 13th Arty
9th How Bn (105-mm, SP), 14th Arty
11th How Bn (105-mm, SP), 15th Arty
12th FA Bn, (Rkt/How), 16th Arty
GS I Corps, reinf 1st Inf Div arty; revert to control 4th
Armd Div on order.
(c) 101st FA Gp:
2d How Bn (155-mm, SP), 50th Arty
2d How Bn (155-mm, Towed), 51st Arty
1st How Bn (8-in, SP), 70th Arty
2d How Bn (8-in, SP), 70th Arty
GS I Corps, reinf 1st Inf Div Arty
(4) Naval support. Naval Fire Support Group (TG 38-1)
spts I Corps; fire support unit two (TU 38.1.2) pro-
vides support to division.
c. Attachments and detachments. Attached effective 071000
Jan:
(1) 1st How Bn (105-mm, SP) 40th Arty.
(2) 1st How Bn (155-mm, SP) 50th Arty.
2. MISSION. Division atk 090515 Jan; assists passage of 4th
Armd Div after seizure of GORDONTOWN; relieves 4th
Armd Div on order after seizure of crossing over PENN
River, prepares to continue atk to SE.
3. EXECUTION.
a. Concept of operation.
(1) General. The atk will be a rapid exploitation of nuclear
fires. Surprise is vital. Maximum dispersion con-
sistent with accomplishment of mission will be main-
tained throughout the operation.
(2) Maneuver. The div will atk with the 1st Tk Bn, 16th Ar-
mor; 1st BG; 23d Inf; and 2d BG, 25th Inf; on the
east under division control. The 2d BG, 15th Inf; and
1st Recon Sq, 12th Cav, will be on the west under
control of 1st Brigade. The 1st BG, 20th Inf, and 3d
BG, 19th Inf, will be initially in Div reserve. Follow-
ing nuclear atk, the 1st Tk Bn and 1st Brigade rapidly
penetrate enemy defense.

(Classification)

262 AGO 2696B

 (Classification)
(3) Fire support. At H-30 minutes, division will employ 3
nuclear weapons to neutralize enemy defenses and
major located reserves in div zone. A 30-minute non-
nuclear preparation, will follow. Available tactical air
spt will be employed following delivery of nuclear
weapons. Division will reserve 4 nuclear weapons for
use against on-call targets and targets of opportunity.
Surface bursts will not be employed. Maximum dam-
age to aggressor personnel and armor without exceed-
ing negligible damage to friendly troops.
b. Tactical air support.
(1) General. Sixteen fighter bombers on air alert from H to
H+1 hour over corps zone to be assigned missions as
cleared by corps FSCC. Armament-mixed load.
(2) Allocations.
(a) Twenty fighter-bomber sorties allocated to div for
period 090500 to 090800 Jan. Priority initially to
1st Tank Bn, 16th Armor.
(b) FAC's allocated as follows:
1 FAC to each battle group.
1 FAC to division artillery.
1 FAC to 1st Tk Bn, 16th Armor.
(c) Miscellaneous. App 1, Air Fire Plan.
c. Artillery Support.
(1) General. Artillery spt the atk with nuclear preparation
at H-30 minutes, followed by 30-minute nonnuclear
preparation.
(2) Organization for combat.
(a) 1st How Bn, 17th Arty.
Btry A, 1st How Bn.
Btry B, 1st How Bn.
Btry A, 2d FA Bn.
Reinf 1st How Bn, 40th Arty. Prepare to spt 1st
BG, 23 Inf on order.
(b) 2d FA Bn, 18th Arty.
Btry C, 1st How Bn.
Btry D, 1st How Bn.

(Classification)
AGO 2696B 263
 (Classification)
Btry E, 1st How Bn.
Btry B, 2d FA Bn.
Spt 1st Brigade.
(c) Btry C, 2d FA Bn: GS.
(d) Btry D, 2d FA Bn: GS.
(e) 1st How Bn, 40th Arty: DS 1st Tank Bn, 16th
Armor.
(f) 1st How Bn, 50th Arty: GS.
(3) Miscellaneous.
(a) 1st How Bn, 40th Arty, schedule fires Mort Btry 1st
BG, 23d Inf H-30 min to H-hour.
(b) App 2, Artillery Fire Plan.
d. Nuclear support.
(1) General. I Corps has allocated 1st Inf Div 7 nuclear
weapons. 1 ALFA, 1 BRAVO and 1 CHARLIE weap-
on will be fired in support of initial penetration. Re-
maining weapons-1 ALFA, 2 BRAVO, and 1 CHAR-
LIE-will be used against on-call targets and targets
of opportunity.
(2) Allocation for employment.
(a) 1st Tk Bn.
1-BRAVO
1-CHARLIE
(b) 1st Brigade.
1-ALFA
(3) Miscellaneous. App 3, Nuclear fire plan.
e. Naval support.
(1) General. Fire support unit two (TU 38.1.2) spt the atk
beginning H-1 hour; H-30 min to H-1 hour, spt atk
with preparation.
(2) Allocation of naval gunfire support.
1 BB, 2 CA: GS div until passage of 4th Armd Div.
1 CL: DS 1st Tank Bn, 16th Armor.
(3) Allocation of control personnel.
NGFL INGF
SFCP teams teams Air spot

1st Inf Div - - 1

2d BG, 15th Inf 2 1 - 1
3d BG, 19th Inf 2 1 - 1

(Classification)

264 AGO 2696B

 (Classification)
NGFL NGF
SFCP teams teams Air spot

1st BG, 20th Inf 1 - - -

1st BG, 23d Inf 2 1 - 1
2d BG, 25th Inf 2 1 - 1
1st Tank Bn, 16th
Armor 1 1 - 1
(4) Miscellaneous. App. 4, Naval Gunfire Plan.
f. Coordinating instructions.
(1) Troop safety. Negligible risk to troops protected and
warned.
(2) Subordinate units will be notified of nuclear fires through
command and fire direction channels.
(3) No troops forward of ASL 1 prior to 090450 Jan.
(4) Report of post strike analysis of targets to div on com-
pletion of study by fire support agency.
(5) BG arty fire plans to reach div arty FDC by 071800 Jan;
requests for prearranged air missions, naval fires, and
nuclear fires, to div FSCC by 071800 Jan.
(6) All personnel not in lightproof shelters will wear gog-
gles or cover eyes with opaque material from 090440
to 090450 Jan.
4. ADMINISTRATION AND LOGISTICS. Div AdminO 8.
5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL.
a. Signal. Index 8-11, SOI.
b. Command. SOP.
Acknowledge.
GREEN
Maj Gen
Appendixes: 1__Air Fire Plan
(to be published later).
2__Atry Fire Plan
(to be published later).
3__Nuclear Fire Plan
(to be published later).
4__Naval Gunfire Plan
(to be published later).

(Classification)
AGO 2696B 265
 (Classification)
Distribution: A
2d Inf Div
3d Inf Div
4th Armd Div
101st FA Gp
OFFICIAL:
/s/ Brown
BROWN
G3

(Classification)
7. Division Air Fire Plan
The division air fire plan is normally prepared by the G3 air in
the division FSCC, under the supervision of the fire support co-
ordinator or his designated representative. It is not an order to
the supporting air, but provides information to the force. The air
fire plan appendix is shown in figure 30.

8. Division Artillery Fire Plan

a. The artillery fire plan to support the division's operations is
prepared in the division artillery FDC by coordinating and con-
solidating fire plans of the battalions (FM 6-101) and separate
batteries of the division to include battle group artillery (FM
6-21). Targets of particular interest to the division as a whole
and concentrations requested by the battle group artillery or di-
rect support battalions are scheduled for other artillery available
to the division. Occasionally, higher headquarters will have re-
quirements which must be included.
b. In planning the fires for support of the 1st Inf Div attack,
concentrations are planned for confirmed and suspect targets and
for the protection of the reorganization after seizure of objectives
1, 2, and 3. In addition, check concentrations to be used for orien-
tation of observers and troops are planned. All concentrations
plotted on the overlay are listed in the target list. Those to be fired
on a time schedule are listed in the schedule of fires. The schedule
of fires graphically points out the concentrations to be fired, the
units to fire, the time of firing, and the amount of ammunition to
be expended on each concentration by the firing unit.
c. When the artillery fire plans of lower echelons have been co-
ordinated, consolidated, augmented, and integrated into a division
artillery fire plan, additional required fires are obtained from

266 2~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Ao~666 AGO 2696B

corps artillery or, if not available, adjustments are made in the
fire plan. Coordination and integration of the artillery fire plan
with the nuclear, naval gunfire, and air fire plans is accomplished
in the division FSCC and any required adjustments are made.
Units are notified of any changes affecting their fire plans, and the
artillery fire plan appendix (fig. 31) to the division fire support
plan annex is issued.
9. Nuclear Fire Plan
The division nuclear fire plan is normally prepared by the divi-
sion artillery operations representative in the division FSCC, un-
der the supervision of the fire support coordinator or his desig-
nated representative. The nuclear fire plan to support the 1st
Infantry Division is shown in figure 33.

10. The Naval Gunfire Plan

a. The division naval gunfire plan is normally prepared by the
division naval gunfire officer in the division FSCC, under the su-
pervision of the fire support coordinator or his designated repre-
sentative. The naval gunfire plan is not a directive to the sup-
porting naval unit, but provides information to the force.
b. The naval gunfire plan to support the 1st Infantry Division
attack is shown in figure 34.
11. Continuation of Planning
After the orders for the attack are issued, the planning process
continues. Late intelligence and new information affecting the op-
eration are evaluated and, if appropriate, modifications are made
to the previously issued instructions. Developments on other
fronts are examined to determine their possible influence on the
forthcoming operation. The planning process continues at all
echelons throughout the operation with all foreseeable contingen-
cies considered.

12. The First Infantry Division Attack

a. The attack of the 1st Infantry Division moved off according
to plan and objectives 1, 2, and 3 were seized. As the infantry re-
organizes and prepares to continue the attack, the fires planned to
protect the reorganization are augmented by additional fires on
other avenues of approach. Field artillery forward observers and
liaison officers plan and coordinate these additional protective
concentrations with the supported unit commanders and other
available fire support representatives. Check rounds are fired on
certain critical concentrations and any necessary additional fires
to support the continuation of the attack are planned. As in the
AGO 2696B 267
attack defensive fire planning includes the use of nuclear weap-
ons. Nonnuclear and nuclear fires are coordinated and integrated.
b. The division artillery operations chart is maintained to re-
flect the fires previously planned and those additional concentra-
tions (a above) received from the battle group artillery, artillery
battalions, and other sources.
c. In figure 35, the 1st Infantry Division Artillery operations
chart is shown as it appeared approximately 1 hour after objec-
tive 3 was seized.

AA588 3
OAA587
AD71
I1X
AX I 6D'zgn
72
2A..I
A
OAD7 ~iAD6A0,OA7 .
A AT63
| OAAL2'I o
XA1T 6 A 0AT67

A
[AAL72O0 :AL230 AT7
AA576 .AL350 6 0D54 OAD059 OAT72 OAT7
I L3$4 OAL32 0 OAD56 OAT73
AL37 AL55 A055
0
0AL4 Ist X 1/23 OAD62
AL410 AL4 r ig ode 063
OA

OAL48 PAL46 /
OAL4 |
:D
'| n~ 46 ~
-- O D10
IO O3AD
OAD12

Target List
Nr Oescriptlon Location Alt Remarks
AA57 Avenue of approach 16215610 176
AA572 Avenue of approoch 16355580 74
AA573 Protective fire 16555562 172

Figure 35. Division artillery operationschart.

268 ppoch Avenue2696

AGO 2696B
 (Co1ifi-ctlon) 25
I. Bondarla., ID, al. of advance, oncentration and group. of fire. planod--
Copy Mr I 5 overlay.
let Inf Div 2. Scheduled Fir...
BRIGABIBI (1687), NEW a. Counterortr program. Fire parallel ehaf, enter rene., shell HE,
JERKY first volley fue. VT,subesqtrt volley. 1/2 fue. quick and delay.
072200 Jen b. Maintenante of neutralisetio off ounoermortar proora.. Total =u-
nition expenditure per oont.entrtion: 12 round. Units deliver 2
Applmdix 2 (Artillery Fir. Plan) to Anne. B X round on mortdr positions at irregular .follove.:
stervale,
(Fire Support Plan) to Opord 12. 3 l2t HBo B, 70oh Arty--HARC, IAS, MARC
Mip: UNITID STATES, 1:50,000, CAPEg AY, 2d , t Ary--AC, APC C
BULOYT CARTHAGE. c. Tank eslubly tro. flre open huf, 1/2 C range spread, firor
volley, ehell HS, fuse VT or tie; eaheeqcu t volley.: 1/3 ehell Hf,
LD
_ fo.u quick; 1/3 shell HE. fue. delay; and 1/3 shell WP.
d. Smoke eLi.ions. Shell C. S-ohe for period indicsted or until re-
q ected to lift,ae follow.:
.F4A411O 2 2d Hoe Bn, 5Ilt Arty, MAA502,H-hr to H+30 in, provide ow obeerro.
-ammmilloll, 0 a
AE805fi ~ kC"323 2d Hlo Bn, 70th Arty. AF43 and AE322, 6-hr to H+30 am. let He 0,
telikeess"6
AAEOV A402 40th Arty, provide ob.a..r.
a ''
AAI16 I ~ · --
AGI5 O~r02
AD 324 I O(-
(~AL~ 3. Medim hatterie. and battalion. ha prepared to deliver onuc-al sonke
X ~j ~ --
-- ~
Oj4eck-~-'/
~' ~"MAG0C
O
O
V A4Ocii
400 4.
.... e indliated 0. t.rg.t lhit.
Raqulst 3d lnf Div Arty shehdule CA400, CA401, end CA402 erly in prepare-
LO AA 0 OA
A515 0
MAN
AM012 OMAJC ti and eoak CA402 froee
Rq ... tI Oorp. Arty
5~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.
-hr to H+60 .l or until reque.ted to lift.
0 YU 'Tsot X 1/23
MAR a. Schedulle C, ARC, AP, ARC. ad A220 in poeprotion.
AA502 OMARac Brigode \~D ~6. lclode hoetil. heavy eortr.. i. couterhabttery pr~o.g.-

AS Acknoledge.

502 OMARC BrigadeA gQiF20J' 24 lnfD Maj Gan

10 ~ 1AA49~~~~~~~~~~~ /B
OALAC
~ ~i12Etribhtion:
A
Ag 2d tef Div
3d ef Dlv
4th Aeed Dlv
,AGC A3 1011 PA 1p
0 0 20AAIO OAE79 OFFICIAL:
D OAI75
AA14 r 0 11 Brown
OAOC Ei80 AiE72 03

0A5 /TcrAet Liet

OAMC Nr Dscoription LoctRion l Mernuke
.lt
AE2071Eotrenchorent 20151163
.100, 100, Entreotinent
AE~~~~~~~~~~~~212 53 I0

a-'- 274189
d6ow ~~~~~~~~E3211CP
E2131Muthiogon
42171 POW
let Bn AE AEBOill"E12
AF 45 AE ;'12~AED AF44 : AE pou, 7472o176

AF43 OPAo1 eE71 168

AF44 Eotcn,net 5212
65+ 65 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~AF45
Entrench"enM 0 6

Is1~~~~ 112
AG3
Roodbo
c"'-2
174621 72
154
AD o i2-IMo.
Schdule of Flran

an Eh,, -2 -26 -2 -22 -20 -is -16 -14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2 H1

IZ 5 12 A 1 AF 4 11 AE EN AE11E
A 112

40 lh Art, 6 1
* 6~~~~~~4
A12 A 1 * F4
C 1 12 6 6
I. All crtillry b lin to l Infantry
auailableion he en cdaldhower only hedl44 for o holon re Ahon. Fr pli

Tth A:17y 6

ar. * Oflrr nlions .- ilablo )o W1 Infantry Dwislo. honr been sched.ustilhm"6r, only schedule, for t.0 battalions'oeon ir lnipi
ontinuOuOs{theref."",other conentrations will he plunned on the situation develope.
2. The ommunition rquirernentl conpuled for each larget ore hown in the schedule of fire under the oncentrIion nu.mber. Forthe purposes of
this illustroatioe, ntlOn reqorement
° rerhcon only for those torgetn liited on the occmpOnying extrcl of the 1rget lilt.

(Classificotion)

Figure 81. Division artilleryfire plan.

 ( Classificotion)

25
1st Int Div
~~~~85
~ BRIGANTINE (1687), NEW JERSEY
072200 Jan
Tab A (Position Areas and Zones of Fire) to Appendix 2 (Artillery
D2 18 II I ] Fire Plan) to Annex B (Fire Support Plan) to Opord 12.
2 70
"' C2 28 1 * ~
2L 5 Mapi UNITED STATES, 1:50,000, CAPE MAY, BURGOYNE, CARTHAGE.
Green
I LI70 II 7aJ1B3 M Gen
/1 122~~~~16
1emg5(jXDistribution: A
OI 3
0 OFI IA 101 st FA Gp

21·)51 ,14
D;O51
2 SLLOC 1440
II · 140 XX 3,14 OFFICIAL:
/s/ Brown
2 18 LC BROWN

XI
Ist
LC Brigade X 1/23

1//7

0t10
C/2/re 12/7o

65 \

15
(Classificatlon)
Figure 32. Position areasand zones of fire.
 Classification

-+--~ 85 Copy Nr 2
Ist Inf Div
BRIGANTINE (1687),New Jersey
072200 Jan
Appendix 3 (Nuclear Fire Plan) to Annex B (Fire
Support Plan) to Opord 12.
Mop: UNITED STATES, 1:50,000 CAPE MAY, BURGOYNE,
I X3 CARTHAGE.
X Acknowledge.

Maj Gen
Distribution: A
2X I 3d Inf Div
X _~ 4th Armd Div
Low Al
_ 101st PA Gp
/A2 ri 2 air OFFICIAL
Lw1 A2 BrigadeXl/23 -/Brown /-
D/2/18 |IOKT BROWN
C/2/182KT G3
NSLII

Low IA3N

\MsllOKT air -.-

\ Q0/2/18120 KT Iw 7IA

01%t° Msl IOKT

Scheduled fire
Descriptin Type1T5n
eDivery T b [2round
fHeight l
Dusd lowable csuated
aximum Predicted condition of torget area
nreapon Unit burst of Zero CEP of ter burst
Frontline BRAVO 090445 Low 60736 250 1/3 to /2 of
Al t eim
rofops: -T /2/1 Jan air motors5 I5rontinse Some tree blowdown.
Frontline ALFA 090445 Low Troops
A2 irsifle bn AFKT C/2/18 9Jan4 i 17157340 Zero in area Minor tree blowdown No obstacle.

Low 68 blowdown .Some tree blow-

A5 Tank regt(- CHARLIE
20-KT D/2/18
044
Jan air meters 20
250 to 40% Bldg
Tank regt down. Can be bypassed.

On-Call fires
A3 Prepared BRAVO le On Low 250 Tree blowdown. No serious obstacle.
position I0-KT j90 air_576 1meters
A4Prepared
psA4tion ALFA
2 -KT Cannon Dn-CoH Oa r 41695 Some bidg Neutron-induced
obstacles. bowdown. No gammoa
serious activity.

Prepared CHARLIE Low 250 Considerable tree blowdown.

A6 position 20-KT Missile O ir . j1565
meters Secondary fires.
A7Possible BRAVO Mi. On-Call Low 2.5562 250 Considerable obstacle.
A7ssembly areiO-KT a
air 5r'67 meters Con be bypassed.

Classification
Figure 33. Nuclear fire plan.
 (Classification )

25
85
+ Copy Nr 3
1st Inft Div
BRIGANTINE (1687), NEW JERSEY
072200 Jon

X Appendix 4 (Naval Gunfire Plan) to Annex B (Fire Support

I3 Plan) to Opord 12.
X Mop: UNITED STATES, 1:50,000, CAPE MAY, BURGOYNE,
LC CARTHAGE.
Acknowledge.

LC 11 GREEN
2 1 j _ _ ~o(
Mai Gen
4,~JI~~~~~~~~~~~~
Ist snt
Distribution: 2d Div

LC Brigade X 1/23 oAS3 oASI 3d Armd Div

4th Ar Div
oAS2 101st FA Gp
o OF9 I. A L ;Fire Spt Unit Two (TG 38.1.2)
AS6! oAS4 OFFICIAL:
/s/ Brown
oAS7 BROWN

OAS5
0 AS8O
OAs8
oAS13 o

\oASII
OAS12

\ 6/0' oASI6

Target List
oASI4 OASI5 Nr Description Location Altitude Remarks
65 ASI Concrete troop 22107315 165 Destroy prior to
AS2 OPdug in 19217314 180
15
Schedule of Fire AS3 Assembly oreo 20187330 182
Unit -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 H-hour AS4 CP 20087211 156
-B2 - AS 2 AS 5 AS5 Tank co 19107201 161
20 rd 16-In 50 rd 16-in
-4 ~ AS6 AS 7 AS6 Assembly oreo 18117308 162
200 AS
5 rd 5-in
10
50 rd 13
AS
8-n AS7 Tank co 17427306 157
CA5
00rd.5in 50rd 8-i I00 rd 5-in ____-___ .
C AAS3 AS 4-

LI5 6-In ASI5 Assemnbl

A larea
reI 2225654 148
AS16 lMissile 22286514 149

(Classification)

Figure 34. Naval gunfire plan.

13. Defensive Fire Planning
a. As the 1st Infantry Division was preparing for the passage of
the 4th Armored Division, the Commanding General, 1st Infantry
Division, received instructions from the I Corps Commander to
assume the defensive along the present line of contact. He is in-
formed that owing to developments in the III corps zone, the re-
mainder of I Corps and First Army is also assuming a defensive
role. The Commanding General, 1st Infantry Division, immedi-
ately issued fragmentary orders informing subordinate command-
ers of the change in plans and directing them to assume the de-
fensive along the present line of contact.
b. Commanders of units occupying the forward edge of the
battle area, and units designated to occupy other defensive lo-
calities for the purpose of providing depth to the defense initiate
immediate readjustment of the units and the temporary defenses
which were established on seizure of objective 3. Commanders
confer with their staffs, fire support coordinators, and the sup-
porting engineer unit commander to plan for barriers, minefields,
etc. Recommendations and requests for changes in boundaries and
additional engineer and tank support are forwarded to division.
c. The artillery protective fires (par. 12, this app.) already
planned are reexamined, augmented, and closely coordinated with
infantry fires, defensive plans, and barriers. Except for the battle
group artillery, only one barrage is assigned each artillery bat-
tery providing close support fires. Two barrages (one to each
platoon) may be assigned the battle group artillery. The bar-
rages are carefully located and fired-in. Survey is extended to lo-
cate accurately the barrages and critical defensive concentration.
Artillery fires are coordinated at each level by the artillery repre-
sentative (forward observer with the rifle company, liaison offi-
cer with the armor battalion, battle group artillery commander or
his representative at battle group), both with the supported unit's
defense plans and organic fires and with other fire support avail-
able. Fires beyond the capabilities of battle group artillery, direct
support artillery, and reinforcing artillery are requested through
artillery channels.
d. Artillery fire plans for the support of a defense include fires
planned on likely avenues of approach and fires planned through-
out the depth of the defensive area. However, the fire plan should
not be so cluttered with concentrations that it would be more
confusing than if no plan were used. A fire plan should also be
prepared to support each counterattack plan.
e. As in planning fires to support an attack, the division artillery
fire plan for a defensive situation is a reflection of fire plans pre-
AGO 2696B 269
pared by artillery units providing close support fires, augmented
by fires desired by division. However, defensive artillery fire
plans published by corps and division normally show all planned
concentrations including those of the battle group artillery, direct
support units, and other artillery units providing close support
fires.
f. On completion, the artillery fire plan is coordinated with corps
artillery and, at the division FSCC, with the division plan of de-
fense and other fire plans. The artillery fire plan is published as
an appendix to the fire support plan annex which accompanies the
division operation order. Concurrent with preparation of the ar-
tillery fire plan, plans for other fire support means are prepared.
The nuclear fire plan to support the defense will include on-call
concentrations on possible assembly areas or attack positions and
major avenues of approach. Nuclear fires are planned within the
battle area and to support counterattack plans. The 1st Infantry
Division Artillery organizations for combat to support the de-
fense is as follows:
(1) 1st How Bn, 17th Arty: GS-reinf 1st BG Arty, 238 Inf.,
1st BG, 23d Inf with one 105-mm How Btry.
(2) 2d FA Bn, 18th Arty: GS-reinf 2d BG Arty, 15th Inf.,
2d BG, 15th Inf with one 105-mm How Btry.
(3) 1st How Bn, 40th Arty: DS, 1st Recon Sq 12th Cav.
Note. No change has been made in the missions of other artillery
with the division, and no change has been made in batteries under
control of the 1st How Bn, 17th Arty, and 2d FA Bn, 18th Arty.
g. The artillery fire plan for the defensive operation is shown
in figure 36.

270 AGO 2696B

 (Classification) 35

_70

Copy Nr 2
1st Inf Div
BOOMTOWN (2078),NEW JERSEY
110800
Appendix I (Artillery Fire Plan) to Annex C
(Fire Support Plan) to Opord 13,
Maps: UNITED STATES, 1:50,000, CAPE
MAY, BURGOYNE, CARTHAGE.
OAA589
OAA588 y GREEN
0 OA OD73 I X 3 Mai Gen

2X _AA587 OAD71 Distribution: A

It econ AD70
O.. 3d Inf Oiv
2AL21 Si 12 .h
Oq1 I~,/th1..,~ ~AAA581 - U 2- OAT64 O. 10s t FADivGp
OAL22 COV -2/l15OAAsO580 AT"r65
0 0 AL23
A5820 OAD52o AT2 OFFICIAL:
AA572 0L23 A582 OAD AT2 A0613 /s/ Brown
FEBA AT D25 06 BROWN
BAT68
|AD 4OALT68

|PnL4; OAD
~584
62
liorAL44
1/23Ba OAD63
OAL43
6AQ8
OAL45
OAL48 0

AL47 OADiO
OAD12

Target List
Nr Description Location Alt Remarks
A 1/17 Barrage 2950120 165
B 1/17 Barroage 2635085 170
MorT 1/23 Barrage 27605040 163

AD54 Protective fire 20755110 161

AT64 Protective fire 27105120 i81
AT67 Suspect assycreo 27915039 156
AT68 Suspect as4', oreo 27825010 159
AT70 Check conc 27814970 153

6957 Protective fire 2OT55110 161

AD55 |Ave of approach 20745005 167
AD56 Ave of approach 20905010 172

30 Z _ __ _
AL44 Protective fire 19154425 163

18 AL45 Protective fire 19054215 173

AL46 Protective fire 19954190 170

(Classification)
Figure 36. Division artilleryfire plan for the defense.
 APPENDIX IV
A PROCEDURE FOR PREPARING SCHEDULES OF
CORPS ARTILLERY FIRES

1. Purpose and Scope

The purpose of this appendix is to illustrate a procedure for
preparing a schedule of fires for corps artillery, by using the fire
capabilities checklist. This procedure may be used at all echelons
of artillery for planning the schedule of fires. The fire capabilities
checklist does not in any way replace the overlay and concentra-
tion type of fire plan; rather, it assists in the scheduling of fires
where large amounts of artillery are involved.
2. Procedure
The use of the checklist in preparing a schedule of fires, al-
though primarily mechanical, is flexible and can be arranged to
reflect specific policies for attack of targets, phasing of a prepara-
tion, maintenance of neutralization, or other special considera-
tions. The following planning sequence is recommended in pre-
paring a schedule of fires for phase I, counterbattery:
a. From the fire capabilities overlay and concentration overlay,
enter the heavy battalions on the left and medium battalions on
the right of the fire capabilities checklist (fig. 37). Indicate the
targets each battalion (battery) is capable of attacking by placing
a diagonal line in the appropriate blocks. A separate checklist
may be made for a specific phase; i.e., a counterbattery phase or a
period during which safety measures for aircraft delivering air
strikes require restrictions on artillery fire.
b. Determine and enter the number of targets each battalion is
capable of attacking. Then, enter the number of battalions which
can attack each target (fig. 38). Establish the order of planning
for the battalions by indicating the battalion which can attack the
fewest targets as first in order of planning, the battalion which
can attack the next fewest targets as second in order of planning,
etc. Where more than one battalion can attack the same number
of targets, assign the order of planning from left to right on the
checklist.
c. Establish as the first target in priority for scheduling that
target which can be attacked by the fewest battalions, the target
which can be attacked by the next fewest battalions as second, etc.
AGO 2696B 271
 Heavy artillery battalions Medium artillery battalions
Order of planning Order of planning
a
0

Number of targets o Number of targets

battalion can hit battallon can hit
F ~ CgZ I C,

Heavy battalions O° E , Medium battalions

1/60 1/70 IL F . c ' 1/50 3/50

____ _ AAC

AS

ACC

ADC

AE

Figqure 37. Firecapabilities checklist showing battalionsand targets.

(fig. 38). Where more than one target can be attacked by the
same number of battalions, assign the priority for scheduling
from top to bottom. On the fire capabilities checklist in figure 38,
the 1st Howitzer Battalion, 70th Artillery is number 1 in order of
planning. Concentrations AB, ANC, ATC, and AZ can be at-
tacked by only one battalion. Since the assignment of priority
for scheduling is from top to battalion when more than one target
can be attacked by'the same number of battalions, concentration
AB is number 1 in priority.
d. As the targets are planned, a schedule of fires worksheet is
prepared. Plan first the battalion capable of attacking the fewest
targets; then, of the targets that the battalion can attack, plan
first the target which can be attacked by the fewest battalions. As
each target is planned, the time of firing is indicated on the sched-
ule of fires worksheet (fig. 40) and a second diagonal line is drawn
through the block on the checklist (fig. 39) corresponding to the
battalion to fire. After planning for a specific target is complete,
place a zero over the diagonal mark (s) under the battalion (s) not
to be scheduled for the target.
e. The corps artillery commander directed that two battalions
fire simultaneously on each enemy battery; preferably one to be a
medium battalion. Therefore, plan first the medium battalion;
then, plan a heavy battalion.

272 AGO 2696B

 Order of planning Order of planning

91 6 10 2 1 1 1 4 1 5 1 4 1 2 1 5 6
Number of targets battalion con hit nNumber
A:
j
,~;
of targets
Battalion can hit
10 I 8 1 _ 12 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
_ 7? 1 5 %= C 5

Heavy battalions * ° Medium boattalon

,r /T c ' ,,e4,se(scthi /

I IAB 0
6 2AC 2 14
25 5 2 1I

__ 7 _ __ ,7 2AGC
A. I
27
2
_ Z__ __7 _ 8 2
2 AHCI 537
= _7 X/ 7__ 26 5 Al 2 16
Z = _ _2 _ ZR= 9 2 AJC 4
is 3 AKC I 5
10 2ALC 0 _
I 2 AM 3 19Z
7Zt -- Z- 7 _- 2 7NC I I_
12 2AC I 7

77=== 7_
_ _ ~ 14 2AC __

3 I ATC 0
7/ / 23 4,AU 0
179-31AVC 2 IS

24 4AXC I I1I
21 3Y , 12
4 AZ 0

Figure 38. Fire capabilitieschecklist showing order of

planningand priority for scheduling targets.

AGO 2696B 273

 Order of planning _ . Order of planning
1
91 8 61 11 2 31714 e 3L
LJ1 1. 4 2L 1s6
Nu.ber of far~Ets battelion con hit o Number of targete
A battalion can hit
10 8 7 112 1 4 4 14 1 7 1 55 C 5 13 S1 3 16
Hccvy
H¥lly bao
batt1 lione
llons 1 C 7 7_ o *=
. Medium boattalions
'
/i/70/701/112/71/71 2Ea 0. 11/5012 /J / / /

I F52 AC 2 F13 I
- _ -kq- £l-……
I _ -

-- 7/7 _ Zz 16
i_ 3 I 0 _
~_ X_ _ __13 A_ 1 _ _

S 2 A 1 __

26 5 AM 2 16 _ _ _ /
2AJC
I9 04
18 3 AC O
1 _

2 IAN 16

2742 06 GAoC

3 1 ATC 0
23 4 AU 0
19 3 AVC 2 18
20 3 W 110
244
- XC I1
21 3 AY 1 12
4 1 AZ 0

Figure 39. Fire capabilitieschecklist showing plaimed targcts.

274 AGO 26963

 -30 -25 -20 '-15 -10 -5 H Hr +5
1st How Bn, 50th Arty

2d How Bn, 50th Arty ACC AVC AM

3d How an, 50th Arty'

5th How Bn, 50th Arty AXC ADC I AI

2d How Bn, 51st Arty /

3d How Bn, 51st Arty

1st Gun Bn, 60th Arty

2d Gun Bn,60th Arty

3d Gun Bn, 60th Arty _

1st Gun Bn,61st Arty

1st How Bn, 70th Arty ACC AM

3d How Bn,70th Arty AVC

4th How Bn, 70 th Arty AXC ADC AI

1st How Bn, 71st Arty

2d How Bn, 71st Arty

3d How Bn, 71st Arty

Figure 40. Worksheet for a schedule of fires.

f. If a group of fires is scheduled in the preparation, all con-

centrations of the group should, if possible, be fired on simul-
taneously.
g. The following symbols are used:
/ Target is within the fire capabilities of the battalion
indicated.
X Target is to be attacked by the battalion indicated.
No fire is planned on the target by the battalion
indicated.
h. A worksheet for maintenance of neutralization is -shown in
figure 41. The time available to each battalion is determined from
the completed worksheet for the schedule of fires. The share of
targets is determined by dividing the total time available by the
total number of targets to be attacked. Adjustments are then
made according to the fire capabilities and time available to each
battalion.

AGO 2696B 275

 Time Shore
Unit avail- of Targets assigned Ammo
able targets

1st Gun Bn, 60th Arty 10 min 3 AB,AAC,ATC, APC,ASC 90 rd

2d Gun Bn, 60th Arty 10min 3 ANC,AM, AOC,AQC,AVC 90rd

3d Gun Bn, 60th Arty 10rmin 3 ATC, .ALC 36 rd

1st Gun Bn, 61st Arty 15min 5 AZ, AFC,AWC,AY 72rd

1st How Bn, 70th Arty 5min 2 ACC, AGC,AHC 24rd

4th How Bn, 70th Arty 5min 2 AU, AXC 16rd

2d How Bn, 71st Arty 1Omln 3 AKC, ARC 16rd

3d How Bn, 71st Arty 1Smin 5 AE,ADC,AI 24rd

155-mm gun-288rd
Total 80min 26 8 - Inch how-80 rd

Figure 41. Worksheet for maintenance of neutralization.

276 AGO 2696B

 INDEX

Paragraphs Page
Accuracy:
Of information _…_------------------------------ 174 112
Of means __----------------------------------- . 181 120
Of target location ____-------------------------- 179 117
Requirements in shelling reports ----------------. 205 145
Activities:
----
Counterbattery_______ ---------------------- 192-196 133
Countermortar …________.
...------------------- 197-201 138
Adjutant, duties ___---------------------------------- 25 16
Advance guard __----------------------------------- 73 48
Aerial:
Observation __________------------------------- 63, 64, 40, 41,
92, 148 64, 100
Observers-------------------------------------- 64, 75, 41, 49,
121, 135, 83, 95,
140, 142, 97, 98,
148 100
Photograph (s):
Distribution --------------------------- --- 229 163
Reconnaissance _------------------------ -- 75, 92 49, 64
Aeropack artillery _____----------------------------- 3, 124, 3, 90,
139 96
Agencies:
Collecting target information __-----------------. 173 111
Contributing counterbattery information__________ 195 137
Air-transportable artillery __---_-------------------- 124 90
Airborne:
Artillery …____________----__--_--------------
- 124 90
Operations_______ ___----------------------- -- 124-129 90
Briefing personnel _______________--__--------- 129 93
Communication means _____--________--_------ 124, 128 90, 92
Estimates --- …________________--___--------- 125 91
Factors affecting _________________------_____ - 124, 129 90, 93
General …_____________________--_----------- 124 90
Intelligence …_____________________. ...-------
127 92
Photograph interpretation --------------------. 127 92
Planning--________________________________--. 125 91
Rehearsals______-- ____--------------------- 126 92
Security …____________________--_--_. ..------129 93
Training -_______________--__.---------.____ 126 92
Aircraft:
Air alert ___…___------------------------------- 229 163
Air Force reconnaissance_____-------------.-- --- 64 41
Army …_______________________________…----_- -. 64, 91 41, 64
Flares -___________________---___....-------- . 66 44
Laying wire ________________------------------- 92, 137 64, 96

AGO 2696B 277

 Paragraphs Page
Airfields_____________----------------------------- 94 65
All available artillery____________------------------ 232, 247 171, 189
Alternate positions _____--------------------------- - 107 73
Ammunition:
Authorized excess ___---_--------------------- - 269 209
Available supply rate ______-_------------ ------- 266 207
Basic load __________________--___--__---------- 267 208
For immediate consumption __________________-
- -- 267 208
Nuclear ____________--_____--------- - ---------. 268 209
Overages ________________---_.--.----______--- 267 208
Reports, administrative __---_-- ___-- __---------- 269 209
Requirements, estimate _--- __---_---_---------- 266 207
Responsibility _______________
- -- ____________-__ 28, 269 18, 209
Supply_______________
-- _--_.---------------- -. 265 207
For amphibious operations …____________----- 120, 121 81, 83
-
System _________________- -- _.___-____-_-- 265-269 207
Amphibious operations _____------------------------- 118-123 80
Aerial photograph _____________________________- - 121 83
Ammunition plan ___________-__________________. -- 121 83
Artillery employment __________________- - -_______ 121 83
Auxiliary weapons employed as field artillery______ 120 81
Fire support plan-________ _____________________- 119 80
Hydrographic effects - -________._________________120 81
Photographic reconnaissance __________________
-- -- 121 83
--
Planning-________________________________ 118, 119, 80, 83
121
Rehearsal - -_______________-____-_____ _-______ 122 88
Target information _______-__--___-_________-___ 121 83
Terrain and weather effects - -____________________- 120 81
Tim e of landing_------------------------------- 121 83
Training directives ______…---_---_--- _---------- 119 80
Analysis:
Crater. (See Crater analysis.)
Post strike __________--__--------_-------------- 170 109
Shell fragments ... ........................---.. 203 145
Target. (See Target analysis.)
Annex, fire support plan __________-_____________-___ 230, app. II, 168, 215,
III 248
Appendixes to fire support plan annex 230, app. III 168, 248
-_______________
Armored amphibians employed as field artillery________ 83, 120 57, 81
Army artillery ______- ___--__----_.---_-------- -- __ __ 13 8
Commander--___________________ _________________ 19 10
Fire direction center______________________________ 247 189
Fire planning _________________…--_________________ 235, 236 172, 173
Organization for combat -___-- ______-_____________ 56 32
Reconnaissance ________-_______.- _________________ 75 49
Tactical missions ___________--_______-___-_________ 60 39
Army aviation _______________- - -_____________________ 56, 91-94 32, 64
Airfields …_______________……___…-
___--__…_-----___ 94 65
Aerial photography ____________.______________-___. 92 64
Capabilities -________________-___--__----_------_ 92 64
Employment __________--______--________--_-_____ . 56, 93 32, 65
Officer ________-___------------------------------ 32 20

278 AGO 2696B

 Paragraphs Page
Army group artillery ______________________________ 14 8
Officer__________________________________
-- 20 11
Staff …____________________________________…. 21 12
Arctic operations __________________________________--130-137 93
Artillery fires ______________________.… ____________- 136 95
Camouflage discipline ____________________________--134 94
Communications __ ____________________________
-- 137 96
Movement __________________________.___________ 133 94
Observation_____________________________ ___---- 135 95
Positions _______________________________…____-- - 134 94
Preparation--_____________ ___________________
--- 131 93
Survey--_________________ _________________
------ 132 94
Training _______________________________________ 131 93
Artificial moonlight ________________________________- 86 58
Artillery:
Annex to corps standing operating procedure______ app. II 215
Battalion group ________________________________ 9, 17, 7, 9,
57 33
Battle group:
Fire planning _____________________________--58, 235, 34, 172,
236 173
Observation _____________________________
-- 64, 65 41, 43
Organization for combat ___________________ 55, 56, 31, 32,
58 34
Survey ___-_ ______________________________ 69 45
Tactical missions __________________________… 58-60 34
Cannon-type atomic field ________________________ 88 62
Chain of command____________________________
-- 16 9
Characteristics _________________________ … 6, 7 6
Classification ------
___________________________ 2-4 3
Commander -_____ __-_________________________ 15, 16 9
Counterfire information form____________________ 189, 202-210 126, 144
Countermortar activities ________________________ 197-201 138
Echelons directing fires ________________________
-- 246 188
Estimates_______________________________
-- 41-44 25
Fire:
Plan appendix _______________…-_____________ 230, app. III 168, 248
Planning________________________________ 233-234 171
Support coordination ______________________- 219-232 159
Group___________________________________-
.. .. 10 7
Headquarters location __________________________. 32 20
Information bulletin ___________________________- 175, app. II 113, 215
Intelligence bulletin ____________________________. 175, app. II 113, 215
Officer__________________________________
-15 9
Periodic intelligence report _____________________. 175, app. II 113, 215
Preparation, definition ________________________
-- 238 176
Prior to attack, actions__________________________ 100 67
Radar officer __________________________________-- 33 21
Reconnaissance__________________________
-- 75 49
Requirements, estimate ________________________- 39 23
Searchlight battery ____________________________- 86 58
Staffs___________________________________ … 21 12

AGO 2696B 279

 Paragraphs Page
Artillery-Continued
Survey ------------.--------------------.
________ 67-69 44
With the:
Army -______ ____--_--------------------_--. 13 8
Corps …_________--.--________________ _____ 12 8
Assignment:
Fire missions __------_---_--------- --
___ _______ 231, 247, 170, 189,
250 195
Position areas _________________________________. 74 49
Tactical missions ______________________________- 59, 60 36, 39
Zones of fire--__-__________._ ___________________ 40,.61, 23, 40,
121 83
Assistant:
Corps artillery officer __________-___.-
…_____-__
-- 22 15
Fire support coordinator-___________________-__--_ 229 163
--
Attached artillery_____________.____________________ 9, 54-57, 7, 30,
78 54
Attachment:
Armored amphibians ___________________________. 83 57
Decentralization of control -_._____-_____________. 54, 56 30, 32
Attack of:
Organized position _--_______.__--_____---__----- 103 68
Targets ___.___-. ---------.-------------------. 168, 175, 108, 113,
179-183 117
Augmenting fires ______________-.
___-___-____._-____.- 56 32
Auxiliary weapons employed as field artillery ____ 80-84 56
Available supply rate ..--.............--......---... 266 207
Aviation, Army. (See Army aviation.)
Barrage, definition ---- _--------. ----------- ---. 238 176
Basic load of ammunition --_---_-----_----___ _--.. 265, 267 207, 208
Battalion group. (See Artillery battalion group.)
Battle position. (See Defensive combat.)
Battlefield illumination _____-------------------.. ---. 86 58
Biological warfare _______---._----- - . 90 64
Boat assignment tables _________… __. _ .------ 121 83
Bomb line __--__------------------------……------- 40 23
Bombing reports. (See Shelling reports.)
Bulletin:
Artillery information -------.--------------- - 175, app. II 113, 215
Artillery intelligence __-------------------------. 175, app. II 113, 215
Burst:
Height .-------------------------------------- 182 122
Pattern__--------------------- _-------------- 215 152
Cannon-type nuclear field artillery ___________--_------ 88 62
Capabilities, artillery -__--------..------------------- 6, app. IV 6, 271
Center. (See Fire direction center and Fire
support coordination center.)
Center of impact --___________---_._------------------ 182 122
Centralized control __------------------------------- 54 30
Chart:
Hostile battery __-----------._------------------ - 189, 190 126, 128

280 AGO 2696B

 Paragraphs Page
Chart-Continued
Hostile mortar ------ ……----------------------- 189, 190 126, 128
Operations…--------- -------- -------- ------- 247 189
Planning ---------------------------------- - 247 189
V isibility…------- ------- ------- ------- ----- 65 31
Chem ical w arfare ---------------------------------- 90 64
Clandestine means -----------------------------.---- 193 134
Class V supplies …------------------------------ 265, 266 207, 207
Classification of artillery . ... . . ......................
2-4 3
Coastal frontier defense ---------------------------- 164, 165 107
Collection of target information …-----------------….. 168, 173, 108, 111,
195,204 137,145
Combat:
In towns -- ……-------------------------. 158-160
…----- 103
Orders -------------------------------..... 39, app. II, 23, 215,
III 248
Outpost _. …----- . .......................
106 71
Command:
Liaison… --------- --------- --------- -------- 36 22
Post:
Displacement ---------- --------- --------- 75,76 49,62
Location .------------------------------- . 38 23
Relationships …_---------------
…---….------- 16 9
Report -------------------------------..... 247 189
Commander:
Army artillery -------------------------------- 19 10
A rtillery ----- ----- ---- ----- ---- ----- ---- 16 9
Battalion group ---------------------------. 17 9
G roup ----------------------------------- 18 10
Corps artillery --------------------------------- 19 10
Division artillery ---..-------------------- ----- 19 10
Force ……------------------------------------ 19 10
Commander's concept of operation ------------------- 230 168
Communication --------------
.------ --------- 37,254-264 22,198
Area systems ---------- --------------------...- 257 199
Countermortar activities ------.---------------- 199 142
Defensive operation - ……-----.----------------- --. 107 73
Discipline and security ---------------- ---------. 256 198
Facilities for fire support coordination center -----. 228 163
In fire direction center -------------------------- 247 189
Means …-----------------.------------------ 255 198
Neutralization of enemy's facilities -------------- 242, 243 181,184
Officer . ..--------------------------------- 30 19
Planning ----------------------------------- 260 200
Principles ... ...........................---
259 199
Priority of installation ……----------------.
……----- 258 199
Radio …--..----.---------------------------- 263 201
Requirements in fire planning ------------------ . 236 173
Responsibility…---- ---- …254 ---- ---- ---- ---- --- 198
Wire -----------------------------------.... 262 201
Concentration designation ----------------------.---- app. II 215
Contingent zones of fire --.------- …-.--.-
-------- 121 83

AGO 2696B 281

 Paragraphs Page
Control and coordination ___________________________ 7, 35-40 6, 21
Coordinating and limiting measures..- ________________ 40 23
Coordination:
Control and ___--
___--___--____.____-________---_ 35-40 21
Fire planning __________________________….______- 236 173
Fire support ____________..______________--______ 219-229 159
Coordinator:
- -229
Assistant fire support_________________________ 163
Fire support ______…____________-______________ 221, 222, 160, 161,
229 163
Corps:
Artillery -____________-___-___________________ 12 8
Attachments ______________________-_______ 12 8
Commander--___-- ___-- ________-__________ 15, 19 . 9, 10
Coordination with army artillery____.…_____._ 236 173
Counterbattery activities and functions_______. 193, 194 134, 136
Fire direction center______--_________________ 247 189
Fire planning _______--_____________-________ 236 173
Observation functions ____…._________________. 63, 65 40, 43
--
Organization for combat ___________________ 56 32
Position areas -_------ __--------____ ____--_. 74 49
Radio system -------_---------------------- 263 201
Survey officer ___-________--_____________--_ 31 21
Tactical missions ________________________--_ 59, 60 36, 39
Wire system --__---_-----._-------- _-------- 262 201
Fire support coordination center _____-____-___--_ 219 159
Survey control ________--_---------------------- 63 45
Counterattack:
Fires in support ______________---_--------_---- 243 184
Planning fires to break up enemy ______ _________- 238, 242 176, 181
Counterbattery:
Activities ______--------------.. ...... _--------192-196, 247 133, 189
Fires_____------------------------ - ----------- 193 134
Functions______--------------.---------------- 194 136
Information, agencies contributing -______________195 137
Intelligence _____-___…__---__________________ -- 192 133
Map 189 126
-____________________________________
Officer _______________-___..--__--_ _______ 196 137
Organization ___--___________.. . _______________ - 193 134
Policy_______________--__---__--___…. ____ ..... 193 134
Records ____________------------------------- 189 126
Responsibilities _________--- _________
_. ____---- 193 134
Counterfire:
Information form, artillery______________________ 189, 202-210 126, 144
Squad--___ ------------------------------ 198 139
Counterintelligence plan _…_________…____--__--___---. 79 55
Countermortar:
Activities ______…--…_----________ --____________ 197-201, 247 138, 189
Communication_--___-____--- __.---_---______-- 199 142
Intelligence _---_ ------------------------------ 201 143
Map _____________________-_______________ 189 126
Officer_____--- __----------------.--------- 198 139
Neutralization fires __…____-___---_---___--____--. 242 181

282 AGO 2696B

 Paragraphs Page
Countermortar-Continued
Organization for operations _____________________ 198, 201 139, 143
Radar ___________________________________ 135, 198 95, 139
Records 189 126
-____________________________
Responsibilities 198 139
-____________________________--
Counterpreparation -243 ______________________ 184
Covering forces ____________________________________ 73 48
Fires in support _-- ____________________________ 243 184
Crater analysis _______…________--__--___--_________. 211-218 151
Appearance of craters 217 155
-_________________________
Artillery shell _________________________________. 211-215 151
Determination of angle of fall __________________
- -- 218 156
Determination of direction -_______-_____________ 215, 218 152, 156
Evaluation__-____-___-___....----------_ - -___ 211 151
Inspection of shelled areas_______________________ 213, 214 151
Mortar shell _______..
___________________________ 216-218 155
Purpose-_________________________________--
-- -. 211 151
Quick fuze ____________________________________- 215 152
Survey ……__________________________________…_-
. 214 151
Techniques--______________________________---- 218 156
Uses ……____________________________________…_ .. 212 151
Damage reported in shelling reports _--______________. 206, 207 146, 148
Debarkation and embarkation______________________
- -121, 123 83, 88
Decentralized control _______________________________ 54, 56 30, 32
Marches______________________________
- - -72 47
Offensive action _______________________________--
-98 67
Deceptive measures ___…_____________________________ 79, 107 55, 73
Defense:
Mobile __________________________________
…… 105 70
Position ………---________________________________ 105 70
River line _____________________________________ 163 106
Towns___________________________________
- - -160 104
Defensive combat ___________________-- -______________ 105 70
Artillery:
Deceptive measures ______________…__-______ 79, 107 55, 73
Requirements ___________________________-.
-- 42-44 26
Support _________________________________
- -- 243 184
Battle area ____________________________ 107 73
Combat outpost________________________
- - -106 71
Covering forces _______________________-- -106 71
General outpost ________________________ 106 71
Doctrine …____________-________-_____---------- 105 70
Fires, categories _--…____________ _______________ 243 184
Defensive works, attack ____________________________. 181 120
Delaying action _--_________________________________ 108, 110 75, 76
Delivery of fire …__________________________________ 220, 246 159, 188
Density of fire _______________________-__-_____--_-
-- 182 122
Desert operations __________________________________. 155-157 102
Maintenance requirements ______________________. 157 103
Observation -___________________-____-____-- - - 156 102
Designation of concentrations -________-___________ __ app. II 215
Destruction fires ___________________________________ 180 119

AGO 2696B 283

 Paragraphs Page
Diffusion, illumination ______________________________ 86 58
Direct fire:
In jungle operations _----------_--__------------. 147 99
In towns ____________________________---___---- 159 103
Direct support artillery:
Coordinating and limiting measures ____________.... 40 23
Countermortar responsibility ____________________ 198 139
Fire plan -___--- __------_----- -________________ 236 173
Forward observers _______--_____________________ 64 41
Position areas --------------.-------._----------. 74 49
Tactical mission ____--- ___----_--____----.
____-- 59 36
Displacement -_____________----------------------- 76, 106, 52, 71,
107 73
Dissemination of information and intelligence--___--- __ 170, 175 1.09, 113
Division artillery:
Commander …____________-----._--------___---- 19, 198, 10, 139,
246 188
Countermortar functions _____._________________ . 198 139
Fire:
Direction center ----- …----____--
__--- ___--__ 247 189
Direction relationship with corps artillery_____ 246 188
Planning____________-________________---
- 236 173
Observation functions --___----_---- __---- __----
. 65 43
Operation order __________--_____________________ app. II, III 215, 248
Organization for combat -___--__--- ___-_--------- 55 31
.
Position areas _______________---__---------__-_ 74 49
Reconnaissance--___----__------- -____--- 75 49
Reserve division --_-_--------------------------- 62 40
Wire communication system ______--___----_-----_ 262 201
Division fire support coordination center ______________ 223-229 161
Duties:
Adjutant (S1) ________--_---_.------------------ 25 16
____
Army aviation officer_-____-__. ______--------- 32 20
Army, corps, division, and task force artillery 19 10
commanders.
--
Assistant corps artillery officer _________________ 22 15
Assistant division artillery executive officer _______ 23 15
Battalion group commander ____________--------- 17 9
Communication officer -------.--- __--------------. 30 19
Counterbattery intelligence officer--____---- __---- 195, 196, 137, 189
247
Countermortar intelligence officer _____________--. 198, 247 139, 189
Deputy army artillery commander_--___-----.------ 22 15
Executive officer -_----__-.-----_---------------. 24 .16
Fire direction center personnel -__________--_---- 247 29
Fire support c;ordination center personnel________. 229 163
Group commander -__--------------------------- 18 10
Liaison officer _---__---- __--------------------- - 29 19
__.---__----------.
Photograph interpreter ____---- 173, 247 111, 189
Radar officer __--------------------------------- 33 21
Reconnaissance and survey officer ______--- __----. 31 20
SI ___________------------- -. _________--------- 25 16
-.-.-----------
S2 ____________--___----------- 26 16

284 AGO 2696B

 Paragraphs Page
Duties--Continued
S3 ______________________________
.___________ 27 17
S4 ______________________________________ 28 18
Theater army and army group artillery officers_:__ 20 11
Economy of force ___…__________________________._ 49
. 29
Embarkation and debarkation - -______________________
121, 123 83, 88
Embarkation, artillery organization for_._____________ 121 83
Encircling force ___________________________________- 102 68
Enemy:
Attack, fires during __ ___.-____________________
-- 238 176
Countermeasures, analysis ______________________ 179 117
Reinforcement, planning fires to prevent -________ 243 184
Troops, morale ___--____________--_____--- ______ 182 122
Weapons:
Location by radar 63-64 40
-_________________________
Neutralization fires against _____.__________- 180, 234, 119, 172,
238, 242 176, 181
Estimate:
Artillery requirements _________________________--41-44 25
The situation __________________________________ 39 23
Evaluation of information_________________________
-- 174 112
Examples:
Artillery annex to corps standing operating app. II 215
procedure.
Corps fire support plan annex ___________________- app. III 248
Corps operation order __.________________________ app. III 248
Corps or division artillery intelligence bulletin___. _ app. II 215
--
Division air fire plan__________________________ app. III 248
Division artillery fire plan_____________________
- -app. III 248
Division artillery operations chart -_______________ app. III 248
Division fire support plan annex - app. III
-________________-- 248
Division operation order (overlay type) __________- app. III 248
Fire capabilities checklist (procedure for preparing app. IV 271
schedules of corps artillery fires).
Fire support plan annex to force operation order___ app. II 215
Naval gunfire plan ____________________---___---
-- app. III 248
Nuclear fire plan _________________-__----------- app. III 248
Periodic intelligence report ____________----__---. app. II 215
Planning artillery operations and fire support -____ app. III 248
Position areas and zones of fire _________ -- -_______app. III 248
Target summary __________.__.
-- _________________ app. II 215
Executive officer, duties ____________________________-. 24 16
Exploitation ____________________________---
-- -- -- - 104 69
Field artillery:
Assignment of tactical missions to________________ 59, 60 36, 39
Battalions:
Army, light _________-______________________ 56 32
Fire planning ________.--____________________ 236 173
Cannon-type nuclear _____-_____---______________ 88 62
Countermortar activities _________________*-- _____ 197-201 138
Group …_______________________________________ 10, 57 7, 33
Commander ______________________________
-- 18 10

AGO 2696B 285

 Paragraphs Page
Field Artillery-Continued
Group-Continued
Fire direction center _____. __________________ 247 189
Fire planning ________--- . _ ___-----___----___ 236 173
Observation -__________------ - __--
-- __----- 65 43
Radio system __________--__________________. 263 201
Reconnaissance ________________________-_
-- 75 49
Tactical missions ____________________--_____ 60 39
Wire system __-----_- __---- __---___---__--_ 262 201
Guided missiles. (See Missiles.)
Heavy ___________________---------- _--_--__.. 3, 56, 3, 22,
147 99
Liaison officer, countermortar functions___________ 198, 201 139, 143
Light___________________________________ ___--- 3, 56, 3, 22,
139, 147 96, 99
--
Maneuver of units _____________________________. 70-73, 76, 46, 52,
77 53
Medium ____________________-_________________ 3, 56 3, 32
Missiles _________________________----_--------- 2, 4, 3, 4,
89 63
--
Missions________________________________ 5, 59 5, 36
Observation battalion __________________________--56, 87 32, 60
Flash ranging ___________________________
-- 64 41
Missions …______________.__________________ 87 60
Meteorological functions _--__________________ 87 60
Radar ranging ____________________________-
-64, 200 41,142
Sound ranging _____________________________ 64, 200 41,142
Position areas ____________-------_-------------- 74, 107, 49, 73,
121 83
Radar -________________-____---_--_--__- 198 139
Role for auxiliary weapons ______________________ 80 56
Searchlight battery ______________________--_____ 86 58
Survey functions ____________.--_________________ 67-69, 87 44, 60
Very heavy _________________.--__________________ 3, 56 3, 32
File:
General target 189
…____________--________-------_-- 126
Hostile battery______________--___------------- 189, 190 126, 128
Hostile mortar ____________--._____---__--------- 189, 190 126, 128
Fire(s):
Capabilities overlay _______--
_.______--___--__--_ 247 189
Concentration …_________--_---.---------------- 238 176
Coordination …_________-------
----------------- 219-233 159, 172
Counterbattery -----____________ _-___________
--- 171,192 110, 133
Countermortar 171, 198 110,
_______________--- ._____________ 139
Counterpreparation______-.--. _ .__-------_______ 238, 243 176, 184
Defensive, categories ________…__________________ 243 184
Density ___________________-_ _____----___---___ 182 122
Destruction . . . 180 119
._____________________________..
Distribution _________________.-________________ 220, 238, 159, 176,
251 196
During:
Attack of an organized position ____________.
-- 103 68

286 AGO 2696B

 Paragraphs Page
Fire (s)--Continued
During-Continued
Enemy attack __________________________-__- 243 184
Meeting engagement _______________________- 101 68
Group___________________________________
-- 238 176
Harassing ____________________________________. 180, 243 119,184
In support:
Attack ___________________________________. 242 181
Counterattack ___________________________- 243 184
Covering forces and outposts________________
- -243 184
Defensive operations _____________________--. 243 184
Exploitation-___________- ________-_______-. 104 69
Interdiction______________________--___________ 180, 243 119, 184
Long-range …_______________---___________----_ 107 73
Massing_____---- ___--------------..
----------- 248-253 195
Neutralization____________---______------
----- 180 120
Nuclear______________-.------------------- 244 186
Planned …________-_________--____.------------- 238 176
Prearranged -____---__ ______-----______------. 101, 103, 68,176
238
Preparation--________________-____________ 103,238, 68, 176,
242 181
Program _____________________________________ 238 176
Requests________________________________
-- 234 172
Scheduled_______________________________
-- 238 176
Superiority--__________________________________. 242 181
Types ________________________________________. 180, 238 119, 176
Zones -_______________-_____-_________________ 40 23
Fire direction _______________--________----____---.- 245-247 188
Center -__________________---_____-____ _------ 247 189
Relationship of artillery echelons________________ . 247 189
Responsibilities -________----- _______- __------ 246 188
Fire missions:
Assignment _____________-____________________ 231,247, 170, 189,
250 195
Record______-- __________------------------------ 247 189
Fire plan (s) __________________________________-____ 238 176
Air _____________________________________ 229,230,163,168,
app. II, III 215, 248
Artillery ________________________________.. 230, 236-238, 168, 173,
app. II, III 215, 248
Direct support _________________________________ 236 173
Naval gunfire -______________________________ 230, app. II, 168, 215,
III 248
Nuclear _________________________________-____. 230,244,168,186,
app. II, III 215,248
Preparation __________________________________ 238,244 176,186
Fire planning _____________________________________- 233-244 172
Army artillery _________________________________ 236 173
Battalion_____________________________________ 236 173
Battle group artillery___________________________. 236 173
Corps artillery _________________________________ 236, app. IV 173, 271

AGO 2696B 287

 Paragraphs Page
Fire planning-Continued
Division artillery -______________________________ 236 173
Factors--__________.___---.______________ 234, 235 172
Group artillery _________---___.___--____________. 236 173
Process ---- ___----------------------------------- 236 173
Responsibilities_ -----
____----____-------------- 236, 237 173, 175
Terms, definitions - …_______--
____--_______---___ 238 176
Fire support:
Channels for request _____--- ___-- _ -_____________ 232 171
During displacement ______________________…___._. 76 52
Functions -________________----.-_____-------_ 224 161
Means_-------------------- --------------------- 181 120
Coordination ----- _________________________ 230 168
Selection _______________________________
-- 181, 231 120, 170
Nuclear--________________- _________________
- -- 244, app. II 186, 215
Plan annex __________________._________________ 229, 230, 163, 168,
237 175
Example -__________________________________ app. III 248
Form ____________________________________ app. II 215
Planning________________________________
-39, 230 23, 168
Fire support coordination center __. _________________ 219-222, 232 159, 171
Principles…___ _______________.________________ 220 159
Procedures______________________________
-- 220 159
Relationships -_ - -_____________________________ 222 161
Personnel responsible _____-___. - -________________ 221 160
Use of nuclear firepower __----___________________ 229, 232 163, 171
Fire support coordination center ___. ___________-_____ 219, 223-229 159, 161
Army _____________________________________
…… 219 159
Communications_----____--- __._______---_______ 228 163
Composition …_____________-____._________-____--
__ 227 162
Establishment ___________--
- -- _ _...-__________ 225 162
Functions - -____________-__-----__-----.- -_-_ 224 161
Location _____________________..__________-_-_- 226 162
Personnel ____--_______________________________ 227, 229 162, 163
Records_________________________________
- - -229 163
Fire support coordinator--___________________________ 220-222 159
Functions_______________________________
- - -224 164
Responsibilities ……----__________---_--
__-----__ 221, 229 160
Flak suppression -_-_------_-___ __.._________________ 172, 241 111, 181
Flank guard ________ _____________________________
- -- 73 48
Flares, aircraft __________________…_________________ 66 44
Flash bases _----___----- ___----_.. ___________--- ___ 64 41
Flash-bang report ________________---________________ 191, 206 132, 146
Flash ranging __________---__________-________-____ 64 41
Force:
Commander …____________ --.-----
______------- _ 19, 220, 10, 159,
221 160
Economy -___________________ _.______________ 49 29
Encircling ……__________…-
___________________
- -- 102 68
G3 (S3) ----__-------_ ____--..---__ _____________ 27, 221 17, 160
Forms (See also Examples.):
Artillery:
Counterfire information (figs. 13 and 14)------ 189, 202-210 126, 144

288 AGO 2696B

 Paragraphs Page
Forms-Continued
Artillery-Continued
Fire support plan annex ____________________ .app. II, III 215, 248
Information bulletin, army or theater army ___ app. II 215
Intelligence bulletin, corps or division_________ app. II 215
Periodic intelligence report ______________---. app. II 215
Operation order ------ _____--
-- ____-.---____---__ app. II, III 215, 248
Operation plan __-______-- _ - ______--
- ________-__ app. II, III 215, 248
Standing operating procedure, corps_________- . ___ app. II 215
Target:
Analysis ____ _____
-- ___________________
- - -- app. II 215
Analysis, nuclear weapons - -__________________
app. II 215
Summary -____________-______________----__ app. II 215
Formation of tactical groupings - -_____________________
57 33
Forward observation __________________.-____________. 66 41
Fragment analysis __--_____-_______________________ 203, 206 145, 146
G2 representative in FSCC _________________________. 229 163
G3 air in FSCC _____--_____-______________________ 229 163
G3 fire support coordination functions________________
-221, 222 160, 161
General:
Outpost -___________________________________
-- 106 71
Support artillery ______________________________--56, 58, 32, 34,
59, 236 36, 173
General target:
File …____________________________________ 189 126
Information records -_______.________________ 189 126
Overlay_________________________________ … 189, 190 126, 190
Group:
Artillery _______________________________
……-- -- 10 7
Commander ----_______________________________ 18 10
Field artillery. (See Field artillery group.)
Group of fires_---____--- __----- __----- _------ _ - 238 176
Ground reconnaissance _____________________________-- 75 49
Guided missiles. (See Missiles.)
Harassing fire _____________________________________. 180, 182, 119, 122,
243 184
Headquarters battery, location-___________.___________ 38 23
Heavy field artillery _______________________________ 3, 147 3, 99
Height of burst ___________________________________
-- 182 122
Hostile battery:
Chart -_____________________________________--
189 126
Criteria for confirming__________________________ 188 125
File ……_-__._____________________________……--- 189 126
List___________-------------------------------- 175 113
Hostile niortar:
Chart ___________________________________… 189 126
File ……--____________________________________ - 189 126
List ____________________.________________ ____ 175 113
Howitzer companies ______--_________________________ 84 57
Hydrographic effects in amphibious operations_____ ___ 120 81

AGO 2696B 289

 Paragraphs Page
Illumination:
Battlefield -__________--__________________-----. 66, 86 44, 58
Plan __________________.___________________
.- 86 58
Searchlight ________________.__________________
-- 86 58
Illuminating shells ________--_______________________- 66 44
Infantry:
Counterfire squad ___________--_____________. - ___ 198 139
Countermortar activities _______________________- 201 143
Information:
Accuracy __________________.__________________ 174, 205 112, 145
Bulletin, artillery ___________-.________________._ 175, app. II 113, 215
Collection agencies __________……________________... 173 111
Evaluation ._________________________________- 174 112
Interchange .________________
--- _______ -168 108
Interpretation .________________.___._ __. ...- __- 174 112
Obtained from shelling reports .. 191, 202, 132, 144,
…_____________….___
204-206 145
Pertinence ……_________________....__________ _ 174 172
Integration:
Artillery fires and plan of operations ______ ___., 246 188
Command installations ___________________.……_____ 226 162
Fire plans __________________- - -__________________ 236 173
Fire support ___________._______________ ._____- 219, 230 159, 168
Nuclear firepower and plan of maneuver ________. 178, 244 117, 186
Intelligence ……____________--______,---- -----. - 166-168, 175 108, 113
Bulletin, artillery ____________---___----_------ 175, app. II 113, 215
Communication _________.----__ ____---_------. 199, 254 142, 198
Counterbattery …_________---
___---____------ -- 192 133
Derived from shelling reports __________________- 191 132
Dissemination ______-___----- __------ .- _ -
___--- 175 113
Map:
Counterbattery _______---.------___--.----- 189 126
Countermortar ________---..--------------- 189 126
Officer duties -____------------------------------ 26 16
--------------.--.
Counterbattery_______ --- 194, 196, 136, 137,
247 189
Countermortar .. _____--- __.--- ____--___ ----- 198, 247 139, 189
Report, artillery periodic ------------------------ 175, app. II 113, 215
Target _----_-----_---------------------------- 166-169 108
Interdiction fire __________________----_------------- 180, 182, 119, 122,
243 184
Interpretation:
Aerial photographs __________-____________ ___.-- 170, 173 109, 111
Information _--____---------------------- - --- 174 112
Interpreter, photograph _____-____._______-__.._ _._-. 247 189

Journal:
S2 -_-_ __---------------------------- …______-- 189 126
S3 _____--__-------------------------------- -- 247 189
Jungle operations ____________________________---__- 145-154 99
Ammunition supply and storage _________________- 153 101
Army aircraft _____________________----___----- 146, 148, 99, 100,
154 102

290 AGO 2696B

 Paragraphs Page
Jungle Operations-Continued
Artillery fires ________________________________. 147, 153 99, 101
Communication _______---___________________
- -- 154 102
Direct fire __---___---_----.---- ___--__---__---- 147 99
Fuze action ___________________________________-- -153 101
High-angle fire ____________----____--__________ 147, 148 99, 100
Mobility ________________
-- ______________--___-_ 146 97
Observation --- _____________________________ - -- 148 100
Positions ……___________________----_ .. ..------- 151 101
Security …_______________________---_---
- ------ 151, 152 101
Sound sensings _______________-_----_----------. 147 99
Special equipment -- _______---- _--------- --- ___ _ 146 99
Survey …________.....------------------------- 149 100
Target locating means _______--_------------- -__ 150 101
------------------
Training_______________---- 145 99

Landing force _---_--------------------------------. 119, 120 80, 81

Liaison ______________----------------------------
-- 36, 46 22, 28
Officer______________
------------------ _--_ 29 19
Special operations ---- ____._----_--------------- 113,115 78, 79
Light artillery _______--__---__--------------------- 3, 139, 3, 96,
147 99
Limitations:
Artillery________________________---________ _- 7 6
Flash ranging ____________________-- _____-____-. 64 41
Observation …________--
__…-__--
-_…------------ 64, 135, 41, 95,
142,148 98, 100
Radar ranging ________________________________--64,145 41, 95
Radio communication ___________________________ 137, 144, 96, 98,
154, 263 102,201
Sound ranging ______________________________
-- 64, 135 41,95
Wire communication ___-________________________ 137, 144, 96, 98,
154, 262 102, 201
Limiting and coordinating measures _______________.
- -- 40 23
Line(s):
Bomb -____________________________________--- 40 23
No-fire __________----_______________________
- -- 40 23
-40
Nuclear safety ________________________________-- 23
0-0__
------- ___--- ________--__----___--- 40 23
List:
Hostile battery ________________________________- 175, app. II 113, 215
Hostile mortar _________________________________ 175, app. II 113, 215
Location:
Artillery headquarters _________________________… 38 23
Bombline -_________________-_______-_--------- 40 23
Center of impact _______________________________ 182 122
Command post _________________________________ 38 23
Concentrations __________________________
-- …-- 238, 250 176, 195
Enemy weapons:
Crater analysis ____________________________ 211-218 151
Flash, radar, and sound ranging ____________. 64, 200 41,142
Target prediction __________________________. 200 142
Fire direction center -___--_---- __--- ___--_---__ 247 189

AGO 2696B 291

 Paragraphs Page
Location-Continued
Fire support coordination center ________________ 226 162
No-fire line ___________________________________--
-40 23
Nuclear safety line _________ _________________
--.. 40 23
0-0 line _____________________-._________________ 40 23
Position areas _________________________________. 74, 97, 49, 66,
121 83
LST's, beaching ____________________________________ 121, 123 83, 88
LVT (A) 's used as field artillery__________________
- - -83_ 57
Maneuver ……________________________________……- 48, 70-73 28, 46
Plan:
Integration with nuclear firepower___________. 240 179
Landing_________________. _________________ 119, 120 80, 81
Portion of concept of operations._________________ 230, app. II, 168, 215,
III 248
Map:
Counterbattery intelligence _____________________… 189 126
Countermortar intelligence ______________________ 189 126
Reconnaissance__________________________
- - -75 49
S2 situation --
____. _____________________________. 189 126
Marches, tactical ____…___________.-__________________ 72 47
Mass, principle _____________________…___-________-_. 47 28
Massed fires during preparation____.. ________________. 103, 242 68, 181
Massing fires _______------_---_---_----------_ __ 47, 248-253 28, 195
Materiel targets ___________._________.---.._________. 181 120
Medium artillery _________________..__________--__---- - 3, 107 3, 73
Meeting engagements …__________.__.
_.-_______________ 98, 101 67, 68
Meteorological conditions ______________________,___- 117, 140, 80, 97,
147 99
Missiles… __---------- ___-------------------------- 2, 4, 3, 4,
55, 56, 31, 32,
89, 245, 63, 188,
247 189
Missions ……___________________________-__________ _- 5, 59 5, 36
Mobile defense ___________________- - -________________ 105 70
Mobility ……_______________________________ _______ _ 71, 133, 47, 94,
139, 146 96, 99
Modification of tactical missions ______________.______
-- 59 36
Morale of enemy troops - -___________-________________ 180, 182 119, 122
Mortar:
Crater analysis _________--_____. ________________ 216-218 155
Location methods _____________.________________
- -- 200 142
Reports. (See Shelling reports.)
Motor:
Movements ……_______________________________- - 72,133 47, 94
Officer ______________-
- -- -71 47
Mountain operations _-______________________________ 138-144 96
Aeropack artillery ____________-________________. 139 96
Altitude effects _____._________-________________.. 138 96
Ammunition-- ...........___ _ --- ___________ -- 141 97
Artillery fires __________________________________ 140 97
Artillery targets ______________.__----__________-- 142 98

292 AGO 2696B

 Paragraphs Page
Mountain Operations-Continued
Communication __--___________________________ 144 98
Control of artillery 143
-____________________________98
Employment of guns - -___________________________.
140 97
Employment of howitzers__ ____________________
-- 140 97
Fuzes .________________...__________._____
. 141 97
--
High-angle fire _________ ______________________. 140 97
Locating hostile weapons______________ .________. 142 98
Massed artillery fire __________________ _________ 142 98
Mobility ______
…_________________________……_- -- 139 96
Observation--_____________________------_______ 140, 142 97, 98
Photograph interpretation ______________________. 142 98
Self-propelled artillery ___…_____________________. 139 97
Targets and target locations 142
.____________------- 98
Time factor --_---------_____.------- __.-------- - 138 96
Towed weapons _________________---___.----_____ 139 97
Movement …______________---_____.----.---_______
_- 72, 77 47, 53
Moving target detection_-___________________________. 64 41
Naval gunfire:
Employment 113, 120, .78, 81,
--------- .______.----_--------------
181,229, 120, 163,
232 171
General -____________--__________---___-_----- 219, 230 159
Officer _________-.-
- - - ----------------- 229 163
Plan appendix _________________.___________---- 230, app. III 168, 248
Support channels ______________----_------------ 232, 247 171, 189
Neutralization fire ______--______------------------. 180 119
Night surveillance by Army aviation -___________--_-
_ 93 65
No-fire lines _____________________-----_______------. 40 23
Nuclear:
Ammunition supply procedures-----______-------__ 268 209
Effect of capability on target intelligence___------ 169 109
Effect of firepower _____________.________________ 178 117
Effect on target area -_________-_ __._-----
…--- - 181, app. II 120, 215
Employment against personnel_______________--- 181, app. II 120, 215
Enemy employment:
In airborne operations 126
-________________----- 92
In snow and cold …___________---_______-__-
- 130 93
In river crossings __________________________ 162 104
Fire plan ______.. __.. ___________________________ 230, 244, 168, 186,
app. III 248
Appendix _____-.___________________________ app. III 248
Preparation ___. __________________________ 244, 247 186, 189
Processing of requests___.. __________________- 232 171
Responsibility __________________________… 19,229 10, 164
Firepower ____________________________________. 181, 244 120, 186
Decision to employ _____.____________________ 181, 232 120, 171
In offense ________________.________________-
- 95 66
In defense _________________________________ 107 73
In airborne operations - ___________________
-- 124 90
In a river crossing 162 104
.________________________

AGO 2696B 293

 Paragraphs Page
Nuclear-Continued
Firepower-Continued
In a defense of a river line__________________ 163 106
With missiles --- ----
…-_________------
____-- 89 63
Method of attack _____________….___________--___. 182, app. II 122, 215
Safety measures ------- …____------------
_------ 40, 229, 23, 163,
247 189
Security measures --- ________-._________________- 244 186
Target analysis _____________________________,___ 177, 229, 116, 163,
app. II 215
Targets of opportunity__________________________ 240 179

Observation ----------
_____________________________ 63-66 40
Aerial ------______________________-___________ 64 41
Coordination …________________--__-------______ 26, 63, 16, 40,
65 43
Forward -________-________ -_________________ 64, 107 41, 73
Functions -___ __________________________ 65 43
Hostile, planning fires to neutralize_______________ 234 172
Means -----______________________-___________ 64 41
Posts ------___________________________________ 64 41
Responsibilities ______________ __________-.- 65 43
Observation battalion, field artillery.
(See Field artillery observation battalion.)
Observers:
Aerial ------__________________________________ 64, 75, 41, 49,
121,135, 83, 95,
140, 142, 97, 98,
148 100
Forward______________-_____----------------- 64, 107, 41, 73,
135, 148, 95, 100,
159 103
Offensive combat _________________--________________ 95-104 66
Artillery support ______________________________… 96, 97 66
Attack of organized position -____________________. 103 68
On-call fires _________________._____________________
-- 238 176
0-0 line _________________________..________________ 40 23
Operation (s) :
Airborne. (See Airborne operations.)
Amphibious. (See Amphibious operations.)
Arctic. (See Arctic operations.)
Chart -___________--__________--_-___________- 247 189
Defensive. (See Defensive combat.)
Desert. (See Desert operations.)
Jungle. (See Jungle operations.)
Mountain. (See Mountain operations.)
Order ________________…_---------------------- 230, app. II, 168, 215,
III 248
Plan ---- ___________-------------------------- 39, app. II, 23,215,
III 248
Report, periodic ________________________________ 247 189
Special. (See Special operations.)
Tentative plan_____.. _________.__-_______________ 230 168

294 AGO 2696B

 Paragraphs Page
Opportunity, targets ___________-___________________ .239, 240 179, 179
Organization for combat ___________________________51-62, app. III 30, 248
Outpost:
Combat ___----------------------- ------ . 106 71
Fires in support _______-_---------------------- 106 71
General _________________________________ 106 71
Overlay:
Fire capabilities _______________________________… 247 189
General target ________________________________--189 126
Roving gun location ___________________________
-- 189 126
Shelling report ________________________…_______. 189 126
Suspect location _______________________________--189 126
Type operation order __________________________
-- app. III 248
Passage of lines--__________________________________ 77 53
Patrols _________________________________
……--- - - - -- 150, 173 101, 111
Periodic:
Intelligence report form_________________________ 175, app. II 113, 215
Operations report ______________________________ 247 189
Pertinence of information __________________________. 174 112
Photograph:
Interpretation -- __________________________
- - -- 170, 173 109, 111
Interpreter duties __…__________________________ 247 189
Plan:
Air fire _______________________________________. 229, 230, 163, 168,
app. II, III 215, 248
Artillery fire __________________________________ 230, 236-238, 168, 173,
app. II, III 215, 248
Collection ___________________-____
-____________ 173 111
Counterintelligence _____________________ … 79 55
Direct support fire ________________________----- 236 173
Fire support __________________________________- 229, 230, 163, 168,
app. II, III 215, 248
Nuclear fire ___________________________________. 230, 244, 168, 186,
app. II, III 215, 248
Of illumination ________________________________. 86 58
Observation -- _____________________________
- - -- 65, 173 43, 111
Planned fires _________________________-------------- 238 176
Planning:
--
Chart___________________________________ 247 189
Fire support ___-------------------------------- 237 175
Fires _______---------------------------------- 233-244 172
Procedure ___________-------------------------- 237 175
Platoon searchlight ________________________________-- 86 58
Plotting:
Targets - ________ __________________________- 190 128
Shelling reports _______________________________- 191 132
Policy, counterbattery _____________ ________________ 193 134
Position:
Alternate and supplementary 107
.___________________73
Area reconnaissance __________________________ 70, 75 46, 49
Areas - - 74, 107, 49, 73,
.__________________________________
121,134 83,94

AGO 2696B 295

 Paragraphs Page
Position--Continued
- -75, _
Coordination of field artillery missiles__________ 88, 49, 62,
89 63
Defense ______________________________________ 105 70
Dummy--_______________________ ___--- -__ 79 55
Temporary ________________--________----.._ . . 79 55
Post strike analysis -____________ --
_________-__-____ 170 109
Prearranged fire _------_____------------------------ 101, 103, 68, 176
238
Prediction, target --------
______--.----_ ____-------__. 200 142
Preparation fires _--________--------- --_____ __ ______ 103, 238, 68, 176,
242 181
Preplanned air support requests -- ____________________ 229 163
Primary means selected for attack of target - -__________.180, 181 119, 120
Principles of fire support coordination _______________
-- 220 159
Priority:
Attack of targets __________..___________________ 179 117
For assignment of prearranged missions __________.-- 181 120
For position areas.__________. ___________________. 74 49
Of fires ________________ - ___________________-.
-- 59 36
Of targets ____________________________----__
-- 179 117
Road ._______--- _ 101,
-________...___________-____ 108 68, 75
Procedure for:
--
Artillery fire planning-________________________ 237 175
Assignment of fire missions …__…_.______---__ ______ 231, 247 170, 189
Fire support coordination -__----_____---------_. 230-232 168
Processing information _______________----______ 187-191 125
Processing target information _____________________- 174, 187-191 112, 125
Program of fires _____________________________.-___ 238 176
Projectiles, nuclear ____________.
-- __________________ 88, 268 62, 209
Pursuit action ___--________________________________. 102 68
Radar:
Countermortar operations ___. - -__________________ 64, 198 41, 128
Duties of countermortar intelligence officer________ 198, 247 139, 189
Field artillery _________________________________. 64, 87 41, 60
Officer -______________________.___-___________ 33 21
Ranging …___________________….________________ 64, 173, 41, 111,
200 142
Radio communication ___________.._________________--_ 263 201
Rear:
Defensive position _____________________________--107 73
Guard -_________________--..---____- __-------- 73 48
Reconnaissance:
Coordination …________________._________…- 75 49
-
Means -________________--_--____.---------- - 75 49
Responsibilities …______________________…----_-- 75 49
Survey officer, and __________-._____-____________ 31 20
Recording target information __.-- __________--__--__ 189 126
Records:
Counterbattery _________-_--. _____ _----------- 189 126
Countermortar---_---____---.---------_-------- 189 126
Fire support coordination center ________________- 229 163
General target information 189
.________________---- 126

296 AGO 2696B

 Paragraphs Page
Recuperability, target______________________________. 183 123
References______--------------------. -- app. I 211
Reflection, illumination ______-------- ___----_------. 86 58
Registration . .....
…___________. . ..---------------- 99 66
------
Coordination_______ --------------------- 99 67
Precautions______--_--- ________--------------- 252 196
Positions________------------------------------ 79, 99 55, 67
Rehearsals:
Airborne operations ___------------------------- 126 92
Amphibious operations ____________--_-_ _-----__- 122 88
Reinforcing mission ___---------------------------- - 59, 60 36, 39
Reliability of target information______._-------------. 174 112
Relief in combat_----------------------------------- 77 53
Reorganization, planning fires to protect -______------. 242 181
Requests:
Air support _----------------------------------- 229, 232 163, 171
Artillery fire support---------------------------- 220, 232, 159, 171,
249, 253 195, 196
Naval gunfire support -____________----__------- 232 171
Required supply rate___----------------------------- 266 207
Reserve units, artillery_______________-------------- 56, 62, 32, 40,
88 62
Retirement 108, 111
…________________---_------------------ 75, 77
Retrograde movements ----_---------------__-------- 108-111 75
River crossings ____________…____-------------------- 161, 162 104
River line, defense ……-_________--_-----------------. 163 106
Road priority ________________---------------------- 101, 108 68, 75
Rockets. (See Missiles.)
Route reconnaissance _------------------------------ 75, 76 49, 52
Roving gun location overlay -______________---------- 189 126
S1 - ----------------------------
……______ 25 16
S2 ---------
………--
……____ 26, 194, 16, 136,
198 139
Coordination of observation _________________
-- __ 26 16
Journal_ ___________________--____-------____- 189 126
Situation map ---------------------------------. 26, 189 16, 126
S3 _--___ _______________________------------------
-- 27, 194, 17, 136,
198, 247 139, 189
Journal--________________________________---- - 247 189
_---
S4 ______------------__ ----------------------- - - 28 18
Safety measures ________________--__---______------ 40, 224, 23, 161,
, 244 186
Schedules of fires___________________________________ 238 176
Scheduled fires ____________________________________--238 176
Seacoast defense __________________________________ 164, 165 107
Searchlight battery, field artillery__________________.
-- 86 58
Searchlight illumination ____________________________--. 86 58
--
Sector of search overlays ________________________--. 65 43
Security:
Forces__________________________________
-73, 106 48, 71
-
Measures _____________---------- _------------ 73, 79, 48, 55,
129, 152 93, 101

AGO 2696B 297

 Paragraphs Page
Security-Continued
Of nuclear fires ______________-.___ ______..____ 244 186
Selection:
Fire support means _________________-____-____- 219, 231 159, 170
Position areas _.--__________________-_____-____. 70, 73, 46, 48,
74 49
Targets for nuclear attack _____-. ________-._______ 240, 244 179, 186
Self-propelled artillery ___________________-________.. 3, 84 3, 57
In a delaying action ___________
-- ______-_________ 110 76
In exploitation __________- __________________.-
-- 104 69
In mountain operations -________-______..- -_____._ 139 96
In support of encircling force_-________ ______. 102 68
In support of pursuit forces ___- ____________
-- __- 102 68
With security forces ______________
- -- _________. 73 48
Series of fires __________________________________
- -- 238 176
Shelling reports _____________-- ________________.--___ 202-210 144
Accuracy _________________________._______
-- -- __ 205 145
Content --
______--- _____---_____.._______---- - 206 146
Craters. (See Crater analysis.)
Damage - ___-._--_
-_________________________ 206 146
Direction _ _________________--_______-.
- -- 206 146
Evaluation___________________
- - -- ___.
._______ 191 132
- - -__-
Information derived ________________.- __- 202, 204 144, 145
Instructions __.- .___--._.__._-- 207 148
Overlay _________________ __ ___ - . _.................................. 189 126
Plotting_____________ . . ---.
_..------
.- - --- I 90, 191 128, 132
Position of observer -_______.___.-____ __ _ _ 206 146
Purpose --
_____________________
- . -__ 191 132
Source identification ..-- ______ __ _ _ _ _ 206 146
Specialists --
__________________-_____.._ 205 145
- --
Transmission _________________________ _____ 207, 210 148, 150
Ship-to-shore movement _______________ .___. 121-123 83
Signal operation instructions .______.…_____ ____ _- 260, 261 200
Situation:
Estimate …_____________________.-_______--___ - 39 23
Map, S2 ---------------- - -- - 26 189 16, 126
Snow, operations ________________________----------- 130-137 93
-
Sound ranging _____________---___--_-_______
-- _-__ 64, 135, 41, 95,
173,200 111,142
Sources of target information______----______-
-- ___ _ 173 111
Special operations ______- ________________________
-- 112-117 78
Considerations affecting artillery______________
-- , 113, 117 78, 80
Control -_______________. . . ..-------------
-__
- - 116 80
Coordination …_________________________…--…-- -_ 113 78
Definition -_____________----___----_____-__---- 112 78
Liaison ----------------
_______ -------
_---_---- 115 79
Planning -______________------ __---.----------- 113 78
Training -______--- ____-------------- _______ _- 114 79
Standing operating procedure _____________---------- 39, 178, 23, 117,
app. II 215
Standing signal instructions _____________________-___. 260, 261 200
Supplementary positions _____--______________________ 107 73
Support, mission type order________-________________ 58, app. III 34, 248

298 AGO 2696B

 Paragraphs Page
Supported unit:
Commander …______._____._______.__________ 16, 221 9, 160
Plans_ _______-_______--_______--____----- 36, 39 22, 23
Surprise_ ____________________ ______________ 50 29
Survey _________________________--_______________ 67-69 44
Control ------_________________________________ 68 45
Echelons …____________________________________ 69 45
Factors affecting ___________-__ _______________- 67, 132, 44, 94,
149 100
For crater location -_______-___________-______ 214 151
Information center ____.-______-_______________ 69 45
Information, exchange _______________________-- _ 31 20
Officer, corps artillery ___________________________ 69 45
Officer's duties _________________________________ 31 20
Plan--_______________________________________. 67 44
Responsibility …______________….___________….____67, 69 44, 45
Time required ____________________--___- _____ 67 44
Suspect location overlay_________--__________________ 189 126
Tactical:
Groupings, formation __________________________- 57 33
Marches_____ _________ ___-________--------- 72 47
Missions.______________________________--
- - - -- 59-60 36
Nuclear field artillery ______________________ 88 62
Commanders authorized to assign____________ 54-56, 60 30, 39
Field artillery _________________________ __. 59 36
Observation battalion, field artillery __________ 87 60
Tactical air:
Alert aircraft _____________________--______----. 229 163
Alert information _____________------------
---- - 264 202
Fire plan ________________________--________---- 229, 230, 163, 168,
app. III 248
Liaison officer's duties __________.___.___-_______ 229 163
Photographs. (See Aerial photographs.)
Reconnaissance -173, __________________________ 195, 111, 137,
229 163
Support:
Adviser _________________________________- 229 163
Channels _______________________
-- ______- 232 171
Estimates_______________________________ … 113,120, 78, 81,
181 120
General …_________________________________219 159
Missions …________________________________ 181 120
Priority of assignment _____________________. 181 120
Requests_ ____________________--_________-- 229, 232, 163,171,
247 189
Tanks used as field artillery 81
-________________________57
Target analysis ____________________________________. 176-184 115
Decision …____________________________--------- 184 124
Definition________________ _____________________ 176 115
Determination of suitable weapons _______________ 181 120
Method of attack …_____________________________ 182 122
Mission of the supported force 178
-__________________ 117

AGO 2696B 299

 Paragraphs Page
Target Analysis-Continued
Process _______________________________________ 177 116
Selection of type of fire_______.-- _________________ 180 119
Target characteristics _______.__________________ 179 117
Time of attack 183 123
-________________________________
Target (s):
Attack …_________________________--_____._--
-- 179-184 117
Characteristics ______________…__.…__.__________ 179, 240 117, 179
Confirmed -___________________________-_______ 188 125
Description _________________-_______________ ... 190 128
- -
Designation _________________.-- - - -__________ 190, app. II 128, 215
File, general __________-________________________ 189 126
Information:
Collection _____…_________. _________--_----_- 173 111
Dissemination _____________._______________ 175 113
Processing _____________…___.______________ 174, 187-191 112, 125
Records, general _____…______-______________ 189 126
Sources and agencies ____-_-_______________-- 173 111
Terms and definitions________---____----_-_. 188 125
Intelligence ____________________________ 168-75 108
Materiel ______________…__...__________________ 181 120
-
Nuclear_____________-________________--
- - -- _ 240, 244 179, 186
Of opportunity ______________-_________________-- 239, 240 179
Overlay, general _______________________________ 189 126
Personnel -____________________._---__________ 181 120
Plotting ____________________________________.
-- 190 128
Prediction _______-- _____________…_ -______……---. 200 142
Priority ________________________________ .. ... 179 117
Reconnaissance ________________..___________
-- 75 49
Responsibility for attack _______________________. 221 160
Status, change ______________-. _____ ___________- 190 128
Summary --________________.-___._____________ 175, app. II 113, 215
Waterborne _________________.… ----
__________…- 165 107
Task force artillery commander____________________- -19 10
Temporary positions _____________--_________________- 79 55
Theater army artillery _____________________________ 14 8
Officer -_______________--___---.____-__------- 20 11
Staff …___.-----------
…_________________…------- 21 12
Time:
Of attack _________…--------__--______------
____. 183 123
Of flash to bang-_________________---_____-----. 206 146
Of opening fire -________________------_-------- 243 184
On target __------_----------------------------. 182, app. II 122, 215
Towed artillery weapons …_______---.
___--___--------- 3, 139 3, 96
Towns, combat _-----__---------------------------- 158-160 103
Transport, organic ________________________________- 3 3
Unit:
- - __--------
Airfields -____________---_------ --- 94 65
Aviation officer ____--
____--- _._------------------ 32 20
Very heavy field artillery ____________________--____- 3 3
Visibility charts ------
_----------..------------------ 65 43
Vulnerability …______________--___..______--___-___
181 120

300 AGO 2696B

 Paragraphs Page
Warheads ______--________________________________ 89 63
Warning, air ______________________________________- 264 202
Warning orders _-______-------- ______-------------- 77 53
Waterborne targets --------------------------------. 165 107
Weapons:
Accuracy …___________________________ _______ 181
. 120
Artillery, classification _________________________… 2-4 3
Auxiliary ------
_______________________________ 80-84 56
Effects _________________----------------------- 180, 181 119, 120
For offensive operations_______________________
-- 242 181
Nuclear -______________--_____.______---_____- - 88 62
Weather:
Cold, effects ___________________________________. 130-137 93
Effects on firing data _-___--___ -________________ 117 80
Weight classification of artillery ____________________- 3 3
Winterization of equipment__________________________ 131 93
Wire:
Communication systems -_____-__-______-________ 262 201
Laying by aircraft --------------.----- _________ 92, 137 64, 96
Withdrawal from action ______________-------------- 108, 109 75, 76
Zone of fire______ __________-____________________ - 40, 61, 23, 40,
121 83

AGO 2696B 301

 [AG 353 (25 Sep 58)]

By Order of Wilber M. Brucker, Secretary of the Army:

MAXWELL D. TAYLOR,
General, United States Army,
Official: Chief of Staff.
R. V. LEE,
Major General, United States Army,
The Adjutant General.

Distribution:
Active Army:
CNGB (2) USACGSC (2500)
DCSPER (2) USAWC (5)
ACSI (2) Br Svc Sch (5) except
DCSOPS (2) USACMLCSCH (10)
DCSLOG (2) USAIS (960)
Technical Stf, DA (1) USARADSCH (20)
Technical Stf Bd (1) USAARMS (1850)
USCONARC (15) USAAMS (3200)
US ARADCOM (2) USAAVNS (500)
US ARADCOM, Rgn (2) USAINTC (17)
OS Maj Comd (5) PMST Sr Div Units (3)
Log Comd (2) PMST Jr Div Units (3)
MDW (1) RIMST Mil Sch Div Units
Armies (5) (3)
Corps (5) Mi Dist (1)
Div (3) USA Corps (Res) (1)
Brig (1) Sector Comd, USA Corps
Regt/Gp/Bg (1) except (Res) (1)
FA Gp (2) MAAG (2)
Bn (1) except FA Bn (5) Mil Mis (1)
Co/Btry (1) except Units org under fol TOE:
FA Btry (5) 6-100 (10)
USATC (Armor) (5) 6-200 (10)
USATC (FA) (5) 6-300 (10)
USMA (50)
NG: State AG (3); units-same as Active Army except allowance is
one copy to each unit.
USAR: Same as Active Army except allowance is one copy to each unit.
For explanation of abbreviations used, see AR 320-50.

' U. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1958-480517

302 AGO 2696B